PC130-7 Sebm036303 PDF

SEBM036303
MACHINE MODEL
SERIAL NUMBER
PC130-7
70001 and up
This shop manual may contain attachiments and optional equipment that are not available in your
area. Please consult your local Komatsu distributor for those items you may require.
Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice.
PC130-7 mounts the SAA4D95LE-3 engine.
For details of the engine, see the 95-3 Series Engine Shop Manual.
2004
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan 10-04(02)
00-1
(3)
CONTENTS
No. of page
01
GENERAL ................................................................................................................01-1
10
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION .................................................................10-1
20
TESTING AND ADJUSTING .......................................................................20-1
30
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ..........................................................30-1
40
MAINTENANCE STANDARD......................................................................40-1
90
OTHERS ....................................................................................................................90-1
00-2
(2)
PC130-7
The affected pages are indicated by the use of the

following marks. It is requested that necessary
actions be taken to these pages according to the
table below.
Mark
Indication
Action required
Page to be newly added
Add
Page to be replaced
Replace
( )
Page to be deleted
Discard
Pages having no marks are those previously revised

or made aditions.
LIST OF REVISED PAGES

Mark
Page
q 00-1
00-2
q 00-2-1
q 00-2-2
q 00-2-3
Revision Mark
number
(3)
(2)
(3)
(3)
(3)
00-3
00-4
00-5
00-6
00-7
00-8
00-9
00-10
00-11
00-12
00-13
00-14
00-15
00-16
00-17
00-18
00-19
00-20
00-21
00-22
01-1
01-2
01-3
q 01-4
01-5
01-6
01-7
01-8
01-9
10-1
10-2
10-3
q 10-4
10-5
PC130-7
q
q
q
(3)
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
(3)
q
q
Page
10-6
10-7
10-8
10-9
10-10
10-11
10-12
10-13
10-14
10-15
10-16
10-17
10-18
10-19
10-20
10-21
10-22
10-23
10-24
10-25
10-26
10-27
10-28
10-29
10-30
10-31
10-32
10-33
10-34
10-35
10-36
10-37
10-38
10-39
10-40
10-41
10-42
10-43
10-44
10-45
10-46
Revision Mark
number
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
q
q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
Page
10-47
10-48
10-49
10-50
10-51
10-52
10-53
10-54
10-55
10-56
10-57
10-58
10-59
10-60
10-60-1
10-60-2
10-60-3
10-60-4
10-60-5
10-61
10-62
10-64
10-65
10-66
10-67
10-68
10-69
10-70
10-71
10-72
10-73
10-74
10-75
10-76
10-77
10-78
10-79
10-80
10-81
10-82
10-83
Revision Mark
number
Page
q 10-84
q 10-85
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
q
q
q
q
10-86
10-87
10-88
10-89
10-90
10-91
10-92
10-93
10-94
10-95
10-96
10-97
10-98
10-99
10-100
10-101
10-102
10-103
10-104
10-105
10-106
10-107
10-108
10-109
10-110
10-111
10-112
10-113
10-114
10-115
10-116
10-117
10-118
10-119
10-120
10-121
10-122
10-124
10-125
Revision Mark
number
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
q
q
(3)
q
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
Page
10-126
10-127
10-128
10-129
10-130
10-131
10-132
10-133
10-134
10-135
10-136
10-137
10-138
10-139
10-140
10-141
10-142
10-143
10-144
10-145
10-146
10-147
10-148
10-149
10-150
10-151
10-152
10-153
10-154
10-155
20-1
20-2
20-3
20-4
20-5
20-6
20-7
20-8
20-9
20-10
Revision
number
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
00-2-1
(3)
Mark
Page
20-11
20-101
20-102
20-103
20-104
20-105
20-106
20-107
20-108
20-109
20-110
20-111
20-112
20-113
20-114
20-115
20-116
20-117
20-118
20-119
20-120
20-121
20-122
20-123
20-124
20-125
20-126
20-127
20-128
20-129
20-130
20-131
20-132
20-133
20-134
20-135
20-136
20-137
20-138
20-139
20-140
20-141
20-142
20-143
20-144
20-145
20-146
20-147
q 20-148
20-149
20-150
00-2-2
(3)
Revision
number Mark
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(3)
(1)
(1)
Page
20-151
20-152
20-153
20-154
20-155
20-156
20-157
20-158
20-159
20-160
20-161
20-162
20-163
q 20-164
q 20-165
( 20-166)
20-167
20-168
20-169
20-170
20-171
20-201
20-202
20-203
20-204
20-205
20-206
20-207
20-208
20-209
20-210
20-211
20-212
20-213
20-214
20-215
20-216
20-217
20-218
20-219
20-220
20-222
20-223
20-224
20-225
20-226
20-228
q 20-229
20-230
20-231
20-232
Revision
number Mark
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(3)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(3)
(1)
(1)
(1)
Page
20-233
20-234
20-235
20-236
20-237
20-238
20-239
20-240
20-241
20-242
20-243
20-244
20-245
20-246
20-247
20-248
20-249
20-250
20-251
20-252
20-253
20-254
20-255
20-256
20-257
20-258
20-301
20-302
20-303
q 20-304
20-305
20-306
20-307
20-308
20-310
20-311
20-312
20-313
20-314
20-315
20-316
20-317
20-318
20-319
20-320
20-321
20-322
20-323
20-324
20-325
20-326
Revision
number Mark
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(3)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
Page
20-327
20-328
20-329
20-330
20-331
20-332
20-333
20-334
20-335
20-336
20-337
20-338
20-339
20-340
20-341
20-342
20-343
20-344
20-345
20-346
20-347
20-348
20-349
20-350
20-351
20-352
20-354
20-355
20-356
20-357
20-358
20-359
20-360
20-362
20-363
20-364
20-365
20-401
20-402
20-403
20-404
20-405
20-406
20-408
20-409
20-410
20-411
20-412
20-413
20-414
20-415
Revision
number Mark
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
Page
20-416
20-417
20-418
20-419
20-420
20-421
20-422
20-423
20-424
20-425
20-426
20-427
20-428
20-429
20-430
20-431
20-432
20-433
20-434
20-436
20-437
20-438
20-439
20-440
20-441
20-442
20-443
20-444
20-445
20-446
20-447
20-448
20-449
20-450
20-451
20-452
20-453
20-454
20-455
20-456
20-457
20-458
20-459
20-460
20-461
20-462
20-463
20-464
20-465
20-466
20-467
Revision
number
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
PC130-7
Mark
Page
20-468
20-469
20-470
20-471
20-472
20-473
20-474
20-475
20-476
20-501
20-502
20-504
20-505
20-506
20-507
20-508
20-509
20-510
20-511
20-512
20-513
20-514
20-515
20-516
20-517
20-518
20-519
20-520
20-521
20-522
20-523
20-524
20-525
20-601
20-602
20-603
20-604
20-605
20-606
20-607
20-608
20-609
20-610
20-611
20-612
20-613
20-614
20-615
20-616
20-617
20-618
PC130-7
Revision
number Mark
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
Page
Revision
number Mark
20-619
20-620
20-621
20-622
20-623
20-624
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
30-1
30-2
30-3
30-4
30-5
30-6
30-7
30-8
30-9
30-10
30-11
30-12
30-13
30-14
30-15
30-16
30-17
30-18
30-19
30-20
30-21
30-22
30-23
30-24
30-25
30-26
30-27
30-28
30-29
30-30
30-31
30-32
30-33
30-34
30-35
30-36
30-37
30-38
30-39
30-40
30-41
30-42
30-43
30-44
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
Page
30-45
30-46
30-47
30-48
30-49
30-50
30-51
30-52
30-53
30-54
30-55
30-56
30-57
30-58
30-59
30-60
30-61
30-62
30-63
30-64
30-65
30-66
30-67
30-68
30-69
30-70
30-71
30-72
30-73
30-74
30-75
30-76
30-77
30-78
30-79
30-80
30-81
30-82
30-83
30-84
30-85
30-86
30-87
30-88
30-89
30-90
30-91
30-92
30-93
30-94
30-95
Revision
number Mark
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
Page
30-96
30-97
30-98
30-99
30-100
30-101
30-102
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
40-1
40-2
40-3
40-4
40-5
40-6
40-7
40-8
40-9
40-10
40-11
40-12
40-13
40-14
40-15
40-16
40-17
40-18
40-19
40-20
40-21
40-22
40-23
40-24
40-25
40-26
40-27
40-28
40-29
40-30
40-31
40-32
40-34
40-35
40-36
40-37
40-38
40-39
40-40
40-41
q 90-1
q 90-3
Revision
number Mark
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
q
q
q
q
Page
90-5
90-7
90-9
90-11
( 90-13)
( 90-15)
( 90-17)
( 90-19)
Revision
number
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
00-2-3
(3)
SAFETY
SAFETY NOTICE
SAFETY
SAFETY NOTICE
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
Proper service and repair is extremely important for safe machine operation. The service and
repair techniques recommended by Komatsu and described in this manual are both effective
and safe. Some of these techniques require the use of tools specially designed by Komatsu for
the specific purpose.
To prevent injury to workers, the symbol k is used to mark safety precautions in this manual.
The cautions accompanying these symbols should always be followed carefully. If any dangerous situation arises or may possibly arise, first consider safety, and take the necessary actions
to deal with the situation.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
Mistakes in operation are extremely dangerous.
Read the Operation and Maintenance Manual carefully BEFORE operating the machine.
1. Before carrying out any greasing or repairs, read
all the precautions given on the decals which are
fixed to the machine.
2. When carrying out any operation, always
wear safety shoes and helmet. Do not wear
loose work clothes, or clothes with buttons
missing.
Always wear safety glasses when hitting

parts with a hammer.
Always wear safety glasses when grinding
parts with a grinder, etc.
3. If welding repairs are needed, always have a

trained, experienced welder carry out the work.
When carrying out welding work, always wear
welding gloves, apron, hand shield, cap and
other clothes suited for welding work.
4. When carrying out any operation with two or
more workers, always agree on the operating
procedure before starting. Always inform your
fellow workers before starting any step of the
operation. Before starting work, hang UNDER
REPAIR signs on the controls in the operator's
compartment.
5. Keep all tools in good condition and learn the
correct way to use them.
6. Decide a place in the repair workshop to keep

tools and removed parts. Always keep the tools
and parts in their correct places. Always keep
the work area clean and make sure that there is
no dirt or oil on the floor. Smoke only in the areas
provided for smoking. Never smoke while working.
PREPARATIONS FOR WORK
7. Before adding oil or making any repairs, park the
machine on hard, level ground, and block the
wheels or tracks to prevent the machine from
moving.
8. Before starting work, lower blade, ripper, bucket
or any other work equipment to the ground. If
this is not possible, insert the safety pin or use
blocks to prevent the work equipment from falling. In addition, be sure to lock all the control
levers and hang warning signs on them.
9. When disassembling or assembling, support the
machine with blocks, jacks or stands before
starting work.
10.Remove all mud and oil from the steps or other
places used to get on and off the machine.
Always use the handrails, ladders or steps when
getting on or off the machine. Never jump on or
off the machine. If it is impossible to use the
handrails, ladders or steps, use a stand to provide safe footing.
00-3
SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS DURING WORK

11.When removing the oil filler cap, drain plug or
hydraulic pressure measuring plugs, loosen
them slowly to prevent the oil from spurting out.
Before disconnecting or removing components
of the oil, water or air circuits, first remove the
pressure completely from the circuit.
12.The water and oil in the circuits are hot when the
engine is stopped, so be careful not to get
burned.
Wait for the oil and water to cool before carrying out any work on the oil or water circuits.
13.Before starting work, remove the leads from the
battery. Always remove the lead from the negative () terminal first.
14.When raising heavy components, use a hoist or
crane.
Check that the wire rope, chains and hooks are
free from damage.
Always use lifting equipment which has ample
capacity.
Install the lifting equipment at the correct places.
Use a hoist or crane and operate slowly to prevent the component from hitting any other part.
Do not work with any part still raised by the hoist
or crane.
15.When removing covers which are under internal
pressure or under pressure from a spring,
always leave two bolts in position on opposite
sides. Slowly release the pressure, then slowly
loosen the bolts to remove.
16.When removing components, be careful not to
break or damage the wiring. Damaged wiring
may cause electrical fires.
17.When removing piping, stop the fuel or oil from
spilling out. If any fuel or oil drips onto the floor,
wipe it up immediately. Fuel or oil on the floor
can cause you to slip, or can even start fires.
18.As a general rule, do not use gasoline to wash
parts. In particular, use only the minimum of
gasoline when washing electrical parts.
00-4
SAFETY NOTICE
19.Be sure to assemble all parts again in their original places.

Replace any damaged parts with new parts.
When installing hoses and wires, be sure
that they will not be damaged by contact
with other parts when the machine is being
operated.
20.When installing high pressure hoses, make sure
that they are not twisted. Damaged tubes are
dangerous, so be extremely careful when installing tubes for high pressure circuits. Also, check
that connecting parts are correctly installed.
21.When assembling or installing parts, always use
the specified tightening torques. When installing
protective parts such as guards, or parts which
vibrate violently or rotate at high speed, be particularly careful to check that they are installed
correctly.
22.When aligning two holes, never insert your fingers or hand. Be careful not to get your fingers
caught in a hole.
23.When measuring hydraulic pressure, check that
the measuring tool is correctly assembled before
taking any measurements.
24.Take care when removing or installing the tracks
of track-type machines.
When removing the track, the track separates
suddenly, so never let anyone stand at either
end of the track.
FOREWORD
GENERAL
FOREWORD
GENERAL
This shop manual has been prepared as an aid to improve the quality of repairs by giving the serviceman an
accurate understanding of the product and by showing him the correct way to perform repairs and make judgements. Make sure you understand the contents of this manual and use it to full effect at every opportunity.
This shop manual mainly contains the necessary technical information for operations performed in a service
workshop. For ease of understanding, the manual is divided into the following chapters; these chapters are further divided into the each main group of components.
STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION

This section explains the structure and function of each component. It serves not only to give an understanding of the structure, but also serves as reference material for troubleshooting.
In addition, this section may contain hydraulic circuit diagrams, electric circuit diagrams, and maintenance standards.
TESTING AND ADJUSTING
This section explains checks to be made before and after performing repairs, as well as adjustments to
be made at completion of the checks and repairs.
Troubleshooting charts correlating "Problems" with "Causes" are also included in this section.
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
This section explains the procedures for removing, installing, disassembling and assembling each component, as well as precautions for them.
MAINTENANCE STANDARD
This section gives the judgment standards for inspection of disassembled parts.
The contents of this section may be described in STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION.
OTHERS
This section mainly gives hydraulic circuit diagrams and electric circuit diagrams.
In addition, this section may give the specifications of attachments and options together.
NOTICE
The specifications contained in this shop manual are subject to change at any time and without any
advance notice. Use the specifications given in the book with the latest date.
00-5
FOREWORD
HOW TO READ THE SHOP MANUAL
HOW TO READ THE SHOP MANUAL
REVISED EDITION MARK
VOLUMES
Shop manuals are issued as a guide to carrying out
repairs. They are divided as follows:
When a manual is revised, an edition mark

((1)(2)(3)....) is recorded on the bottom of the pages.
Chassis volume: Issued for every machine model

Engine volume: Issued for each engine series
Each issued as one
Electrical volume:
Attachments volume: volume to cover all
models
REVISIONS
These various volumes are designed to avoid duplicating the same information. Therefore, to deal with
all repairs for any model , it is necessary that chassis, engine, electrical and attachment volumes be
available.
DISTRIBUTION AND UPDATING
Any additions, amendments or other changes will be
sent to KOMATSU distributors. Get the most up-todate information before you start any work.
FILING METHOD
1. See the page number on the bottom of the page.
File the pages in correct order.
2. Following examples show how to read the page
number.
Example 1 (Chassis volume):
10 - 3
Item number (10. Structure and
Function)
Consecutive page number for each
item.
Example 2 (Engine volume):
12 - 5
Unit number (1. Engine)
Item number (2. Testing and Adjusting)
Consecutive page number for each
item.
3. Additional pages: Additional pages are indicated
by a hyphen (-) and number after the page
number. File as in the example.
Example:
12-203
10-4
12-203-1
10-4-1
Added pages
12-203-2
10-4-2
12-204
10-5
00-6
Revised pages are shown in the LIST OF REVISED

PAGES next to the CONTENTS page.
SYMBOLS
So that the shop manual can be of ample practical
use, important safety and quality portions are
marked with the following symbols.
Symbol
Item
Remarks
Safety
Special safety precautions

are necessary when performing the work.
Caution
Special technical precautions or other precautions

for preserving standards
are necessary when performing the work.
Weight
Weight of parts of systems. Caution necessary

when selecting hoisting
wire, or when working posture is important, etc.
Tightening
torque
Places that require special

attention for the tightening
torque during assembly.
Coat
Places to be coated with

adhesives and lubricants,
etc.
Oil, water
Places where oil, water or

fuel must be added, and
the capacity.
Drain
Places where oil or water

must be drained, and
quantity to be drained.
3
2
FOREWORD
HOISTING INSTRUCTIONS
HOISTING INSTRUCTIONS
HOISTING
k Heavy parts (25 kg or more) must be lifted
with a hoist, etc. In the DISASSEMBLY
AND ASSEMBLY section, every part
weighing 25 kg or more is indicated clearly
with the symbol 4
If a part cannot be smoothly removed from the

machine by hoisting, the following checks
should be made:
1) Check for removal of all bolts fastening the
part to the relative parts.
2) Check for existence of another part causing
interference with the part to be removed.
WIRE ROPES
1) Use adequate ropes depending on the
weight of parts to be hoisted, referring to
the table below:
Wire ropes
(Standard "Z" or "S" twist ropes
without galvanizing)
Rope diameter
Allowable load
mm
kN
tons
10
11.5
12.5
14
16
18
20
22.4
30
40
50
60
9.8
13.7
15.7
21.6
27.5
35.3
43.1
54.9
98.1
176.5
274.6
392.2
1.0
1.4
1.6
2.2
2.8
3.6
4.4
5.6
10.0
18.0
28.0
40.0
Slinging near the edge of the hook may cause

the rope to slip off the hook during hoisting, and
a serious accident can result. Hooks have maximum strength at the middle portion.
100%
88%
79%
71%
41%
SAD00479
3) Do not sling a heavy load with one rope alone,

but sling with two or more ropes symmetrically
wound onto the load.
k Slinging with one rope may cause turning
of the load during hoisting, untwisting of
the rope, or slipping of the rope from its
original winding position on the load, which
can result in a dangerous accident.
4) Do not sling a heavy load with ropes forming a

wide hanging angle from the hook.
When hoisting a load with two or more ropes,
the force subjected to each rope will increase
with the hanging angles. The table below
shows the variation of allowable load kN {kg}
when hoisting is made with two ropes, each of
which is allowed to sling up to 9.8 kN {1000 kg}
vertically, at various hanging angles.
When two ropes sling a load vertically, up to
19.6 kN {2000 kg} of total weight can be suspended. This weight becomes 9.8 kN {1000 kg}
when two ropes make a 120 hanging angle.
On the other hand, two ropes are subjected to
an excessive force as large as 39.2 kN {4000
kg} if they sling a 19.6 kN {2000 kg} load at a
lifting angle of 150.
The allowable load value is estimated to be onesixth or one-seventh of the breaking strength of
the rope used.
2) Sling wire ropes from the middle portion of the

hook.
00-7
FOREWORD
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLING, CONNECTING PUSH-PULL TYPE COUPLER

k Before carrying out the following work, release
the residual pressure from the hydraulic tank.
For details, see TESTING AND ADJUSTING,
Releasing residual pressure from hydraulic
tank.
k Even if the residual pressure is released from

the hydraulic tank, some hydraulic oil flows out
when the hose is disconnected. Accordingly,
prepare an oil receiving container.
Disconnection
1) Release the residual pressure from the hydraulic tank. For details, see TESTING AND
ADJUSTING, Releasing residual pressure from
hydraulic tank.
2) Hold adapter (1) and push hose joint (2) into
mating adapter (3). (See Fig. 1)
The adapter can be pushed in about 3.5
mm.
Do not hold rubber cap portion (4).
3) After hose joint (2) is pushed into adapter (3),
press rubber cap portion (4) against (3) until it
clicks. (See Fig. 2)
4) Hold hose adapter (1) or hose (5) and pull it out.
(See Fig. 3)
Since some hydraulic oil flows out, prepare
an oil receiving container.
Connection
1) Hold hose adapter (1) or hose (5) and insert it in
mating adapter (3), aligning them with each
other. (See Fig. 4)
Do not hold rubber cap portion (4).
2) After inserting the hose in the mating adapter
perfectly, pull it back to check its connecting
condition. (See Fig. 5)
When the hose is pulled back, the rubber
cap portion moves toward the hose about
3.5 mm. This does not indicate abnormality,
however.
00-8
Type 1
FOREWORD
Type 3
1) Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion

and push body (2) in straight until sliding prevention ring (1) contacts contact surface a of
the hexagonal portion at the male end.
1) Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion

2) Hold in the condition in Step 1), and turn

lever (4) to the right (clockwise).
2) Hold in the condition in Step 1), and push

until cover (3) contacts contact surface a of
3) Hold in the condition in Steps 1) and 2), and

pull out whole body (2) to disconnect it.
3) Hold in the condition in Steps 1) and 2), and

pull out whole body (2) to disconnect it.
Disassembly
Type 2
Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion

the hexagonal portion at the male end to connect it.
Connection
Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion

the hexagonal portion at the male end to connect it.
00-9
FOREWORD
COATING MATERIALS
COATING MATERIALS
The recommended coating materials such as adhesives, gasket sealants and greases used for disassembly
and assembly are listed below.
For coating materials not listed below, use the equivalent of products shown in this list.
Category
Komatsu code
Part No.
Q'ty
Container
Main applications, featuresr
LT-1A
790-129-9030
150 g
Tube
Used to prevent rubber gaskets, rubber cushions, and cock plug from
coming out.
LT-1B
790-129-9050
20 g
(2 pcs.)
Polyethylene
container
Used in places requiring an immediately effective, strong adhesive.

Used for plastics (except polyethylene, polyprophylene, tetrafluoroethlene and vinyl chloride), rubber,
metal and non-metal.
LT-2
09940-00030
50 g
Polyethylene
container
Features: Resistance to heat and

chemicals
Used for anti-loosening and sealant
purpose for bolts and plugs.
LT-3
790-129-9060
(Set of adhesive
and hardening
agent)
Adhesive:
1 kg
Hardening
agent:
500 g
Can
LT-4
790-129-9040
250 g
Polyethylene
container
Holtz
MH 705
790-126-9120
75 g
Tube
Used as heat-resisting sealant for repairing engine.
50 g
Polyethylene
container
Quick hardening type adhesive

Cure time: within 5 sec. to 3 min.
Used mainly for adhesion of metals,
rubbers, plastics and woods.
Adhesives
Three bond
1735
790-129-9140
Used as adhesive or sealant for metal, glass and plastic.
Aron-alpha
201
790-129-9130
2g
Polyethylene
container
Quick hardening type adhesive

Quick cure type (max. strength after
30 minutes)
Used mainly for adhesion of rubbers,
plastics and metals.
Loctite
648-50
79A-129-9110
50 cc
Polyethylene
container
Resistance to heat, chemicals

Used at joint portions subject to high
temperatures.
LG-1
790-129-9010
200 g
Tube
Used as adhesive or sealant for gaskets and packing of power train case,
etc.
LG-5
790-129-9080
1 kg
Can
Used as sealant for various threads,

pipe joints, flanges.
Used as sealant for tapered plugs,
elbows, nipples of hydraulic piping.
Tube
Features: Silicon based, resistance

to heat, cold
Used as sealant for flange surface,
tread.
Used as sealant for oil pan, final
drive case, etc.
LG-6
790-129-9020
200 g
Gasket
sealant
LG-7
790-129-9070
1g
Tube
Features: Silicon based, quick hardening type

Used as sealant for flywheel housing, intake manifold, oil an, thermostat housing, etc.
Three bond
1211
790-129-9090
100 g
Tube
Used as heat-resisting sealant for repairing engine.
Tube
Features: Silicone type, heat resistant, vibration resistant, and impact

resistant sealing material
Used as sealing material for transfer
case
Three bond
1207B
00-10
Used as sealant for machined holes.
419-15-18131
100 g
FOREWORD
Molybdenum
disulphide
lubricant
Grease
Primer
Adhesive
Caulking
material
Komatsu code
Part No.
Q'ty
Container
Main applications, featuresr
LM-G
09940-00051
60 g
Can
Used as lubricant for sliding portion

(to prevent from squeaking).
Tube
Used to prevent seizure or scuffling

of the thread when press fitting or
shrink fitting.
Used as lubricant for linkage, bearings, etc.
LM-P
09940-00040
G2-LI
SYG2-400LI
SYG2-350LI
SYG2-400LI-A
SYG2-160LI
SYGA-160CNLI
G2-CA
SYG2-400CA
SYG2-350CA
SYG2-400CA-A
SYG2-160CA
SYGA-160CNCA
200 g
General purpose type

Various
Various
Various
Various
Used for normal temperature, light

load bearing at places in contact
with water or steam.
Used for heavy load portion
Molybdenum
disulphide
grease
LM-G (G2-M)
SYG2-400M
SYG2-400M-A
SYGA-16CNM
Hyper White
Grease G2-T
G0-T (*)
*: For use in cold
district
SYG2-400T-A
SYG2-16CNT
SYG0-400T-A (*)
SYG0-16CNT (*)
400 g
16 kg
Seizure resistance and heat resistance higher than molybdenum diBellows type
sulfide grease
Can
Since this grease is white, it does
not stand out against machine
body.
Biogrease G2B
G2-BT (*)
*: For high
temperature
and large load
SYG2-400B
SYGA-16CNB
SYG2-400BT (*)
SYGA-16CNBT (*)
400 g
16 kg
Bellows type
Can
SUNSTAR
PAINT PRIMER
580 SUPER
20 ml
Glass
container
SUNSTAR
GLASS PRIMER
580 SUPER
20 ml
Glass
container
400 g 10 Bellows type

400 g 20 Bellows type
16 kg
Can
417-926-3910
SUNSTAR
PENGUINE
SEAL 580
SUPER "S" or
"W"
320 ml
Polyethylene
container
Sika Japan,
Sikaflex 256HV
20Y-54-39850
310 ml
Polyethylene
container
SUNSTAR
PENGUINE
SEAL No. 2505
417-926-3920
320 ml
Polyethylene
container
SEKISUI
SILICONE
SEALANT
20Y-54-55130
333 ml
Polyethylene
container
Since this grease is decomposed

by bacteria in short period, it has
less effects on microorganisms,
animals, and plants.
Used as primer for cab side
(Using limit: 4 months)
Used as primer for glass side
Adhesive for cab glass
Category
COATING MATERIALS
"S" is used for high-temperature season (April - October)

and "W" for low-temperature
season (November - April) as
adhesive for glass.
Used as adhesive for glass.
Used to seal joints of glass
parts.
Used to seal front window.
00-11
FOREWORD
STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUE

STANDARD TIGHTENING TORQUE TABLE (WHEN USING TORQUE WRENCH)
In the case of metric nuts and bolts for which there is no special instruction, tighten to the torque given in
the table below.
Tightening torque
Thread diameter
of bolt
Width across
flats
mm
mm
Nm
kgm
6
8
10
12
14
10
13
17
19
22
11.8 14.7
27 34
59 74
98 123
153 190
1.2 1.5
2.8 3.5
6 7.5
10 12.5
15.5 19.5
16
18
20
22
24
24
27
30
32
36
235 285
320 400
455 565
610 765
785 980
23.5 29.5
33 41
46.5 58
62.5 78
80 100
27
30
33
36
39
41
46
50
55
60
1150 1440
1520 1910
1960 2450
2450 3040
2890 3630
118 147
155 195
200 250
250 310
295 370
Thread diameter
of bolt
Width across
flats
mm
mm
Nm
kgm
6
8
10
12
10
13
14
27
5.9 9.8
13.7 23.5
34.3 46.1
74.5 90.2
0.6 1.0
1.4 2.4
3.5 4.7
7.6 9.2
Tightening torque
Sealing surface
TABLE OF TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR FLARED NUTS

In the case of flared nuts for which there is no
special instruction, tighten to the torque given in
the table below.
SAD00483
Thread diameter
Width across flat
mm
mm
Nm
kgm
14
18
22
24
30
33
36
42
19
24
27
32
36
41
46
55
24.5 4.9
49 19.6
78.5 19.6
137.3 29.4
176.5 29.4
196.1 49
245.2 49
294.2 49
2.5 0.5
52
82
14 3
18 3
20 5
25 5
30 5
00-12
Tightening torque
FOREWORD
TABLE OF TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR SPLIT FLANGE BOLTS

In the case of split flange bolts for which there is no special instruction, tighten to the torque given in the
table below.
Thread diameter
Width across flat
Tightening torque
mm
mm
Nm
kgm
10
12
16
14
17
22
59 74
98 123
235 285
6 7.5
10 12.5
23.5 29.5
TABLE OF TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR O-RING BOSS PIPING JOINTS

Unless there are special instructions, tighten the O-ring boss piping joints to the torque below.
Thread diameter
Width across flat
mm
mm
14
20
24
33
42
Varies depending
on type of
connector.
Tightening torque (Nm {kgm})
Norminal No.
02
03, 04
05, 06
10, 12
14
Range
35 63
84 132
128 186
363 480
746 1010
{3.5 6.5}
{8.5 13.5}
{13.0 19.0}
{37.0 49.0}
{76.0 103}
Target
44 {4.5}
103 {10.5}
157 {16.0}
422 {43.0}
883 {90.0}
TABLE OF TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR O-RING BOSS PLUGS

Unless there are special instructions, tighten the O-ring boss plugs to the torque below.
Thread diameter
Width across flat
mm
mm
08
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
33
36
42
52
14
17
19
22
24
27
30
32
32
36
Norminal No.
08
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
30
33
36
42
52
Range
5.88 8.82
9.8 12.74
14.7 19.6
19.6 24.5
24.5 34.3
34.3 44.1
44.1 53.9
58.8 78.4
93.1 122.5
107.8 147.0
127.4 176.4
181.3 240.1
274.4 367.5
{0.6 0.9}
{1.0 1.3}
{1.5 2.0}
{2.0 2.5}
{2.5 3.5}
{3.5 4.5}
{4.5 5.5}
{6.0 8.0}
{9.5 12.5}
{11.0 15.0}
{13.0 18.0}
{18.5 24.5}
{28.0 37.5}
Target
7.35 {0.75}
11.27 {1.15}
17.64 {1.8}
22.54 {2.3}
29.4 {3.0}
39.2 {4.0}
49.0 {5.0}
68.6 {7.0}
107.8 {11.0}
124.4 {13.0}
151.9 {15.5}
210.7 {21.5}
323.4 {33.0}
00-13
FOREWORD
TIGHTENING TORQUE FOR 102 ENGINE SERIES

1) BOLT AND NUTS
Use these torques for bolts and nuts (unit: mm) of Cummins Engine.
Thread diameter
Tightening torque
mm
Nm
kgm
10 0 2
24 0 4
43 0 6
77 0 12
6
8
10
12
1.02 0 0.20
2.45 0 0.41
4.38 0 0.61
7.85 0 1.22
2) EYE JOINTS
Use these torques for eye joints (unit: mm) of Cummins Engine.
Thread diameter
Tightening torque
mm
Nm
kgm
802
10 0 2
12 0 2
24 0 4
36 0 5
6
8
10
12
14
0.81 0 0.20
1.02 0 0.20
1.22 0 0.20
2.45 0 0.41
3.67 0 0.51
3) TAPERED SCREWS
Use these torques for tapered screws (unit: inch) of Cummins Engine.
Thread diameter
Tightening torque
inch
Nm
kgm
301
802
12 0 2
15 0 2
24 0 4
36 0 5
60 0 9
1 / 16
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
0.31 0 0.10
0.81 0 0.20
1.22 0 0.20
1.53 0 0.41
2.45 0 0.41
3.67 0 0.51
6.12 0 0.92
TIGHTENING TORQUE TABLE FOR HOSES (TAPER SEAL TYPE AND FACE SEAL TYPE)
Tighten the hoses (taper seal type and face seal type) to the following torque, unless otherwise specified.
Apply the following torque when the threads are coated (wet) with engine oil.
Nominal size Width across
of hose
flats
Taper seal
type
Face seal type
Nominal thread
Thread size size
Root diameter
- Threads per
(mm)
inch, Thread series (mm) (Reference)
Range
Target
19
34 - 63 {3.5 - 6.5}
44 {4.5}
14
9
- 18UNF
16
14.3
22
54 - 93 {5.5 - 9.5}
74 {4.5}
11
- 16UN
16
17.5
24
59 - 98 {6.0 - 10.0}
78 {8.0}
18
04
27
84 - 132 {8.5 - 13.5}
103 {10.5}
22
13
- 16UN
16
20.7
05
32
128 - 186 {13.0 - 19.0}
157 {16.0}
24
1 - 14UNS
25.4
06
36
177 - 245 {18.0 - 25.0}
216 {22.0}
30
3
1 - 12UNF
16
30.3
(10)
41
177 - 245 {18.0 - 25.0}
216 {22.0}
33
(12)
46
197 - 294 {20.0 - 30.0}
245 {25.0}
36
(14)
55
246 - 343 {25.0 - 35.0}
294 {30.0}
42
02
03
00-14
FOREWORD
ELECTRIC WIRE CODE
ELECTRIC WIRE CODE

In the wiring diagrams, various colors and symbols are employed to indicate the thickness of wires.
This wire code table will help you understand WIRING DIAGRAMS.
Example: 5WB indicates a cable having a nominal number 5 and white coating with black stripe.
CLASSIFICATION BY THICKNESS
Copper wire
Cable O.D.
(mm)
Current
rating
(A)
Applicable circuit
0.88
2.4
12
Starting, lighting, signal

etc.
0.32
2.09
3.1
20
Lighting, signal etc.
65
0.32
5.23
4.6
37
Charging and signal
15
84
0.45
13.36
7.0
59
Starting (Glow plug)
40
85
0.80
42.73
11.4
135
Starting
60
127
0.80
63.84
13.6
178
Starting
100
217
0.80
109.1
17.6
230
Starting
Norminal
number
Number of
strands
Dia. of
strands
(mm2)
Cross
section
(mm2)
0.85
11
0.32
26
CLASSIFICATION BY COLOR AND CODE

Circuits
Priority
Classification
Primary
Charging
Ground
Starting
Lighting
Instrument
Signal
Other
Code
Color
White
Black
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
Code
WR
BW
RW
YR
GW
LW
2
Color White & Red
Code
WB
White & Black Red & White Rellow & Red Green & White Blue & White
BY
RB
YB
GR
LR
Auxiliary
Color White & Black
Code
WL
Black & Yellow Red & Black Yellow & Black Green & Red Blue & Yellow
BR
Color White & Blue
Code
Color White & Green
Code
Color
WG
RY
Black & Red Red & Yellow

RG
YG
GY
LY
Yellow &
Green
Green &
Yellow
Blue & Yellow
YL
GB
LB
5
Red & Green Yellow & Blue Green & Black Blue & Black
RL
YW
GL
6
Red & Blue Yellow & White Green & Blue
n
n
00-15
FOREWORD
CONVERSION TABLE
CONVERSION TABLE
METHOD OF USING THE CONVERSION TABLE
The Conversion Table in this section is provided to enable simple conversion of figures. For details of the
method of using the Conversion Table, see the example given below.
EXAMPLE
Method of using the Conversion Table to convert from millimeters to inches
1. Convert 55 mm into inches.
(1) Locate the number 50 in the vertical column at the left side, take this as A, then draw a horizontal line
from A.
(2) Locate the number 5 in the row across the top, take this as B, then draw a perpendicular line down
from B.
(3) Take the point where the two lines cross as C. This point C gives the value when converting from millimeters to inches. Therefore, 55 mm = 2.165 inches.
2. Convert 550 mm into inches.
(1) The number 550 does not appear in the table, so divide by 10 (move the decimal point one place to the
left) to convert it to 55 mm.
(2) Carry out the same procedure as above to convert 55 mm to 2.165 inches.
(3) The original value (550 mm) was divided by 10, so multiply 2.165 inches by 10 (move the decimal point
one place to the right) to return to the original value. This gives 550 mm = 21.65 inches.
B
Millimeters to inches
1 mm = 0.03937 in
00-16
0
10
20
30
40
0
0.394
0.787
1.181
1.575
0.039
0.433
0.827
1.220
1.614
0.079
0.472
0.866
1.260
1.654
0.118
0.512
0.906
1.299
1.693
0.157
0.551
0.945
1.339
1.732
50
60
70
80
90
1.969
2.362
2.756
3.150
3.543
2.008
2.402
2.795
3.189
3.583
2.047
2.441
2.835
3.228
3.622
2.087
2.480
2.874
3.268
3.661
2.126
2.520
2.913
3.307
3.701
5
0.197
0.591
0.984
1.378
1.772
C
2.165
2.559
2.953
3.346
3.740
0.236
0.630
1.024
1.417
1.811
0.276
0.669
1.063
1.457
1.850
0.315
0.709
1.102
1.496
1.890
0.354
0.748
1.142
1.536
1.929
2.205
2.598
2.992
3.386
3.780
2.244
2.638
3.032
3.425
3.819
2.283
2.677
3.071
3.465
3.858
2.323
2.717
3.110
3.504
3.898
FOREWORD
CONVERSION TABLE
Millimeters to Inches
1 mm = 0.03937 in
0.039
0.079
0.118
0.157
0.197
0.236
0.276
0.315
0.354
10
0.394
0.433
0.472
0.512
0.551
0.591
0.630
0.669
0.709
0.748
20
0.787
0.827
0.866
0.906
0.945
0.984
1.024
1.063
1.102
1.142
30
1.181
1.220
1.260
1.299
1.339
1.378
1.417
1.457
1.496
1.536
40
1.575
1.614
1.654
1.693
1.732
1.772
1.811
1.850
1.890
1.929
50
1.969
2.008
2.047
2.087
2.126
2.165
2.205
2.244
2.283
2.323
60
2.362
2.402
2.441
2.480
2.520
2.559
2.598
2.638
2.677
2.717
70
2.756
2.795
2.835
2.874
2.913
2.953
2.992
3.032
3.071
3.110
80
3.150
3.189
3.228
3.268
3.307
3.346
3.386
3.425
3.465
3.504
90
3.543
3.583
3.622
3.661
3.701
3.740
3.780
3.819
3.858
3.898
Kilogram to Pound
1 kg = 2.2046 lb
0
0
2.20
4.41
6.61
8.82
11.02
13.23
15.43
17.64
19.84
10
22.05
24.25
26.46
28.66
30.86
33.07
35.27
37.48
39.68
41.89
20
44.09
46.30
48.50
50.71
51.91
55.12
57.32
59.53
61.73
63.93
30
66.14
68.34
70.55
72.75
74.96
77.16
79.37
81.57
83.78
85.98
40
88.18
90.39
92.59
94.80
97.00
99.21
101.41
103.62
105.82
108.03
50
110.23
112.44
114.64
116.85
119.05
121.25
123.46
125.66
127.87
130.07
60
132.28
134.48
136.69
138.89
141.10
143.30
145.51
147.71
149.91
152.12
70
154.32
156.53
158.73
160.94
163.14
165.35
167.55
169.76
171.96
174.17
80
176.37
178.57
180.78
182.98
185.19
187.39
189.60
191.80
194.01
196.21
90
198.42
200.62
202.83
205.03
207.24
209.44
211.64
213.85
216.05
218.26
00-17
FOREWORD
CONVERSION TABLE
Liter to U.S. Gallon

1l = 0.2642 U.S. Gal
0.264
0.528
0.793
1.057
1.321
1.585
1.849
2.113
2.378
10
2.642
2.906
3.170
3.434
3.698
3.963
4.227
4.491
4.755
5.019
20
5.283
5.548
5.812
6.076
6.340
6.604
6.869
7.133
7.397
7.661
30
7.925
8.189
8.454
8.718
8.982
9.246
9.510
9.774
10.039
10.303
40
10.567
10.831
11.095
11.359
11.624
11.888
12.152
12.416
12.680
12.944
50
13.209
13.473
13.737
14.001
14.265
14.529
14.795
15.058
15.322
15.586
60
15.850
16.115
16.379
16.643
16.907
17.171
17.435
17.700
17.964
18.228
70
18.492
18.756
19.020
19.285
19.549
19.813
20.077
20.341
20.605
20.870
80
21.134
21.398
21.662
21.926
22.190
22.455
22.719
22.983
23.247
23.511
90
23.775
24.040
24.304
24.568
24.832
25.096
25.361
25.625
25.889
26.153
Liter to U.K. Gallon

1l = 0.21997 U.K. Gal
0.220
0.440
0.660
0.880
1.100
1.320
1.540
1.760
1.980
10
2.200
2.420
2.640
2.860
3.080
3.300
3.520
3.740
3.950
4.179
20
4.399
4.619
4.839
5.059
5.279
5.499
5.719
5.939
6.159
6.379
30
6.599
6.819
7.039
7.259
7.479
7.969
7.919
8.139
8.359
8.579
40
8.799
9.019
9.239
9.459
9.679
9.899
10.119
10.339
10.559
10.778
50
10.998
11.281
11.438
11.658
11.878
12.098
12.318
12.528
12.758
12.978
60
13.198
13.418
13.638
13.858
14.078
14.298
14.518
14.738
14.958
15.178
70
15.398
15.618
15.838
16.058
16.278
16.498
16.718
16.938
17.158
17.378
80
17.598
17.818
18.037
18.257
18.477
18.697
18.917
19.137
19.357
19.577
90
19.797
20.017
20.237
20.457
20.677
20.897
21.117
21.337
21.557
21.777
00-18
FOREWORD
CONVERSION TABLE
kgm to ft. lb
1 kgm = 7.233 ft. lb
7.2
14.5
21.7
28.9
36.2
43.4
50.6
57.9
65.1
10
72.3
79.6
86.8
94.0
101.3
108.5
115.7
123.0
130.2
137.4
20
144.7
151.9
159.1
166.4
173.6
180.8
188.1
195.3
202.5
209.8
30
217.0
224.2
231.5
238.7
245.9
253.2
260.4
267.6
274.9
282.1
40
289.3
296.6
303.8
311.0
318.3
325.5
332.7
340.0
347.2
354.4
50
361.7
368.9
376.1
383.4
390.6
397.8
405.1
412.3
419.5
426.8
60
434.0
441.2
448.5
455.7
462.9
470.2
477.4
484.6
491.8
499.1
70
506.3
513.5
520.8
528.0
535.2
542.5
549.7
556.9
564.2
571.4
80
578.6
585.9
593.1
600.3
607.6
614.8
622.0
629.3
636.5
643.7
90
651.0
658.2
665.4
672.7
679.9
687.1
694.4
701.6
708.8
716.1
100
723.3
730.5
737.8
745.0
752.2
759.5
766.7
773.9
781.2
788.4
110
795.6
802.9
810.1
817.3
824.6
831.8
839.0
846.3
853.5
860.7
120
868.0
875.2
882.4
889.7
896.9
904.1
911.4
918.6
925.8
933.1
130
940.3
947.5
954.8
962.0
969.2
976.5
983.7
990.9
998.2
1005.4
140
1012.6
1019.9
1027.1
1034.3
1041.5
1048.8
1056.0
1063.2
1070.5
1077.7
150
1084.9
1092.2
1099.4
1106.6
1113.9
1121.1
1128.3
1135.6
1142.8
1150.0
160
1157.3
1164.5
1171.7
1179.0
1186.2
1193.4
1200.7
1207.9
1215.1
1222.4
170
1129.6
1236.8
1244.1
1251.3
1258.5
1265.8
1273.0
1280.1
1287.5
1294.7
180
1301.9
1309.2
1316.4
1323.6
1330.9
1338.1
1345.3
1352.6
1359.8
1367.0
190
1374.3
1381.5
1388.7
1396.0
1403.2
1410.4
1417.7
1424.9
1432.1
1439.4
00-19
FOREWORD
CONVERSION TABLE
kg/cm2 to lb/in2
1kg/cm2 = 14.2233 lb/in2
14.2
28.4
42.7
56.9
71.1
85.3
99.6
113.8
128.0
10
142.2
156.5
170.7
184.9
199.1
213.4
227.6
241.8
256.0
270.2
20
284.5
298.7
312.9
327.1
341.4
355.6
369.8
384.0
398.3
412.5
30
426.7
440.9
455.1
469.4
483.6
497.8
512.0
526.3
540.5
554.7
40
568.9
583.2
597.4
611.6
625.8
640.1
654.3
668.5
682.7
696.9
50
711.2
725.4
739.6
753.8
768.1
782.3
796.5
810.7
825.0
839.2
60
853.4
867.6
881.8
896.1
910.3
924.5
938.7
953.0
967.2
981.4
70
995.6
1010
1024
1038
1053
1067
1081
1095
1109
1124
80
1138
1152
1166
1181
1195
1209
1223
1237
1252
1266
90
1280
1294
1309
1323
1337
1351
1365
1380
1394
1408
100
1422
1437
1451
1465
1479
1493
1508
1522
1536
1550
110
1565
1579
1593
1607
1621
1636
1650
1664
1678
1693
120
1707
1721
1735
1749
1764
1778
1792
1806
1821
1835
130
1849
1863
1877
1892
1906
1920
1934
1949
1963
1977
140
1991
2005
2020
2034
2048
2062
2077
2091
2105
2119
150
2134
2148
2162
2176
2190
2205
2219
2233
2247
2262
160
2276
2290
2304
2318
2333
2347
2361
2375
2389
2404
170
2418
2432
2446
2460
2475
2489
2503
2518
2532
2546
180
2560
2574
2589
2603
2617
2631
2646
2660
2674
2688
190
2702
2717
2731
2745
2759
2773
2788
2802
2816
2830
200
2845
2859
2873
2887
2901
2916
2930
2944
2958
2973
210
2987
3001
3015
3030
3044
3058
3072
3086
3101
3115
220
3129
3143
3158
3172
3186
3200
3214
3229
3243
3257
230
3271
3286
3300
3314
3328
3343
3357
3371
3385
3399
240
3414
3428
3442
3456
3470
3485
3499
3513
3527
3542
00-20
FOREWORD
CONVERSION TABLE
Temperature
Fahrenheit-Centigrade Conversion ; a simple way to convert a Fahrenheit temperature reading into a Centigrade temperature reading or vice versa is to enter the accompanying table in the center or boldface column of figures.
These figures refer to the temperature in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade degrees.
If it is desired to convert from Fahrenheit to Centigrade degrees, consider the center column as a table of
Fahrenheit temperatures and read the corresponding Centigrade temperature in the column at the left.
If it is desired to convert from Centigrade to Fahrenheit degrees, consider the center column as a table of
Centigrade values, and read the corresponding Fahrenheit temperature on the right.
1C = 33.8F
40.4
37.2
34.4
31.7
28.9
40
35
30
25
20
40.0
31.0
22.0
13.0
4.0
11.7
11.1
10.6
10.0
9.4
11
12
13
14
15
51.8
53.6
55.4
57.2
59.0
7.8
8.3
8.9
9.4
10.0
46
47
48
49
50
114.8
116.6
118.4
120.2
122.0
27.2
27.8
28.3
28.9
29.4
81
82
83
84
85
117.8
179.6
181.4
183.2
185.0
28.3
27.8
27.2
26.7
26.1
19
18
17
16
15
2.2
0.4
1.4
3.2
5.0
8.9
8.3
7.8
7.2
6.7
16
17
18
19
20
60.8
62.6
64.4
66.2
68.0
10.6
11.1
11.7
12.2
12.8
51
52
53
54
55
123.8
125.6
127.4
129.2
131.0
30.0
30.6
31.1
31.7
32.2
86
87
88
89
90
186.8
188.6
190.4
192.2
194.0
25.6
25.0
24.4
23.9
23.3
14
13
12
11
10
6.8
8.6
10.4
12.2
14.0
6.1
5.6
5.0
4.4
3.9
21
22
23
24
25
69.8
71.6
73.4
75.2
77.0
13.3
13.9
14.4
15.0
15.6
56
57
58
59
0
132.8
134.6
136.4
138.2
140.0
32.8
33.3
33.9
34.4
35.0
91
92
93
94
95
195.8
197.6
199.4
201.2
203.0
22.8
22.2
21.7
21.1
20.6
9
8
7
6
5
15.8
17.6
19.4
21.2
23.0
3.3
2.8
2.2
1.7
1.1
26
27
28
29
30
78.8
80.6
82.4
84.2
86.0
16.1
16.7
17.2
17.8
18.3
61
62
63
64
65
141.8
143.6
145.4
147.2
149.0
35.6
36.1
36.7
37.2
37.8
96
97
98
99
100
204.8
206.6
208.4
210.2
212.0
20.0
19.4
18.9
18.3
17.8
4
3
2
1
0
24.8
26.6
28.4
30.2
32.0
0.6
0
0.6
1.1
1.7
31
32
33
34
35
87.8
89.6
91.4
93.2
95.0
18.9
19.4
20.0
20.6
21.1
66
67
68
69
70
150.8
152.6
154.4
156.2
158.0
40.6
43.3
46.1
48.9
51.7
105
110
115
120
125
221.0
230.0
239.0
248.0
257.0
17.2
16.7
16.1
15.6
15.0
1
2
3
4
5
33.8
35.6
37.4
39.2
41.0
2.2
2.8
3.3
3.9
4.4
36
37
38
39
40
96.8
98.6
100.4
102.2
104.0
21.7
22.2
22.8
23.3
23.9
71
72
73
74
75
159.8
161.6
163.4
165.2
167.0
54.4
57.2
60.0
62.7
65.6
130
135
140
145
150
266.0
275.0
284.0
293.0
302.0
14.4
13.9
13.3
12.8
12.2
6
7
8
9
10
42.8
44.6
46.4
48.2
50.0
5.0
5.6
6.1
6.7
7.2
41
42
43
44
45
105.8
107.6
109.4
111.2
113.0
24.4
25.0
25.6
26.1
26.7
76
77
78
79
80
168.8
170.6
172.4
174.2
176.0
68.3
71.1
73.9
76.7
79.4
155
160
165
170
175
311.0
320.0
329.0
338.0
347.0
00-21
FOREWORD
UNITS
UNITS
In this manual, the measuring units are indicated with Internatinal System of units (SI).
As for reference, conventionally used Gravitational System of units are indicated in parentheses {
Example:
N {kg}
Nm {kgm}
MPa {kg/cm2}
kPa {mmH2O}
kPa {mmHg}
kW/rpm {HP/rpm}
g/kWh {g/HPh}
00-22
}.
01 GENERAL
GENERAL ASSEMBLY DRAWING ........................................... 01-2

SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................... 01-4
WEIGHT TABLE ........................................................................ 01-7
LIST OF LUBRICANTS AND WATER ....................................... 01-9
PC130-7
01-1
GENERAL
GENERAL ASSEMBLY DRAWING

SPECIFICATION DIMENSIONAL DRAWING
PC130-7
Item
Unit
2.5 m arm, 500 mm shoe
Overall length
mm
7,595
7,485
Overall height
mm
2,810
3,170
Overall width
mm
2,490
2,490
Shoe width
mm
500
700
Cab height
mm
2,810
2,810
Trail swing radius
mm
2,190
2,190
Crawler overall length
mm
3,610
3,610
Distance between tambler center
mm
2,880
2,880
01-2
PC130-7
GENERAL
WORKING RANGE DRAWING
PC130-7
Working range (mm)
2.5 m arm
3.0 m arm
Maximum digging radius
8,290
8,785
Maximum digging depth
5,520
6,015
Maximum digging height
8,610
8,790
Maximum vertical wall digging depth
4,940
5,360
Maximum dumping height
6,170
6,535
Minimum swing radius of work equipment
2,450
2,610
Maximum reach at ground level
8,170
8,665
PC130-7
01-3
GENERAL
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
PC130-7
Machine model
Dimension
Bucket capacity (SAE)
0.5
0.5
Operating weight
kg
12,200
13,050
Max. digging depth
mm
5,520
6,015
Max. vertical wall depth
mm
4,940
5,360
Max. digging reach
mm
8,290
8,785
Max. reach st ground level
mm
8,170
8,665
Max. digging height
mm
8,610
8,970
Max. dumping height
mm
6,170
6,535
kN {kg}
93.2 {9,500}
93.2 {9,500}
Swing speed
rpm
11.0
11.0
Swing max. slope angle
deg.
20
20
Travel speed (Hi/Lo)
km/h
2.7/5.5
2.7/5.5
Gradeability
deg.
35
35
Ground pressure
{kg/cm2}
38 {0.39}
29 {0.30}
Max. digging force (bucket)
mm
7,595
7,485
Overall width
mm
2,490
2,690
Overall height (for transport)
mm
2,810
3,170
Overall height to top of cab
mm
2,730
2,730
Ground clearance of counterweight
mm
855
855
Min. ground clearance
mm
400
400
Tail swing radius
mm
2,190
2,190
Min. swing radius of work euipment
mm
2,450
2,610
Height of work equipment at min.

swing radius
mm
6,455
6,455
Length of track
mm
3,610
3,610
Distance between tumbler center
mm
2,880
2,880
Track gauge
mm
1,990
1,990
Overall height of machine cab
mm
1,885
1,885
Model
SAA4D95LE-3
Type
4-cycle, water-cooled, in-line, vertical,

direct injection, with turbochatger, after cooler
mm
4 95 x 115
l {cc}
3.260 {3,260}
Rated horsepower
kW/rpm{HP/rpm}
66.2/2,200 {88.7/2,200}
Max. torpue
Nm/rpm{kgm/rpm}
353/1,500 {36.0/1,500}
High idling speed
rpm
2,400
Low idling speed
rpm
1,100
g/kWh{g/HPh}
224 {165}
Performance
Piston displacement
Engine
kPa
Overall length (for transport)
No. of cylinders-bore x stroke
Min. fuel consumption ratio
01-4
(3)
70001 and up
m3
Working ranges
Performance
Serial No.
PC130-7
GENERAL
SPECIFICATIONS
PC130-7
Machine model
Serial No.
70001 and up
24V, 3.0 kw
Alternator
24V, 25A
Battery
12V, 64 Ah x 2
Radiator type
Aluminum wave (4-line)
Carrier roller
1 on each side
Track roller
7 on each side
Track shoe (iron shoe)
Asembly-type triple grouster, 43 on each side
Hydraulic pump
(road liner)
Type x no.
Hydraulic motor Control

valve
Type x no.
Road liner, 43 on each side

Variable displacement piston type x 1
Discharge
Set pressure (at operation)
l /min
226 (at 2,200rpm)
MPa {kg/cm2}
31.9 {325}
(at traveling)
34.8 {355}
7-spool type x 1
Control method
Hydraulic type
Travel motor
Variable displacement piston type

(with brake valve, holding brake) x 2
Swing motor
Fixed displacement piston type

(with safety valve, holding brake) x 1
Hydraulic tank
Box-shaped, open
Hydraulic filter
Tank return side
Hydraulic cooler
Air cooled
PC130-7
Boom cylinder
Work equipment cylinder
Type
Reciprocating piston tipe
Cylinder inner diameter
mm
105
105
Piston rod diameter
mm
70
70
Stroke
mm
990
990
Max. length betwiin pins
mm
2,490
2,490
Min. length betwiin pins
mm
1,500
1,500
Type
Arm cylinder
Undercarriage
Engine
Starting motor
Hydraulic system
mm
115
115
Piston rod diameter
mm
75
75
Stroke
mm
1,175
1,175
mm
2,877
2,877
mm
1,702
1,702
01-5
GENERAL
SPECIFICATIONS
PC130-7
Machine model
01-6
70001 and up
Type
Bucket cylinder
Work equipment cylinder
Hydraulic system
Serial No.
mm
95
95
Piston rod diameter
mm
65
65
Stroke
mm
885
885
mm
2,263
2,263
mm
1,378
1,378
PC130-7
GENERAL
WEIGHT TABLE
WEIGHT TABLE
k This weight table is a guide for use when transporting or handling component.
Unit: kg
Machine model
PC130-7
Serial No.
70001 and up
Engine assembly (excl. water, oil)
449
Engine (excl. water, oil)
345
Engine mount
19.6
PTO
4.1
Hydraulic pump
80
Radiator, oil cooler assembly
83
Revolving frame
1,110
Operator's cab
279
Operator's seat
35
Fuel tank (excl. fuel)
101
Hydraulic tank (excl. hydraulic oil)
89
Control valve
116
Self pressure reducing valve
4.8
Counterweight
2,455
Swing motor (with brake valve)
26
Swing circle
155
Swing machinery
72.2
Center swivel joint
28.6
Track frame assembly
2,260
Track frame
1,280
Idler assembly
79 x 2
Recoil spring assembly
69.5 x 2
Carrier roller
16.5 x 2
Track roller
21 x 14
Travel motor, final drive assembly
144 x 2
Sprocket
33.7 x 2
Track shoe assembly

Triple grouser shoe (500mm)
725 x 2
815 x 2
905 x 2
City pad shoe (500mm)
720 x 2
Road liner (500mm)
780 x 2
PC130-7
01-7
GENERAL
WEIGHT TABLE
Unit: kg
Machine model
PC130-7
Serial No.
70001 and up
Boom assembly
1,088
Arm assembly
392.4
Bucket link assembly
92.7
Bucket assembly
369
Boom cylinder assembly
92.7
Arm cylinder assembly
135
Bucket cylinder assembly
82.6
01-8
PC130-7
GENERAL
LIST OF LUBRICANTS AND WATER
LIST OF LUBRICANTS AND WATER
RESERVOIR
KIND OF
-22
FLUID
-30
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
-4
-20
14
-10
32
0
50
10
68
20
CAPACITY ( )
86
30
104F
40C
Specified
Refill
17.5
16
0.75
0.75
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
0.090 --0.105
0.090 --0.105
0.075 --0.085
0.075 --0.085
0.068 --0.076
0.068 --0.076
140
90
SAE 30
SAE 10W
Engine oil pan
SAE 10W-30
SAE 15W-40
PTO case
Swing machinery case
Final drive case (each)
SAE 30
Engine oil
Idler (each)
Track roller (each)
SAE 30
Carrier roller (each)

SAE 10W
SAE 10W-30
Hydraulic system
SAE 15W-40
Hydraulic oil
Fuel tank
HD46-HM (a)
ASTM D975 No.2
Diesel fuel
240
ASTM D975 No. 1

Cooling system
PC130-7
Coolant
Add antifreeze
18.2
01-9
10 STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION
PTO ...........................................................................10- 2
COOLING SYSTEM ..................................................10- 3
POWER TRAIN .........................................................10- 5
SWING CIRCLE ........................................................10- 6
SWING MACHINERY................................................10- 7
TRACK FRAME.........................................................10- 8
IDLER CUSHION ......................................................10- 9
HYDRAULIC COMPONENT LAYOUT ......................10- 10
VALVE CONTROL.....................................................10- 12
HYDRAULIC TANK AND FILTER..............................10- 14
HYDRAULIC PUMP (PISTON PUMP) ......................10- 15
CONTROL VALVE.....................................................10- 36
SUCTION SAFETY VALVE .......................................10- 46
CLSS .........................................................................10- 47
SELF PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE ....................10- 79
CENTER SWIVEL JOINT..........................................10- 86
TRAVEL MOTOR (FINAL DRIVE).............................10- 87
SWING MOTOR ........................................................10- 96
SOLENOID VALVE....................................................10-102
PPC ACCUMULATOR...............................................10-104
PPC VALVE ...............................................................10-105
WORK EQUIPMENT .................................................10-116
AIR CONDITIONER PIPING .....................................10-117
ENGINE CONTROL ..................................................10-118
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM ..............................10-123
MONITOR SYSTEM..................................................10-150
PC130-7
10-1
PTO
PTO
1.
2.
3.
4.
Coupling
Shaft
Cage
Hydraulic pump
10-2
5. Level plug
6. Oil filler plug
7. Breather
PC130-7
COOLING SYSTEM
COOLING SYSTEM
PC130-7
10-3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
COOLING SYSTEM
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Reservoir tank
Shroud
Oil cooler
Fan
Radiator
Fan guard
Oil cooler
Radiator cap
Charge air inlet hose

Radiator inlet hose
Charge air outlet hose
Oil cooler outlet
Drain valve
Radiator outlet hose
Air condenser
Oil cooler inlet
SPECIFICATION
Radiator
Oil cooler
Charge air cooler
Aluminium wave
(4-line)
CF40
Aluminium wave
(mm)
3.5/2
3.5/2
4.0/2
(m2)
25.58
11.60
9.54
Pressure valve cracking pressure

(kPa {kg/cm2})
49.0 14.7
{0.5 0.15}
Vacuum valve cracking pressure

(kPa {kg/cm2})
-4.9 0
{-0.05 0}
Core type
Fin pitch
Total heat dissipation surface
10-4
(3)
PC130-7
POWER TRAIN
POWER TRAIN
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Idler
Control valve
Self pressure reducing valve
Travel motor
Hydraulic pump
Engine
2-stage relief solenoid valve
PC130-7
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Swing hold brake solenoid valve

2-speed travel changeover solenoid valve
PPC lock solenoid valve
Swing motor
Center swivel joint
Swing machinery
Swing circle
10-5
SWING CIRCLE
SWING CIRCLE
1. Outer race
2. Ball
3. Inner race
a. Inner race soft zone "S" position
b. Outer race soft zone "S" position
10-6
SPECIFICATIONS
Reduction ratio:
90
11
= 8.182
Amount of grease: 6.5 l (Grease: G2-LI)
PC130-7
SWING MACHINERY
SWING MACHINERY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Swing pinion (No. of teeth: 11)

Case
No. 2 sun gear (No. of teeth: 17)
No. 2 planetary carrier (No. of teeth: 17)
Ring gear (No. of teeth: 61)
No. 1 planetary carrier (No. of teeth: 17)
No. 1 sun gear (No. of teeth: 14)
Oil level gauge/ oil filler port
Swing motor
PC130-7
10.
11.
12.
13.
No. 1 planetary gear (No. of teeth: 24)

No. 2 planetary gear (No. of teeth: 22)
Drain plug
Swing circle
SPECIFICATION
+ 61
Reduction ratio: 1414
x
17 + 61
17
= 24.58
10-7
TRACK FRAME
TRACK FRAME
1.
2.
3.
4.
Idler
Track frame
Carrier roller
Travel motor
10-8
5.
6.
7.
8.
Sprocket
Track roller
Idler cushion
Track shoe
PC130-7
IDLER CUSHION
IDLER CUSHION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Idler
Support
Yoke
Cylinder
Recoil spring
U-packing
Pilot
Nut
Valve
Grease fitting
PC130-7
SPECIFICATION
Grease : G2-LI
Amount of filled grease : 140 ml
10-9
HYDRAULIC COMPONENT LAYOUT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Bucket cylinder
Arm cylinder
Boom cylinder
Hydraulic tank
Swing motor
Hydraulic pump
Oil cooler
L.H. travel motor
Control valve
4-spool solenoid valve
PPC lock
2-speed travel speed selection
Swing holding brake
2-stage relief
L.H. PPC valve
R.H. PPC valve
Travel PPC valve
Center swivel joint
10-10
PC130-7
PC130-7
10-11
VALVE CONTROL
VALVE CONTROL
10-12
PC130-7
VALVE CONTROL
1. R.H. work equipment PPC valve

2. R.H. work equipment control lever
(for boom and bucket operation)
3. Main pump
4. Control valve
5. 4-spool solenoid valve
6. L.H. work equipment control lever
(for arm, swing operation)
7. L.H. work equipment PPC valve
8. Safety lock lever
9. L.H. travel pedal
10. R.H. travel pedal
11. L.H. travel lever
12. R.H. travel lever
13. Travel PPC valve
14. Attachment PPC valve
(Attachment installable machine)
15. Attachment pedal
(Attachment installable machine)
Lever and Pedal Positions
(A) HOLD
(B) Boom LOWER
(C) Boom RAISE
(D) Bucket CURL
(E) Bucket DUMP
(F) HOLD
(G) Arm OUT
(H) Arm IN
(J) Swing LEFT
(K) Swing RIGHT
(L) L.H. travel FORWARD
(M) L.H. travel REVERSE
(N) R.H. travel FORWARD
(P) R.H. travel REVERSE
(Q) PPC FREE
(R) PPC LOCK
PC130-7
10-13
HYDRAULIC TANK AND FILTER
HYDRAULIC TANK AND FILTER
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Hydraulic tank
Drain plug
Oil filler cap
Pressure valve
Vacuum valve
Sight gauge
Suction strainer
Filter element
Bypass strainer
Bypass valve
10-14
SPECIFICATION
Tank capacity : 130 l
Hydraulic oil amount in tank : 90 l
Pressure valve cracking pressure :
16.7 6.9 kPa {0.17 0.07 kg/cm2}
Vacuum valve cracking pressure :
-0.49 0 kPa {-0.005 0 kg/cm2}
Bypass valve set pressure :
103 29.4 kPa {1.05 0.2 kg/cm2}
PC130-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP
HYDRAULIC PUMP (PISTON PUMP)

MAIN PUMP
Type : HPV95 (for 105cc/rev.)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Main pump
LS valve
PC valve
Fixed choke valve
PC-EPC valve (for PC mode selection)
LS-EPC valve (for LS set selection)
PC130-7
IM
: PC mode change current
PA
: Main pump delivery
PB
: Main pump pressure input
PS
: Main pump absorption
PD1 : Case drain
PLS : Control valve LS pressure inlet
PEPC : EPC valve basic pressure inlet
10-15
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Shaft
Cradle
Case
Rocker cam
Shoe
Piston
Cylinder block
10-16
HYDRAULIC PUMP
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Valve plate
End cap
Spring
Servo last chance filter
Servo piston
Slider
PC130-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP
FUNCTION
This pump converts engine rotation and torque
transmitted to the pump shaft into hydraulic
energy and discharges pressurized oil according
to load.
This pump can change delivery when the swash
plate angle is changed.
STRUCTURE
Cylinder block (7) is supported to shaft (1) with
spline a, and shaft (1) is supported with the front
and rear bearings.
Shoe (5) is punched to the tip of piston (6) with a
concave ball so that piston (6) and shoe (5) form
a spherical bearing.
Shoe (5) is always pressed to plane A of rocker
cam (4) and slides in a circle.
Rocker cam (4) leads highly pressurized oil
together with cylindrical plane B with cradle (2)
fixed to the case, forms a static pressure bearing
and slides.
Piston (6) moves in the axial direction relatively
in each cylinder of cylinder block (7).
Cylinder block (7) rotates relatively while sealing
pressurized oil against valve plate (8), and the
plane is designed to balance the oil pressure
properly.
Oil in each cylinder of cylinder block (7) is
absorbed and discharged through valve plate
(8).
PC130-7
10-17
(3)
HYDRAULIC PUMP
OPERATION
1. Pump Operation
Shaft (1) rotates together with cylinder block (7),
and shoe (5) slides on plate A. When rocker
arm (4) moves along cylindrical plane B, the
inclination
to centerline X of rocker cam (4)
and the axial direction of cylinder block (7)
changes. Inclination
is called "swash plate
angle."
When the swash plate angle of center line X of

rocker cam (4) is
to the axial direction of cylinder block (7), plane A works like the cam against
shoe (5).
Therefore, piston (6) slides inside cylinder block
(7), and the capacities E and F of cylinder block
(7) come to change differently. Then, the pump
absorbs and discharges the difference E-F.
When the capacity in E chamber contracts as
cylinder block (7) rotates, the pump discharges
oil during the process. On the other hand, when
the capacity in F chamber increases, the pump
absorbs oil during the process. (The figure
shows the end of the absorbing process in
Chamber F and the end of the discharging process in Chamber E.
When the centerline X of rocker cam (4) comes
to the axial direction of cylinder block (7) (when
the swash plate angle is 0), the difference
between capacities E and F in cylinder block (7)
comes to 0. And the pump comes to stop
absorbing or discharging oil, i.e., the pump
stops. (However, the swash plate angle never
comes to 0 practically.)
In other words, swash plate angle
and the
pump delivery are in the proportional relations.
10-18
(3)
PC130-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP
2. Delivery Control
When swash plate angle
increases, the difference between capacities E and F becomes
larger and delivery Q increases. Servo piston
(12) changes the swash plate angle .
The servo piston moves in the direction of
straight reciprocation according to signal pressures of the PC and LS valves. This straight
motion is transmitted to rocker arm (4) through
slider (13), and rocker cam (4), which is supported with the cylindrical plane to cradle (2),
slides in the direction of rotation.
Servo piston's (12) area receiving the pressure is

different on the right and left sides, and the discharge (self) pressure PP from the main pump is
always led to the pressure chamber of the small
diameter piston.
The output pressure Pen of the LS valve is led to
the pressure chamber of the large diameter piston.
Motions of the servo piston are controlled
according to the relations between the small
diameter piston pressure PP and the large diameter piston pressure Pen and the rate of area
receiving pressure of the small diameter piston
to that of the large diameter piston.
PC130-7
10-19
(3)
HYDRAULIC PUMP
LS AND PC VALVE
LS valve
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Sleeve
Piston
Spool
Seat
Plug
Spring
Sleeve
Nut
O-ring
Nut
PA : Pump pressure inlet

PB : Pump pressure inlet
PDP : Drain
PLP : Control pressure outlet
PLS : Over load pressure inlet
PPL : Control pressure intle
PSIG : LS mode switching pressure inlet
PC Valve
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Piston
Spring
Seat
Spring
Seat
Spool
Piston
Sleeve
Lock nut
10-20
10. Plug
11. Lock nut
PA
PA2
PD
PM
PPL
: Pump discharge pressure inlet

: Pump discharge pressure inlet
: Drain pressure outlet
: PC mode switching pressure inlet
: PC valve signal pressure outlet
PC130-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP
FIXED THROTTLE VALVE
1. Plug
2. Plug
PA
: Drain pressure outlet
POUT : Control pressure outlet
PIN : LS valve signal pressure inlet
PC130-7
10-21
HYDRAULIC PUMP
FUNCTION
1. LS Valve
The LS valve detects loads and controls delivery.
This valve controls main pump delivery Q with
differential pressure PLS (PP PLS) [that is
called LS Differential Pressure] between the
main pump pressure PP and control valve outlet
pressure PLS.
This valve is applied with main pump pressure
PP, pressure PLS that is obtained from the control valve output [that is called LS Pressure] and
pressure PSIG from the LS-EPC valve [that is
called LS Selection Pressure].
The relations of differential pressure PLS (=
PP PLS) between main pump pressure PP and
LS pressure PLS with delivery Q vary with the
LS selection current ISIG of the LS-EPC valve as
shown in the right figure.
As ISIG changes from 0 to 1A, the spring set
force changes accordingly, and the selector point
for pump discharge amount changes from 0.64
to 2.1 MPa {6.5 to 21.5 kg/cm2} at the standard
median.
2. PC Valve
When pump discharge pressure PP rises, the
control valve spool stroke will increase and the
opening area will enlarge. So, the PC valve controls pump delivery Q so that delivery Q does not
increase above a certain level depending on discharge pressure PP.
The valve also controls the pump absorbing
hydraulic horsepower to approximately equal
horsepower so that the pump absorbing horsepower does not exceed the engine horsepower.
This means that, when a load to the actuator
increases during operation and pump discharge
pressure PP rises, this valve will reduce pump
delivery Q, or when pump discharge pressure
PP drops, this valve will increase delivery Q.
In this case, the relations between pump discharge pressure PP and pump delivery Q
change as shown in the right figure since the current value given to the PC-EPC valve solenoid is
regarded as a parameter.
However, some PC valves have the function to
sense actual engine speeds in the heavy-duty
operation mode and to reduce pump delivery
and recover speed when the speed reduces due
to increase of load.
In other words, when an increase of load
reduces engine speed below the set value, the
command current from the controller to the PCEPC valve solenoid will increase as engine
speed reduces and will reduce the pump swash
plate angle.
10-22
(3)
PC130-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP
OPERATION
1. LS Valve
1) When the control valve is at the center
value position
The LS valve is a 3-way selector valve, and
the pressure PLS (LS pressure) from the
control valve inlet is being led to spring
chamber B and pump discharge pressure PP
is being led to the H port of sleeve (8).
Spool (6) position is determined depending
on the force of LS pressure PLS + the force
of spring (4) Z and force of the pump discharge pressure (self-pressure) PP.
PC130-7
10-23
(3)
Before the engine starts, servo piston (12) is

pressed to the right side. (See the right figure.)
If the control lever is at the "center value"
position when the engine starts, LS pressure
PLS will be 0 MPa (0 kg/cm2). (The LS valve
interconnects to the drain circuit through the
control valve spool.)
At the time, spool (6) is pressed to the left
side and C port is connected to D port. The
pump discharge pressure enters from K port
to the piston large diameter side and from J
port to the piston small diameter side respectively. So, the area difference of servo piston (12) minimizes the swash plate angle.
10-24
(3)
HYDRAULIC PUMP
PC130-7
2) Operation in direction for maximum pump

delivery
When the LS differential pressure
PLS
between pump discharge pressure PP and
LS pressure PLS reduces (when the control
valve is large and discharge pressure PP
drops, for example), the combined force of
LS pressure PLS and spring (4) pushes
spool (6) to the right side.
When spool (6) moves, port D is connected
to port E to bring the PC valve in line. At the
time, the PC valve is connected to the drain
port, and circuit D K is applied with drain
pressure PT. (The operation of the PC valve
will be explained later.)
PC130-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP
Therefore, pressure on the piston large

diameter side of servo piston (12) comes to
drain pressure PT, and since the pump discharge pressure PP is applied to port J on
the small diameter side, servo piston (12) is
pushed to the right side and the swash plate
is moved to the delivery increasing direction.
When port G is applied with the output pressure of the EPC valve for the LS valve, piston (7) is pushed to the left side.
This is effective to reduce spring (4) set
force, and the differential pressure between
oil pressure PP when ports D and E of spool
(6) are connected and PP changes.
10-25
(3)
3) Operation in direction for minimum pump

delivery
The following explains movement of servo
piston (12) to the left side (in the direction for
minimum pump delivery). When LS differential pressure PLS increases (when the control valve opening area becomes small and
pump discharge pressure PP increases, for
example), the force of discharge pressure
PP pushes the spool (6) to the left side.
As spool (6) moves, pump discharge pressure PP flows from port C to port D and
comes from port K to the piston large diameter side.
10-26
(3)
HYDRAULIC PUMP
Though pump discharge pressure PP comes

to port J of the piston small diameter side,
servo piston (12) is pushed to the left side
due to the area difference between the piston large diameter side and the piston small
diameter side of servo piston (12) and the
swash plate is moved in the delivery reducing direction.
When port G is applied with the LS selection
pressure, it is effective to reduce spring (4)
set force.
PC130-7
4) When the servo piston balances

The area receiving pressure on the piston
large diameter side is supposed to be A1,
the one on the small diameter side is supposed to be A0 and pressure flowing to the
piston large diameter side is supposed to be
PEN.
When pump discharge pressure PP of the
LS valve balances with the combined force
of LS pressure PLS and spring (4) force Z
and the relations of A0 x PP = A1 x PEN are
satisfied, servo piston (12) stops at the position and the swash plate is held at the intermediate position (stops where the opening
from port D to port E of spool (6) is almost
equal to the one from port C to port D).
PC130-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP
At the time, the relations of areas receiving

pressure on both ends of servo piston (12)
are A0 : A1 = 1 : 1.75, and the ones of pressures applied on the piston both ends at the
balancing time are PP : PEN = 1.75 : 1
approximately.
Spring (4) force has been adjusted so that
the balance stop position of spool (6) is
determined when PP PLS = 2.21 MPa
{22.5 kg/cm 2 } is satisfied at the standard
center.
When port G is applied with PSIG (EPC
valve output pressure for LS valve of 0 2.9
MPa {10 30 kg/cm 2 }), however, the balance stop position changes proportionally to
the PSIG pressure in the range of PP PLS
from 2.1 to 0.6 MPa {21.5 to 6.5 kg/cm2}.
10-27
(3)
2. PC Valve
(1) When the pump controller is normal, the
load to the actuator is small and the pump
discharge pressure PP is low
1) Function of PC-EPC Valve Solenoid
(1)
The pump controller provides a command current to PC-EPC valve solenoid
(1). This command current actuates the
PC-EPC valve and outputs a signal pressure. When receiving the signal pressure, the PC valve changes the force
given to piston (2).
Spool (3) stops where the force to piston
(2) balances with the combined force of
spring setting force of springs (4) and (6)
on the opposite side and the force given
to spool (3) by the pump discharge pressure PP.
10-28
(3)
HYDRAULIC PUMP
And pressure output from the PC valve

(the pressure at C port) varies with the
spool position.
The value of command current X is
determined depending on type of work
(lever control), selection of working
mode, set point of engine speed and
actual speed.
PC130-7
2) Function of Spring
The loads to springs (4) and (6) of the PC
valve are determined depending on
swash plate position.
As servo piston (9) moves, piston (7)
connected to slider (8) moves to the right
or the left.
When piston (7) moves to the left, spring
(6) will be contracted. If the piston
moves further to the left, the spring will
be brought to seat (5) and be fixed there.
Thereafter, spring (4) will only move.
This means that the spring load changes
as piston (7) extends or contracts springs
(4) and (6).
PC130-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP
Also, since the pressing force of piston

(2) changes as the command current
input to the PC-EPC valve solenoid (1)
changes, the load to springs (4) and (6)
changes depending on the value of the
command current.
The C port of the PC valve is connected
to the E port of the LS valve. The self
pressure PP is provided to A port, the
small diameter side of servo piston (9)
and B port.
10-29
(3)
10-30
(3)
HYDRAULIC PUMP
When the pump discharge pressure PP

is small, the spool is located at a position
in the left direction. At the time, C port is
connected to D port, and pressure to the
LS valve becomes drain pressure PT. If
E port of the LS valve is connected to G
port at the time, the pressure from J port
to the large diameter side of the piston
will become drain pressure PT. And the
servo piston will moves to the right side.
Then, the pump delivery will increase.
Also, as servo piston (9) operates, slider
(8) moves piston (7) to the right side, and
the spring force becomes weak because
springs (4) and (6) expand. As the
spring force becomes weak, spool (3)
moves to the right side to disconnect C
port from D port. Then, the pump discharge pressure ports B and C are connected.
As a result, pressure at the C port rises
and pressure on the large diameter side
of the piston rises as well, and servo piston (9) stops moving to the right side.
This means that the stop position of
servo piston (9) (= pump delivery) is
determined where the pressing force
caused pressure PP to spool (3), the
pressing force of the PC-EPC valve solenoid and the forces of the springs (4) and
(6) balance with each other.
PC130-7
(2) When the pump controller is normal, the

load to actuator is large and the pump
discharge pressure PP is high
When the load is large and the pump discharge pressure is high, the force pushing
spool (3) to the left side increases and spool
(3) comes to the position shown in the above
figure.
Then, the pressure flowing from C port to the
LS valve becomes about 3/5 of the pump discharge pressure PP because the pressure
from A port partly flows from C port to D port
through the LS valve as shown in the above
figure.
PC130-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP
When E port of the LS valve is connected to

G port, this pressure is led from J port to the
large diameter side of the servo piston (9)
and the servo piston comes to stop.
When the pump discharge pressure PP
increase and spool (3) moves further to the
left side, discharge pressure PP will flow to C
port so as to minimize the pump delivery.
10-31
(3)
When servo piston (9) moves to the left side,

piston (7) will move to the left.
Then, springs (4) and (6) will be compressed
and will push spool (3) back. If piston (7)
moves further to the left, ports C and D will
open wide.
As a result, the pressure at port C (= J) will
drop, and servo piston (9) will move to the
left and will stop.
At the time, servo piston (9) is located further
to the left than where it is when pump discharge pressure PP is low.
The positional relations between pump discharge pressure PP and servo piston (9) are
shown by a broken line because springs (4)
and (6) are 2-stage ones. And the relations
between discharge pressure PP and pump
delivery Q are as shown in the right figure.
Also, when the command current X to the

PC-EPC valve solenoid increases, the relations between the pump discharge pressure
PP and the pump delivery Q will move in parallel in relation to the pushing force of the
PC-EPC valve solenoid. Therefore, the force
of the PC-EPC valve solenoid (1) will be
added to the leftward pressing force of the
discharge pressure PP to the spool (3), and
the relations between PP and Q will move
from
to
as X increases.
10-32
(3)
HYDRAULIC PUMP
PC130-7
3) When the pump controller is out of order

and the PC redundant switch is set to ON
1) In case of light load to main pump
When the pump controller is out of order,
set the PC redundant switch to ON to
change the circuit to the resistor side. In
this case, since the current is too large
when power is directly taken from the
battery, the resistor is connected to control the current to the PC-EPC valve solenoid.
At the time, the current becomes constant and piston (2) pressing force
becomes constant as well.
PC130-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP
When the pump discharge pressure is

low, the combined force of the force of
PC-EPC valve solenoid (1) and discharge pressure PP is smaller than the
spring set force. So, spool (3) balances
at a position in the left side.
At the time, C port has the same pressure as the drain pressure at D port, and
the drain pressure PT is led to the large
diameter side of servo piston (9) through
the LS valve.
Then, servo piston (9)
moves in the diction where delivery
increases because the pressure on the
small diameter side of the piston is large.
10-33
(3)
HYDRAULIC PUMP
2) In case of heavy load to main pump

When the PC redundant switch is set to
ON just like in the previous paragraph, a
constant command current is sent to PCEPC valve solenoid (1). So, piston (2)
pushes spool (3) with a constant force.
When pump discharge pressure PP
rises, the spool will moves further to the
left side than when the main pump is
lightly loaded and will balance at the
position shown in the above figure.
In this case, since the pressure from A
port is led to C port, servo piston (9) will
move to the left side (small delivery) and
will stop at a position further to the left
than when the pump is lightly loaded.
10-34
(3)
PC130-7
PC130-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP
This means that the current, which is

sent to the PC-EPC valve solenoid
through the resistor when the PC redundant switch is set to On, determines the
curve between pump discharge pressure
PP and delivery Q as shown in the figure.
When the PC redundant switch is set to
ON, curve
is further to the left than
curve
drawn when the pump controller is normal.
10-35
(3)
CONTROL VALVE
CONTROL VALVE
OUTLINE
The following are 3 types of control valves.
6-spool valve (without service valve)
7-spool valve (with service valve)
8-spool valve (with 2 service valve)
a Each service valve is a single add-on type, so it
is possible to add or remove the extra valve at
any time.
External apperance and cross sections shown are
for the 7 spool valve only.
AA
: Pressure sensor port

(pressure sensor is intalled)
A1 : To swing motor MB
A2 : To L.H. travel motor A
A3 : To R.H. travel motor A
A4 : To boom cylinder bottom
A5 : To arm cylinder head
A6 : To bucket cylinder head
A7 : To attachment 1
B1 : To swing motor MA
B2 : To L.H. travel motor B
B3 : To R.H. travel motor B
B4 : To boom cylinder head
B5 : To arm cylinder bottom
B6 : To bucket cylinder bottom
B7 : To attachment 1
BP : From boom RAISE PPC/EPC valve
LS : To pump LS valve
PA1 : From swing L.H. PPC/EPC valve
PA2 : From L.H. travel forward PPC valve
PA3 : From R.H. travel reverse PPC valve
PA4 : From boom RAISE PPC/EPC valve
PA5 : From arm OUT PPC/EPC valve
PA6 : From bucket DUMP PPC/EPC valve
PA7 : From service 1 PPC valve
PB1 : From swing R.H. PPC/EPC valve
PB2 : From L.H. travel reverse PPC valve
PB3 : From R.H. travel forward PPC valve
PB4 : From boom LOWER PPC/EPC valve
PB5 : From arm IN PPC/EPC valve
PB6 : From bucket CURL PPC/EPC valve
PB7 : From service 1 PPC valve
P
: From main pump
PP : To main pump
PX : From 2-stage relief solenoid valve
SA : From swing stroke control solenoid valve
SB : From swing stroke control solenoid valve
TS1 : To tank
TS2 : To tank
TB : To tank
TC : To oil cooler
TSW : To swing motor
10-36
(3)
1. Swing bleed valve

2. Travel junction valve
3. Arm rcheck valve
4. Cover
5. Service valve
6. Bucket valve
7. Arm valve
8. Boom valve
9. R.H. travel valve
10. L.H. travel valve
11. Swing valve
12. PT port block
13. Boom lock valve
PC130-7
CONTROL VALVE
7 spool valve
(6 spool valve + service valve)
PC130-7
10-37
(3)
CONTROL VALVE
CROSS-SECTIONAL DRAWING
a Cross-sectional drawing shows 7-spool valve (6-spool + service valve).
(1/8)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Safety-suction valve
Suction valve (L.H. travel A)
Suction valve (R.H. travel A)
Suction valve (Boom bottom)
Suction valve (Arm head)
Suction valve (Bucket head)
Safety-suction valve mount (service A)
10-38
(3)
8 Safety-suction valve mount (service B)

9. Suction valve (Bucket bottom)
10. Suction valve (Arm bottom)
11. Suction valve (Boom head)
12. Suction valve (R.H. travel B)
13. Suction valve (L.H. travel B)
14. Lift check valve
PC130-7
CONTROL VALVE
(2/8)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Main relief valve

Spool (swing)
Spool (L.H. travel)
Spool (R.H. ravel)
Spool (boom)
Spool (arm)
Spool (bucket)
Spool (service)
PC130-7
10-39
CONTROL VALVE
(3/8)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Pressure compensation valve F (swing)

Pressure compensation valve F (L.H. travel)
Pressure compensation valve F (R.H. travel)
Pressure compensation valve F (boom)
Pressure compensation valve F (arm)
Pressure compensation valve F (bucket)
Pressure compensation valve F (service)
Unload valve
10-40
(3)
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Pressure compensation valve R (service)

Pressure compensation valve R (bucket)
Pressure compensation valve R (arm)
Pressure compensation valve R (boom)
Pressure compensation valve R (R.H. travel)
Pressure compensation valve R (L.H. travel)
Pressure compensation valve R (swing)
a The above F and R means the following valves :

F : Flow control valve
R : Pressure reducing valve
PC130-7
CONTROL VALVE
(4/8)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
LS pressure detection plug

LS bypass plug
Pump pressure detection plug
Check valve (bucket head)
Check valve (arm head)
LS selection valve
PC130-7
10-41
(3)
CONTROL VALVE
(5/8)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Main relief valve

Cooler bypass valve
Lift check valve
LS selection valve
Spool (swing)
Pressure compensation valve R
10-42
(3)
7. Swing bleed valve

8. Pressure compensation valve F
PC130-7
CONTROL VALVE
(6/8)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Suction valve (A)

Suction valve (B)
Spool (L.H. travel)
Travel junction valve
Pressure compensation valve F
Suction valve (A)
PC130-7
8.
9.
10.
11.
Suction valve (B)

Spool (R.H. travel)

10-43
CONTROL VALVE
(7/8)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Suction valve (A)

Boom lock valve
Suction valve (B)
Spool
Suction valve (A)
Suction valve (B)
10-44
(3)
9.
10.
11.
12.
Spool
Arm regemeration valve

PC130-7
CONTROL VALVE
(8/8)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Suction valve (A)

Suction valve (B)
Spool
Safty-suction valve mount (A)
Safty-suction valve mount (B)
Spool
PC130-7
9.
10.
11.
12.

Pressure relief plug
Unload valve

10-45
(3)
SUCTION SAFETY VALVE

(SAFETY VALVE WITH SUCTION FOR SERVICE PORT)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Suction valve
Main valve
Piston
Piston spring
Poppet
Poppet spring
Suction valve
Sleeve
Adjustment screw
Lock nut
SPECIFICATION
Part No. (Reference)
Set pressure
Use
709-70-74600
24.5 MPa {250 kg/cm2}

(at the time of 5l/min.)
For crusher
709-70-74700
17.2 MPa {175 kg/cm2}

(at the time of 5l/min.)
10-46
PC130-7
CLSS
CLSS
OUTLINE OF CLSS
Features
CLSS stands for Closed Center Load Sensing System and is featured as follows :
Fine controllability without affect of load
Controllability that allows digging even in the fine
control mode.
Ease of compound operation in which the flow
distribution performance depends on spool
opening area during compound operation.
Saving of energy by variable pump control
PC130-7
Configuration
The CLSS consists of a variable displacement
piston pump, a control valve and actuators.
The pump body consists of a main pump, a PC
valve and an LS valve.
10-47
CLSS
Basic principle
1. Control of pump swash plate angle
The pump swash plate angle (pump delivery) is
controlled so that the LS differential pressure
PLS, which is the difference between the pump
discharge pressure PP and the LS pressure PLS
(actuator load pressure) at the control valve outlet, becomes constant.
(LS differential pressure PLS = Pump pressure
PP - LS pressure PLS)
When the LS differential pressure PLS reduces

below the set pressure of the LS valve (when the
actuator load pressure is high), the pump swash
plate angle will move in the direction of maximum. When the set pressure is raised (when the
actuator load pressure is low), the pump swash
plate angle will move in the direction of minimum.
a For the detail of the operation, see the paragraph
of "Hydraulic Pump."
10-48
PC130-7
CLSS
2. Pressure compensation control

A valve (pressure compensation valve) is
mounted on the outlet side of the control valve.
In case of compound operation of the actuator
with this valve, the differential pressure
P
between the spool upstream (inlet) and the
downstream (outlet) of each valve becomes constant irrespective of load (pressure). So, the flow
from the pump is distributed (compensated) in
proportion to the opening areas S1 and S2 of
each valve being operated.
PC130-7
10-49
CLSS
EACH FUNCTION AND OPERATION OF EACH VALVE

Hydraulic circuit diagram and valve names
10-50
(3)
PC130-7
CLSS
1. Unload valve
Set pressure : 3.38 MPa {34.5 kg/cm2}
2. Safety-suction valve
Set pressure : 35.8 MPa {365 kg/cm2}
3. Pressure compensation valve
4. Suction valve
5. Main relief valve
Set pressure : normal: 31.9 MPa {325 kg/cm2}
High pressure : 34.8 MPa {355 kg/cm2}
6. Lift check valve
7. Cooler bypass valve
8. LS selection valve
9. Swing bleeding valve
10. Travel junction valve
11. Arm regeneration valve
12. Boom lock valve
PC130-7
10-51
(3)
CLSS
UNLOAD VALVE
1. When the control valve is neutral
FUNCTION
When the control valve is neutral, the delivery Q
equivalent to the pump minimum swash plate
angle is released to the tank circuit. At the time,
pump discharge pressure PP is set to 2.45 MPa
{25.0kg/cm2} with spring (3) inside the vale. (The
LS pressure PLS is 0 MPa {0kg/cm2}.)
OPERATION
Pump discharge pressure PP is applied to the
left end face of spool (4) and LS pressure PLS is
applied to the right end face.
Since the LS pressure PLS is 0 when the control
valve is neutral, pump discharge pressure PP is
only applied and is set with the lead to spring (3).
When pump discharge pressure PP rises to
spring (3) load (2.45 MPa {25.0 kg/cm2}), spool
(4) will move toward the right side and pump circuit PP will interconnect to tank circuit T through
the drill hole.
Therefore, pump discharge pressure PP is set to
2.45 MPa {25.0 kg/cm2}.
10-52
(3)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Unload valve
Sleeve
Spring
Spool
PLS : LS circuit (pressure)

PP : Pump circuit (pressure)
T
: Tank circuit
PC130-7
CLSS
When the differential pressure between discharge pressure PP and LS pressure PLS
comes to spring (3) load (2.45 MPa {25.0 kg/
cm2}), the unload valve will open and LS differential pressure PLS will come to 2.45 MPa
{25.0 kg/cm2}.
2. When the control valve is in the fine control

mode
FUNCTION
When the control valve is in the fine control
mode and the requested flow of the actuator is
less than the pump minimum swash plate angle,
pump discharge pressure PP is set to LS pressure PLS + 2.45 MPa {25.0 kg/cm2}.
OPERATION
When the control valve is operated in the fine
control mode, LS pressure PLS will occur and
will be applied to the right end face of spool (4).
At the time differential pressure between LS
pressure PLS and pump discharge pressure PP
increases because the opening area of the control valve spool is small.
When the differential pressure between pump
discharge pressure PP and LS pressure PLS
comes to spring (3) load (2.45 MPa {25.0 kg/
cm2}), spool (4) will move to the right side and
pump circuit PP will interconnect to tank circuit T.
This means that pump discharge pressure PP is
set to the spring force (2.45 MPa {25.0 kg/cm2} +
LS pressure PLS, and LS differential pressure
PLS comes to 2.45 MPa {25.0 kg/cm2}.
PC130-7
1.
2.
3.
4.
Unload valve
Sleeve
Spring
Spool

T
: Tank circuit
10-53
(3)
CLSS
3. When the control valve is operated

FUNCTION
If the required flow of the actuator increases over
the pump minimum swash plate angle when the
control valve is operated, the flow to tank circuit
T will be interrupted and pump delivery Q will be
completely flown to the actuator circuit.
OPERATION
When the control valve is operated with large
stroke, LS pressure PLS will occur and will be
applied to the right end face of spool (4). At the
time, the opening areas of the control valve
spool is large and the difference between LS
pressure PLS and pump discharge pressure PP
is small.
So, the differential pressure between pump discharge pressure PP and LS pressure PLS does
not reach spring (3) load (2.45 MPa {25.0 kg/
cm2}) and spring (3) pushes spool (4) to the left
side.
Then, pump circuit PP and tank circuit T are
interrupted, and pump delivery Q is completely
flown to the actuator circuit.
10-54
(3)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Unload valve
Sleeve
Spring
Spool

T
: Tank circuit
PC130-7
CLSS
LEADING OF LS PRESSURE
FUNCTION
The LS pressure is load pressure to the actuator
on the outlet side of the control valve.
In case of a work equipment valve, pressure
reducing valve (3) of the pressure compensation
valve reduces pump discharge pressure PP to
the same level as actuator circuit pressure A and
leads the pressure to LS circuit PLS.
Also, orifice C is mounted on piston (5) halfway

from pump circuit PP to pressure reducing valve
(3), and the orifice has the damper function.
The travel valves leads actuator circuit pressure
A directly to LS circuit PLS.
1. Work equipment valve (boom, arm, bucket, swing)
OPERATION
When spool (1) is operated, pump discharge
pressure PP will be led to actuator circuit A
through bridge passage b from flow control valve
(2) and spool notch a.
Since pressure reducing valve (3) moves to the
right at the same time, pump discharge pressure
PP led from orifice c is reduced due to pressure
loss at notch d and is led to LS circuit PLS and to
spring chamber PLS1.
At the time, LS circuit PLS is connected to tank
circuit T from LS bypass plug (4).
PC130-7
Both end face areas of pressure reducing valve

(3) are the same (SA = SLS), and actuator circuit
pressure PA (= A) is applied to the SA side and
reduced pump discharge pressure PP is applied
to the SLS side on the opposite side.
Therefore, pressure reducing valve (3) balances
at the position where actuator circuit pressure
PA becomes equal to the pressure of spring
chamber PLS1. The pump discharge pressure
PP reduced at notch d comes to actuator circuit
pressure A and is led to the LS circuit PLS.
10-55
(3)
CLSS
2. Travel valve
OPERATION
When spool (1) is operated, the pump discharge
pressure PP will be led to actuator circuit A
through bridge passage b from flow control valve
(2) and spool notch a.
At the same time, the actuator circuit pressure
PA moves pressure reducing valve (3) to the
right side, and notches c and d interconnect to
the travel junction circuit e and LS circuit PLS
respectively.
So, actuator circuit pressure PA (= A) is led from
notch c to LS circuit PLS through notch d.
a The travel circuit is different from the work equipment circuit, actuator circuit pressure PA is
directly led to the LS circuit PLS.
10-56
(3)
PC130-7
CLSS
LS BYPASS PLUG
FUNCTION
This plug released residual pressure of the LS
pressure PLS.
This plug slows the rising speed of the LS pressure PLS, causes pressure losses at the spool
and the throttle of the shuttle valve by the discarded throttled flow and reduces the effective
LS differential pressure for higher safety.
OPERATION
Pressurized oil in the LS circuit PLS flows from
clearance filter a in the space between LS
bypass plug (1) and the valve body to tank circuit
T through orifice b.
PC130-7
1. LS bypass plug
T
: Tank circuit (pressure)
10-57
(3)
CLSS
PRESSURE COMPENSATION VALVE

FUNCTION
When the load pressure becomes lower than
another actuator and the flow is going to
increase during a compound operation, this
valve compensates the load pressure. (At the
time, the load pressure of another actuator under
compound operation (the upper side) is higher
than that of the actuator on this side (the lower
side).
10-58
PC130-7
CLSS
OPERATION
When the load pressure of another actuator side
(the upper side) rises during a compound operation, the flow in actuator circuit A on this side (the
lower side) is apt to increase.
In this case, LS pressure PLS of another actuator is applied to spring chamber PLS1 and
pushes pressure reducing valve (1) and flow
control valve (2) to the left side.
Flow control valve (2) throttles the opening area
between pump circuit PP and spool upstream
PPA and causes a pressure loss between PP
and PPA.
Flow control valve (2) and pressure reducing
valve (1) balance each other where the pressure
difference between PA applied to both end faces
of pressure reducing valve (1) and PLS becomes
the same as the pressure loss between PP
before and after the flow control valve and PPA.
So, the pressure differences between upstream
pressures PPA and downstream pressures PA of
both spools under compound operation become
the same, and the pump flow is distributed in
proportion to the opening area of each spool
notch a.
PC130-7
10-59
(3)
CLSS
AREA RATIO OF PRESSURE COMPENSATION VALVE

FUNCTION
The pressure compensation valve slightly adjust the ratio (S2/S1) of area S1 on the left side of flow control
valve (2) and area S2 on the right side of pressure reducing valve (1) to suite the characteristics of each
actuator and determines the compensation characteristics.
S1 : Area of flow control valve (2) - area of piston (3)
S2 : Area of pressure reducing valve (1) - area of piston (3)
Area ratio (S1:S2) and compensation characteristics

When the ratio is 1.00 : The expression [Pump (discharge) pressure PP - Spool notch upstream pressure
PPB]
[LS circuit pressure PLS - Actuator circuit pressure PA (= A)] can be held,
and the flow is distributed as per the spool opening area ratio.
When the ratio is more than 1.00 : The expression PP - PPB > PLS - PA (= A) can be held, and the flow is
distributed less than the spool opening area ratio.
When the ratio is less than 1.00 : The expression PP - PPB < PLS - PA (= A) can be held, and the flow is
distributed more than the spool opening area ratio.
10-60
(3)
PC130-7
BOOM HOLDING VALVE

FUNCTION
When the boom lever is not being operated, the oil at the boom bottom leaks from spool (1) and prevents
hydraulic drift of the boom.
OPERATION
1) At boom RAISE
When the control lever is operated to boom
RAISE, the main pressure from the control
valve pushes poppet (5) up.
As a result, the main pressure oil from the
control valve passes through the inside of
the valve and flows to the boom cylinder bottom.
PC130-7
10-60-1
(3)
CLSS
2) At boom HOLD
When the control lever has been operated
to boom RAISE and is then returned to the
HOLD position, the holding pressure at the
boom cylinder bottom end is closed by poppet (5). At the same time, the oil flowing
inside poppet (5) from orifice a in poppet (5)
is closed by pilot spool (3).
In this way, the boom is held in position.
10-60-2
(3)
PC130-7
CLSS
3) At boom LOWER
When the control lever is operated to boom
LOWER, pilot pressure P1 from the PPC
valve pushes pilot spool (3) and the pressure
oil in chamber b inside the poppet is drained.
The oil pressure at port Ab increases
because of the pressure oil from the boom
cylinder bottom, but the oil pressure in chamber b is lowered by orifice a.
If the pressure in chamber b becomes lower
than the pressure at port Aa, poppet (5)
opens and the pressure oil from port Ab
flows to port Aa and goes to the control
valve.
PC130-7
10-60-3
(3)
CLSS
BOOM REGENERATION CIRCUIT

FUNCTION
1) When the boom is being lowered, if bottom pressure A of cylinder (1) is higher than head pressure B,
and the boom is lowered under its own weight, this sends the return oil flow at the bottom end to the
head end to increase the cylinder speed by that amount.
OPERATION
If the boom is lowered under its own weight,
pressure A at the bottom end of boom cylinder
(1) becomes higher than pressure B at the head
end.
When this happens, part of the return oil at the
bottom end passes through regeneration passage a of boom spool (1), pushes check valve
(3) open, and flows to the head end.
As a result, the boom lowering speed is
increased.
10-60-4
(3)
PC130-7
CLSS
2) When lowering the boom, if head pressure B of cylinder (1) is greater than bottom pressure A, and the
work equipment is in the load process, check valve (3) closes and shuts off the circuit between the head
and bottom ends.
OPERATION
When the boom is lowered, if the work equipment is in the load process, pressure B at the
head end of cylinder (1) becomes higher than
pressure A at the bottom end.
When this happens, check valve (3) is closed by
spring (4) and pressure B at the head end, so
the circuit between the head circuit and bottom
circuit is shut off.
PC130-7
10-60-5
(3)
CLSS
ARM REGENERATION CIRCUIT

1. At arm in and own weight fall
FUNCTION
When the arm falls due to its own weight
because head pressure A in arm cylinder (1) is
higher than bottom pressure B during arm digging, this circuit brings the return flow on the
head side to the bottom side to increase the cylinder speed.
OPERATION
When the arm falls for digging due to its own
weight, the head side pressure A in arm cylinder
(1) will rise above bottom side pressure B.
At the time, part of the return flow on the head
side passes through regeneration passage a of
arm spool (2), pushes check valve (3) to open it
and flows to the bottom side.
This increases the arm digging speed.
PC130-7
1. Arm cylinder
2. Arm spool
3. Check valve
A : Head circuit (pressure)
B : Bottom circuit (pressure)
10-61
(3)
CLSS
2. At arm in process
FUNCTION
When bottom pressure B of cylinder (1) rises
above head pressure A and the arm enters the
digging process, check valve (3) will be closed
and the circuits on the head side and the bottom
side will be interrupted.
OPERATION
When the arm is in the digging process, the bottom side pressure B of arm cylinder (1) will rise,
close check valve (3) and interrupt the circuits on
the head side and the bottom side.
10-62
(3)
1. Arm cylinder
2. Arm spool
3. Check valve
A : Head circuit (pressure)
B : Bottom circuit (pressure)
PC130-7
CLSS
TRAVEL JUNCTION VALVE

(L.H. and R.H. travel junction circuit)
1. When traveling straight
10-64
PC130-7
CLSS
FUNCTION
When the L.H. and R.H. travel spool is operated
to compensate flow errors in the L.H. and R.H.
travel circuits during straight travel, the junction
circuit will open.
Then, the flows to the L.H. and R.H. travel
motors will become the same during the straight
travel, and travel deviation will decrease.
At the time of steering, load pressure difference
brings back the pressure reducing valve of the
travel valve inside the steering and closes the
spool notch opening of the travel junction valve
to close the junction circuit for steering.
OPERATION
When the L.H. and R.H. travel spool (1) is operated, the pump delivery will flow from the pump
circuit PP to A through the actuator circuit PA.
When traveling straight, the actuator circuit PA
will be equalized and the L.H. and R.H. pressure
reducing valves (2) will be pressed the same
stroke to the right. Then, the notch a and the
junction circuit will open.
The L.H. travel forward oil pressure P1 and the
R.H. travel forward oil pressure P2 are led to the
spring chamber on the both end of the travel
junction valve spool (4) through the respective
shuttle valves (5). So, P1 = P2, and the spool is
at the neutral position, and the notch d is open.
Then, the L.H. and R.H. travel actuator circuits
are interconnected with the junction circuit.
When any difference occurs in the flows to the
L.H and R.H. travel motors, this valve will compensate them and will reduce occurrence of
travel deviations.
PC130-7
10-65
(3)
CLSS
2. When operating travel steering
10-66
PC130-7
CLSS
OPERATION
When the L.H. travel spool (L.H. 1) is returned to
the neutral side from the straight traveling state
and the steering is operated, there will occur any
difference in the load pressures in the L.H. and
R.H. travel actuator circuits PA (R.H. A > L.H. A).
The LS pressure PLS will become the same as
the R.H. A on the higher load pressure side.
Therefore, the flow control valve on the L.H.
travel side is pressed to the left side with the LS
pressure PLS, i.e., the load pressure on the R.H.
travel side, and the notch a closes to interrupt
the L.H. and R.H. travel circuits. Also, since the
pressures in the spring chambers on the both
ends of the travel junction valve spool (4)
become different and P1 becomes higher than
P2, the spool (4) moves to the P1 side and the
notch d closes. Then, the steering can be operated.
The damper is provided to relax the transition
characteristics of the junction circuit at the time
of abrupt operation.
PC130-7
10-67
CLSS
TRAVEL LS BYPASS CIRCUIT

1. At normal operation
10-68
PC130-7
CLSS
FUNCTION
When an actuator is operated during travel, this
circuit will increase the discarded throttled flow of
the LS circuit PLS, loosen the pressure compensation accuracy of the travel circuit and limits
reduction of the travel speed to small extent.
The bypass circuit is closed in case of independent travel or independent operation of an actuator.
OPERATION
When boom spool (1) is operated, the LS circuit
PLS will come to the same pressure as the boom
circuit pressure A1.
At the same time, the LS circuit pressure PLS is
led to the spring chamber PLS1 of pressure
reducing valve (2) of the travel valve.
Since the travel spool is not operated, the travel
actuator circuit PA is closed and check valve (4)
inside flow control valve (3) is also closed.
Therefore, the travel LS bypass circuit is closed
in case of independent operation of the boom.
PC130-7
10-69
(3)
CLSS
2. At operation of travel + other actuator
10-70
PC130-7
CLSS
OPERATION
When boom spool (1) is operated, the LS circuit
PLS will come to the same pressure as the boom
circuit pressure A1.
Since the actuator circuit pressure is generally
higher at boom RAISE than during travel (A1 >
A2), the pressure in spring chamber PLS1 of
flow control valve (3) on the travel side is higher
than the travel circuit pressure PA.
So, the pressure reducing valve (2) moves to the
left side, and the LS pressure of spring chamber
PLS1 pushes check valve (4) from orifice a to
open it and flows to the travel circuit PA through
passages b and c.
Therefore, when LS circuit pressure PLS, which
has been as high as boom circuit pressure A1,
flows to travel circuit A2, the pressure will drop.
PC130-7
10-71
(3)
CLSS
3. At simultaneous operation of boom + swing

FUNCTION
When the boom is raised at the time of swinging,
the swing pool stroke will be controlled and the
flow to the boom will be distributed more to raise
the boom more.
1) When the boom is not raised
OPERATION
Since the SA and SB ports are interconnected to
the drain and no force is given to piston (2), the
stroke of spool (1) is not controlled. So, spool
(1) comes to cases (4) and (5) and the stroke
increases by ST1. This increases the filtering oil
flow.
10-72
(3)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Spool (swing)
Piston
Plug
Case
Case
ST1 : Spool stroke
PC130-7
CLSS
2) At simultaneous operation of boom RAISE
OPERATION
When the boom RAISE PPC pressure is led to
piston (2) as the stroke control pilot pressure PS
through SA and SB ports, piston (2) will be
pressed in the inner direction.
At the time, the maximum stroke of spool (1) will
shorten (by ST0) due to control of piston (2).
Boom RAISE OFF ST1 > Boom RAISE ON ST0
The spool (1) stroke is controlled and shortens.
If the boom is raised at the time of swing (hoist
swing), notch a opening area will decrease. So,
the flow distribution to the boom will increase
and the boom will rise higher at the time of hoist
swing.
PC130-7
10-73
(3)
CLSS
SWING BLEED VALVE

FUNCTION
For swing operation, a bleed valve is provided to
the pressure reducing valve to raise the LS pressure slowly and to smooth the swing operation.
1. Swing at neutral position
OPERATION
Since notch a of pressure reducing valve (1) and
the LS circuit are closed and the bleed-off circuit
and LS circuit are also closed, the LS pressure
PLS is not affected by operation of other work
equipment.
The pump discharge pressure PP is also interrupted from the bleed-off circuit with piston (2)
and is not affected.
Notch b of bleed spool (3) and the bleed-off circuit are interconnected each other.
10-74
(3)
PC130-7
CLSS
2. At swing fine control
OPERATION
The pressure reducing valve moves in the right
direction, and notch a and the LS circuit interconnect each other. Also, pump circuit PP, bleed-off
circuit and LS circuit interconnect each other
through piston (2).
Bleed spool (3) moves in the left direction in proportion to raise of the swing PPC pressure PA.
But notch b throttles and interconnect to the
bleed-off circuit in the fine control region and
determines the intermediate pressure before
pump discharge pressure PP is reduced and
applied to LS pressure PLS.
Therefore, the intermediate pressure is set lower
than the pump discharge pressure PP and rises
as bleed spool (3) moves . So, the LS pressure
PLS rises slowly.
PC130-7
10-75
(3)
CLSS
3. At full swing operation
OPERATION
When the swing PPC pressure PA comes to the
maximum, notch b of bleed spool (3) interrupt
the bleed-off circuit. The intermediate pressure
becomes equal to the pump discharge pressure
PP, and the LS pressure PLS becomes equal to
the actuator circuit pressure.
10-76
(3)
PC130-7
CLSS
LS SELECT VALVE
FUNCTION
At the time of simultaneous operation of swing +
boom RAISE, this valve prevents high swing LS
pressure from entering the LS circuit PLS and
also prevents the boom RAISE speed from
reducing by securing the pump flow at the time of
swing drive.
1. During normal operation
OPERATION
The pilot pressure is not generally applied to pilot
port BP except for boom RAISE operation.
In this state, the pump discharge pressure PP
pushes valve (1) to open it and is led to pressure
reducing valve (4) of the swing valve. At the
time of swing operation, there occurs the LS
pressure PLS suitable for the load pressure, and
the pressure is led to the pump LS valve.
PC130-7
10-77
(3)
CLSS
2. At simultaneous operation of swing + boom RAISE
OPERATION
At the simultaneous operation of swing + boom
RAISE, the signal pressure of the PPC circuit is
led to pilot port BP.
When this pilot pressure BP is applied to piston
(2) and reaches a pressure that is stronger than
spring (3), piston (2) will be pushed to the left
side, valve (1) will close and the pump discharge
pressure PP will not come to flow to pressure
reducing valve (4) of the swing valve.
Then, the swing pressure does not cause LS
pressure PLS, but the LS pressure PLS cause
the boom RAISE pressure is led to the pump LS
valve, and the pump delivery is controlled with
the boom RAISE LS pressure.
The pilot pressure BP depends on the control
lever stroke.
10-78
(3)
PC130-7
SELF PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE
P1 : From pump
PR : Supply to solenoid valve, PPC valve and EPC valve.
T : To hydraulic tank
PC130-7
10-79
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Control valve block

Valve (sequence valve)
Spring
Screw
Poppet
Spring (pressure reducing valve pilot)
10-80
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Spring (pressure reducing valve main)

Valve (pressure reducing valve)
Spring (safety valve)
Ball
Filter
PC130-7
FUNCTION
The self pressure reducing valves reduces the
discharge pressure of the main pump and supplies it to the solenoid valve, the PPC valve, etc.
as the control pressure.
PC130-7
10-81
1. At engine stop (total low pressure)
OPERATION
Spring (6) pushes poppet (5) to the seat, and the
circuit between ports PR and T is closed.
Spring (7) pushes valve (8) to the left side, and
the circuit between ports P1 and PR is open.
Spring (3) pushes valve (2) to the left side, and
the circuit between ports P1 and P2 is closed.
10-82
(3)
PC130-7
2. At neutral and reduction of load pressure P2

(at own weight fall in boom LOWER and arm
IN)
Note : When load pressure P2 is lower than output
pressure PR of the self pressure reducing
valve.
OPERATION
Spring (3) and the PR pressure (0 MPa {0 kg/
cm2} at the time of engine stop) pushes valve (2)
in direction to close the circuit between ports P1
and P2. When the hydraulic oil enters P1 port,
the expression (P1 pressure
Spring (7) force +
( d area x PR pressure)) holds, and the self
pressure reducing valve will adjust the openings
of ports P1 and P2 so that the P1 pressure can
be maintained higher than the PR pressure.
When the PR pressure rises above the set pressure, poppet (5) will open and the hydraulic oil
flows through the route from PR port, hole a in
spool (8), poppet (5) opening to tank port T.
PC130-7
Therefore, there will occur a differential pressure

around hold a in spool (8) and the spool will
move in the direction to close port P1 and the PR
opening. Then, the P1 pressure is reduced and
adjusted to a certain pressure (set pressure) with
the opening and is supplied as the PR pressure.
10-83
(3)
3. At raise of load pressure P2
OPERATION
When the load pressure P2 rises due to digging
or other operations, the pump delivery will
increase and P1 pressure will rise.
Then, the expression (P1 pressure > Spring (7)
force + ( d area x PR pressure)) will hold, and
valve (2) will move to the right side till the stroke
end. As a result, the opening between ports P1
and P2 will increase, the passage resistance will
become smaller to reduce engine loss horsepower.
When the PR pressure rises above the set pressure, poppet (5) will open and hydraulic oil will
flow through the route from the PR port, hole a in
spool (8), poppet (5) opening to tank port T.
10-84
(3)
Therefore, there will occur a differential pressure

around hold a in spool (8) and the spool will
move in the direction to close port P1 and PR
opening. Then, the P1 pressure is reduced and
adjusted to a certain pressure (set pressure) with
the opening and is supplied as the PR pressure.
PC130-7
4. At occurrence of abnormal high pressure
OPERATION
When PR pressure of the self pressure reducing
valve rises abnormally high, ball (10) will separate from the seat against spring (9) force to flow
hydraulic oil to the output ports PR o T so as to
reduce the PR pressure. Then, the equipment
(PPC valve, solenoid valve, etc.), to which the oil
pressure is supplied, is protected from the abnormal high pressure.
PC130-7
10-85
(3)
CENTER SWIVEL JOINT
CENTER SWIVEL JOINT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Cover
Body
Slipper seal
O-ring
Shaft
10-86
A1 :
A2 :
B1 :
B2 :
C1 :
C2 :
D1 :
D2 :
E1 :
E2 :
DR1 :
DR2 :
From control valve (R.H. travel Forward)

To R.H. travel motor B
From control valve (L.H. travel Forward)
To L.H. travel motor A
From control valve (R.H. travel Reverse)
To R.H. travel motor A
From control valve (L.H. travel Reverse)
To L.H. travel motor B
2-stage travel selection solenoid valve
To L.H./R.H. travel motor D
To hydraulic tank
From L.H. travel motor C1 and R.H. travel
motor C2
PC130-7
TRAVEL MOTOR
TRAVEL MOTOR (FINAL DRIVE)
A : From control valve (L.H./R.H. travel)

B : From control valve (L.H./R.H. travel)
C1 : To hydraulic tank (L.H. travel motor)
Plug (R.H. travel motor)
C2 : Plug (L.H. travel motor)
To hydraulic tank (R.H. travel motor)
D : From travel 2nd speed selector solenoid valve
PC130-7
10-87
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Plug
Check valve spring
Check valve
Return spring
Counterbalance valve
Safety valve
Safety valve spring
End cover
Regulator valve
Spring
Brake piston
Cylinder
Spring
Swash plate
Pivot
Crankshaft
RV gear A
10-88
TRAVEL MOTOR
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
RV gear B
Cover
Driven gear
Drive gear
Drain plug
Hub
Regulator piston
Spindle
Piston
Floating seal
Plate
Disc
Valve plate
Spring
Piston
Plug
Check valve
PC130-7
TRAVEL MOTOR
SPECIFICATION
Type
Theoretical delivery
(cm3/rev{cc/rev})
Rated speed (rpm)
GM18VL3
Hi
33.2 {33.2}
Lo
52.7 {52.7}
Hi
3,562
Lo
2,291
Brake releasing pressure

(MPa{kg/cm2})
0.68
{6.94}
Hi-Lo switching pressure

(MPa{kg/cm2})
2.94
{30}
Final drive reduction ratio
66
OUTLINE
Travel speed selection
Swash plate (14) has 2 faces (x, y) behind it, and

is supported by pivot (15).
When pressure of comtrol chamber a rises, it
pushes regulator piston (24), then swash plate
angle becomes minimum, then travel speed
goes high.
PC130-7
10-89
(3)
TRAVEL MOTOR
OPERATION
Operation of motor
At slow speed (the motor swash plate angle is maximized.)
Since the travel 2nd speed selector solenoid

valve is demagnetized, pressurized oil from the
main pump does not flow to the D port.
Therefore, spring (10) has pressed regulator
valve (9) to the left side.
So, regulator valve (9) stops the main pressurized oil led from the control valve to the end
cover by pushing check valve (34).
The pressurized oil in the control chamber drains
in the motor case through passage b of regulator
valve (9).
Then, the main pressurized oil from cylinder c
chamber pushes swash plate (14) in the direction to maximize the swash plate angle and the
motor capacity is increased to the maximum for
slow speed travel.
10-90
(3)
PC130-7
TRAVEL MOTOR
At high speed (the motor swash plate angle is minimized.)
When the travel 2nd speed selector solenoid

valve is energized, pilot pressure from the main
pump will flow in D port and push regulator valve
(9) in the right direction.
Therefore, the main pressurized oil from the control valve passes through passage b of regulator
valve (9), flows in control chamber a and pushed
regulator piston (24) in the left direction.
Then, swash plate (14) is pressed in the direction to minimize the swash plate angle, and the
motor capacity is minimized for high speed
travel.
PC130-7
10-91
(3)
TRAVEL MOTOR
Operation of brake valve

The brake valve consists of check valves (3a)
and (3b), counterbalance valve (5) and safety
valve (6), and the circuit configuration is as per
the right figure.
Functions and operations of these components
are as follows :
Counterbalance valve, check valve

Function
When traveling down a slope, the own weight
falling force will make the machine travel faster
than the motor rotation. So, traveling with
reduced engine speed is very dangerous
because the motor idles and runs away.
These valves let the machine travel at a speed
appropriate for the engine speed (pump delivery)
to prevent this danger.
Operation at oil supply
When the travel lever is operated, pressurized oil
from the control valve will be supplied to the PA
port, push and open check valve (3a) and flow
from MA port on the motor inlet side to MB port
on the motor outlet side.
Since the motor outlet circuit is closed with check
valve (3b) and counterbalance valve (5), however, the supply-side pressure will rise.
10-92
(3)
PC130-7
TRAVEL MOTOR
The pressurized oil on the supply side flows in

the S1 chamber from orifice E1 of counterbalance valve (5). When the pressure in S1 chamber rises above the switching pressure of the
counterbalance valve, counterbalance valve (5)
will be pressed in the right direction.
So, the circuit between outlet side MB port and
PB port will open, the motor outlet circuit will
open, and the motor will start rotating.
Brake operation at traveling downhill

If the machine is going to run away when traveling downhill, the motor will idle to reduce oil pressure on the motor inlet side and the pressure in
S1 chamber through orifice E1.
When the pressure in S1 chamber drops below
the switching pressure of the counterbalance
valve, counterbalance valve (5) will be returned
in the left direction with return spring (4), and outlet side MB port will be throttled.
Then, pressure on the outlet side will rise and
rotation resistance will occur to the motor to prevent the machine from running away.
This means that counterbalance valve (5) moves
to a position where the machine own weight and
inlet side pressure balance with the pressure at
outlet side MB port, and the outlet circuit is throttled to control speed to the pump delivery.
PC130-7
10-93
(3)
TRAVEL MOTOR
Safety valve
Function
When stopping a travel (or traveling downhill),
counterbalance valve (5) will close the inlet and
outlet circuits of the motor.
Since the motor
keeps rotating by inertia, however, pressure on
the outlet side of the motor will rise abnormally
and the motor and pipes may be damaged.
Then, safety valve leads the abnormally high
pressure to the inlet side of the motor to prevent
equipment from being damaged.
Operation
When the pressurized oil being supplied from PA
port is stopped flowing at the time of travel stop,
return spring (4) will return counterbalance valve
(5) from the right side to the left side (neutral
position).
Though counterbalance valve (5) closes a chamber on the outlet side circuit, the inertia lets the
motor rotate and the pressure in a chamber
rises.
The highly pressurized oil in a chamber passes
through throttle b of safety valve (6a) and enters
in d chamber from c chamber. The pressurized
oil entered in d chamber moves piston (32) to the
left side. Meantime, safety valve (6a) is pushed
to open by the pressurized oil in a chamber, and
the pressurized oil in a chamber flows in f chamber through e port. Therefore, the pressurized
oil in a chamber flows in f chamber at a comparatively slow speed to control the pressure in a
chamber and also to prevent cavitation in f
chamber at the same time.
When piston (32) reaches the stroke end, the
pressures in d and c chambers will rise, safety
valve (6a) will be closed again and the pressure
in a chamber will rise further.
Then, safety valve (6b) will open and the pressurized oil in the a chamber will flow in f chamber
from g chamber. The pressure in a chamber
can be controlled in two stage as mentioned
above, and the hydraulic motor can be smoothly
braked to stop.
10-94
(3)
PC130-7
TRAVEL MOTOR
Operation of parking brake

When operating travel
When the travel lever is operated, pressurized oil
from the pump will work on counterbalance valve
(5), open circuit a to the parking brake and flow
in b chamber of brake piston (11).
The pressure in b chamber overcomes spring
(31) and pushed brake piston (11) in the left
direction.
This will eliminate the press force to plate (28)
and disc (29), and plate (28) and disc (29) will
separate, and the brake force will be released.
When positioning travel neutral

When the travel lever is brought to the neutral
position, counterbalance valve (5) will return to
the neutral position and circuit a to the parking
brake will be closed.
The pressurized oil in b chamber of brake piston
(11) will be drained in the case, and spring (31)
will push the brake piston in the right direction.
Therefore, plate (28) and disc (19) will be
pushed to each other, and the brake will come to
work.
PC130-7
10-95
(3)
SWING MOTOR
SWING MOTOR
TYPE : KMF40ABE-3
B
S
T
MA
MB
:
:
:
:
:
From swing brake solenoid valve

From control valve
To tank
From control valve
From control valve
10-96
SPECIFICATION
Type : KMF40ABE-3
Theoretical delivery : 40.2 cc/rev
Safety valve set pressure : 27.5 MPa {280 kg/cm2}
Rated speed : 2,413 rpm
Brake releasing pressure :1.77 MPa{18.0 kg/cm2}
PC130-7
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Drive shaft
Spacer
Case
Disc
Plate
Brake ring
Brake piston
Housing
Reverse prevention valve
Center spring
PC130-7
SWING MOTOR
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Cylinder
Valve plate
Piston
Center shaft
Safety valve
Check valve
Check valve spring
Shuttle valve
Shuttle valve spring
Brake spring
10-97
SWING MOTOR
SWING BRAKE
1. When solenoid valve is demagnetized
Operation
When the solenoid valve of the swing brake is
demagnetized, pressurized oil from the control
pump will be interrupted and the B port will be
connected to the tank circuit.
Then, brake piston (7) will be pressed downward
with brake spring (8) and will push disc (4) and
plate (5) to work the brake.
2. When solenoid valve is energized

Operation
When the solenoid valve of the swing brake is
energized, the valve will be changed over and
pressurized oil from the control pump will enter
the B port and will flow in to the brake chamber
A.
Pressurized oil in the A chamber will push brake
spring (8) and brake piston (7) will move upward.
Then, disc (4) and plate (5) will separate to
release the brake.
10-98
(3)
PC130-7
SWING MOTOR
REVERSE PREVENTION VALVE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Valve body
Spool (MA side)
Spring (MA side)
Plug (MA side)
Spool (MB side)
Spring (MB side)
Plug (MB side)
MA : Port
MB : Port
T1 : Port
T2 : Port
PC130-7
10-99
SWING MOTOR
Effect explanation drawing
10-100
PC130-7
SWING MOTOR
FUNCTION
This function is used for reducing swing back
generated on a swing body that can result from
factors such as inertia of the swing body, backlash and rigidity of the machinery system and
compressibility of hydraulic oil.
This function helps preventing loose loads at the
end of swing or cutting lead time (better positioning performance allows you to proceed to the
next operation within a shorter time).
1. When MB port pressure is generated

Operation
MB pressure is conducted to d room via the cutout. Utilizing difference of space (D1>D2), the
pressure compresses spring (6) and drives spool
(5) leftward to interconnect MB o e.
Since MA pressure at this time is lower than the
pressure set on spring (3), spool (2) is not moved
and pressurized oil remains closed. Thus, the
braking force is maintained.
2. When the motor is once stopped

Operation
The motor is reverse rotated by charging pressure generated on the MB port (1st reverse rotation).
At this time, reversing pressure is generated on
the MA port. MA pressure conducted to a room
interconnects MA o b by compressing spring (3)
and driving spool (2) rightward.
The pressure is then conducted through drilled
hole on spool (5) to interconnect b o f. Reversing pressure on the MA port is bypassed to the T
port to disable the 2nd reverse rotation.
PC130-7
10-101
(3)
SOLENOID VALVE
SOLENOID VALVE
FOR PPC LOCK, 2ND TRAVEL SPEED SELECT, SWING HOLD BRAKE AND 2-STAGE
RELIEF SOLENOID VALVE.
1.
2.
3.
4.

2nd travel speed select solenoid valve
Solenoid valve
5. Push pin
6. Coil
7. Gauge
8. Spool
9. Block
10. Spring
A1 : To PPC valve
A2 : To 2-stage relief valve
A3 : To swing hold brake
A4 : To 2nd travel speed select valve
ACC : To accumulator
P1 : From self-pressure reducing valve
T
: To hydraulic oil tank
Check valve
11. Plug
12. Spring
13. Plunger
10-102
PC130-7
SOLENOID VALVE
OPERATION
When solenoid is "demagnetized"
Coil (6) remains demagnetized as long as signal
current to it is stopped..
Thus, spool (8) is pushed leftward by spring (10).
Since ports P to A are closed by this spool, flow
of pilot oil pressure to the actuator is blocked. At
the same time, oil from the actuator is lead from
A port to T port, then drained to the hydraulic oil
tank.
When solenoid is "magnetized"

Coil (6) is magnetized by signal current conducted to it.
Thus, spool (8) is pushed rightward by push pin
(5).
As the result, pilot oil pressure is conducted from
P port through cage (7) and A port up the actuator.
At the same time, T port is closed, thereby blocking flow of oil to the hydraulic oil tank.
PC130-7
10-103
(3)
PPC ACCUMULATOR
PPC ACCUMULATOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Gas plug
Shell
Poppet
Holder
Bladder
Oil port
SPECIFICATIONS
Gas used : Nitrogen gas
Gas capacity : 0.3 l
Charged gas pressure :
1.18 MPa (12 kg/cm2) at 80C
Maximum operating pressure :
6.86 MPa (70 kg/cm2)
10-104
PC130-7
PPC VALVE
PPC VALVE
FOR SWING, WORK EQUIPMENT
P : From main pump

P1 : Left : Arm OUT/Right : Boom LOWER
P2 : Left : Arm IN/Right : Boom RAISE
PC130-7
P3 : Left : Swing RIGHT/Right : Bucket CURL

P4 : Left : Swing LEFT/Right : Bucket DUMP
T : To tank
10-105
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Spool
Metering spring
Centering spring
Piston
Disk
10-106
PPC VALVE
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Nut (for linking the lever)

Joint
Plate
Retainer
Body
PC130-7
PPC VALVE
OPERATION
1) At neutral
Ports A and B of the control valve and ports P1
and P2 of the PPC valve are connected to drain
chamber D through fine control hole f in spool
(1). (Fig. 1)
2) During fine control (neutral o fine control)

When piston (4) starts to be pushed by disc (5),
retainer (9) is pushed; spool (1) is also pushed
by metering spring (2), and moves down.
When this happens, fine control hole f is shut off
from drain chamber D, and at almost the same
time, it is connected to pump pressure chamber
PP, so pilot pressure oil from the main pump
passes through fine control hole f and goes from
port P1 to port A.
When the pressure at port P1 becomes higher,
spool (1) is pushed back and fine control hole f is
shut off from pump pressure chamber PP. At
almost the same time, it is connected to drain
chamber D to release the pressure at port P1.
When this happens, spool (1) moves up or down
so that force of metering spring (2) is balanced
with the pressure at port P1. The relationship in
the position of spool (1) and body (10) (fine control hole f is at a point midway between drain
hole D and pump pressure chamber PP) does
not change until retainer (9) contacts spool (1).
Therefore, metering spring (2) is compressed
proportionally to the amount of movement of the
control lever, so the pressure at port P1 also
rises in proportion to the travel of the control
lever. In this way, the control valve spool moves
to a position where the pressure in chamber A
(the same as the pressure at port P1) and the
force of the control valve spool return spring are
balanced. (Fig. 2)
PC130-7
10-107
PPC VALVE
3) During fine control (when control lever is

returned)
When disc (5) starts to be returned, spool (1) is
pushed up by the force of centering spring (3)
and the pressure at port P1.
When this happens, fine control hole f is connected to drain chamber D and the pressure oil
at port P1 is released.
If the pressure at port P1 drops too far, spool (1)
is pushed down by metering spring (2), and fine
control hole f is shut off from drain chamber D. At
almost the same time, it is connected to pump
pressure chamber PP, and the pump pressure is
supplied until the pressure at port P1 recovers to
a pressure that corresponds to the lever position.
When the spool of the control valve returns, oil in
drain chamber D flows fine control hole f' in the
valve on the side that is not working. The oil
passes through port P2 and enters chamber B to
fill the chamber with oil. (Fig. 3)
4) At full stroke
When disc (5) pushes down piston (4), and
retainer (9) pushes down spool (1), fine control
hole f is shut off from drain chamber D, and is
connected with pump pressure chamber PP.
Therefore, the pilot pressure oil from the main
pump passes through fine control hole f and
flows to chamber A from port P1, and pushes the
control valve spool.
The oil returning from chamber B passes from
port P2 through fine control hole f' and flows to
drain chamber D. (Fig. 4)
10-108
PC130-7
PPC VALVE
FOR TRAVEL
P
T
P1
P2
: From main pump

: To tank
: L.H reverse
: L.H forward
PC130-7
P3 : R.H reverse
P4 : R.H forward
P5 : Travel signal
10-109
1.
2.
3.
4.
Plate
Body
Piston
Collar
10-110
PPC VALVE
5.
6.
7.
8.
Metering spring
Centering spring
Valve
Pin
PC130-7
PPC VALVE
OPERATION
1. In the neutral mode
P1 and P2 ports of the operation valves A, B and
PPC valve are connected to drain room D via the
fine control hole f on spool (1).
2. In the fine control mode

(neutral o fine control)
As piston (4) is pushed by disk (5), retainer (9) ia
also pushed. At the same time, spool (1) is also
pushed down via the metering spring (2).
By this move, connection of the fine control hole
f is switched from drain room D to the pump
pressure room PP, and pilot pressurized oil for
the main pump is conducted from P1 port to A
port.
As P1 port pressure increases, spool (1) is
pushed back. By this move, connection of the
fine control hole f is switched from pump pressure room PP to drain room D, thereby relieving
P1 port pressure.
As the result, spool (1) moves up and down so
that force of metering spring (2) and P1 port
pressure may be balanced.
Positional relationship between spool (1) and
body (10) (fine control hole f is situated at mid
point between drain room D and pump pressure
room PP) remains unchanged until retainer (9) is
contacted against spool (1).
Metering spring (2) is, therefore, compressed in
proportion to strokes of the operation lever.
Thus, the P1 port pressure, too, also increases
in proportion to strokes of the operation lever.
As the result, the operation valve spool moves to
the position where pressure of A room (the same
as P1 port pressure) is balanced against force of
the operation valve spool return spring.
PC130-7
10-111
(3)
PPC VALVE
3. In the fine control mode (when operation

lever is shifted back to its original position)
As disk (5) starts returning, spool (1) is pushed
up by force of centering spring (3) and P1 port
pressure.
By this move, the fine control hole f is connected
to drain room D and relieves pressurized oil of
P1 port to it.
If P1 port pressure goes excessively low, spool
(1) is pushed down by metering spring (2) and
passage between the fine control hole f and
drain room D is shut down. And, almost at the
same time, the hole is connected to pump pressure room PP and starts supplying pressure to
the pump. This supply continues until P1 port
pressure is recovered to the level equivalent to
the lever position.
When the operation valve spool returns, oil in
drain room D flows in through the fine control
hole f' on the not moving side valve. Oil is then
conducted via P2 port to room B to fill it up.
4. In the full stroke mode

When disk (5) pushes down piston (4) and
retainer (9) pushes down spool (1), connection of
the fine control hole f is switched from drain
room D to pump pressure room PP.
Thus, pilot pressurized oil from the control pump
passes through the fine control hole f and conducted to A room via P1 port to push the operation valve spool.
Return oil from B room is conducted from P2 port
to drain room D via the fine control hole f'.
10-112
(3)
PC130-7
PPC VALVE
FOR SERVICE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Spool
Metering spring
Centering spring
Piston
Lever
Plate
Retainer
Body
Filter
PC130-7
P
T
P1
P
: From self pressure reducing valve

: To tank
: To blade or service valve
: To blade or service valve
10-113
PPC VALVE
OPERATION
1. In the neutral mode
P1 and P2 ports of the operation valves A, B and
PPC valve are connected to drain room D via the
fine control hole f on spool (1).
2. In the fine control mode

(Neutral o fine control)
As piston (4) is pushed by disk (5), retainer (7) is
also pushed. At the same time, spool (1) is also
pushed down via metering spring (2).
By this move, connection of the fine control hole
f is switched from drain room D to pump pressure room PP, and pilot pressurized oil for the
control pump is conducted from P1 port to A
port.
As P1 port pressure increases, spool (1) is
pushed back. By this move, connection of the
fine control hole f is switched from pump pressure room PP to drain room D, thereby relieving
P1 port pressure.
As the result, spool (1) moves up and down so
that force of metering spring (2) and P1 port
pressure may be balanced.
Positional relationship between spool (1) and
body (8) (fine control hole f is situated at mid
point between drain room D and pump pressure
room PP) remains unchanged until retainer (7) is
contacted against spool (1).
Metering spring (2) is, therefore, compressed in
Thus, the P1 port pressure, also increases in
As the result, the operation valve spool moves to
the position where pressure of A room (the same
as P1 port pressure) is balanced against force of
the operation valve spool return spring.
10-114
(3)
PC130-7
PPC VALVE
3. In the fine control mode (when the operation

lever is shifted back to its original position)
As lever (5) starts returning, spool (1) is pushed
up by force of centering spring (3) and P1 port
pressure. By this move, the fine control hole f is
connected to drain room D and relieves pressurized oil of P1 port to it.
If P1 port pressure goes excessively low, spool
(1) is pushed down by metering spring (2) and
passage between the fine control hole f and
drain room D is shut down. And, almost at the
same time, the hole is connected to pump pressure room PP and starts supplying pressure to
the pump. This supply continues until the P1
port pressure is recovered to the level equivalent
to the lever position.
When the operation valve spool returns, oil in
drain room D flows in through the fine control
hole f' on the not moving side valve. Oil is then
conducted via P2 port to the room B to fill it up.
4. In the full stroke mode

When disk (5) pushes down piston (4) and
retainer (7) pushes down spool (1), connection of
the fine control hole f is switched from drain
room D to pump pressure room PP.
Thus, pilot pressurized oil from the control pump
passes through the fine control hole f and conducted to A room via P1 port to push the operation valve spool.
Return oil from B room is conducted from P2 port
to drain room D via the fine control hole f'.
PC130-7
10-115
(3)
WORK EQUIPMENT
WORK EQUIPMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Bucket
Link
Bucket cylinder
Arm
Arm cylinder
Boom
Boom cylinder
10-116
PC130-7
AIR CONDITIONER PIPING
AIR CONDITIONER PIPING
A:
B:
C:
D:
Hot air/cold air spurting port

Internal air circulation port
External air inlet
Refrigerant checking port
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hot water inport piping

Air conditioner compressor
Condenser
Refrigerant piping
PC130-7
5.
6.
7.
8.
Receiver tank
Hot water return piping
Air conditioner unit
Duct
10-117
ENGINE CONTROL
ENGINE CONTROL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Starting switch
Fuel control dial
Governor motor
Starting motor
Linkage
Battery relay
Battery
Engine throttle and pump controller
Fuel injection pump
10-118
(3)
OUTLINE
The engine can be started and stopped with only
starting switch (1).
The engine throttle and pump controller (8) reveives the signal of fuel control dial (2) and transmits the drive signal to governor motor (3) to
control the governor lever angle of fuel injection
pump (9) and control the engine speed.
PC130-7
ENGINE CONTROL
1. OPERATION OF SYSTEM
Starting engine
When the starting switch is turned to the START
position, the starting signal flows to the starting
motor, and the starting motor turns to start the
engine.
When this happens, the engine throttle and
pump controller checks the signal from the fuel
control dial and sets the engine speed to the
speed set by the fuel control dial.
Engine speed control

The fuel control dial sends a signal to the engine
throttle and pump controller according to the
position of the dial. The engine throttle and pump
controller calculates the angle of the governor
motor according to this signal, and sends a signal to drive the governor motor so that it is at that
angle.
When this happens, the operating angle of the
governor motor is detected by the potentiometer,
and feedback is sent to the engine throttle and
pump controller, so that it can observe the operation of the governor motor.
Stopping engine
When the starting switch is turned to the STOP
position, the engine throttle and pump controller
drives the governor motor so that the governor
lever is set to the NO INJECTION position.
When this happens, to maintain the electric
power in the system until the engine stops completely, the engine throttle and pump controller
itself drives the battery relay.
PC130-7
10-119
ENGINE CONTROL
2. COMPONENT
Fuel control dial
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Knob
Dial
Spring
Ball
Potentiometer
Connector
FUNCTION
The fuel control dial is installed under the monitor
panel, and a potentiometer is installed under the
knob. The potentiometer shaft is turned by turning the knob.
As the potentiometer shaft is turned, the resistance of the variable resistor in the potentiometer
changes and a throttle signal is sent to the
engine throttle and pump controller.
The hatched area in the graph shown at right is
the abnormality detection area.
10-120
PC130-7
ENGINE CONTROL
GOVERNOR MOTOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Potentiometer
Cover
Shaft
Dust seal
Bearing
Motor
Gear
Connector
OPERATION
While motor is stopped
Electric power is applied to both phases A and B
of the motor.
While motor is running
The engine throttle and pump controller supplies
a pulse current to phases A and B, and the motor
revolves, synchronizing to the pulse.
FUNCTION
The motor is turned according to the drive signal
from the engine throttle and pump controller to
control the governor lever of the fuel injection
pump.
This motor used as the motive power source is a
stepping motor.
A potentiometer for feedback is installed to monitor the operation of the motor.
Revolution of the motor is transmitted through
the gear to the potentiometer.
PC130-7
10-121
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM

CONTROL FUNCTION
1
Engine/Pump composite control function
2
Pump/Valve control function
3
One-touch power maximizing function
4
Auto-deceleration function
5
Electric control system
Auto-warm-up/Overheat prevention function
6
Swing control function
7
Travel control function
8
ATT flow control, circuit selector function (if equipped)
Self-diagnosis function
10-122
PC130-7
MACHINE CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
10-124
(3)
PC130-7
PC130-7
10-125
1. ENGINE AND PUMP CONTROL FUNCTION
10-126
PC130-7
FUNCTION
This function is for selecting any of the four working modes "A," "B", "E" and "L" with the working
mode selector switch on the monitor panel. The
controller can select optimum engine torques or
pump absorption torques for works to be
expected.
The controller detects the engine governor

speed set with the fuel control dial depending on
the pump absorption torque set in each mode
and detects actual engine speeds. Then, the
controller controls all torques at each output
point of the engine so that the pump can absorb
them.
When an engine speed was lowered, the controller prevents the engine from stopping by throttling the pump absorption toque.
PC130-7
10-127
(3)
1. CONTROL METHOD IN EACH MODE

Mode A
Matching point in Mode A
When a load to the pump increases and the
pressure rises and the engine speed lowers.
At the time, the controller reduces the pump
delivery so that the speed lowers to the speed at
the full output point or so. If the pressure drops
on the contrary, the controller increases the
pump delivery so that the speed comes to the
speed at the full output point or so.
The controller repeats these controls so that the
engine can always be used at speeds at the full
output point or so.
10-128
A Travel (A1)
66.2 kW/2,200 rpm

{88.7 HP/2,200 rpm}
A Work (A2)
65.5 kW/2,200 rpm

{87.8 HP/2,200 rpm}
PC130-7
Mode E / Mode B / Mode L

Mode
Partial output point
Model
90%
90%
56%
PC130-7
Mode E
58.8 kW/2,000 rpm {78.9 HP/2,000 rpm}
Mode B
58.8 kW/2,000 rpm {78.9 HP/2,000 rpm}
Mode L
36.8 kW/1,500 rpm {70 HP/1,500 rtpm}
At this time, the controller keeps the pump

absorption torque along the constant horsepower curve and lower the engine speed by
the composite control of the engine and
pump.
By this method, the engine is used in the low
fuel consumption area.
PC130-7
10-129
2. FUNCTION TO CONTROL PUMP DURING

TRAVEL
If the machine travels in mode work A, B, E, or L,
the working mode does not change, but the
pump absorption torque and engine speed rise
to travel A mode.
3. PUMP DRIVE IN AN EMERGENCY

Even if controllers and sensors get out of order,
the emergency pump drive switch (S) will enable
to maintain functions of the machine with absorption torques quite similar to those in the Mode E.
In this case, a constant current flows from the
battery to the PC-EPC valve, and the valve
detects the oil pressure only.
(1) Normal
(2) Emergency
a The emergency pump drive switch (S) is of the
alternative type. If the machine is operated after
the switch is set to "Emergency (2)" even though
the machine is normal, the user code "E02" will
be shown on the display.
10-130
PC130-7
2. PUMP/VALVE CONTROL FUNCTION
FUNCTION
The machine is matched to various types of work
properly with the 2-stage relief function to
increase the digging force, etc.
PC130-7
10-131
1) Cut-off function
When the cut-off function is turned on, the
PC-EPC current is increased to near the
maximum value.
By this operation, the flow rate in the relief
state is lowered to reduce fuel consumption.
Operating condition for turning on cut-off
function.
Condition
The average value of the front and rear pressure sensors is above 27.9 MPa {285 kg/cm2}
and the one-touch power maximizing function is
not turned on
The cut-off function does not work, however,

while the machine is traveling in mode A, the
lock switch is turned on.
2) 2-stage relief function
The relief pressure in the normal work is 31.9
MPa {325 kg/cm2}. If the 2-stage relief function is turned on, however, the relief pressure
rises to about 34.8 MPa {355 kg/cm2}.
By this operation, the hydraulic force is
increased further.
Operating condition for turning on 2-stage
relief function
Condition
Relief pressure
During travel
When swing lock switch is
31.9 MPa
turned on
{325 kg/cm2}
When one-touch power maxi
mizing function is turned on
34.8 MPa
When L mode is operated
{355 kg/cm2}
10-132
PC130-7
3. ONE-TOUCH POWER MAXIMIZING FUNCTION
FUNCTION
Power can be increased for about 8.5 sec. by
operating the left knob switch.
PC130-7
10-133
1) One-touch power maximizing function

When the operator needs more digging force
to dig up a large rock, etc., if the left knob
switch is pressed, the hydraulic force is
increased about 9% to increase the digging
force.
If the left knob switch is turned on in working
mode "A" or "E", each function is set automatically as shown below.
Software cut-off function

Working
mode
Engine/Pump
control
A, E
Matching at rated
output point
10-134
2-stage relief function

31.9 MPa {325 kg/cm2}
34.8 MPa {355 kg/cm2}
Operation time
Automatically
Cancel
reset at 8.5 sec
PC130-7
4. AUTO-DECELERATION FUNCTION
FUNCTION
If the all control levers are set in NEUTRAL while
waiting for a dump truck or work, the engine
speed is lowered to the medium level automatically to reduce the fuel consumption and noise.
If any lever is operated, the engine speed rises
to the set level instantly.
PC130-7
10-135
OPERATION
When control levers are set in neutral
If all the control levers are set in NEUTRAL while
the engine speed is above the decelerator operation level (about 1,400 rpm), the engine speed
lowers instantly to the first deceleration level
about 100 rpm lower than the set speed.
If 4 more seconds pass, the engine speed lowers
to the second deceleration level (about 1,400
rpm) and keeps at that level until any lever is
operated again.
When any control lever is operated
If any control lever is operated while the engine
speed is kept at the second deceleration level,
the engine speed rises instantly to the level set
with the fuel control dial.
10-136
PC130-7
5. AUTO-WARM-UP/OVERHEAT PREVENTION FUNCTION
FUNCTION
After the engine is started, if the engine coolant
temperature is low, the engine speed is raised
automatically to warm up the engine. If the
engine coolant temperature rises too high during
work, the pump load is reduced to prevent overheating.
PC130-7
10-137
(3)
1) Auto-warm-up function
After the engine is started, if the engine coolant water temperature is low, the engine
speed is raised automatically to warm up the
engine.
Operating condition (All)
Operated
Coolant temperature: Below 30C.

Engine speed: Max. 1,200 rpm
Engine speed: Max. 1,200 rpm
Resetting condition (Any one)

Auto
Manual
Coolant temperature: Above 30C

Auto-warm-up operation time: Min. 10 minutes
Reset
Engine speed: Any level
Fuel control dial: Kept at 70% of full level for 3 sec. or

longer
Operating condition
Operation/Remedy
Resetting condition
Coolant and oil temperature:
Below 105?C
Coolant and oil temperature: Above

105C
Operating condition
Coolant and oil temperature: Above
102C
10-138
(3)
Work mode: Mode A, E,

OR B
Engine speed: Keep as is.
Monitor alarm lamp: Lights up.
Lower pump discharge.
Work mode: Mode A

Lower pump discharge.
Under above condition, controller is set to condition before

operation of function. (Manual
reset)

Below 102C
operation of function. (Automatic reset)
Resetting condition
Operation/Remedy
Work mode: Travel
Lower travel speed.
Fuel control dial: Return to low

idle position once.
Resetting condition
Operation/Remedy
Operating condition
Coolant and oil temperature: Above 95C
Operation/Remedy
Operating condition
Coolant and oil temperature: Above 98C
Work mode: Any mode

Engine speed: Low idle
Monitor alarm lamp: Lights up
Alarm buzzer: Sounds

Below 98C
Resetting condition

Below 95C
PC130-7
6. SWING CONTROL FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Battery
Battery relay
Fusible link
Starting switch
Fuse box
Controller
Swing holding brake release switch
Swing lock switch
Monitor panel
Swing holding brake solenoid valve
Input/Output Signals
a. Controller power supply
b. Solenoid power supply
c. Monitor panel power supply
d. S-NET signal
PC130-7
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.

Swing motor
L.H. work equipment PPC valve
Arm IN PPC oil pressure switch
Swing PPC oil pressure switch
Engine
Hydraulic pump
Control valve
18a. Self pressure reducing valve
18b. Main relief valve
e. Solenoid valve drive signal

f. Swing PPC oil pressure switch signal
g. Arm IN PPC oil pressure switch signal
10-139
FUNCTION
Swing lock and swing holding brake
The swing lock (manual type) is for locking swing
at optional positions. The swing holding brake
(automatic type) interlocks with swing and prevents hydraulic drift from occurring after stop of
swing.
a When the swing lock is released, only the
hydraulic brake with the safety valve is effective
for swing. So, note that, when a swing stops on
a slope, a hydraulic drift may occur sometimes.
a Even during arm IN operation, release the swing
holding brake.
Swing
lock
switch
OFF
ON
Release of swing holding brake

If the controller gets out of order and no swing is
possible because the swing holding brake does
not work normally, use the swing holding brake
release switch (S), and the swing holding brake
will be released and swing will become possible.
(1) Normal
(2) Release
a Even if the swing holding brake release switch is
set to "ON," the swing holding brake is not be
released while the swing lock switch is set to
"ON."
Swing
lock
monitor
Function
Operation
The lamp Swing

goes
holding
OUT.
brake
When the swing control lever is set to

NEUTRAL, the swing
holding brake works 4
sec. later.
When the swing control lever or the arm IN
lever is operated, the
swing holding brake is
released and free
swing becomes possible.
The lamp Swing

turns ON. lock
The swing holding brake

works, and the swing is
locked.
Even if the swing control lever is operated,
the swing holding brake
cannot be released,
and no swing is possible.
Swing
ON
holding
(when the controller
brake reis out of order)
lease switch
Swing lock
switch
Swing brake
OFF
(when the controller
is in order)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
The
swing
lock
works.
The
swing
lock is
released.
The
swing
lock
works.
The
swing
holding
brake
works.
Input/Output signal time chart
10-140
PC130-7
7. TRAVEL CONTROL FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Battery
Battery relay
Fusible link
Starting switch
Fuse box
Controller
Monitor panel
Travel speed selector solenoid valve
L.H. travel motor
Input/Output signals
a. Controller power supply
b. Solenoid power supply
c. Monitor panel power supply
d. S-NET signal
PC130-7
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
R.H. travel motor

Engine speed sensor
Pump pressure sensor
Engine
Hydraulic pump
Control valve
15b. Main relief valve
e. Solenoid valve drive signal

f. Engine speed signal
g. Pump pressure signal
10-141
FUNCTION
Travel Speed Selection
1. Travel Speed "Manual" Change
When the travel speed selector switch is set
to LOW or HIGH, the motor capacity
changes and travel speeds can be selected.
Travel speed
selector switch
LOW
(low speed)
HIGH
(high speed)
Motor capacity
(cc/rev)
52.7
33.2
Travel speed
(km/h)
2.7
5.5
Maximum
Minimum
Travel motor swash plate

angle
2. "Automatic"change of travel speed

1) Automatic selection corresponding to engine
speed
If engine speed drops to 1,500 rpm or
less when travel speed selector switch is
in HIGH and travel speed is HIGH, travel
speed changes to LOW automatically.
If engine speed becomes 1,700 rpm or
less when travel speed selector switch is
in HIGH and travel speed is LOW, travel
speed changes to HIGH automatically.
a If travel speed selector switch is in LOW,
travel speed is not changed automatically.
2) Automatic selection corresponding to discharge pressure of pump
If travel pressure of 30.4MPa {310 kg/
cm2} or higher continues for 0.2 seconds
or more when travel speed selector
switch is in HIGH, travel speed changes
to LOW automatically.
If travel pressure of 16.7MPa {170 kg/
cm2} or lower continues for 0.2 seconds
or more when travel speed selector
switch is in HIGH, travel speed changes
to HIGH automatically.
a If travel speed selector switch is in LOW,
travel speed is not changed automatically.
10-142
(3)
PC130-7
8. PPC LOCK FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Battery
Battery relay
Fusible link
Starting switch
Fuse box
Controller
Safety lock lever
PPC lock switch
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Left work equipment PPC valve

Right work equipment PPC valve
Traveling PPC valve
Blade PPC valve (Blade specification)
Engine
Hydraulic pump
Operation valve
16b. Man relief valve
a. Power supply of controller
b. Power supply of solenoids
c. Solenoid valve driving signals
Function
PPC lock switch works with safety lock lever.
Setting safety lock lever to "Lock", PPC lock
switch turns to "OFF".
Turning PPC lock switch to "OFF" shuts off current to PPC lock solenoid valve, making operation lever on the work equipment disabled.
PC130-7
10-143
SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

1. Error code display/Alarm functions
Controller always watches electronic devices
which constitutes the system, including controller itself, each potentiometer which issues
input signals, each solenoid valve which
receives output signals, and EPC valves, to
check for they normal operation.
If an abnormality occurred in any of these
devices, the controller diagnoses it and display the results on display (1) of monitor
panel as a "USER CODE" or "SERVICE
CODE", sounding alarm buzzer at the same
time to notify the abnormality to operator.
a Refer to the "TROUBLESHOOTING" section as for the details of display and measures to be taken.
2. Error code memory function
Controller takes in memory the error code
diagnosed about an abnormality which
occurred in advanced system.
a Refer to the "TESTING AND ADJUSTING"
section as for the details of display and how
to reset.
10-144
PC130-7
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
ENGINE SPEED SENSOR
FUNCTION
The engine speed sensor is installed on the ring
gear of the engine flywheel. It electrically counts
number of gear teeth that pass its front side and
sends the counting to the controller.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Magnet
Terminal
Case
Boots
Connector
Remarks : Number of ring gear teeth is 127.
For the count, a magnet is used which generates

current every time a gear tooth passes its front
side.
PC130-7
10-145
PPC HYDRAULIC SWITCH
SPECIFICATION
Contact structre : Normally opened
Operating (ON) pressure :
490 98.1 kPa {5.0 1.0 kg/cm2}
Resetting (OFF) pressure :
294 49.0 kPa {3.0 0.5 kg/cm2}
1. Plug
2. Switch
3. Connector
FUNCTION
8 switches installed to junction block sense operating condetion of each actuator, and send it to
controller.
1 switch installed to travel PPC valve sense
travel operating condition, and send it to controller.
10-146
PC130-7
CONTROLLER
PC130-7
10-147
Input/output signals
CN-1
CN-2
Pin
No.
Signal name
Input/
output
Pin
No.
CN-3
Signal name
Input/
output
Pin
No.
Output
Control power supply
Input
Input
Signal name
NC
Input
NC
NC
Input
Swing prolix switch
Input
Solenoid power supply
NC
Input
NC
Input
SOL_COM
Input/
output
Signal GND
232C_RxD
Input
Battery relay drive
Output
NC
Input
NC
Input
Motor drive a (+)
Output
NC
Input
Over load caution enable

switch
Input
LS_EPC
Output
Overload pressure sensor
Input
NC
Output
Input
NC
Output
Input
NC
10
Signal GND
11
Knob switch
Input
12
NC
Input
13
Feed back signal
Input
14
NC
Input
15
NC
Input
16
SENS_PWR
17
Start switch (C)
Input
18
NC
Input
19
Fuel dial
Input
20
NC
Input
21
Analog GND
Output
Machine select 4
NC
Output
NC
Output
POT_PWR
23
Start switch (Acc)
Output
Input
24
NC
Input
Input
10
NC
Input
11
NC
Output
12
CAN shield
13
Machine select 5
14
232C_TxD
15
NC
Input
Output
Input
16
NC
Input
17
Machine select 3
Input
18
NC
Output
19
NC
Output
20
NC
Input
22
10-148
21
S_NET
22
CANO_L
23
CAN1_L
Input/
Output
Input/
Output
Input/
Output
Bucket curl switch
Input
10
Boom ralse switch
Input
11
Control power supply
Input
12
Input
13
SOL_COM
14
Key signal
Input
15
Motor drive a (-)
Output
16
PC-EPC
Output
17
NC
Output
18
Heater relay solenoid
Output
19
Bucket dump switch
Input
20
Boom lower switch
Input
21
GND
22
23
SOL_COM
24
Key signal
25
Motor drive b (+)
Output
Input
Input
24
Flash memory write enable

signal
Input
26
NC
Output
25
NC
Input
27
Travel speed solenoid
Output
26
NC
Input
28
2-stage rellef solenoid
Output
27
Machine select 2
Input
29
Swing switch
Input
28
NC
Input
30
Arm curl switch
Input
29
Puls GND
31
GND
30
NC
Input
32
GND
31
GND (S_NET GND)
33
GND
32
CAN0_H
34
NC
33
CAN1_H
Input/
Output
Input/
Output
35
Motor drive b (-)
Output
36
NC
Output
37
Swing brake solenoid
Output
38
NC
Output
34
GND (232C GND)
35
Service switch
36
NC
Input
37
Machine select 1
Input
38
Swing lock switch
Input
39
Puls GND
40
Eng. speed
39
Travel switch
Input
40
Arm dump switch
Input
Input
PC130-7
PUMP PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Plug
2. Sensor
3. Connector
FUNCTION
Mounted on the inlet circuit of control valve, this
sensor changes discharging pressure of pump
into voltage, and send it to automatic travel
speed change controller.
Monitor panel
a Refer to the section describing the "Monitor System".
PC valve
LS valve
PC-EPC valve
a Refer to the section describing the "Hydraulic
Pump (Piston pump)".
LS-EPC valve
a Refer to the section describing the "Hydraulic
Pump (Piston pump)".
2nd speed select solenoid valve
a Refer to the section describing the "Solenoid
Valve".
PC130-7
10-149
MONITOR SYSTEM
MONITOR SYSTEM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Monitor panel
Battery
Controller
Sensors and switches
Wiper motor, window washer motor
Description
The monitor system monitors conditions of the
machine with sensors mounted on its each section, processes promptly the information
obtained, and displays it on panel to let operator
know the conditions of the machine.
a. Power supply
b. Switch signal
c. Caution signal
d. Sensor/switch signal
e. Sensor/switch signal
f. Output for driving
10-150
PC130-7
MONITOR SYSTEM
MONITOR PANEL
OUTLINE
The monitor panel has the functions to display a
monitor, gauge, service meter and electric system. It has also an alarm buzzer built in.
A CPU (Central Processing Unit) mounted inside
processes, displays and outputs information.
AMP070-12P [CN-P01]
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
PC130-7
Signal name
Starting switch (battery)
Starting switch (battery)
Window washer motor output
Starting switch (C-terminal)
Wiper W-contact
GND
GND
VB + (24V)
Wiper motor (+)
Wiper motor ()
Alarm buzzer ON signal
Wiper P-contact
The monitor's switch section consists of three flat

type sheet switches. Pressing any of these
switches changes the conditions of the machine,
which are shown by LEDs located above the
switches turned ON.
The monitor does not give correct display if any
of the monitor panel unit, controller, or the wiring
between monitor-panel and controller is in abnormal condition.
AMP040-20P [CN-P02]
I/O signal
Input
Input
Output
Input
Input
Input
Output
Output
Input
Input
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Signal name
Engine coolant temperature
Fuel level
Radiator coolant level
NC
Air cleaner clogging
NC
Engine oil pressure
Engine oil level
S-NET signal
S-NET signal
Battery charge level
Hydraulic oil level
GND (analog signal)
NC
Pull-up window limit switch
Alarm buzzer cancel
Swing lock
Preheating
Lamp switch
GND (S-NET)
I/O signal
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input/Output
Input/Output
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
10-151
MONITOR SYSTEM
METER DISPLAY
No.
1
Display
category
Display item
Service meter
[*1]
2 Display
3a Gauge
3b Caution
Coolant
temperature
4a Gauge
4b Caution
Fuel level
Pilot
[*2]
7
8
9
10
Caution
11
12
Display method
Time counting while engine is in operation (alternator is generating) (Always lit even if starting switch is OFF)
Count time during engine operates.
Alphanumerics in 2 Displays 2 digit alphanumerics (user code or
digits
service code) if electric control system is in abnormal condition.
See picture above All the segments of the corresponding level and
lower are turned ON.
Specified tempera- (Level 8 (102C or higher):Monitor lamp blinks.
ture (102C) or
Level 9: Monitor lamp blinks and alarm buzzer
higher
sounds.)
See picture above All the segments of the corresponding level and
lower are turned on. (Level 1 (42 l or less):
Specified level
Monitor lamp blinks.)
(42 l) or lower
Display Remarks
color
0 99999.9 h
Blue
LCD
Red
LED
Blue
LCD
Red
LED
Turned on for about 30 seconds after starting

switch was turned to "HEAT". It blinks (for about
10 seconds) after preheating was over to notify
it to operator, and then it is turned off.
Turned on when the swing lock function is acWhen swing-lock is
tive.
Swing lock
in operation
Blinks when swing holding brake release
Green
switch was turn on.
Turned ON when specified oil maintenance
periods (125h, 250, and 500h) elapsed. (Also,
When
specified
oilOil
elapsed time and telephone No. of your dealmaintenance
perimaintenance
er are shown on service meter.)
ods elapsed
Not turned on if no oil maintenance period
has been specified.
Engine oil level Max. low level
Charge in fault
Battery charge (charge voltage <
level
battery voltage)
Turned ON when starting switch was turned on;
Air cleaner
turned off after engine started running.
At
clogging
clogging
In normal condition : turned OFF
Red
In abnormal condition : turned ON
Lower
than
the
Engine oil
(As
for
engine
oil
pressure,
charge
and
over
specified pressure
pressure
49 kPa {0.5 kg/cm2} load alarm buzzer sounds if the pressure became abnormal when engine was running.)
Min. specified presOver load
sure 16.7 MPa {170
kg/cm2}
Preheating
Display area
During preheating
Lamp
[*1] As for display and operation, refer to the "Self Diagnosis Function" section.
[*2] As for display and operation, refer to the "Troubleshooting" chapter.
10-152
PC130-7
MONITOR SYSTEM
MONITOR SWITCH
No.
Name
Function
Operation
Used to select a travel speed from two of them.

"Lo" is lit: Travel in low speed.
1 Travel speed selector switch "Hi" is lit: Travel in high speed.
Lo
Hi
<The speed is locked at Lo when arm crane is used.>
Activates the function to reduce fuel consumption.
Turned ON: The function is active.
ON
OFF
2 Auto-deceleration switch
Turned OFF: The function is not active.
(Lit)
<The function is made inactive when arm crane is
used.>
Activates wiper of front glass.
"ON" is lit: Wiper works continuously.
OFF
INT
ON
3 Wiper switch
"INT" is lit: Wiper works intermittently.
(Not lit)
(Intermittent) (Continuous)
Not lit: Wiper is not working.
[When wiper is not working]
ON : Washer fluid is sprayed
and wiper works continuously.
OFF : Wiper works twice and
stops after the switch was
released.
[When wiper is working intermit4 Windshield washer switch
Sprays washer fluid onto front glass.
tently]
ON : Washer fluid is sprayed
and wiper works continuously.
OFF : Wiper works twice and returns to intermittent operation after the switch was
released.
Sets the movement and force of the working
equipment.
"A" is lit: A mode (for heavy duty work)
* Operation mode selector
A
E
L
B
5 switch
"E" is lit: E mode (for fuel economical operation)
"L" is lit: L mode (for fine control work)
"B" is lit: B mode (for breaker work)
You can change the default settings which become active when starting switch is turned on. Refer to the
"TROUBLESHOOTING" chapter.
a Signs written in bold fonts in the "Operation" column above represent the positions switches default to when
starting switched is turned on.
PC130-7
10-153
(3)
MONITOR SYSTEM
SENSORS
Signal from a sensor is directly entered to the

panel.
There are two types of sensors, contact type and
resistance type.
One end of a contact type sensor is connected to
the ground on the machine body.
Display class
Caution
Gauge
Sensor type
Engine oil pressure
Coolant temperature
Fuel level
Hydraulic oil temperature
Sensing approach
Contact
Resistance
Resistance
Resistance
When normal
OFF (open)
When failed
ON (closed)
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Plug
2. Contact ring
3. Contact
4. Diaphragm
5. Spring
6. Terminal
COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Connector
2. Plug
3. Thermistor
10-154
PC130-7
MONITOR SYSTEM
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
Float
Connector
Cover
Variable resisto
PC130-7
10-155
20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING

STANDARD VALUE TABLE FOR ENGINE.......... 20- 2
STANDARD VALUE TABLE FOR CHASSIS........ 20- 3
TESTING AND ADJUSTING................................ 20-101
TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................... 20-201
Note the following when making judgements using the standard value tables for testing, adjusting, or troubleshooting.
1. The standard value for a new machine given in the table is the value used when shipping the machine from
the factory and is given for reference. It is used as a guideline for judging the progress of wear after the
machine has been operated, and as a reference value when carrying out repairs.
2. The service limit value given in the tables is the estimated value for the shipped machine based on the
results of various tests. It is used for reference together with the state of repair and the history of operation
to judge if there is a failure.
3. These standard values are not the standards used in dealing with claims.
When carrying out testing, adjusting, or troubleshooting, park the machine on level ground, inset the safety
pins, and use blocks to prevent the machine from moving.
When carrying out work together with other workers, always use signals and do not let unauthorized people
near the machine.
When checking the water level, always wait for the water to cool down. If the radiator cap is removed when
the water is still hot, the water will spurt out and cause burns.
Be careful not to get caught in the fan, fan belt or other rotating parts.
PC130-7
20-1
(1)
STANDARD VALUE TABLE FOR ENGINE
STANDARD VALUE TABLE FOR ENGINE
Item
Model name
PC130-7
Engine
SAA4D95LE-3
Measurement condition
Unit
Standard value
Permissible value
2,350 100
2,350 100
1,100 50
1,100 50
2,200
Max. 4.5
Max. 6.5
Max. 1.0
Max. 2.0
0.35
0.50
MPa
{kg/cm2}
(rpm)
Min. 2.9
{Min. 30}
(320 360)
2.0
{20}
(320 360)
kPa
{mmH2O}
Max. 0.49
{Max. 50}
0.98
{100}
0.34 0.59
{3.5 6.0}
0.25
{2.5}
0.29 0.54
{3.0 5.5}
0.21
{2.1}
Min. 0.1
{Min. 1.0}
Min. 0.08
{Min. 0.8}
0.07
{0.7}
0.07
{0.7}
90 110
120
6 0.75
6 0.75
High idling
Engine speed
Low idling
rpm
Rated speed
During sharp acceleration
Exhaust gas color
During high idling
Valve clearance
(Cooled)
Compression pressure
Blow-by pressure
Bosch
index
Intake valve
mm
Exhaust valve
Oil temperature: 40 60 C
(Engine speed)
Coolant temperature:
Within operating range
At rated output
Coolant temperature:
At high idling (SAE30)
Oil pressure
At high idling (SAE10W)
MPa
{kg/cm2}
At low idling (SAE30)

At high idling (SAE10W)
Oil temperature
Through speed range (In oil pan)
Fuel injection timing
Before top dead center (BTDC)
Fan belt tension
Deflection under finger pressure of

58.8 N {6 kg}
mm
6 10
6 10
Air conditioner compressor belt tension
Deflection under finger pressure of

58.8 N {6 kg}
mm
6 10
6 10
20-2
(1)
PC130-7
STANDARD VALUE TABLE FOR CHASSIS

Model name
Category
Item
Unit
Standard value
Permissible value
rpm
2,120 100
2,120 100
rpm
2,180 100
2,180 100
rpm
1,400 100
1,400 100
8.0 0.5
8.0 0.5
9.5 0.5
9.5 0.5
8.0 0.5
8.0 0.5
Bucket control valve
8.0 0.5
8.0 0.5
Swing control valve
8.0 0.5
8.0 0.5
Travel control valve
8.0 0.5
8.0 0.5
85 10
85 10
85 10
85 10
85 10
85 10
Swing control lever
85 10
85 10
Travel control lever
112 15
112 15
Play of control lever
10 15
10 15
15.7 3.9
{1.6 0.4}
15.7 3.9
{1.6 0.4}
Max. 24.5
{Max. 2.5}
Max. 24.5
{Max. 2.5}
12.7 2.9
{1.3 0.3}
Max. 21.6
{Max. 2.2}
12.7 2.9
{1.3 0.3}
Max. 21.6
{Max. 2.2}
Travel control lever
24.5 5.9
{2.5 0.6}
Max. 39.2
{Max. 4.0}
Travel control pedal
80.4 20.1
{8.2 2.0}
Max. 107.9
{Max. 11}
Engine speed
Pump relief
Pump relief + Onetouch power maximizing
During auto-deceleration
Control valve spool stroke
Boom control valve
Control lever stroke
Engine coolant temperature:
Hydraulic oil temperature: 45 55 C
Engine speed: High idling
Working mode: A
Arm OUT relief
Engine coolant temperature:
Arm OUT relief + One-touch power
maximizing switch ON
Auto-decelerator switch: ON
All control levers in neutral
Engine: Stopped
IN
Arm control valve

OUT
mm
Boom control lever
Operating effort of control lever
PC130-7
Arm control lever
Engine: Stopped
Center of lever grip
Read max. value to stroke end
(Exclude play in neutral position).
Bucket control lever

mm
Boom control lever

Arm control lever
Bucket control lever
Swing control lever
PC130-7
Hydraulic oil temperature:

Center of lever grip
Tip of pedal
Read max. value to stroke end
N
{kg}
20-3
(1)
Model name
Category
Item
Unload pressure
Boom relief pressure
Oil pressure
Arm relief pressure
Bucket relief pressure
PC130-7
Unit
Standard value
Permissible value
MPa
{kg/cm2}
2.9 0.5
{30 5}
2.9 0.5
{30 5}
At normal
relief
31.9 + 2.0
0
{325 + 20
0 }
33.3 36.8
{340 375}
At power
max.
34.8 1.0
{355 10}
31.9 + 2.0
0
{325 + 20
0 }
34.8 1.0
{355 10}
31.9 + 2.0
0
{325 + 20
0 }
36.3 39.2
{370 400}
33.3 36.8
{340 375}
36.3 39.2
{370 400}
33.3 36.8
{340 375}
34.8 1.0
{355 10}
36.3 39.2
{370 400}
28.9 1.5
{295 15}
34.8 1.0
{355 10}
28.9 32.9
{295 335}
36.3 39.2
{370 400}
3.23 0.2
{33 2}
2.84 3.43
{29 35}
2.7 + 1.0
0.7
{28 + 107 }
2.7 + 1.0
0.7
{28 + 107 }
2.2 0.1
{22.5 1}
2.2 0.1
{22.5 1}

Working mode: A
Pump outlet pressure when all levers
are in neutral
Engine speed:
High idling
Working mode: A
Pump outlet pressure
when measured circuit is
relieved
At normal
relief
At power
max.
At normal
relief
MPa
{kg/cm2}
At power
max.
Swing relief pressure

Travel relief pressure
Control circuit basic

pressure
LS differential pressure
20-4
(1)

MPa
Outlet pressure of self-reducing pres{kg/cm2}
sure valve when all levers are in neutral
Hydraulic oil temperature: When all
45 55 C levers are
Engine speed: High idling in neutral
MPa
Working mode: A
{kg/cm2}
When
Pump pressure - LS prestravel syssure
tem runs
idle at Hi
PC130-7
Model name
Category
Item
Overrun of swing
PC130-7

Working mode: A
Quantity of overrun of swing circle
when it stops after 1 turn
( ): Qty of overrun of periphery of
swing circle
Unit
Standard value
Permissible value
deg
(mm)
75 10
{730 100}
Max. 90
(Max. 870)
2.9 0.3
Max. 3.5
4.0 0.4
Max. 8.5
sec
28.6 4.8
28.6 5.8
mm
90

45 55 C
180
Working mode: A
Time taken to swing 90 and
180 after starting
sec
Swing
Time taken to start

swinging
Time taken to swing

Working mode: A
Time taken to swing 5 turns after
swinging 1 turn
Hydraulic drift of swing

Engine: Stopped
Set upper structure at 90 to machine
body on slope of 15.
Make match marks on inner race and
outer race of swing circle.
Measure deviation of match marks in
15 minutes.
PC130-7
20-5
(1)
Model name
Swing
Category
Item
Leakage from swing

motor
PC130-7
Unit
Standard value
Permissible value
l/min
Max. 3
Max. 6
46.1 9.2
46.1 9.2
Hi
21.9 2.2
23.1 3.0
Lo
27.6 5.1
27.6 7.1
Hi
13.2 1.2
13.2 1.7
Max. 200
Max. 220

Swing lock switch: LOCK
Measure leakage for 1 minutes while
swing circuit is relieved.
Lo
Travel speed (Idle run)
sec
45 55 C
Working mode: A
Measure time taken to rotate
track shoe 5 turns after 1 turn.
Travel
Travel speed
(Actual travel)
Travel deviation
20-6
(1)

45 55 C
Working mode: A
Hard and level place
Measure time taken to travel 20
m after running up 10 m.

Working mode: A
Travel speed: Lo
Measure travel deviation in travel of
20 m after running up 10 m.
mm
PC130-7
Model name
Category
Item
PC130-7
Unit
Standard value
Permissible value
mm
l/min
Max. 5
Max. 10
Whole work
equipment
(Hydraulic drift of tooth tip)
Max. 460
Max. 700
Boom cylinder
(Retraction of cylinder)
Max. 10
Max. 12
Max. 80
Max. 90
Max. 22
Max. 40
3.7 0.4
Max. 4.3
2.6 0.5
Max. 3.2
Travel
Hydraulic drift of travel
Hydraulic drift of work equipment

Work equipment speed
Work equipment
Leakage from travel

motor
PC130-7

Engine: Stopped
Stop machine on slope of 12 degrees
with sprocket on upper side.
Measure hydraulic drift of travel in 5
minutes.
Lock sprocket.
Measure leakage for 1 minutes while
travel circuit is relieved.

Level and flat place
Bucket: Full of dirt and sand or filled
Arm cylinder
with rated load (1,080 kg)
(Extension of cylinder) Level boom top, retract arm cylinder
fully, and extract bucket cylinder fully.
Engine: Stopped
Work equipment control lever: Neutral
Bucket cylinder
Start measuring hydraulic drift just
(Retraction of cylinder) after setting machine and measure
every 5 minutes for 15 minutes.
mm
RAISE
Boom speed

45 55 C
Working mode: A
LOWER
Measure time taken to move
bucket between RAISE stroke
end and ground touch point of
bucket.
sec
20-7
(1)
Model name
Category
Item
PC130-7
Unit
CURL
Work equipment
Work equipment speed
Arm speed
(1)

45 55 C
Working mode: A
DUMP
bucket between DUMP stroke
end and CURL stroke end
Boom time lag
Permissible value
3.2 0.4
Max. 4.4
3.1 0.3
Max. 3.7
2.9 0.3
Max. 3.7
2.3 0.2
Max. 2.9
Max. 3.0
Max. 4.0
sec
CURL
Bucket speed
Time lag
20-8

45 55 C
Working mode: A
DUMP
arm between OUT stroke end
and IN stroke end (between
starting points of cushion).
Standard value
sec
sec
Engine speed: Low idling
Working mode: A
Lower boom from RAISE stroke end
and measure time taken to start raising front of machine after bucket
touches ground.
PC130-7
Model name
Category
Item
Unit
Standard value
Permissible value
sec
Max. 2.0
Max. 3.0
sec
Max. 2.0
Max. 3.0
Max. 3.5
Max. 15
Max. 10
Max. 50
Max. 500
Max. 500

Working mode: A
Move IN arm from OUT stroke end
and measure time taken to start moving arm again after it is stopped.
For measuring posture, see WORK
EQUIPMENT 6.
Time lag
Work equipment
Arm time lag
PC130-7
Bucket time lag
Compound operation performance
Oil leakage

Working mode: A
Curl bucket from DUMP stroke end
and measure time taken to start moving bucket again after it is stopped.
For measuring posture, see WORK
EQUIPMENT 7.
Relieve cylinder to be measured or
Center swivel joint travel circuit and measure leakage in
1 minute.
Cylinder
Travel deviation in
compound operation
of work equipment and
travel
PC130-7
cc/min

Working mode: A
Travel speed: Lo
Measure travel deviation in travel of
20 m after running up 10 m.
mm
20-9
(1)
Model name
Category
PC flow control
characteristics

Engine: High idling
Working mode: A
Time taken to swing
Bucket: Filled with rated load
90 in compound oper- Hard and level place
ation of raising boom
Set arm vertically and lower back of
and starting swinging
bucket to ground.
Raise boom and start swinging simultaneously from above posture and
measure time taken to pass 90 point.
Pump
performance
Item
Hydraulic pump
capacity
20-10
(1)
See graph.
PC130-7
Unit
Standard value
Permissible value
sec
4.0
(Reference value)
l/min
See graph.
PC130-7
Model name
Category
Item
PC130-7
Unit
Standard value
Permissible value
Pump performance
Hydraulic pump performance
PC-EPC current: 400 mA

Pump speed: 2,000 rpm
Check point
Test pump discharge

pressure
(MPa{kg/cm2})
Standard discharge
(l/min)
Lower limit of
discharge
(l/min)
Any point
Q
(See graph)
Q
(See graph)
a Avoid measuring near a broken point of the graph, since the error becomes large at that point.
a When measuring without removing the pump from the machine, if the engine speed cannot be set to the specified speed with the fuel control dial, calculate the pump discharge pressure at the specified speed from the
engine speed and pump discharge at the time of measurement.
PC130-7
20-11
(1)

TOOLS FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................................... 20-102
TESTING AND ADJUSTING ENGINE SPEED .......................................................................................... 20-104
MEASURING EXHAUST GAS COLOR ..................................................................................................... 20-105
ADJUSTING VALVE CLEARANCE ........................................................................................................... 20-107
MEASURING COMPRESSION PRESSURE ............................................................................................. 20-109
MEASURING BLOW-BY PRESSURE ....................................................................................................... 20-110
MEASURING ENGINE OIL PRESSURE ................................................................................................... 20-111
TESTING AND ADJUSTING FOR FUEL INJECTION TIMING ................................................................ 20-112
ADJUSTING ENGINE SPEED SENSOR .................................................................................................. 20-116
TESTING AND ADJUSTING FAN BELT TENSION .................................................................................. 20-117
TESTING AND ADJUSTING AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR BELT TENSION .............................. 20-118
MEASURING CLEARANCE OF SWING CIRCLE BEARING .................................................................... 20-119
TESTING AND ADJUSTING TRACK SHOE TENSION ............................................................................ 20-120
TESTING AND ADJUSTING OIL PRESSURE IN WORK EQUIPMENT, SWING, AND TRAVEL CIRCUITS....... 20-122
MEASURING CONTROL CIRCUIT BASIC PRESSURE ........................................................................... 20-125
TESTING AND ADJUSTING OIL PRESSURE IN PUMP PC CONTROL CIRCUIT .................................. 20-126
TESTING AND ADJUSTING OIL PRESSURE IN PUMP LS CONTROL CIRCUIT .................................. 20-129
MEASURING SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT PRESSURE ......................................................................... 20-133
MEASURING PPC VALVE OUTPUT PRESSURE .................................................................................... 20-135
ADJUSTING PLAY OF WORK EQUIPMENT AND SWING PPC VALVES ............................................... 20-136
TESTING PARTS WHICH CAUSE HYDRAULIC DRIFT OF WORK EQUIPMENT .................................. 20-137
MEASURING OIL LEAKAGE ..................................................................................................................... 20-139
RELEASING RESIDUAL PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT ............................................................. 20-142
BLEEDING AIR FROM EACH PART ......................................................................................................... 20-143
TESTING PROCEDURE FOR DIODE ...................................................................................................... 20-146
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS OF MONITOR PANEL ......................................................................................... 20-147
PREPARATION WORK FOR TROUBLESHOOTING FOR ELECTRIC SYSTEM .................................... 20-166
PM-CLINIC SERVICE ................................................................................................................................. 20-167
PC130-7
20-101
(1)
TOOLS FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Testing and adjusting item
Measuring exhaust gas

color
Part No.
Part name
Q'ty
Symbol

Remarks
1 799-203-9000
Handy smoke
checker
Commercially
2 available
Smoke meter
Pollution level: 0 70% (With standard

color)
(Pollution level x 1/10 C Bosch index)
Commercially
available
Feeler gauge
(Air intake side: 0.35 mm, Exhaust side:

0.50 mm)
795-502-1205
Compression gauge
0 6.9MPa {0 70kg/cm2}
795-502-1370
Adapter
6204-11-3880
Gasket
799-201-1504
Blow-by checker
799-101-5002
Hydraulic tester
Pressure gauge: 2.5,5.9,39.2,58.8MPa

{25,60,400,600kg/cm2}
790-261-1203
Digital hydraulic
tester
Pressure gauge: 58.8MPa {600kg/cm2}
E 2 799-401-2320
Hydraulic tester
Pressure gauge: 0.98MPa {10kg/cm2}
Adapter
Size: 06
799-101-5220
Nipple
07002-11023
O-ring
Spring pusher
Adjusting valve clearance
Measuring compression
pressure
For 95E-3 engine
Measuring blow-by pressure
Measuring engine oil pressure
3 799-401-3500
4
Size: 10 x 1.25mm
1 795-102-2103
Measuring fuel injection
timing
For delivery valve method
Measuring clearance of
swing circle bearing
2 Commercially
available
Dial gauge
Commercially
available
Dial gauge
799-101-5002
Hydraulic tester
790-261-1203
Digital hydraulic
tester
799-101-5220
Nipple
07002-11023
O-ring
799-101-5002
Hydraulic tester
790-261-1203
Digital hydraulic
tester
799-101-5230
Nipple
07002-11423
O-ring
799-101-5002
Hydraulic tester
790-261-1203
Digital hydraulic
tester
799-101-5230
Nipple
07002-11423
O-ring
Testing and adjusting oil

pressure in work equipH
ment, swing, and travel circuits
* Same as E1
* Same as E4
1
Measuring control circuit
basic pressure
* Same as E1
Size: 14 x 1.5mm
1
pressure in pump PC control circuit
* Same as H (Only quantity is different)
20-102
(1)
PC130-7
Part name
Q'ty
Testing and adjusting item
Symbol
799-101-5002
Hydraulic tester
790-261-1203
Digital hydraulic
tester
799-101-5230
Nipple
07002-11423
O-ring
Differential pressure
gauge
799-101-5002
Hydraulic tester
790-261-1203
Digital hydraulic
tester
Adapter
799-101-5002
Hydraulic tester
790-261-1203
Digital hydraulic
tester
Adapter
Part No.
1
pressure in pump LS control circuit
1
M
2 799-401-3100
Measuring PPC valve output pressure
* Same as H (Only quantity is different)
3 799-401-2701
Measuring solenoid valve

output pressure
Remarks
1
N
2 799-401-3100
* Same as E1
Size: 03
* Same as E1
* Same as M2
Measuring oil leakage
Commercially
available
Measuring cylinder
Measuring water temperature and oil temperature
799-101-1502
Digital thermometer
-99.9 1,299C
Measuring operating effort

and pressing force
79A-264-0021 Push-pull scale
0 294N {0 30kg}
79A-264-0091 Push-pull scale
0 490N {0 50kg}
Measuring stroke and

hydraulic drift
Commercially
available
Scale
Measuring work equipment

speed
Commercially
available
Stopwatch
Measuring voltage and

resistance
Commercially
available
Circuit tester
a For the model names and part Nos. of the T-adapters and boxes used for troubleshooting for the monitor
panel, controllers, sensors, actuators, and wiring harnesses, see TROUBLESHOOTING, Layout of connectors and electric circuit diagram of each system.
PC130-7
20-103
(1)

ENGINE SPEED
MEASURING
1. Preparation work
1) Turn the starting switch ON and set the monitor panel in the "Monitoring function [02]" to
prepare for measurement of the engine
speed.
a For the operating method, see "Special
functions of monitor panel".
Monitoring code: 010 (Engine speed)
a The engine speed is displayed in rpm.
2) Warm up the engine to the following operating condition.
Engine coolant temperature: Within operating range
Hydraulic oil temperature: 45 55C
a Measure the engine speed with the working mode switch in the A-mode position.
TESTING AND ADJUSTING ENGINE SPEED
4. Measuring pump relief and one-touch power

maximizing speed
1) Set the fuel control dial in the high idling
(MAX) position.
2) Relieve the arm circuit by moving the arm IN,
keeping pressing the one-touch power maximizing switch, and measure the engine
speed.
a The one-touch power maximizing function is reset automatically in about 8.5
seconds even if the switch is kept held.
Accordingly, measure the engine speed
in that period.
5. Measuring auto-deceleration speed
1) Start the engine and set the fuel control dial
in the high idling position (MAX).
2) Set the work equipment control, swing control, and travel levers in neutral and measure
the engine speed.
a The engine speed lowers to a certain
level about 5 seconds after all the levers
are set in neutral. This level is the autodeceleration speed.
ADJUSTING
Adjusting governor spring
a If the high idling speed is out of the standard
range or the engine speed is unstable (the
engine hunts), adjust the governor spring with
"Governor adjustment function [03]" of the monitor panel.
a For the adjustment procedure, see SPECIAL
FUNCTIONS OF MONITOR PANEL.
1. Measuring low idling speed

1) Set the fuel control dial in the low idling (MIN)
position.
the engine speed.
2. Measuring high idling speed
1) Turn the auto-decelerator switch OFF.
(MAX) position.
the engine speed.
3. Measuring pump relief speed
(MAX) position.
2) Relieve the arm circuit by moving the arm IN
and measure the engine speed.
20-104
(1)
PC130-7
MEASURING EXHAUST GAS COLOR
MEASURING EXHAUST GAS

COLOR
a Measuring instruments for exhaust gas color
Symbol
A
Part No.
2. Measuring with smoke meter A2

1) Insert probe [1] of smoke meter A2 in the
outlet of exhaust pipe (1) and fix it to the
exhaust pipe with a clip.
Part name
799-201-9000
Handy Smoke Checker
Commercially
available
Smoke Meter
k When installing and removing the measuring

instruments, take care not to touch a hot part.
a If an air source and an electric power source are
not available in the field, use handy smoke
checker A1. When recording official data, use
smoke meter A2.
1. Measuring with handy smoke checker A1
1) Stick a sheet of filter paper to smoke checker
A1.
2) Insert the exhaust gas intake pipe in exhaust
pipe (1).
3) Run the engine.
4) Accelerate the engine suddenly or run it at
high idling and operate the handle of smoke
checker A1 so that the filter paper will absorb
the exhaust gas.
2) Connect the probe hose, receptacle of the

accelerator switch, and air hose to smoke
meter A2.
a Limit the supplied air pressure to 1.5
MPa {15 kg/cm2}.
3) Connect the power cable to a receptacle of
AC 100 V.
a Before connecting the cable, check that
the power switch of the smoke meter is
turned OFF.
4) Loosen the cap nut of the suction pump and
fit the filter paper.
a Fit the filter paper securely so that the
exhaust gas will not leak.
5) Turn on the power switch of smoke meter
A2.
5) Remove the filter paper and compare it with

the attached scale.
6) After finishing measurement, remove the
measuring instrument and return the
removed parts.
6) Start the engine and heighten the engine
coolant temperature to the operating range.
PC130-7
20-105
(1)
MEASURING EXHAUST GAS COLOR
7) Accelerate the engine suddenly or run it at

high idling and press the accelerator pedal of
smoke meter A2 and collect the exhaust gas
into the filter paper.
8) Place the contaminated filter paper on the
clean filter paper (at least 10 sheets) in the
filter paper holder and read the indicated
value.
measuring instrument and return the
removed parts.
20-106
(1)
PC130-7
ADJUSTING VALVE CLEARANCE
ADJUSTING VALVE
CLEARANCE
a Adjusting instrument for valve clearance
Symbol
Part No.
Commercially
available
4. While the No. 1 cylinder is at the compression

top dead center, adjust the valve clearances
marked with q in the valve arrangement drawing
according to the following procedure.
Part name
Feeler gauger
1. Open the engine hood and remove all cylinder

head covers (1).
2. Remove the engine undercover (on the radiator

side).
3. Rotate the crankshaft forward to bring the
stamped "1.4TOP" line (a) of the crank pulley to
pointer (2) and set the No. 1 cylinder to the compression top dead center.
a Crank the crankshaft with the crank pulley
mounting bolt.
a There are 2 stamped "1.4TOP" lines on the
crank pulley. Use the one at the diagonal
position of "2.3TOP".
a When the No. 1 cylinder is at the compression top dead center, the rocker arm of the
No. 1 cylinder can be moved by the valve
clearance with the hand. If the rocker arm
cannot be moved, the No. 1 cylinder is not at
the compression top dead center. In this
case, rotate the crankshaft one more turn.
1) Insert feeler gauge B in clearance (b)

between rocker arm (3) and valve stem (4)
and adjust the clearance with adjustment
screw (5).
a With the feeler gauge inserted, turn the
adjustment screw to a degree that you
can move the filler gauge lightly.
2) Secure adjustment screw (5) and tighten
locknut (6).
3 Locknut: 39.2 49 Nm {4 5 kgm}
a After tightening the locknut, check the
valve clearance again.
a After adjusting all of the valves marked
with q, go to the next procedure.

PC130-7
20-107
(1)
ADJUSTING VALVE CLEARANCE
6. While the No. 4 cylinder is at the compression

top dead center, adjust the valve clearances
marked with Q in the valve arrangement drawing.
a Adjust the valve clearance according to step
4 above.
7. After finishing adjustment, return the removed
parts.
3 Cylinder head cover mounting bolt:

7.84 9.8 Nm {0.8 1.0 kgm}
20-108
(1)
PC130-7
MEASURING COMPRESSION PRESSURE
MEASURING COMPRESSION
PRESSURE
a Measuring instruments for compression pressure
Symbol
C
Part No.
Part name
795-502-1205
Compression gauge
795-502-1370
Adapter
6204-11-3880
Gasket
a When measuring the compression pressure,

take care not to burn yourself on the exhaust
manifold, muffler, etc. or get caught in a rotating
part.
6. Remove governor spring (2).
1. Adjust the valve clearance.
a See Adjusting valve clearance.
7. Put governor lever (3) of the fuel injection pump

to the STOP side stopper and fix it.
2. Warm up the engine until the engine oil temperature is 40 60C.

3. Prepare for measuring the engine speed.
a See Testing and adjusting engine speed.
4. Open the engine hood and remove nozzle holder
(1) of the cylinder to measure the compression
pressure.
8. Crank the engine with the starting motor and

measure the compression pressure.
a Read the compression gauge when its
pointer is stabilized.
a When measuring the compression pressure,
measure the engine speed, too, and check
that it is in the measurement condition range.
5. Install adapter [1] of compression gauge C to the

mounting part of the nozzle holder and connect
gauge [2].
a Install the gasket to the end of the adapter.
a Secure the adapter with the clamping holder
and mounting bolt for the nozzle holder.
3 Mounting bolt: 39.2 49 Nm {4 5 kgm}
PC130-7
9. After finishing measurement, remove the measuring instruments and return the removed parts.
a Check that the fulcrum of the clamping
holder for the nozzle holder is seated on the
cylinder head, and then tighten the mounting
bolt.
3 Mounting bolt: 39.2 49 Nm {4 5 kgm}
20-109
(1)
MEASURING BLOW-BY PRESSURE
MEASURING BLOW-BY
PRESSURE
a Measuring instruments for blow-by pressure
Symbol
Part No.
799-201-1504
5. Run the engine at high idling and measure the

blow-by pressure.
Working mode: A
Work equipment, swing, and travel circuit:
Relieve the travel circuit.
Part name
Blow-by checker
1. Remove the engine undercover (on the flywheel

side).
2. Install nozzle [1] of blow-by checker C to the end
of blow-by hose (1) and connect it to gauge [2].
3. Start the engine and lock the travel mechanism.
k Put pin [3] between the sprocket and track

frame to lock the travel mechanism
securely.
4. Start the engine and warm it up to the operating

range.
Engine coolant temperature: Within operating range
Hydraulic oil temperature: 45 55C
20-110
(1)
PC130-7
MEASURING ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
MEASURING ENGINE OIL

PRESSURE
5. Measure the oil pressure during low idling and

high idling.
a Measuring instruments for engine oil pressure

Symbol
1
E
2
3
4
Part No.
Part name
799-101-5002
Hydraulic tester
790-261-1203
Digital hydraulic tester
799-401-2320
Hydraulic tester
799-401-3500
Adapter (Size: 06)
799-101-5220
Nipple (10 x 1.25 mm)
07002-11023
O-ring
1. Open the pump room cover and disconnect outlet hose (1) of the engine oil filter.
2. Install adapter E3 and connect the disconnected

hose again.
3. Install nipple E4 and connect it to hydraulic tester
E2.
4. Start the engine and heighten the engine coolant

temperature to the operating range.
PC130-7
20-111
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING FOR FUEL INJECTION TIMING

FOR FUEL INJECTION TIMING
a Testing and adjusting instruments for fuel injection timing (for delivery valve method)
Symbol
F
Part No.
Part name
795-102-2103
Spring pusher
Commercially
available
Dial gauge
TESTING AND ADJUSTING BY MATCH MARK

METHOD
a After removing and installing the fuel injection
pump without repairing it or when only checking
the injection timing, test and adjust the injection
timing according to the following procedure.
TESTING
head covers (1).
4. Remove cover (3) of the fuel injection pump

drive shaft.
5. Insert pin [1] in the mounting bolt hole of the front
cover (on the outside of the engine) to check the
fuel injection timing.
a Use a pin 4.0 4.5 mm in diameter and
about 80 mm in length.
a If the pin enters smoothly to inside of the
drive gear of the fuel injection pump, the fuel
injection timing is normal. In this case, return
the removed parts.
a If the pin touches the drive gear of the fuel
pump, the fuel injection timing is abnormal.
In this case, adjust the fuel injection timing.

side).
mounting bolt.
20-112
(1)
ADJUSTING
a If the fuel injection timing is abnormal, adjust it
1. Remove the fuel pump, holder, and drive gear
together.
a See DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY,
Removal, installation of fuel pump assembly.
PC130-7
2. Remove bolt (3) and fix drive gear (4) to holder

(5) with fixing bolt [2].
a As fixing bolt [2], use a bolt 6 mm in thread
diameter and 35 mm in length.
a Pass the fixing bolt through the screw hole of
bolt (3) and tighten it into the screw hole of
the drive gear, and the fuel injection pump is
fixed in the fuel injection timing.
ADJUSTING BY DELIVERY VALVE METHOD

a After repairing or replacing the fuel injection
pump or timing gear, adjust the injection timing
ADJUSTING
a Apply the delivery valve method to only adjustment of the injection timing.
head covers (1).
3. Install the fuel injection pump, holder, and drive

gear together.
a See DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY,
Removal, installation of fuel pump assembly.
a After installing the fuel injection pump temporarily, check the fuel injection timing according to the above described procedure.
4. After finishing adjustment, remove the measuring tools and return the removed parts.
k Be sure to remove pin [1] and fixing bolt [2].
7.84 9.8 Nm {0.8 1.0 kgm}
PC130-7

side).
mounting bolt.
20-113
(1)
4. Remove snap ring (6) of the rocker arm shaft on

the No. 1 cylinder side, and then remove rocker
arm (7) of the No. 1 air intake valve.
a Remove the valve stem cap, too.
8. Install dial gauge F2 on the valve stem of No. 1

air intake valve (11) and set it to the 0 point.
a Since the No. 1 cylinder is at the compression top dead center, set this point as the 0
point.
9. Rotate the crankshaft about 45 in reverse.
5. Using spring pusher F1, remove valve cotter (8)

of the No. 1 air intake valve.
6. Loosen spring pusher F1 and remove seat (9)
and spring (10).
7. While No. 1 air intake valve (11) is in contact with

the top of piston (12), turn the valve stem with
the hand to press No. 1 air intake valve (11)
against the piston.
a Since the piston stroke will be measured at
the valve stem top, check that the valve bottom is in contact with the piston top securely.
20-114
(1)
10. Rotate the crankshaft forward slowly so that dial

gauge F2 will indicate fuel injection timing dimension (a).
a When adjusting the crankshaft to fuel injection timing dimension (a), be sure to rotate it
forward so that the adjustment will not be
affected by the backlash of the drive gear. (If
the crankshaft passes the adjustment dimension, return it sufficiently, and then adjust it
again forward.)
a Fuel injection timing dimension (a) and fuel
injection timing
dimension (a)
(Reference)
mm
0.42 0.08
6 0.75
11. Disconnect all of connected fuel injection tubes

(12), if there are any.
PC130-7
12. Remove delivery valve holder (14) for the No. 1

cylinder of fuel pump (13), delivery valve (15),
and spring (16), and then install delivery valve
holder (14) again.
13. Remove governor spring (17), and then put the

governor lever (18) of the fuel injection pump to
the stopper on the FULL side and fix it.
16. Tighten 4 mounting nuts (19) of fuel injection

pump (13) securely and alternately.
17. After finishing adjustment, remove the adjusting

tools and return the removed parts.
a Replace the O-ring and copper gasket of the
delivery valve with new ones.
k Tighten the delivery valve securely in 3
times. (If it is not tightened sufficiently, the
gasket may be broken.)
3 Delivery valve holder:
39.2 44.1 Nm {4 4.5 kgm}
3 Fuel injection tube sleeve nut:
19.6 24.5 Nm {2 2.5 kgm}
14. Remove the fixing bracket and lubrication tube of

fuel injection pump (13), loosen 4 mounting nuts
(19), and lean the fuel injection pump outward
fully.
a Loosen the mounting nuts to a degree that
the fuel injection pump can be moved in and
out within the range of the oblong hole (Do
not loosen them so much that the fuel injection pump will have play).

7.84 9.8 Nm {0.8 1.0 kgm}
a After finishing adjustment, if the stamped
lines of the fuel injection pump and holder
are not at the same position or there is not a
stamped line on the fuel injection pump,
stamp a new line to show that the fuel injection timing has been adjusted.
15. Operating priming pump (20) of fuel injection

pump 13, move the injection pump gradually
toward the cylinder block and stop when the fuel
stops flowing out of No. 1 delivery valve holder
(14), and then tighten the mounting nuts temporarily.
a The position where fuel stops flowing out of
the No. 1 delivery valve holder is the position
to start fuel injection in the No. 1 cylinder
(fuel injection timing).
PC130-7
20-115
(1)
ADJUSTING ENGINE SPEED

SENSOR
a If the engine speed sensor has been removed
and installed or its signal contains an error,
adjust it according to the following procedure.
a Remove engine speed sensor (1) before adjusting it and check that its tip is free from steel chips
(The engine speed sensor is installed to the right
side of the flywheel housing).
ADJUSTING ENGINE SPEED SENSOR
4. After finishing adjustment, check that the monitor

panel displays the engine speed normally in the
"Monitoring mode".
a For the operating method, see "Special functions of monitor panel".
Monitoring code: 010 (Engine speed)
1. Screw in sensor (1) until its tip touches the tooth

tip of flywheel ring gear (2).
2 Threads: Gasket sealant (LG-6)
2. Return sensor (1) by the specified angle.

a Returning angle of sensor: 1 1/6 turn
a After this adjustment, clearance (a) between
the sensor tip and gear tooth tip is 1.25
1.75 mm.
2 Nut: 49 68.6 Nm {5 7 kgm}
3. Fixing sensor (1), tighten nut (3).
20-116
(1)
PC130-7
TESTING AND ADJUSTING FAN BELT TENSION

FAN BELT TENSION
ADJUSTING
a If the deflection of the belt is abnormal, adjust it
TESTING
1. Open the engine hood and remove the belt cover
from above the alternator.
1. Loosen alternator mounting bolts (1) and (2).
2. Press the intermediate point of the belt between

the fan pulley and alternator pulley with a finger
and measure deflection (a) of the belt.
Force to press belt: Approx. 58.8 N {6 kg}
Deflection (a): 6 10 mm
2. Adjust the belt tension by moving alternator (5)

with adjustment bolt (4).
a Turn the adjusting belt to left, the belt tension
tight.
3. Tighten locknut (3) and mounting bolts (2) and
(1).
a Check breakage of the pulleys, wear of the
V-grooves, and contact of the belts and Vgrooves.
a If a belt is lengthened to the adjustment limit,
cut, or cracked, replace it with new one.
4. After finishing adjustment, return the covers.

a If a V-belt is replaced, adjust its tension again
after 1 operating hour.
PC130-7
20-117
(1)

AIR CONDITIONER
COMPRESSOR BELT
TENSION
TESTING
1. Open the engine hood and remove the belt cover
from above the air conditioner compressor.
2. Press the intermediate point of the belt between
the fan pulley and alternator pulley with a finger
and measure deflection "a" of the belt.
Force to press belt: Approx. 58.8 N {6 kg}
Deflection (a): 6 10 mm
TESTING AND ADJUSTING AIR CONDITIONER

COMPRESSOR BELT TENSION
ADJUSTING
a If the deflection of the belt is abnormal, adjust it
1. Loosen compressor bracket mounting bolts (1)
and (2).
2. Adjust the belt tension by moving compressor (3)
and bracket (4) together.
a Use a bar, etc. to move the bracket (Do not
push the compressor directly with a bar, etc.)
3. Tighten mounting bolts (2) and (1).
a Check breakage of the pulleys, wear of the
V-grooves, and contact of the belts and Vgrooves.
a If a belt is lengthened to the adjustment limit,
cut, or cracked, replace it with new one.
4. After finishing adjustment, return the covers.

a If a V-belt is replaced, adjust its tension again
after 1 operating hour.
20-118
(1)
PC130-7
MEASURING CLEARANCE OF SWING CIRCLE BEARING
MEASURING CLEARANCE OF
SWING CIRCLE BEARING
a Measuring instrument for clearance of swing circle bearing
Symbol
Part No.
Commercially
available
Part name
Dial gauge
a When measuring the clearance of the swing circle bearing on the actual machine, observe the
following procedure.
k While measuring, do not put your hands or foot
under the undercarriage.
1. Fix dial gauge G to outer race (1) or inner race
(2) of the swing circle and apply the probe to the
end face of inner race (2) or outer race (1) on the
opposite side.
a Set dial gauge G on the front or at rear side
of the machine
4. Set the arm at almost a right angle to the ground

and lower the boom until the track shoe at the
front side of the machine is floated.
a At this time, the front end of the upper structure rises and the rear end lowers.
5. Under this condition, read dial gauge G.
a Dial gauge G indicates the clearance of the
bearing.
2. Set the work equipment in the maximum reach

posture and set the bucket tip to the height of the
revolving frame bottom.
a At this time, the front end of the upper structure lowers and the rear end rises.
6. Return the machine to the posture of step 2 and

check that dial gauge G indicates 0 again.
a If dial gauge G does not indicate 0, repeat
steps 3 5.
3. Set the dial gauge G to the 0 point.
PC130-7
20-119
(1)

TRACK SHOE TENSION
TESTING
1. Running the engine at low idling, move the
machine forward by the length of track on ground
and stop slowly.
2. Place straight bar [1] on the track shoe between
the idler and the 1st carrier roller.
a As straight bar [1], use an L-shape steel, etc.
which will be deflected less.
3. Measure maximum clearance (a) between
straight bar [1] and track shoe.
Standard maximum clearance (a):
10 30 mm
TESTING AND ADJUSTING TRACK SHOE TENSION
ADJUSTING
a If the track shoe tension is out of the standard
range, adjust it according to the following procedure.
1. When tension is too high
1) Loosen valve (1) gradually to discharge the
grease.
k Since the valve may jump out because

of the high-pressure grease in it, do not
loosen it more than 1 turn.
a If the grease is not discharged well, drive
the machine forward and in reverse
slowly.
2) Tighten valve (1).
3 Valve: 58.8 88.2 Nm {6 9 kgm}
3) After finishing adjustment, check again that
the track shoe tension is normal according to
the above described procedure.
2. When tension is low

1) Add grease through valve (2).
a If the track shoe is not tensed well, drive
the machine forward and in reverse
slowly.
the track shoe tension is normal according to
the above described procedure.
20-120
(1)
PC130-7
TESTING AND ADJUSTING TRACK SHOE TENSION
a You may supply grease until distance (b)

between the idler guide and track frame end
is 0 mm. If the tension is still low, the pin and
bushing are worn excessively. In this case,
turn over or replace the pin and bushing.
PC130-7
20-121
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING OIL PRESSURE IN WORK EQUIPMENT,

SWING, AND TRAVEL CIRCUITS

OIL PRESSURE IN WORK
EQUIPMENT, SWING, AND
TRAVEL CIRCUITS
a Testing and adjusting instruments for oil pressure
in work equipment, swing, and travel circuits
Symbol
1
H
2
Part No.
Part name
799-101-5002
Hydraulic tester
790-261-1203
799-101-5220
07002-11023
O-ring
a The oil pressure in work equipment, swing, and

travel circuits (pump discharge pressure) can be
checked with monitoring function [02] of the
monitor panel.
Monitoring code: 011, 012 (Pump discharge
pressure)
a The pump discharge pressure is displayed in 1
kg/cm2.
2) Install nipple H2 and connect it to oil pressure gauge [1] of hydraulic tester H1.
a Use the oil pressure gauges of 58.8 MPa
{600 kg/cm2}.
3) Run the engine and heighten the hydraulic

oil temperature to 45 55C.
MEASURING
1. Preparation work
k Lower the work equipment to the ground

and stop the engine. Operate the control
levers several times to release the residual
pressure in the piping, and then loosen the
oil filler cap of the hydraulic tank slowly to
release the internal pressure of the hydraulic tank.
1) Remove the top cover of the control valve,
and then remove pump pressure pickup plug
(1) from the top of the control valve.
20-122
(1)
2. Measuring unload pressure

1) Start the engine.
2) Run the engine at high idling and set all the
control levers in neutral and measure the oil
pressure.
a The pressure measured when the unload
valve is unloaded is indicated.
PC130-7

3. Measuring work equipment circuit relief pressure

1) Start the engine and move the cylinder to be
measured to the stroke end.
2) Run the engine at high idling and relieve the
cylinder and measure the oil pressure.
a The pressure measured when the main relief
valve is relieved is indicated.
a If the one-touch power maximizing switch is
released, the main relief valve is relieved at
low pressure. If the former is pressed, the
latter is relieved at high pressure.
a If the swing lock switch is set in the LOCK
position, the 2-stage relief solenoid valve is
turned ON and the main relief valve is
relieved at high pressure. Accordingly, keep
the swing lock switch turned OFF.
ADJUSTING
a The unload valve cannot be adjusted.
1. Adjusting main relief pressure (High pressure setting side)
a If the high relief pressure of the work equipment circuit and travel circuit is abnormal,
adjust the high pressure setting side of main
relief valve (2) according to the following procedure.
a The high relief pressure is the pressure
applied when the 2-stage relief solenoid
valve is turned ON and the pilot pressure is
applied to the selector port.
4. Measuring swing circuit relief pressure

1) Start the engine and set the swing lock
switch in the LOCK position.
swing circuit and measure the oil pressure.
a The pressure measured when the swing
motor safety valve is relieved is indicated.
a The swing motor relief pressure is lower than
the main relief pressure.
5. Measuring travel circuit relief pressure
1) Start the engine and lock the travel mechanism.
k Set pin [2] between the sprocket and
track frame to lock the travel mechanism securely.
1) Disconnect pilot hose (3).

2) Fixing holder (4), loosen locknut (5).
3) Turn holder (4) to adjust the pressure.
a If the holder is
turned to the right, the pressure
rises.
turned to the left, the pressure lowers.
a Quantity of adjustment per turn of holder:
Approx. 12.6 MPa {Approx. 128 kg/cm2}
4) Fixing holder (4), tighten locknut (5).
3 Locknut: 39.2 49 Nm {4 5 kgm}

travel circuit and measure the oil pressure.
a The pressure measured when the main relief
valve is relieved is indicated. The travel circuit is always relieved at high pressure.
5) Connect pilot hose (3).
PC130-7
20-123
(1)

6) After finishing adjustment, check again that the

pressure is normal according to the above
described measurement procedure.
a If the high pressure setting side is adjusted,
the low pressure setting side changes.
Accordingly, adjust the low pressure setting
side, too.
2. Adjusting main relief pressure (Low pressure
setting side)
a If the low relief pressure of the work equipment circuit is abnormal or the high pressure
setting was adjusted, adjust the low pressure
setting side of main relief valve (2) according
to the following procedure.
a The low relief pressure is the pressure
applied when the 2-stage relief solenoid
valve is turned OFF and the pilot pressure is
not applied to the selector port.
1) Disconnect pilot hose (3).
2) Fixing holder (6), loosen locknut (7).
3) Turn holder (6) to adjust the pressure.
a If the holder is
rises.
a Quantity of adjustment per turn of holder:
Approx. 12.6 MPa {Approx. 128 kg/cm2}
4) Fixing holder (6), tighten locknut (7).
3 Locknut:
53.9 63.7 Nm {5.5 6.5 kgm}
5) Connect pilot hose (3).

the pressure is normal according to the
above described measurement procedure.
20-124
(1)
3. Adjusting swing relief pressure

a If the relief pressure of the swing circuit is
abnormal, adjust swing motor safety valve
(8) according to the following procedure.
1) Fixing adjustment screw (9), loosen locknut

(10).
2) Turn adjustment screw (9) to adjust the pressure.
a If the adjustment screw is
rises.
a Quantity of adjustment per turn of adjustment screw: Approx. 14 MPa {Approx.
143 kg/cm2}
3) Fixing adjustment screw (9), tighten locknut
(10).
3 Locknut:
53.9 73.5 Nm {5.5 7.5 kgm}

the pressure is normal according to the
above described measurement procedure.
PC130-7
MEASURING CONTROL CIRCUIT BASIC PRESSURE
MEASURING CONTROL
CIRCUIT BASIC PRESSURE
a Measuring instruments for control circuit basic
pressure
Symbol
1
J
2
Part No.
4. Run the engine at high idling and set all the control levers in neutral and measure the oil pressure.
Part name
799-101-5002
Hydraulic tester
790-261-1203
799-101-5230
07002-11423
O-ring
k Lower the work equipment to the ground and

stop the engine. Operate the control levers
several times to release the residual pressure
in the piping, and then loosen the oil filler cap of
the hydraulic tank slowly to release the internal
pressure of the hydraulic tank.
1. Open the pump room cover and remove control
circuit basic pressure pickup plug (1) under the
hydraulic pump.
a Do not adjust the relief valve for the control circuit basic pressure is not adjustable.
2. Install nipple J2 and connect it to oil pressure

gauge [1] of hydraulic tester J1.
a Use the oil pressure gauges of 5.9 MPa {60
kg/cm2}.
3. Run the engine and heighten the hydraulic oil

temperature to 45 55C.
PC130-7
20-125
(1)
TESTING AND ADJUSTING OIL PRESSURE

IN PUMP PC CONTROL CIRCUIT

OIL PRESSURE IN PUMP PC
CONTROL CIRCUIT
(2): PC valve output pressure pickup plug (at

top of hydraulic pump)

in pump PC control circuit
Symbol
1
K
2
Part No.
Part name
799-101-5002
Hydraulic tester
790-261-1203
799-101-5220
07002-11023
O-ring
MEASURING
Measuring PC valve output pressure (servo piston inlet pressure)
a Before measuring the PC valve output pressure
(servo piston inlet pressure), check that the oil
pressure in the work equipment, swing, and
travel circuits and the basic pressure in the control circuit are normal.
a Measure the PC valve output pressure (servo
piston inlet pressure) and pump discharge pressure simultaneously and compare them.
3. Install nipple K2 and connect it to oil pressure

gauge [1] of hydraulic tester K1.
a Use the oil pressure gauge of 58.8 MPa {600
kg/cm2}.
The drawing shows the pump discharge
pressure side.

1. Remove the top cover of the control valve and
open the pump room cover.
2. Remove oil pressure pickup plugs (1) and (2).
(1): Pump discharge pressure pickup plug (at
top of control valve)
The drawing shows the PC valve output

pressure side.

20-126
(1)
PC130-7

ADJUSTING
Adjusting PC valve
a If either of the following phenomena occurs and
the PC valve seems to be defective, adjust PC
valve (3) according to the procedure shown
below.
As the working load increases, the engine
speed lowers remarkably.
The engine speed is normal but the work
equipment speed is low.
a The figure shows the hydraulic pump seen from
the front side of the machine.
5. While running the engine at high idling, measure

the pump discharge pressure and PC valve output pressure (servo piston inlet pressure) simultaneously.
Working mode: A
Swing lock switch: LOCK (2-stage relief
valve is turned ON and relief pressure is set
high)
Work equipment, swing, and travel circuits:
Relieve arm circuit by moving arm IN.
a Method of judgment:
If the pump discharge pressure and PC valve
output pressure (servo piston output pressure) are in the following ratio, they are normal.
Measured oil pressure
Ratio of oil pressure
Pump discharge pressure
PC valve output pressure

(Servo piston inlet
pressure)
Approx. 3/5
a If the PC valve or the servo piston is abnormal, the PC valve output pressure (servo piston inlet pressure) is "the same as the pump
discharge pressure" or "almost 0".
1. Loosen hose fixing (4).

2. Fixing sleeve (5), loosen locknut (6).
3. Turn sleeve (5) to the right or left to adjust the
pump absorption torque.
a If the sleeve is
turned to the right, the pump absorption
torque increases.
turned to the left, the pump absorption
torque decreases.
a Limit the turning angle of the sleeve to the
following range.
Right turning: Max. 1 turn (360)
Left turning: Max. 1/2 turn (180)
a Change of servo piston stroke per turn of
sleeve: 1.5 mm
3 Locknut: 88 113 Nm {9 11.5 kgm}
4. Fixing sleeve (5), tighten locknut (6).
PC130-7
20-127
(1)

5. Tighten hose fixing nut (4).
6. After finishing adjustment, check that the pressure is normal according to the above described
procedure.
20-128
(1)
PC130-7

IN PUMP LS CONTROL CIRCUIT

OIL PRESSURE IN PUMP LS
CONTROL CIRCUIT
(2): LS valve output pressure pickup

plug (at top of hydraulic pump)

in pump LS control circuit
Symbol
1
L
2
3
Part No.
Part name
799-101-5002
Hydraulic tester
790-261-1203
799-101-5220
07002-11023
O-ring
799-400-2701
Differential pressure gauge
MEASURING
1. Measuring LS valve output pressure (servo
piston inlet pressure)
a Before measuring the LS valve output pressure (servo piston inlet pressure), check that
the oil pressure in the work equipment,
swing, and travel circuits and the basic pressure in the control circuit are normal.
a Measure the LS valve output pressure (servo
piston inlet pressure) and pump discharge
pressure simultaneously and compare them.
k Lower the work equipment to the ground
and stop the engine. Operate the control
levers several times to release the residual
pressure in the piping, and then loosen the
oil filler cap of the hydraulic tank slowly to
release the internal pressure of the hydraulic tank.
1) Remove the top cover of the control valve
and open the pump room cover.
2) Remove oil pressure pickup plugs (1) and
(2).
(1): Pump discharge pressure pickup
plug (at top of control valve)
PC130-7
3) Install nipple L2 and connect it to oil pressure

gauge [1] of hydraulic tester L1.
a Use the oil pressure gauge of 58.8 MPa
{600 kg/cm2}.
The drawing shows the pump discharge
pressure side.
The drawing shows the LS valve output

pressure side.
20-129
(1)


oil temperature to 45 55C, and then push
up the track shoe on either side with the work
equipment.

measuring instruments and return the
removed parts.
5) While running the engine at high idling, measure the pump discharge pressure and LS
valve output pressure (servo piston inlet
pressure) simultaneously.
Working mode: A
Travel speed switch: Hi
Set all levers in neutral and run track
shoe on one side idle.
k Checking the safety around the
machine, run the track shoe pushed up
idle.
a Method of judgment:
If the pump discharge pressure and LS
valve output pressure (servo piston output pressure) are in the following ratio,
they are normal.
2. Measuring LS differential pressure

a Measure the pump discharge pressure and
LS pressure (actuator load pressure) simultaneously and calculate the difference
between them.
1) Remove the top cover of the control valve
and remove oil pressure pickup plugs (1) and
(3).
(1): Pump discharge pressure pickup
plug
(3): LS pressure pickup plug
Pump
LS valve
discharge output Ratio of oil presTravel lever pressure pressure
sure
MPa {kg/cm2}
Neutral
2.90.5
{305}
2.90.5
{305}
Almost same
pressure
(1:1)
Full (Idle
running)
7.82.0
{8020}
4.41.0
{4510}
Almost 3/5
(1:0.6)
20-130
(1)
PC130-7
2) Install nipple L2 and connect it to the oil

pressure gauge of hydraulic tester L1.
a When using differential pressure gauge:
Connect the pump discharge pressure to
the high pressure side (back side) and
connect the LS pressure to the low pressure side (lower side).
Since the differential pressure gauge
needs a 12-V power source, connect it to
a battery.
a When using oil pressure gauge:
Use the oil pressure gauge of 58.8 MPa
{600 kg/cm2}.
Since the differential pressure is about
2.9 MPa {30 kg/cm2} at maximum, measure it by installing the same gauge to
the pickup plugs alternately.

4) While running the engine at high idling, measure the pump discharge pressure and LS
valve output pressure (servo piston inlet
pressure) simultaneously.
Working mode: A
Travel speed switch: Hi
Set all levers in neutral and run track
shoe on one side idle.
k Checking the safety around the
machine, run the track shoe pushed up
idle.
a Calculation of LS differential pressure
(when oil pressure gauge is used):
LS differential pressure = Pump discharge pressure - LS pressure
a If the LS differential pressure is as follows, it is normal.
Travel lever
Neutral
in neutral
(See standard values
table)
Specified LS differential
pressure
Full (Idle running)
(See standard values
table)

oil temperature to 45 55C, and then push
up the track shoe on either side with the work
equipment.

measuring instruments and return the
removed parts.
PC130-7
20-131
(1)
ADJUSTING
Adjusting LS valve
a If the LS differential pressure is abnormal, adjust
LS valve (4) according to the procedure shown
below.
a The figure shows the hydraulic pump seen from
the front side of the machine.

6. After finishing adjustment, check that the pressure is normal according to the above described
procedure.
1. Loosen hose sleeve nut (4).

2. Fixing plug (5), loosen locknut (6).
3. Turn plug (5) to adjust the differential pressure.
a If the plug is
turned to the right, the differential pressure rises.
turned to the left, the differential pressure
lowers.
a Quantity of adjustment (LS differential pressure) per turn of plug:
1,304 kPa {13.3 kg/cm2}
a Tighten the hose sleeve nut (4) temporarily
and turn the plug, while checking the LS differential pressure.
3 Locknut: 98 122.5 Nm {10 12.5 kgm}
4. Fixing plug (5), tighten locknut (6).
5. Tighten hose sleeve nut (4).
20-132
(1)
PC130-7
MEASURING SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT PRESSURE
MEASURING SOLENOID
VALVE OUTPUT PRESSURE
a Measuring instruments for solenoid valve output
pressure
Symbol
M
Part No.
1
2

kg/cm2}.
a The figure shows the measuring instruments
connected to the outlet hose of the 2-stage
relief solenoid valve.
Part name
799-101-5002
Hydraulic tester
790-261-1203
799-401-3100
Adapter (Size 02)
a Before measuring the solenoid valve output

pressure, check that the basic pressure in the
control circuit is normal.


1. Remove the undercover of the control valve and

disconnect outlet hoses (1) (4) of the solenoid
valves to be measured.
No.
1
Solenoid valve to be measured

Travel speed solenoid valve
PPC pressure lock solenoid valve
a Since outlet hose (4) of the PPC pressure

lock solenoid valve has a quick coupler,
measure the output pressure on the PPC
valve side.
2. Install adapter M2 and connect the disconnected

hose again.
5. Run the engine at high idling, operate the control

levers and switches to turn the solenoid valve
ON or OFF, and measure the oil pressure.
a For the conditions for turning the solenoid
valve ON and OFF, see the operations table
of each solenoid valve.
a The operating condition of the solenoid valve
can be also checked with the monitoring
function [02] of the monitor panel (excluding
the PPC pressure lock solenoid valve).
a If the output pressure is as follows, the solenoid valve is normal.
Solenoid valve
Output pressure
OFF
(Deenergized)
0 MPa {0kg/cm2}
ON (Energized)
Almost same as control basic

pressure
(See standard values table)
3. Install nipple [1] of hydraulic tester M1 and connect it to hydraulic gauge [2].
PC130-7
20-133
(1)
MEASURING SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT PRESSURE
Operation table of 2-stage relief solenoid valve
Operation
Operating condition
One-touch power maximizing switch: ON (8.5-sec timer)
Tr avel signal
ON
Swing lock switch

Other than above condition
OFF
Operation table of swing holding brake solenoid valve

Operation
Operating condition
Work equipment, swing, and travel signals
Any one is turned ON
ON
Swing holding brake release switch: RELEASE (Upper) position

OFF
Operation table of travel speed brake solenoid valve

Operating condition
Operation
Travel speed switch: Lo

Auto shift function operates during run at Hi
Engine speed: Below 1,500 rpm

Pump pressure: Above 30.4 MPa {310 kg/cm2}
OFF
Overheat prevention function operates during run

Hydraulic oil temperature: Above 95C
at Hi
ON
Operation table of PPC pressure lock solenoid valve

Operating condition
Safety lock lever
20-134
(1)
Operation
LOCK position
OFF
FREE position
ON
PC130-7
MEASURING PPC VALVE OUTPUT PRESSURE
MEASURING PPC VALVE

OUTPUT PRESSURE
a Measuring instruments for PPC valve output
pressure
Symbol
Part No.
Part name
799-101-5002
Hydraulic tester
790-261-1203
a Before measuring the PPC valve output pressure, check that the basic pressure in the control
circuit is normal.

a Since PPC oil pressure switches (10) and

(11) are installed in the battery room, open
the battery room cover.
1. Disconnect PPC oil pressure switches (1) (4)

of the circuit to be measured.
No. Circuit to be measured No. Circuit to be measured
1
Boom RAISE (S06)
Swing RIGHT (S07)
Boom LOWER (S02)
Swing LEFT (S03)
Arm IN (S04)
Travel (S30)
Arm OUT (S04)
1ATT on front side

10 (S10)
Bucket CURL (S08)
1ATT on rear side

11 (S11)
Bucket DUMP (S01)
a Since PPC oil pressure switches (1) (8) are

installed in the battery room, open the battery room cover.
a Since PPC oil pressure switch (9) is installed

on the under side of the floor frame, remove
the cab undercover (on the front side).
PC130-7
2. Install nipple [1] of hydraulic tester N and connect it to oil pressure gauge [2].
kg/cm2}.
a The figure shows the measuring instruments
installed to the mounting part of the swing
LEFT PPC pressure switch.

20-135
(1)
MEASURING SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT PRESSURE,

ADJUSTING PLAY OF WORK EQUIPMENT AND SWING PPC VALVES
ADJUSTING PLAY OF WORK

EQUIPMENT AND SWING PPC
VALVES
a If the work equipment and swing levers have
large play, adjust them according to the following
procedure.
1. Remove the work equipment and swing PPC
valve assembly.
2. Remove bellows (1).
4. Run the engine at high idling and measure the oil

pressure while the control lever or pedal of the
measured circuit is in neutral and while it is operated to the stroke end.
a If the PPC valve output pressure is as follows, the solenoid valve is normal.
Lever/Pedal
Output pressure
In neutral
0 MPa {0kg/cm2}
Operated to
stroke end
Almost same as control basic

pressure (See standard values
table)
3. Loosen locknut (2) and tighten disc (3) until it

touches the heads of 4 pistons (4).
a Do not move the piston at this time.
4. Fix disc (3) and tighten locknut (2) to the specified torque.
3 Locknut: 69 88 Nm {7 9 kgm}
5. Install bellows (1).

6. Install the work equipment and swing PPC valve
assembly.
20-136
(1)
PC130-7
TESTING PARTS WHICH CAUSE HYDRAULIC DRIFT OF

WORK EQUIPMENT
TESTING PARTS WHICH

CAUSE HYDRAULIC DRIFT OF
WORK EQUIPMENT
a If the work equipment (cylinder) drifts hydraulically, check to see if the cause is on the cylinder
packing side or control valve side or hydraulic
drift prevention valve side (if equipped) according to the following procedure.
1. Testing boom cylinder and bucket cylinder
1) Set the machine in the position of measuring
hydraulic drift and stop the engine.
a Fill the bucket with a rated load or with
dirt and sand.
2) When testing the boom cylinder, set the

boom control lever in the RAISE position.
When testing the bucket cylinder, set the
bucket control lever in the CURL position.
If the lowering speed is increased at this
time, the cylinder packing is defective.
If the lowering speed does not change at
this time, the control valve or hydraulic
drift prevention valve (if equipped) is
defective.
a Operate the control lever while the starting switch is in the ON position.
a If the pressure in the accumulator is lost,
run the engine for about 10 seconds to
heighten the pressure in the accumulator.
2. Testing arm cylinder
1) Stop the arm cylinder about 100 mm before
the IN stroke end and stop the engine.
PC130-7
2) Operate the arm control lever in the IN position.

If the lowering speed is increased at this
time, the cylinder packing is defective.
If the lowering speed does not change at
this time, the control valve is defective.
a Operate the control lever while the starting switch is in the ON position.
a If the pressure in the accumulator is lost,
run the engine for about 10 seconds to
heighten the pressure in the accumulator.
[Reference]
Reason why the lowering speed is increased by
the above operation when the cylinder packing is
the cause of the hydraulic drift:
1) If the machine is set in the above position (where
the holding pressure is applied to the bottom
side), the oil leaks from the bottom side to the
head side. Since the volume on the head side is
less than that on the bottom side by the volume
of the rod, the pressure in the head side is
increased by the oil flowing in from the bottom
side.
2) As the pressure in the head side is increased, it
is balanced at a certain level (which depends on
the leakage), and then the lowering speed is lowered.
3) If the circuit on the head side is opened to the
drain circuit by the above operation of the lever
(the bottom side is closed by the check valve at
this time), the oil on the head side flows in the
drain circuit. As a result, the pressure is unbalanced and the lowering speed is increased.
20-137
(1)
TESTING PARTS WHICH CAUSE HYDRAULIC DRIFT OF

WORK EQUIPMENT
3. Testing PPC valve

While the pressure in the accumulator is high,
set the safety lock lever in the LOCK/FREE position and measure the lowering distance.
a Operate the control lever while the starting
switch is in the ON position.
a If the pressure in the accumulator is lost, run
the engine for about 10 seconds to heighten
the pressure in the accumulator.
a If there is a difference in the lowering distance between the LOCK position and FREE
position, the PPC valve is defective (it has an
internal defect).
20-138
(1)
PC130-7
MEASURING OIL LEAKAGE

a Measuring instruments fro oil leakage
Symbol
Part No.
Commercially
available
Part name
Measuring cylinder
1. Measuring oil leakage from boom cylinder

1) Run the engine and heighten the engine oil
temperature to 45 55C, and then move
the boom cylinder to the RAISE stroke end.
k Release the residual pressure in the

piping on the boom cylinder head side.
For details, see RELEASING RESIDUAL PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT (Operate the lever in the boom
RAISE direction only, however).
2) Disconnect hose (1) on the cylinder head
side and block the hose side with a plate.
2. Measuring oil leakage from arm cylinder

1) Run the engine and raise the engine oil temperature to 45 55C, and then move the
arm cylinder to the IN stroke end.
piping on the arm cylinder head side.
For details, see RELEASING RESIDUAL PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT (Operate the lever in the arm IN
direction only, however).
k Take care not to disconnect the hose on

the cylinder bottom side.
a Use the following part to block the hose
side.
07376-50522 (Plug No. 05)

side.
07376-50422 (Plug No. 04)

arm circuit by moving the arm IN.
k Take care not to "move the arm OUT".
4) Measure the oil leakage for 1 minute after 30
seconds since relieving is started.
5) After finishing measurement, return the
removed parts.
boom circuit by raising the boom.
k Take care not to "lower the boom".

removed parts.
PC130-7
20-139
(1)
3. Measuring oil leakage from bucket cylinder

1) Run the engine and raise the engine oil temperature to 45 55C, and then move the
bucket cylinder to the CURL stroke end and
stop the engine.

piping on the bucket cylinder head side.
For details, see RELEASING RESIDUAL PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT (Operate the lever in the arm
CURL direction only, however).
4. Measuring oil leakage from swing motor

1) Run the engine and raise the engine oil temperature to 45 55C.
2) Disconnect drain hose (4) and block the
hose side with a plug.
side.
07376-50522 (Plug No. 05)

side.
07376-50422 (Plug No. 04)
3) Turn the swing lock switch ON.

swing circuit by swinging.
a Measure the oil leakage for 1 minute
after 30 seconds since relieving is
started.
a After measuring 1 time, swing 180, and
then measure again.
removed parts.
bucket circuit by curling the bucket.
k Take care not to "dump the bucket".

removed parts.
20-140
(1)
PC130-7
5. Measuring oil leakage from travel motor

1) Run the engine and raise the engine oil temperature to 45 55C, and then remove the
travel motor cover.
2) Run the engine and lock the travel system.
k Put pin [1] between the sprocket and
track frame to lock the travel system
securely.
3) Disconnect drain hose (5) of the travel motor

and block the hose side with a plug.
side.
07376-50422 (Plug No. 04)
4) Run the engine at high idling, relieve the

travel circuit, and measure the oil leakage.
k Wrong operation of the lever can cause

an accident. Accordingly, make signs
and checks securely.
a Measure the oil leakage for 1 minute
after 30 seconds since r elieving is
started.
a Measure several times, moving the
motor a little (changing the position of the
valve plate and cylinder and that of the
cylinder and piston) each time.
removed parts.
PC130-7
20-141
(1)
RELEASING RESIDUAL PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
RELEASING RESIDUAL
PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC
CIRCUIT
1. Releasing residual pressure in hydraulic tank
k Since the hydraulic tank is enclosed and

pressurized, release the residual pressure
in it when removing a hose or a plug connected to it.
1) Lower the work equipment to the ground in a
stable position and stop the engine.
2) Loosen oil filler cap (1) of the hydraulic tank
gradually to release the air in the tank.
a If you open the pump room cover, you
can loosen the oil filler cap from the right
side of the machine.
4) Repeat steps 2) and 3) above 2 3 times,

and the residual pressure in the piping is
released completely.
3. Releasing residual pressure in swing motor
circuit
a The residual pressure in the swing motor circuit can be released by performing the operation for RELEASING RESIDUAL
PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
CIRCUIT (Operate the lever in the swing
direction only, however).
4. Releasing residual pressure in travel motor
circuit
a Since the control valve spool of the travel
motor circuit is open, the pressure in this circuit can be released by performing RELEASING RESIDUAL PRESSURE IN
HYDRAULIC TANK.
2. Releasing residual pressure in hydraulic cylinder circuit
k When disconnecting a pipe between a

hydraulic cylinder and the control valve,
release the residual pressure in the piping
1) Release the residual pressure in the hydraulic tank.
For details, see RELEASING
RESIDUAL PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC
TANK.
a Keep the oil filler cap of the hydraulic
tank removed.
2) Turn the starting switch ON and set the
safety lock lever in the FREE position, and
then operate the work equipment control
levers on both sides forward, backward, to
the right, and to the left.
a The control valve is operated by the
pressure in the accumulator. The pressure in the accumulator is used up, however, after the control valve is operated 2
3 times.
3) Run the engine at low idling for 10 seconds
to heighten the pressure in the accumulator.
20-142
(1)
PC130-7
BLEEDING AIR FROM EACH PART

Air bleeding procedure
Air bleeding item
Contents of work
Replacing hydraulic oil
Cleaning strainer
Bleeding air
from
hydraulic
pump
Starting
engine
Bleeding air Bleeding air

Bleeding air
from swing from travel
from cylinder
motor
motor
(See note)
(See note)
6
Checking oil
level and
starting
operation
Replacing return filter element

Replacing and repairing hydraulic
pump
Removing suction piping
Replacing and repairing control valve

Removing control valve piping
Replacing and repairing cylinder

Removing cylinder piping
Replacing and repairing swing motor

Removing swing motor piping
Replacing and repairing travel motor

Removing travel motor piping
Replacing and repairing swivel joint

Removing swivel joint piping
q
q
q
q
Note: Bleed air from the swing motor and travel motor only when the oil in the motor cases is drained.
1. Bleeding air from hydraulic pump
1) Open the pump room cover, loosen bleeder
(1), and check that oil flows out.
2) If the oil does not flow out, disconnect drain
hose (2) and fill the pump case with oil
through the drain port.
a Fix the drain hose adapter to a place
higher than the oil level in the hydraulic
tank.
a Fill the pump case with oil until oil containing no bubbles flows out of the
bleeder.
3) After oil containing no bubbles flows out of
bleeder (1), tighten the bleeder.
3 Air bleeder:
7.8 9.8 Nm {0.8 1.0 kgm}
a If the drain hose has been disconnected,
connect it after tightening the bleeder.
PC130-7
2. Starting engine
When running the engine after performing step
1, keep its speed at low idling for 10 minutes.
a If the engine coolant temperature is low and
the automatic warm-up operation is started,
stop the engine temporarily and reset the
automatic warm-up operation with the fuel
control dial (Set the starting switch in the ON
position and hold the fuel control dial in the
MAX position for 3 seconds, and the automatic warm-up operation is reset).
20-143
(1)
3. Bleeding air from cylinder

a If a cylinder was replaced, bleed air from it
before connecting the work equipment. In
particular, the boom cylinder does not move
to the lowering stroke end, if it is installed to
the work equipment.
1) Run the engine at low idling for about 5 minutes.
2) Running the engine at low idling, raise and
lower the boom 4 5 times.
a Stop the piston rod about 100 mm before
each stroke end. Do not relieve the oil.
3) Running the engine at high idling, perform
step 2).
4) Running the engine at low idling, move the
piston rod to the stroke end and relieve the
oil.
5) Bleed air from the arm cylinder and bucket
cylinder according to steps 2) 4).
5. Bleeding air from travel motor

1) Remove the travel motor cover and run the
engine at low idling.
2) Loosen drain hose (4) and check that oil
oozes out, and then tighten the drain hose.
4. Bleeding air from swing motor

1) Run the engine at low idling.
2) Loosen air bleeding plug (3) and check that
the oil oozes out, and then tighten the air
bleeding plug.
3) Running the engine at low idling and using

the work equipment, raise the track shoe on
either side.
3 Air bleeding plug:

25.5 34.3 Nm {2.5 3.5 kgm}
3) If the oil does not oozes out, remove air
bleeding plug (3) and fill the pump case with
oil.
4) Running the engine at low idling, run the

raised track shoe idle slowly for about 2 minutes.
a Run the track shoe forward and in
reverse as evenly as possible.
a Run the track shoe on the opposite side
idle similarly.
4) Run the engine at low idling and swing slowly
2 turns or more in each direction.
20-144
(1)
PC130-7
6. Checking oil level and starting work

1) Run the engine, retract the arm cylinder and
bucket cylinder to the stroke ends, lower the
work equipment to the ground, and stop the
engine.
2) Check the oil level by sight gauge (5) on the

side of the hydraulic tank.
a If the oil level is between lines H and L, it
is normal.
a If the oil level is below line L, add new oil.
PC130-7
20-145
(1)
TESTING PROCEDURE FOR DIODE
TESTING PROCEDURE FOR

DIODE
a Test an assembled-type diode (18-pin) or a diode
(2-pin) according to the following procedure.
a The conductive direction of an assembled-type
diode is shown in the following figure.
a The conductive direction of a diode is marked on

its surface.
2. When using an analog circuit tester

1) Set the circuit tester in the resistance range.
2) Apply the test pins as shown below and
check movement of the pointer.
i) Apply the red (+) test pin to the anode (P)
side of the diode and the black (-) test pin
to the cathode (N) side.
ii) Apply the red (+) test pin to the cathode
(N) side of the diode and the black (-) test
pin to the anode (P) side.
3) Judge the condition of the diode from movement of the pointer.
The pointer does not move in i) above
but moves in ii): Normal (Moving angle
(Resistance) depends on the type and
measurement range of the circuit tester,
however)
The pointer moves in both i) and ii):
Defective (Internal short circuit)
The pointer does not move in either of i)
and ii): Defective (Internal disconnection)
1. When using a digital circuit tester

1) Set the circuit tester in the diode range and
check the indicated value.
a If an ordinary tester is used, the voltage
of the battery in itself is indicated.
2) Apply the red (+) test pin to the anode (P)
side of the diode and the black (-) test pin to
the cathode (N) side and read the indicated
value.
3) Judge the condition of the diode from the
indicated value.
The indicated value does not change:
There is not continuity (Defective).
The indicated value changes: There is
continuity (Normal) (Note).
Note) In the case of a silicon diode, the circuit tester indicates a value of 460
600.
20-146
(1)
PC130-7
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS OF MONITOR PANEL
Section to display special functions

1. Display section
2. Service meter section
PC130-7
Section to operate special function 1

(Basic operation)
3. Caution buzzer stop switch
4. Auto-decelerator switch
5. Setting switch (Black switch)
6. Travel speed shifting switch
Section to operate special function 2

(Selecting operation and special
operation)
7. Working mode selector switch (UP)
8. Working mode selector switch
(DOWN)
9. Swing lock switch
20-147
(1)
Ordinary functions and special functions of monitor panel

The monitor panel has the ordinary functions and special functions and displays various pieces of information
on display section (1) and service meter section (2).
Some items are displayed automatically according to the internal setting of the monitor panel and the others are
displayed by operating switches.
1. Ordinary functions: Operator menu
The items in this menu are displayed normally or displayed automatically when a trouble occurs.
2. Special functions: Service menu
The items in this menu are not displayed normally. Each serviceman can display them by operating special
switches. These functions are used for special setting, testing, adjusting, or troubleshooting.
Flow of each function
Function of displaying service meter
O <Automatic>
2
Function of displaying user code
Special functions (Service menu)
<Operation of switch> O
Ordinary functions (Operator menu)

3
Function of displaying error code [01]
Monitoring function [02]
Function of adjusting governor [03]
Function of selecting maintenance period [04]
Function of selecting default working mode [05]
Special function of monitoring replacement of engine oil
a Each number in [ ] is a code No. displayed in the service meter section when the menu is selected.
20-148
(3)
PC130-7
Display of operator menu

a Only outline of the operator menu is described in
this section. For details of each menu, see
O P E R AT I O N M A N U A L o r t h e v o l u m e o f
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION.
1. Function of displaying service meter
While the machine is used normally, the monitor
panel displays the following information.
Display section (1): Nothing is displayed
Service meter section (2): Service meter
2. Function of displaying user code

If the machine has any trouble, the corresponding user code is displayed automatically in display section (1) and the caution buzzer is turned
ON to urge the operator to take a proper remedy,
depending on the degree of the trouble.
a Service meter section (2) continues displaying the service meter.
a For displayed user codes and the remedies
shown to the operator, see "User codes and
remedies shown to operator".
a Each user code simply shows occurrence of
a trouble to the operator. To find out the
cause of the trouble, a serviceman must
check the error code with the "Function of
displaying error code [01]" in the service
menu.
<Reference>
A user code is displayed only when a serious trouble
occurs.
Even if a user code is not displayed, a trouble may
have occurred. If you feel any abnormality, be sure
to check for an error code with the "Function of displaying error code [01]" in the service menu.
PC130-7
20-149
(1)
a User codes and remedies shown to operator

User
code
Error mode
Remedy (shown to operator)
Caution
buzzer
Error in pump control system
If the emergency pump drive switch is set in the upper position, the machine can operate normally. Have the machine
inspected immediately, however.
E03
Error in swing brake system
Set the swing holding brake release switch in the upper position to release the brake. Apply the swing brake manually
with the swing lock switch, if necessary. The brake may not
be released, depending on the cause of the failure. In any
case, have the machine inspected immediately.
E05
Error in governor system
Have the machine inspected immediately.
E02
20-150
(1)
PC130-7
Operation and display of service menu

How to select service menu
a When using the general functions in the service
menu, perform the following switch operation to
change the screen of the monitor panel.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Function of displaying error code [01]

Monitoring function [02]
Function of adjusting governor [03]
Function of selecting maintenance period
[04]
7. Function of selecting default working
mode [05]
1) Operating switches
Holding caution buzzer stop switch (3), hold auto
decelerator switch (4) for 2.5 seconds.
3) Selecting menu
Holding caution buzzer stop switch (3), operate
working mode selector switches (7) and (8) to
select a menu you will use.
UP switch (7): Menu No. increases.
DOWN switch (8): Menu No. decreases.
Menu
No.
Service menu
(Excluding special functions)
01
Function of displaying error code
02
Monitoring function
03
Function of adjusting governor
04
Function of selecting maintenance

period
05
Function of selecting default working

mode
4) Executing menu
Select a menu you will use and press set switch
(5), and the menu is executed.
2) Displaying display section and service meter

section
If the switches are operated as shown above, the
first menu No. [01] (Monitoring function) is displayed in service meter section (2).
a Nothing is displayed in display section (1).
5) Finishing service menu

Holding caution buzzer stop switch (3), hold auto
decelerator switch (4) for 2.5 seconds (similarly
to the selecting operation).
a The service menu is finished and the ordinary screen appears.
a The service menu can be also finished by
turning the starting switch OFF while the service menu is selected. (In this case, the ordinary screen appears when the starting
switch is turned ON again.)
a To use the special functions in the service menu,
you must operate the switches differently from
the above. See details of each menu.
8. Function of adjusting service meter
9. Special function of monitoring replacement of engine oil
PC130-7
20-151
(1)
3. Function of displaying error code [01]

With this function, you can check the error code
of a trouble which is occurring at present or has
occurred in the past.
1) Selecting and executing function

i) Select menu No. [01] in the menu selection mode.
ii) Press set switch (5) to execute this function.
2) Information displayed in display section and
service meter section 1 (When error code is
recorded)
If an error code is recorded, the following
information is displayed in display section (1)
and service meter section (2).
(a): Error code
(b): Service meter reading increased after
trouble occurred
(c): Mark [E] to indicate that trouble is occurring at present
a Mark [E] to indicate that a trouble is
occurring at present indicates that the
error code is being detected now. It is
not displayed if the trouble has been
repaired or the error code is not
detected.
a For the error codes which the monitor
panel and governor and pump controller
can detect, see the "Error codes table".
20-152
(1)

service meter section 2 (When error code is
not recorded)
If an error code is not recorded, display section (1) and service meter section (2) display
as shown below.
4) Number of recorded error codes and display

order of them
This function can record up to 20 error
codes, which are displayed in order from the
latest one.
a If a new trouble occurs while 20 error
codes are recorded, the oldest error
code is deleted and the error code of the
new trouble is recorded.
PC130-7
5) Change of displayed error codes

Holding caution buzzer stop switch (3), operate working mode selector switches (7) and
(8) to change the displayed error codes.
UP switch (7): Next error code appears.
DOWN switch (8): Previous error code
appears.
6) How to delete error code
i) Holding caution buzzer stop switch (3),
turn the starting switch OFF and keep
holding caution buzzer stop switch (3).
ii) Under the above condition, turn the starting switch ON again and hold caution
buzzer stop switch (3) for 5 seconds.
a An error code having the mark [E] cannot
be deleted.
PC130-7
20-153
(1)
Error codes table

User code
Error code
104
Clogging of air cleaner
108
Overheating of engine coolant
112
Short circuit in wiper motor drive forward system
113
Short circuit in wiper motor drive reverse system
114
Short circuit in windshield washer drive system
115
Trouble in operation of windshield wiper
116
Trouble in storage of windshield wiper
E03
203
Short circuit in swing holding brake solenoid
205
Short circuit in 2-stage relief solenoid
206
Short circuit travel speed shifting solenoid
E03
213
Disconnection in swing holding brake solenoid
215
Disconnection in 2-stage relief solenoid
216
Disconnection travel speed shifting solenoid
217
Abnormality in input model code
218
Disconnection in S-NET signal line
222
Short circuit in LS-EPC solenoid
223
Disconnection in LS-EPC solenoid
224
Abnormality in pump pressure sensor
226
Abnormality in pressure sensor power supply
227
Abnormality in engine speed sensor
E02
232
Short circuit in PC-EPC solenoid
E02
233
Disconnection in PC-EPC solenoid
251
Abnormality in overload pressure sensor
301
Engine low idling speed out of standard range
302
Engine high idling speed out of standard range
306
Abnormality in governor potentiometer
E05
308
Abnormality in fuel control dial
315
Short circuit in battery relay output line
316
Step-out of governor motor
E05
317
Disconnection in phases A and B of governor motor
E05
318
Short circuit in phases A and B of governor motor
20-154
(1)
Trouble
PC130-7
4. Monitoring function [02]

With this function, you can monitor the revolution
speed, oil pressure, current, voltage, input condition, output condition, etc. in real time by the signals from the sensors, switches, and solenoids
installed to various parts of the machine.


service meter section 1 (When numeral code
is displayed)
If a numeral monitoring code is selected, the
following information is displayed in display
section (1) and service meter section (2).
(a): Monitoring code
(b): Monitoring information (Value is displayed)
2) Selecting and executing monitoring code

Holding caution buzzer stop switch (3), operate working mode selector switches (7) and
(8) to select a monitoring code displayed in
service meter section (1).
UP switch (7): Code No. increases.
DOWN switch (8): Code No. decreases.
a This function displays monitoring code
[001] and its information first.
a For the items and code Nos. which you
can monitor, see the "Monitoring codes
table".
PC130-7
20-155
(1)

service meter section 2 (When 6-bit code is
displayed)
If a 6-bit monitoring code is selected, the following information is displayed in display
section (1) and service meter section (2).
(a): Monitoring code
(b): Monitoring information (6 pieces of information are displayed in bits)
a In the 6-bit display mode, only the top
and bottom of the 7-segment mark are
used to display. "Solid black" indicates
the ON state, and "white on black background" indicates the OFF state.
a For the No. of each bit, see the "Monitoring codes table" and the drawing
attached to it.
20-156
(1)
PC130-7
Monitoring codes table

Code
Monitoring item
Unit
001
Monitor panel model code
Numeral
002
Governor and pump controller model code (Pump side)
Numeral
003
Governor and pump controller model code (Engine throttle side)
Numeral
008
Connecting condition of network
Numeral
010
Engine speed
10rpm
011
kg/cm2
012
kg/cm2
013
PC-EPC solenoid output current
10mA
015
LS-EPC solenoid output current
10mA
016
2nd throttle speed
10rpm
018
(Unused)
019
(Unused)
020
021
022
023
PC130-7
Swing oil pressure switch (ON)
(6bit)
Travel oil pressure switch (ON)
(6bit)
Boom LOWER oil pressure switch (ON)
(6bit)
Boom RAISE oil pressure switch (ON)
(6bit)
Arm IN oil pressure switch (ON)
(6bit)
Arm OUT oil pressure switch (ON)
(6bit)
Bucket CURL oil pressure switch (ON)
(6bit)
Bucket DUMP oil pressure switch (ON)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
Service oil pressure switch (ON)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
One-touch power maximizing switch (ON)
(6bit)
Swing holding brake release switch (RELEASE)
(6bit)
Swing lock switch (LOCK)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
Swing holding brake solenoid (ON)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
2nd relief solenoid (ON)
(6bit)
Travel speed shifting solenoid (ON)
(6bit)
Remarks
Input condition of switch 1
Drive condition of solenoid valve
20-157
(1)
Code
024
027
Monitoring item
(Unused)
Input condition of model

selection signal
Unit
Model selection 1 (Connected to ground)
(6bit)
(6bit)
(6bit)
(6bit)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
030
Fuel control dial input voltage
10mV
031
Governor potentiometer input voltage
10mV
032
Controller power source voltage
100mV
033
Governor motor phase A output current
10mA
034
Governor motor phase B output current
10mA
035
Battery relay BR output voltage
100mV
036
037
(Unused)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
Starting switch signal C (START)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
Battery relay (DRIVEN)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
Input condition of signal
Output condition of signal
041
Engine coolant sensor input voltage
10mV
042
Fuel level sensor input voltage
10mV
043
Alternator input voltage
10mV
044
(Unused)
045
Starting switch signal ACC (ON)
(6bit)
Starting switch signal C (START)
(6bit)
Starting switch signal R1 (HEAT)
(6bit)
Lamp switch (ON)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
Input condition 4 of switch
20-158
(1)
Remarks
PC130-7
Code
046
049
Monitoring item
Unit
Air cleaner clogging switch (OPEN)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
Engine oil pressure switch (OPEN)
(6bit)
Engine oil level switch (OPEN)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
Alternator (Normal generation)
(6bit)
Swing lock switch (LOCK)
(6bit)
Caution buzzer stop switch (ON)
(6bit)
Windows limit switch (ON)
(6bit)
Wiper contact W (ON)
(6bit)
Wiper contact P (ON)
(6bit)
(Unused)
(6bit)
Input condition of sensor
Input condition 5 of switch
200
Monitor panel program version
Numeral
201
Governor and pump controller program version
Numeral
Display of numeral code
PC130-7
Remarks
Display of 6bit
20-159
(1)
5. Function of adjusting governor [03]

This function is used to adjust the governor lever
stroke after the governor actuator, fuel injection
pump, or governor spring is removed and
installed or replaced, or when the high idling
speed is low or engine speed is not stabilized.

2) Condition of governor motor
If this function is executed, all the governor
control functions are cancelled, and then the
operating angle of the governor actuator follows up only the operation signal of the fuel
control dial.
a While this function is executed, [GOV] is
displayed in display section (1) and
[gSET] is displayed in service meter section (2).
3) Adjusting governor lever stroke

a The turning direction of the governor
spring described below is the direction
when the governor actuator is seen from
the fuel injection pump side.
i) Keep the fuel control dial in the MAX
position.
ii) Loosen locknut (2) on the governor actuator side of governor spring (1).
iii) Turn governor spring (1) clockwise to
reduce its installed length (a) and return
governor lever (3) of the fuel injection
pump to a position where it does not
touch the full stopper.
iv) Turn governor spring (1) counterclockwise to increase its installed length (a)
and stop it when governor lever (3) of the
fuel injection pump touches the full stopper.
Standard installed length (a) (Reference): 262 mm
v) Turn governor spring (1) counterclockwise further by 2.5 turns to compress the
spring in governor spring (1).
a Since the inside spring is compressed, only the outer cylinder of
governor spring (1) moves toward
the fuel injection pump by about 3.1
mm (the installed length does not
change).
vi) Fixing governor spring (1), tighten locknut (2) on the governor actuator side.
a Before fixing the locknut, check that
the water drain hole of the governor
spring is directed down. If the water
drain hole is not directed down,
loosen locknut (4) on the fuel injection pump side and turn the whole
governor spring to adjust (Take care
not to change the adjustment dimension of the governor spring).
3 Locknut:
11.8 19.6 Nm {1.2 2.0 kgm}
20-160
(1)
PC130-7
vii) Return the fuel control dial to the MIN

position, and then turn it again slowly
toward the MAX position. At this time,
check that governor spring is compressed by about 3.1 mm after governor
lever (3) reaches the full stopper.
PC130-7
20-161
(1)
6. Function of selecting maintenance period

[04]
With this function, you can adjust the maintenance period of the engine oil for the function of
the engine oil replacement monitor.
3) Settling maintenance period

The display or maintenance period becomes
effective when it is selected. Accordingly,
perform the ordinary finishing operation.
2) Selecting maintenance period
The current display mode or maintenance
period is displayed in service meter section
(2). Press set switch (5) to select a maintenance period.
a Nothing is displayed in display section
(1).
a Each time the set switch is pressed, the
display mode or maintenance period
changes in the following order.
Display
0
20-162
(1)
Display mode/Maintenance period

Reset maintenance function
125
125-hour interval
250
250-hour interval
500
500-hour interval
<Special functions of engine oil replacement monitor>

a For the method of displaying the engine oil
replacement monitor, method of checking the
elapsed time after replacement of engine oil,
method of clearing the elapsed time, and method
of displaying demonstration mode, see "9. Special functions of engine oil replacement monitor".
Demonstration mode
PC130-7
7. Function of selecting default working mode

[05]
With this function, you can freely select the working mode which is set automatically when the
starting switch is turned ON (When the machine
is delivered, mode A is set).
3) Settling default working mode

Press set switch (5) to settle the selected
working mode.

2) Selecting default working mode
The currently set working mode is displayed
in service meter section (2). Press working
mode selector switches (7) and (8) to select
a working mode.
UP switch (7): Next mode is displayed.
DOWN switch (8): Previous mode is displayed.
a Nothing is displayed in display section
(1).
a The working mode changes in the following order.
AoEoB
a Mode L cannot be set as the default.
PC130-7
20-163
(1)
8. Special functions of engine oil replacement

monitor
1) Ordinary display of engine oil replacement
monitor
If the rest of time before the set engine oil
replacement time is 10 hours or shorter,
engine oil replacement monitor (10) lights up
and display the elapsed time in service meter
section for 20 seconds each time the starting
switch is turned ON.
4) Function of demonstration mode

If the demonstration mode is selected, you
can perform demonstration of the oil maintenance function when teaching the operation
to a customer.
The functions and display of the demonstration mode are as follows.
2) Checking elapsed time

To check the elapsed time while engine oil
replacement monitor (10) is OFF, turn the
starting switch OFF and press set switch (5)
and then turn the starting switch ON and
keep holding set switch (5).
1. The internally set interval is recognized

as 250 hours and the elapsed time is recognized as 240 hours.
2. When the starting switch is turned ON
after the demonstration mode is set, the
ordinary display is repeated up to 3 times
(number of the times of turning the starting switch ON).
3. After the demonstration is finished, resetting of maintenance setting [0] is recognized.
a When the demonstration is repeated 3
times, resetting of maintenance setting is
recognized. If setting is necessary at this
time, see "Function of selecting maintenance period".
3) Clearing elapsed time

To clear the elapsed time after replacing the
engine oil, hold set switch (5) for 3 seconds
while the elapsed time is displayed.
a If the above operation is performed, the
elapsed time in the monitor panel is set
to 0 hour.
20-164
(3)
PC130-7
PREPARATION WORK FOR TROUBLESHOOTING FOR

ELECTRIC SYSTEM
PREPARATION WORK FOR

TROUBLESHOOTING FOR
ELECTRIC SYSTEM
2. Governor and pump controller

a The governor and pump controller is installed
in the cover at the rear of the operator's seat.
1) Remove the 3 mounting bolts and cover (3).
a When carrying out troubleshooting for an electric

circuit related to the monitor panel and governor
and pump controller, expose the related connectors according to the following procedure.
1. Monitor panel
1) Remove cover (1)
a The cover is fixed with 2 clips at the top
and bottom. Just pull it up to remove it.
a If the daylight sensor of the air conditioner is installed, disconnect connector
P15 on the back side of the cover.
2) Insert or connect testing T-adapters in or to
connectors C01, C02, and C03 of governor
and pump controller (4).
a Since the connectors are secured with
screws, loosen those screws before disconnecting.
a When connecting the connectors again,
tighten their screws to the specified
torque.
3 Screw: 2.82 Nm {0.288 kgm}
2) Remove the 3 mounting screws, and then

remove monitor panel (2) from the mount.
a Take care not to drop the mounting
screws into the console.
3) Insert or connect testing T-adapters in or to
connectors P01 and P02 of the monitor
panel.
a Connector P70 clamped near the above
connectors is not used.
PC130-7
20-165
(3)
Pm-Clinic Service
Model
Serial No.
Service meter
PC130-7
Boom
Arm
Bucket
User's name
Date of inspection
Inspector
Main parts
Specifications
Attachments
Shoe width
Standard
Standard
Standard
(
(
(
)
)
)
1 att.
Blade
2-piece boom
(
(
)
)
500 mm
600 mm
700 mm
Check of oil and coolant levels

When necessary
Damper case oil
Machinery case oil
Radiator coolant
Engine oil
Hydraulic oil
Max. range of engine coolant temperature
(Top)
Max. range of hydraulic oil temperature
(Bottom)
Final drive case oil

(
)
Ambient temperature
Altitude
m
Operator's opinion
Visual inspection result
Error code history
Memo
PC130-7
20-167
(2)
PM-CLINIC SERVICE
Items related to engine
20-168
(1)
PC130-7
PM-CLINIC SERVICE
Items related to hydraulic equipment
PC130-7
20-169
(1)
20-170
(1)
PC130-7
Full (MAX)
Low (MIN)
Low (MIN)
Full (MAX)
Full (MAX)
Full (MAX)
Working
mode
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Auto
decelerator
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
One-touch power
max. switch
Condition
Serial No.
Full (MAX)
Full (MAX)
Full (MAX)
Full (MAX)
Full (MAX)
Full (MAX)
Full (MAX)
Working
mode
Boom top on level, no load
Max. reach, no load
Position of work equipment
Push up track shoe 1 side by 1
Max. reach
Engine speed
Blow-by pressure
Engine speed
Engine oil pressure
Engine speed
Engine oil pressure
Engine speed
Measured item
Travel (5 turns)
Swing (5 turns)
Hi
Lo
Bucket CURL
Arm IN (*1)
Arm IN (*1)
Arm IN (*1)
Arm OUT (*1)
Boom RAISE (*1)
Measured item
Left
Right
19.7 24.1
19.7 24.1
36.9 55.3
36.9 55.3
Right
Left
23.8 33.4
23.8 33.4
2.6 3.2
3.7 5.1
3.0 3.8
2.8 3.6
2.8 3.4
3.3 4.1
Standard value for

new machine
Left
Right
sec
Unit
1,300 1,500
0.98 {100}
2,080 2,280
0.15 {1.5}
1,050 1,150
0.25 {2.5}
2,250 2,450
Service limit
value
20.1 26.1
20.1 26.1
36.9 55.3
36.9 55.3
22.8 34.4
22.8 34.4
Max. 3.7
Max. 5.4
Max. 4.6
Max. 4.4
Max. 3.7
Max. 4.3
Service limit
value
Standard value
1,300 1,500
Max. 0.49{Max. 50}
kPa{mmH2O}
rpm
2,080 2,280
Min. 0.18{Min. 1.8}
1,050 1,150
rpm
MPa{kg/cm }
0.340.54{3.55.5}
MPa{kg/cm2}
rpm
2,250 2,450
Standard value for

new machine
Standard value
Date of inspection
rpm
Unit
User's name
All levers in neutral
Arm DUMP relief
Arm DUMP relief
Operation of work
equipment
Service meter
Arm top and boom foot on level, no load
*1: Until cylinder cushion starts working
Full (MAX)
Fuel control
dial
No.
Condition
2. Work equipment, switch, and travel speed
Full (MAX)
Fuel control
dial
No.
1. Engine
Model
Measured
value
Measured
value
Judgmen
Good/Bad
Good/Bad
Good/Bad
Judgment
Inspector
PC130-7
20-171
(1)
Full (MAX)
Full (MAX)
Full (MAX)
Full (MAX)
Full (MAX)
Full (MAX)
Full (MAX)
Full (MAX)
Fuel control Working

dial
mode
No.
Condition
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Lowering distance of bucket

tip (in 15 min)
Measured item

(Motor safety valve)
Swing lock
(Switch: LOCK)
60kg/cm2
(4)
Right front
PC control pressure
(PC valve)
Left rear
(1):(3)=1:0.5
{370400kg/cm2}
36.339.2MPa
Left
{21.523.5kg/cm2}
2.12.3MPa
{2138kg/cm2}
1.963.7MPa
{370400kg/cm2}
36.339.2MPa
{343378kg/cm2}
33.337.0MPa
{2935kg/cm2}
2.843.43MPa
Point
(Service limit
value)
Good/Bad
Judgment
28.932.9MPa
Servo inlet Control basic

pressure
pressure
600kg/cm2
(3)
Measured
value
{295335kg/cm2}
LS pressure
600kg/cm2
600kg/cm2
Pump
pressure
(2)
Max. 700
(1)
Max. 460
Service limit
value
Standard value
Standard value
for new machine
{kg/cm2}
MPa
Unit
mm
Unit
Right
(LS valve: Operated)
(LS valve: Neutral)
Pump relief pressure (Main

relief valve: High pressure)
Pump relief pressure (Main

relief valve: Low pressure)
Control basic pressure

(Self-reducing pressure valve)
Travel relief pressure Right rear

Travel lock
(Main relief valve)
(With sprocket fixed)
(Motor safety valve) Left front
Swing lock
(Switch: LOCK)
Idle travel
(With shoe raised)
Arm DUMP relief
Arm DUMP relief
Measured item
(Tested part)
Arm top and boom foot on level,

rated load on bucket
Position of work equipment
Condition
Auto
One-touch power Operation of work
decelerator
max. switch
equipment
Working
mode
Engine stopped
Fuel control
dial
4. Oil pressure
No.
3. Hydraulic drift of work equipment
TROUBLESHOOTING
POINTS TO REMEMBER WHEN TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................................................... 20-202
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS IN TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................ 20-203
POINTS TO REMEMBER WHEN CARRYING OUT MAINTENANCE ...................................................... 20-204
INSPECTION BEFORE TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................................ 20-212
CLASSIFICATION OF AND PROCEDURES FOR TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................... 20-213
CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT DRAWING AND ELECTRIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF EACH SYSTEM ....... 20-217
CONNECTION TABLE FOR CONNECTOR PIN NUMBERS .................................................................... 20-234
T-BRANCH BOX AND T-BRANCH TABLE ............................................................................................... 20-257
PC130-7
20-201
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
POINTS TO REMEMBER WHEN TROUBLESHOOTING
POINTS TO REMEMBER WHEN TROUBLESHOOTING

k Stop the machine in a level place, and check that the safety pin, blocks, and parking brake are securely fitted.
k When carrying out the operation with two or more workers, keep strictly to the agreed signals, and do not
allow any unauthorized person to come near.
k If the radiator cap is removed when the engine is hot, hot water may spurt out and cause burns, so wait for
the engine to cool down before starting troubleshooting.
k Be extremely careful not to touch any hot parts or to get caught in any rotating parts.
k When disconnecting wiring, always disconnect the negative () terminal of the battery first.
k When removing the plug or cap from a location which is under pressure from oil, water, or air, always release
the internal pressure first. When installing measuring equipment, be sure to connect it properly.
The aim of troubleshooting is to pinpoint the basic cause of the failure, to carry out repairs swiftly, and to
prevent reoccurrence of the failure.
When carrying out troubleshooting, and important point is of course to understand the structure and function.
However, a short cut to effective troubleshooting is to ask the operator various questions to form some idea
of possible causes of the failure that would produce the reported symptoms.
1. When carrying out troubleshooting, do not hurry
to disassemble the components.
If components are disassembled immediately
any failure occurs:
Parts that have no connection with the failure
or other unnecessary parts will be disassembled.
It will become impossible to find the cause of
the failure.
It will also cause a waste of manhours, parts, or
oil or grease, and at the same time, will also lose
the confidence of the user or operator.
For this reason, when carrying out troubleshooting, it is necessary to carry out thorough prior
investigation and to carry out troubleshooting in
accordance with the fixed procedure.
2. Points to ask user or operator
1) Have any other problems occurred apart
from the problem that has been reported?
2) Was there anything strange about the
machine before the failure occurred?
3) Did the failure occur suddenly, or were there
problems with the machine condition before
this?
4) Under what conditions did the failure occur?
5) Had any repairs been carried out before the
failure?
When were these repairs carried out?
6) Has the same kind of failure occurred
before?
3. Check before troubleshooting
1) Check the oil level
2) Check for any external leakage of oil from
the piping or hydraulic equipment.
3) Check the travel of the control levers.
4) Check the stroke of the control valve spool.
20-202
(1)
5) Other maintenance items can be checked

externally, so check any item that is considered to be necessary.
4. Confirming failure
Confirm the extent of the failure yourself, and
judge whether to handle it as a real failure or
as a problem with the method of operation,
etc.
a When operating the machine to reenact
the troubleshooting symptoms, do not
carry out any investigation or measurement that may make the problem worse.
5. Troubleshooting
Use the results of the investigation and inspection in Items 2 4 to narrow down the
causes of failure, then use the troubleshooting flowchart to locate the position of the failure exactly.
a The basic procedure for troubleshooting
is as follows.
1) Start from the simple points.
2) Start from the most likely points.
3) Investigate other related parts or
information.
6. Measures to remove root cause of failure
Even if the failure is repaired, if the root
cause of the failure is not repaired, the same
failure will occur again.
To prevent this, always investigate why the
problem occurred. Then, remove the root
cause.
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS IN TROUBLESHOOTING
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS IN TROUBLESHOOTING
PC130-7
20-203
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
POINTS TO REMEMBER WHEN CARRYING OUT MAINTENANCE

To maintain the performance of the machine over a long period, and to prevent failures or other troubles before
they occur, correct operation, maintenance and inspection, troubleshooting, and repairs must be carried out.
This section deals particularly with correct repair procedures for mechatronics and is aimed at improving the
quality of repairs. For this purpose, it gives sections on Handling electric equipment and Handling hydraulic
equipment (particularly gear oil and hydraulic oil).
1. Points to remember when handling electric
equipment
1) Handling wiring harnesses and connectors
Wiring harnesses consist of wiring connecting
one component to another component, connectors used for connecting and disconnecting one
wire from another wire, and protectors or tubes
used for protecting the wiring.
Compared with other electrical components fitted in boxes or cases, wiring harnesses are
more likely to be affected by the direct effects of
rain, water, heat, or vibration. Furthermore, during inspection and repair operations, they are
frequently removed and installed again, so they
are likely to suffer deformation or damage. For
this reason, it is necessary to be extremely careful when handling wiring harnesses.
Main failures occurring in wiring harness
1) Defective contact of connectors (defective
contact between male and female)
Problems with defective contact are likely to
occur because the male connector is not
properly inserted into the female connector,
or because one or both of the connectors is
deformed or the position is not correctly
aligned, or because there is corrosion or
oxidization of the contact surfaces.
2) Defective crimping or soldering of connectors

The pins of the male and female connectors
are in contact at the crimped terminal or soldered portion, but if there is excessive force
brought to bear on the wiring, the plating at
the joint will peel and cause improper connection or breakage.
20-204
(1)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
3) Disconnections in wiring
If the wiring is held and the connectors are
pulled apart, or components are lifted with a
crane with the wiring still connected, or a
heavy object hits the wiring, the crimping of
the connector may separate, or the soldering may be damaged, or the wiring may be
broken.
4) High-pressure water entering connector

The connector is designed to make it difficult for water to enter (drip-proof structure),
but if high-pressure water is sprayed directly
on the connector, water may enter the connector, depending on the direction of the
water jet.
As already said, the connector is designed
to prevent water from entering, but at the
same time, if water does enter, it is difficult
for it to be drained. Therefore, if water
should get into the connector, the pins will
be short-circuited by the water, so if any
water gets in, immediately dry the connector
or take other appropriate action before
passing electricity through it.
5) Oil or dirt stuck to connector
If oil or grease are stuck to the connector
and an oil film is formed on the mating surface between the male and female pins, the
oil will not let the electricity pass, so there
will be defective contact.
If there is oil or grease stuck to the connector, wipe it off with a dry cloth or blow it dry
with compressed air and spray it with a contact restorer.
a When wiping the mating portion of the
connector, be careful not to use excessive force or deform the pins.
a If there is oil or water in the compressed
air, the contacts will become even dirtier,
so remove the oil and water from the
compressed air completely before
cleaning with compressed air.
PC130-7
20-205
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
2) Removing, installing, and drying connectors

and wiring harnesses
Disconnecting connectors
1) Hold the connectors when disconnecting.
When disconnecting the connectors, hold
the connectors and not the wires. For connectors held by a screw, loosen the screw
fully, then hold the male and female connectors in each hand and pull apart. For connectors which have a lock stopper, press
down the stopper with your thumb and pull
the connectors apart.
a Never pull with one hand.
2) When removing from clips
When removing a connector from a clip, pull
the connector in a parallel direction to the
clip.
a If the connector is twisted up and down
or to the left or right, the housing may
break.
3) Action to take after removing connectors

After removing any connector, cover it with a
vinyl bag to prevent any dust, dirt, oil, or
water from getting in the connector portion.
a If the machine is left disassembled for a
long time, it is particularly easy for improper contact to occur, so always cover
the connector.
20-206
(1)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Connecting connectors
1) Check the connector visually.
1) Check that there is no oil, dirt, or water
stuck to the connector pins (mating portion).
2) Check that there is no deformation,
defective contact, corrosion, or damage
to the connector pins.
3) Check that there is no damage or breakage to the outside of the connector.
a If there is any oil, water, or dirt stuck to
the connector, wipe it off with a dry cloth.
If any water has got inside the connector, warm the inside of the wiring with a
dryer, but be careful not to make it too
hot as this will cause short circuits.
a If there is any damage or breakage, replace the connector.
2) Fix the connector securely.
Align the position of the connector correctly,
then insert it securely.
For connectors with lock stopper, push in
the connector until the stopper clicks into
position.
3) Correct any protrusion of the boot and any
misalignment of the wiring harness
For connectors fitted with boots, correct any
protrusion of the boot. In addition, if the wiring harness is misaligned, or the clamp is
out of position, adjust it to its correct position.
a If the connector cannot be corrected
easily, remove the clamp and adjust the
position.
4) If the connector clamp has been removed,
be sure to return it to its original position.
Check also that there are no loose clamps.
Connecting connectors (DT type connector)

Since the DT 8-pole and 12-pole DT type connectors have 2 latches respectively, push them
in until they click 2 times.
1. Male connector, 2. Female connector
Normal locking state (Horizontal): a, b, d
Incomplete locking state (Diagonal): c
PC130-7
20-207
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Drying wiring harness

If there is any oil or dirt on the wiring harness,
wipe it off with a dry cloth. Avoid washing it in
water or using steam. If the connector must be
washed in water, do not use high-pressure
water or steam directly on the wiring harness.
If water gets directly on the connector, do as follows.
1) Disconnect the connector and wipe off the
water with a dry cloth.
a If the connector is blown dry with compressed air, there is the risk that oil in the
air may cause defective contact, so remove all oil and water from the compressed air before blowing with air.
2) Dry the inside of the connector with a dryer.
If water gets inside the connector, use a
dryer to dry the connector.
a Hot air from the dryer can be used, but
regulate the time that the hot air is used
in order not to make the connector or related parts too hot, as this will cause deformation or damage to the connector.
3) Carry out a continuity test on the connector.

After drying, leave the wiring harness disconnected and carry out a continuity test to
check for any short circuits between pins
caused by water.
a After completely drying the connector,
blow it with contact restorer and reassemble.
20-208
(1)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
3) Handling control box

1) The control box contains a microcomputer
and electronic control circuits. These control
all of the electronic circuits on the machine,
so be extremely careful when handling the
control box.
2) Do not open the cover of the control box
unless necessary.
3) Do not place objects on top of the control

box.
4) Cover the control connectors with tape or a
vinyl bag.
Never touch the connector contacts with
your hand.
5) During rainy weather, do not leave the control box in a place where it is exposed to
rain.
6) Do not place the control box on oil, water, or

soil, or in any hot place, even for a short
time.
(Place it on a suitable dry stand).
7) Precautions when carrying out arc welding
When carrying out arc welding on the body,
disconnect all wiring harness connectors
connected to the control box. Fit an arc
welding ground close to the welding point.
2. Points to remember when troubleshooting electric circuits

1) Always turn the power OFF before disconnecting or connect connectors.
2) Before carrying out troubleshooting, check that all the related connectors are properly inserted.
a Disconnect and connect the related connectors several times to check.
3) Always connect any disconnected connectors before going on to the next step.
a If the power is turned ON with the connectors still disconnected, unnecessary abnormality displays
will be generated.
4) When carrying out troubleshooting of circuits (measuring the voltage, resistance, continuity, or current),
move the related wiring and connectors several times and check that there is no change in the reading
of the tester.
a If there is any change, there is probably defective contact in that circuit.
PC130-7
20-209
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
3. Points to remember when handling hydraulic

equipment
With the increase in pressure and precision of
hydraulic equipment, the most common cause of
failure is dirt (foreign material) in the hydraulic circuit. When adding hydraulic oil, or when disassembling or assembling hydraulic equipment, it is
necessary to be particularly careful.
1) Be careful of the operating environment.
Avoid adding hydraulic oil, replacing filters, or
repairing the machine in rain or high winds, or
places where there is a lot of dust.
2) Disassembly and maintenance work in the
field
If disassembly or maintenance work is carried
out on hydraulic equipment in the field, there is
danger of dust entering the equipment. It is also
difficult to confirm the performance after repairs,
so it is desirable to use unit exchange. Disassembly and main-tenance of hydraulic equipment should be carried out in a specially
prepared dustproof workshop, and the performance should be confirmed with special test
equipment.
3) Sealing openings
After any piping or equipment is removed, the
openings should be sealed with caps, tapes, or
vinyl bags to prevent any dirt or dust from entering. If the opening is left open or is blocked with
a rag, there is danger of dirt entering or of the
surrounding area being made dirty by leaking oil
so never do this.
Do not simply drain oil out on to the ground, collect it and ask the customer to dispose of it, or
take it back with you for disposal.
4) Do not let any dirt or dust get in during refilling operations.

Be careful not to let any dirt or dust get in when
refilling with hydraulic oil. Always keep the oil
filler and the area around it clean, and also use
clean pumps and oil containers. If an oil cleaning device is used, it is possible to filter out the
dirt that has collected during storage, so this is
an even more effective method.
20-210
(1)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
5) Change hydraulic oil when the temperature

is high.
When hydraulic oil or other oil is warm, it flows
easily. In addition, the sludge can also be
drained out easily from the circuit together with
the oil, so it is best to change the oil when it is
still warm. When changing the oil, as much as
possible of the old hydraulic oil must be drained
out. (Drain the oil from the hydraulic tank; also
drain the oil from the filter and from the drain
plug in the circuit.) If any old oil is left, the contaminants and sludge in it will mix with the new
oil and will shorten the life of the hydraulic oil.
6) Flushing operations
After disassembling and assembling the equipment, or changing the oil, use flushing oil to
remove the contaminants, sludge, and old oil
from the hydraulic circuit.
Normally, flushing is carried out twice: primary
flushing is carried out with flushing oil, and secondary flushing is carried out with the specified
hydraulic oil.
7) Cleaning operations
After repairing the hydraulic equipment (pump,
c o n tr o l v a lv e , e t c .) o r wh e n r u n ni n g t he
machine, carry out oil cleaning to remove the
sludge or contaminants in the hydraulic oil circuit.
The oil cleaning equipment is used to remove
the ultrafine (about 3) particles that the filter
built into the hydraulic equipment cannot
remove, so it is an extremely effective device.
PC130-7
20-211
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
INSPECTION BEFORE TROUBLESHOOTING
INSPECTION BEFORE TROUBLESHOOTING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Hydraulic and
Electrical
mechanical
equipment
equipment
Lubricating oil/Coolant
Item
Check of level and type of fuel
Check of fuel for foreign matter
Check of fuel filter cartridge for clogging
Check of level and type of oil in engine oil pan
Check of engine oil filter for clogging
Check of coolant level
Check of air cleaner for clogging
Check of level and type of hydraulic oil
Check of hydraulic oil strainer for clogging
Check of hydraulic oil filter for clogging
Check of level and type of swing machinery oil
Check of level and type of final drive oil
Add fuel
Clean or drain
Replace
Add oil
Replace
Add coolant
Clean or replace
Add oil
Clean or drain
Replace
Add oil
Add oil
1. Check of battery terminal wires for looseness and corrosion

2. Check of alternator terminal wires for looseness and corrosion
3. Check of starting motor terminal wires for looseness and corrosion
Retighten or replace
1. Check for abnormal sound and smell

2. Check for oil leakage
3. Air bleeding operation
Repair
Repair
Bleed air
Electrical parts
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
(1)
Remedy
1. Check of battery voltage (with engine stopped)

2. Check of electrolyte level
20-212
Criterion
20 30V
Charge or replace
Add distilled water
or replace electrolyte
Check of wires for discoloration, burn, and removal of covers
Replace
Check of wires for removal of clamps and looseness
Repair
Check of wires for wetting with water (Particularly check connectors and
Disconnect and dry

terminals for wetting)
connectors
Check of fuses for breakage and corrosion
Replace
Check of alternator voltage (with engine at medium or higher speed)
Must be 27.5 - Replace
29.5 V after
operation of
several minutes.
Check of operating sound of battery relay (when starting switch is
Replace
turned OFF and ON)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
CLASSIFICATION OF AND PROCEDURES FOR TROUBLESHOOTING
CLASSIFICATION OF AND PROCEDURES FOR

TROUBLESHOOTING
Classification of troubleshooting
Mode
Code display
Contents
Troubleshooting when error code is displayed
E-mode
Troubleshooting for electric system
H-mode
Troubleshooting for hydraulic and mechanical system
S-mode
Troubleshooting for engine unit
Procedure for troubleshooting

If a phenomenon looking like a trouble occurs in the machine, select a proper troubleshooting No. according to
the following procedure, and then go to the corresponding troubleshooting section.
1. Procedure for troubleshooting to be taken when user code is displayed on monitor panel:
If a user code is displayed on the monitor panel, display the error code by using the error code display function of the monitor panel.
Carry out the troubleshooting for the corresponding "Code display" according to the displayed error code.
2. Procedure for troubleshooting when electrical system error code or mechanical system error code
is recorded in error history:
If a user code is not displayed on the monitor panel, check the error code with the error code display function of the monitor panel.
If the error code is recorded, carry out troubleshooting for the corresponding "Code display" according to
the displayed error code.
a If error codes are recorded, delete all of them and reproduce them, and then see if the trouble is still detected.
a If an error code is still output, the mark of "E" is displayed at the left end of the lower line.
3. Procedure for troubleshooting to be taken when user code is not displayed and error history is not
recorded:
If a user code is not displayed in the monitor panel and an error code is not recorded, a trouble that the
machine cannot find out by itself may have occurred in the electrical system or hydraulic and mechanical
system.
In this case, check the phenomenon looking like a trouble again and select the same phenomenon from the
table of "Phenomena looking like troubles and troubleshooting Nos.", and then carry out troubleshooting
related to that phenomenon in the "E mode", "H mode", or "S mode".
PC130-7
20-213
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Phenomena looking like troubles and troubleshooting Nos.

Troubleshooting
No.
Phenomenon looking like trouble
Code
display
E-mode
H-mode
S-mode
Phenomena related to user code or error code

1
User codes are displayed on monitor panel
If error code display function is checked, error codes are displayed
According to displayed
code
Phenomena related to engine

3
Engine does not start easily (It always takes time to start)
S-1
Engine does not crank
Engine cranks but exhaust smoke

does not come out
(Fuel is not injected)
S-2 b)
Exhaust smoke comes out but engine

does not start (Fuel is injected)
S-2 c)
Engine speed does not rise sharply (Follow-up performance is low)
Engine stops during operation
E-2
S-4
Engine rotation is abnormal (Engine hunts)
E-3
S-5
10
Output is insufficient (Power is low)
S-6
11
Exhaust gas color is bad (Incomplete combustion)
S-7
12
Oil is consumed much (or exhaust gas color is bad)
S-8
13
Oil becomes dirty quickly
S-9
14
Fuel is consumed much
S-10
15
Coolant contains oil (or it blows back or reduces)
S-11
16
Engine oil pressure caution lamp lights up (Oil pressure lowers)
S-12
17
Oil level rises (Water or fuel is mixed in oil)
S-13
18
Water temperature rises too high (Overheating)
S-14
19
Abnormal sound comes out
S-15
20
Vibration is excessive
S-16
21
Engine does not stop
E-4
22
Auto-decelerator does not operate
E-5
23
Automatic warm-up system does not operate
E-6
24
Preheater does not operate
E-7
Engine does not start
E-1
S-2 a)
S-3
H-5
Phenomena related to work equipment, swing, and travel

25
Speed or power of whole work equipment, travel, and swing is low
H-1
S-6
26
Engine speed lowers extremely or engine stalls
H-2
S-4
27
Work equipment, travel, and swing systems do not work
28
Abnormal sound comes out from around hydraulic pump
H-4
29
Fine control performance or response is low
H-6
20-214
(1)
E-8
H-3
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
No.
Code
display
E-mode
H-mode
S-mode
Phenomena related to work equipment

30
Speed or power of boom is low
H-7
31
Speed or power of arm is low
H-8
32
Speed or power of bucket is low
H-9
33
Work equipment does not move singly
H-10
34
Hydraulic drift of work equipment is large
H-11
35
Time lag of work equipment is large
H-12
36
One-touch power maximizing function does not work
E-9
H-13
Phenomena related to compound operation

37
In compound operation of work equipment, speed of part loaded

more is low
H-14
38
When machine swings and raises boom simultaneously, boom rising

speed is low
H-15
39
When machine operates work equipment or swings and travels

simultaneously, travel speed lowers largely
H-16
Phenomena related to travel

40
Machine deviates during travel
H-17
41
Travel speed is low
H-18
42
Machine is not steered well or steering power is low
H-19
43
Travel speed does not change
H-20
44
Travel motor does not work (only 1 side)
H-21
45
Travel alarm does not sound or does not stop sounding
E-33
Phenomena related to swing

46
Upper structure does not swing
H-22
47
Swing acceleration or swing speed is low
H-23
48
Upper structure overruns remarkably when it stops swinging
H-24
49
Large shock is made when upper structure stops swinging
H-25
50
Large sound is made when upper structure stops swinging
H-26
51
Hydraulic drift of swing is large
H-27
Phenomena related to monitor panel (Operator menu: Ordinary screen)

52
No items are displayed on monitor panel
E-10
53
7-segment LED's of monitor panel display partially
E-11
54
Monitor lamp of monitor panel is different from mounted model
E-12
55
When starting switch is turned ON, basic check items light up or

flash
E-13
56
While engine is running, caution items flash
E-14
57
While engine is running, emergency stop items flash
E-15
58
Engine coolant thermometer does not display normally
E-16
59
Fuel level gauge does not display normally
E-17
60
Swing lock monitor does not display normally
E-18
PC130-7
20-215
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
No.
Code
display
E-mode
61
When monitor switches are operated, display by lamps does not

change
E-19
62
Windshield wiper or windshield washer does not operate
E-20
63
Lower wiper does not operate
E-21
64
Caution buzzer cannot be stopped
E-22
H-mode
S-mode
Phenomena related to monitor panel (Service menu: Special function screen)

65
Monitoring function does not display "Boom RAISE" normally
E-23
66
Monitoring function does not display "Boom LOWER" normally
E-24
67
Monitoring function does not display "Arm IN" normally
E-25
68
Monitoring function does not display "Arm OUT" normally
E-26
69
Monitoring function does not display "Bucket CURL" normally
E-27
70
Monitoring function does not display "Bucket DUMP" normally
E-28
71
Monitoring function does not display "Swing" normally
E-29
72
Monitoring function does not display "Travel" normally
E-30
73
Monitoring function does not display "Service" normally
E-31
Other phenomena
74
Air conditioner does not operate (Troubleshooting for air conditioner

system)
20-216
(1)
E-32
PC130-7
CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT DRAWING AND ELECTRIC

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF EACH SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING

Connectors list
Connector
No
A01
A02
A03
A04
A05
A06
A07
A09
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A20
A21
A22
A23
A25
A26
A27
A29
A31
A33
A34
A35
A41
A42
A43
A44
A50
A50
A51
A60
A61
A70
A71K
A80
A95
A96
A97
A98
A99
PC130-7
Type
X
X
DT
SWP
SWP
SWP
SWP
SWP
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
X
Terminal
D
X
L
M
090-II
X
X
One-pin
connector
X
KES0
D
X
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
SWP
a The address of each connector roughly shows the place of the connector in
the connectors stereogram and the circuit diagram of each system.
No. of
pins
Name of device
Stereogram
S-1
T-1
N-3
N-1
T-1
N-1
S-1
N-2
I-1
I-2
I-2
I-2
L-1
J-2
J-2
L-2
L-2
K-2
K-3
K-1
K-1
L-1
K-2
L-7
L-5
L-3
L-3
G-1
G-9
I-9
4
4
12
6
14
14
16
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
Intermediate connector
Revolving frame ground
Battery relay (Terminal E)
Battery relay (Terminal BR)
Battery relay (Terminal M)
Battery relay (Terminal B)
Heater relay (Coil)
Heater relay (Contact)
Starting motor safety relay (Terminals S, R)
Starting motor safety relay (Terminals C)
Air cleaner clogging switch
Radiator coolant level sensor
Fusible link (65A)
Fusible link (30A)
Horn
Travel alarm (If equipped)
Working lamp (Right front)
D-9
2
2
3
1
2
3
2
4
2
2
2
2
8
Windshield washer motor (Tank)
Pump oil pressure sensor
Fuel level sensor
Hydraulic oil temperature sensor
Overload alarm pressure sensor (If equipped)
Fuel priming pump (If equipped)
Spare connector
Spare connector
Spare connector
Spare connector
Spare connector
E-9
E-9
I-9
G-9
K-9
G-9
G-1
R-1
K-8
K-8
L-8
L-8
N-2
Address
MGcircuit circuit
H-7
I-8
H-7
I-8
H-6
I-6
H-6
H-6
H-4
I-1
I-1
I-1
I-1
I-1
I-1
I-1
J-3
J-2
J-2
J-2
K-3
K-3
K-3
K-3
K-5
K-5
K-7
K-7
I-7
G-1
G-1
H-1
Pcircuit
H-8
H-7
H-7
H-7
H-6
H-5
H-5
H-5
I-1
I-1
J-1
J-1
J-4
J-3
K-4
K-3
K-7
K-7
K-5
L-5
L-3
L-3
G-2
K-5
H-1
K-6
K-6
K-5
K-6
A-70
H-3
H-4
20-217
(1)

TROUBLESHOOTING
Connector
No
Type
No. of
pins
C01
C02
C03
C09
D01
D02
D03
E01
E02
E03
E04
E05
E06
E06
E08
E10
E11
E12
F02A
F02B
FB1
H07
H08
H09
H10
H11
H12
H15
J01
J02
J03
J04
J05
J06
J07
J08
J09
J10
K19
K30
K31
M07
M09
M13
M19
M21
M22
M23
M26
M27
M29
DRC
DRC
DRC
S
SWP
SWP
SWP
Terminal
Terminal
D
D
D
M
X
X
D
D
X
SWP
DT
M
M
S
S
S
S
090
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
M
DT
DT
M
M
PA
090
090
SWP
040
24
40
40
8
8
8
8
1
1
2
2
2
3
1
2
3
4
2
2
2
2
8
8
16
16
12
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
2
3
3
3
1
2
2
9
6
8
12
16
20
20-218
(1)
Name of device
Governor and pump controller
Model selection connector
Concentrated diode
Concentrated diode
Concentrated diode
Electrical intake air heater
Engine oil pressure switch
Engine oil level switch
Engine speed sensor
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Fuel control dial
Air conditioner compressor magnetic clutch
Governor potentiometer
Governor motor
Alternator [35-A alternator specification]
Rotary lamp (If equipped)
Fuse box
Junction connector (Black)
Junction connector (Black)
Junction connector (Green)
Junction connector (Green)
Junction connector (Pink)
Junction connector (Orange)
Pump resistor (For driving pump in emergency)
CAN terminal resistance
CAN terminal resistance
Light switch
Working lamp (Boom front)
Speaker (Right)
Cigarette lighter
Radio (If equipped)
Right lever knob switch
Left lever knob switch
Air conditioner control panel
Stereogram
U-9
V-9
W-9
U-9
W-9
W-8
W-3
J-9
K-8
K-8
H-9
K-8
O-8
J-8
L-7
J-9
J-8
J-2
AA-9
AA-9
U-2
Y-5
W-6
W-6
S-9
S-9
S-9
N-7
T-9
V-3
V-3
V-3
V-3
W-3
W-4
W-4
W-3
W-3
W-3
W-7
N-4
P-8
F-9
AC-8
N-3
U-2
N-7
T-1
W-4
W-5
U-2
Address
MGcircuit circuit
A-4
A-8
A-3
A-7
A-3
A-4
C-8
A-8
D-1
A-8
D-1
L-3
L-7
L-4
K-6
Pcircuit
A-8
A-7
A-4
G-8
K-9
K-5
F-1
K-4
K-2
I-1
K-6
K-6
L-2
J-9
B-1
D-3
I-9
I-9
I-8
B-9
J-8
J-8
C-7
C-6
C-5
C-3
C-9
C-9
D-9
D-9
E-9
E-9
F-9
E-9
E-9
C-3
C-9
D-9
D-9
E-9
E-9
F-9
E-9
D-9
D-9
F-9
G-9
E-9
G-8
A-3
A-4
B-1
G-1
C-1
L-8
B-8
PC130-7

TROUBLESHOOTING
Connector
No
Type
No. of
pins
M30
M31
M31B
M32
M32B
M33
M33
M40
M40A
M40B
M41
M42
M43
M45
M46
M50
M51
M71
M72
M73
M91
M92
P01
P02
P03
P05
P06
P15
P17
P70
R10
R11
R13
R16
R17
R18
R20
R22
R30
R31
S01
S02
S03
S04
S05
S06
S07
S08
S09
S10
S11
M
M
M
M
M
SWP
SWP
SWP
SWP
SWP
X
M
D
090
AMP
AMP
M
M
M
KES0
070
040
M
M
M
Y050
040
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
16
2
2
2
2
2
8
2
2
2
2
1
1
12
4
8
8
2
4
2
1
4
12
20
2
2
2
2
2
16
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
PC130-7
Name of device
Air conditioner control panel
Optional power supply (2)
Heated seat (If equipped)
Optional power supply (1)
Heated seat (If equipped)
Heated seat switch (If equipped)
Headlamp (Left)
Rear lamp (If equipped)
Headlamp (Right)
Working lamp (Rear) (If equipped)
Network bus connector
RS232C junction connector
Radio cassette (If equipped)
Radio cassette (If equipped)
Room lamp
DC/DC converter
Speaker (Left)
Working lamp (Left front) (If equipped)
Lower wiper motor
Monitor panel
Monitor panel
Caution buzzer stop switch
Rotary lamp switch (If equipped)
Lower wiper switch
Air conditioner daylight sensor (If equipped)
Air conditioner high/low pressure switch
Monitor panel
Light relay (1)
Starting motor cutout relay (PPC lock)
Starting motor cutout relay (Personal code)
Light relay (2)
12-V selector relay
Lower wiper relay
Spare connector
Spare connector
Air conditioner blower relay
Air conditioner compressor relay
Bucket CURL pressure switch
Boom LOWER oil pressure switch
Swing LEFT oil pressure switch
Arm IN pressure switch
Bucket DUMP oil pressure switch
Boom RAISE oil pressure switch
Swing RIGHT oil pressure switch
Arm OUT oil pressure switch
Service 1 (Front) oil pressure switch (If equipped)
Service 1 (Rear) oil pressure switch (If equipped)
Stereogram
U-2
W-6
U-2
Y-5
V-2
W-2
W-6
Z-8
AA-8
AC-8
Y-7
I-9
I-9
W-8
V-9
AD-8
AD-8
Z-8
W-7
AD-7
H-1
H-1
N-6
N-5
P-9
W-2
W-1
N-6
N-4
N-5
O-8
P-8
Q-9
T-9
W-4
T-9
T-9
U-9
W-6
W-5
L-6
L-4
L-7
L-5
L-6
L-4
L-6
L-5
L-3
L-3
K-3
Address
MGcircuit circuit
Pcircuit
K-8
K-8
K-8
K-7
H-2
H-1
B-9
H-8
H-8
A-7
A-6
B-1
L-9
L-9
A-9
F-1
A-5
D-1
D-1
D-1
E-1
L-9
B-9
E-1
C-9
C-9
K-4
K-4
K-3
K-4
K-3
K-5
K-3
K-4
H-3
G-2
G-2
20-219
(1)

TROUBLESHOOTING
Connector
No
Type
No. of
pins
S14
S21
S21
S22
S22
S25
S30
S31
SC
T05
T06
T06A
T11
T13
T91
T92
V01
V04
V05
V06
V21
V22
V30
W03
W04
X05
M
Terminal
X
Terminal
X
090
X
X
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
M
Terminal
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
X
X
M
M
3
6
2
6
2
16
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
4
20-220
(1)
Name of device
Safety lock switch
Emergency pump drive switch
Service 2 (Front) oil pressure switch (If equipped)
Swing holding brake release switch
Service 2 (Rear) oil pressure switch (If equipped)
Travel oil pressure switch
Spare connector
Starting motor (Terminal C)
Floor frame ground
Radio body ground
Cab ground
Travel speed shifting solenoid valve
2-stage relief solenoid
PC-EPC solenoid valve
LS-EPC solenoid valve
Spare connector
Window rear limit switch
Wiper motor
Swing lock switch
Stereogram
T-1
R-9
K-3
R-9
K-3
Q-9
O-1
P-1
J-8
V-2
U-2
T-2
AD-3
K-8
K-8
K-8
J-2
J-2
J-3
K-3
K-9
K-9
N-2
AB-9
Y-3
Q-9
Address
MGcircuit circuit
K-9
K-4
K-4
K-4
Pcircuit
F-8
E-2
G-1
F-2
G-1
E-3
A-1
A-1
I-2
I-2
I-1
K-8
K-7
K-7
K-7
K-9
K-8
A-1
K-8
A-9
C-1
C-2
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING

STEREOGRAM OF CONNECTORS
20-222
(1)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
PC130-7

20-223
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
20-224
(1)

PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
PC130-7

20-225
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
20-226
(1)

PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF MONITOR PANEL SYSTEM (M-CIRCUIT)
20-228
(1)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING

a This circuit diagram is made by excerpting the monitor panel system, engine preheating/starting/charging
system, lower wiper system, and light system from the general electric circuit diagram.
PC130-7
20-229
(3)
TROUBLESHOOTING

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF ENGINE THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM OF GOVERNOR AND

PUMP CONTROLLER (G-CIRCUIT)
20-230
(1)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING

a This circuit diagram is made by excerpting the governor and pump controller system (engine throttle/power
supply/model selection/communication system) from the general electric circuit diagram.
PC130-7
20-231
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF PUMP CONTROL SYSTEM OF GOVERNOR AND PUMP CONTROLLER (P-CIRCUIT)
20-232
(1)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING

a This circuit diagram is made by excerpting the governor and pump controller system (pump control), PPC
lock system, and travel alarm system from the general electric circuit diagram.
PC130-7
20-233
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
CONNECTION TABLE FOR CONNECTOR PIN NUMBERS

a The terms male and female refer to the pins, while the terms male housing and female housing refer to the
mating portion of the housing.
X type connector
No.of
pins
Male (female housing)
Female (male housing)
T-adapter
Part No.
Part No.: 08055-00181
Part No.: 08055-00191
799-601-7010
799-601-7020
Part No.: 08055-00282
Part No.: 08055-00292
799-601-7030
Part No.: 08055-00381
Part No.: 08055-00391
799-601-7040
Part No.: 08055-00481
Part No.: 08055-00491
Terminal part No.: 79A-222-3370

Electric wire size: 0.85
Grommet: Black
Qty: 20

Grommet: Black
Qty : 20

Grommet: Red
Qty: 20

Grommet: Red
Qty: 20
20-234
(1)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
No.of
pins
SWP type connector

799-601-7050
Part No.: 08055-10681
Part No.: 08055-10691
799-601-7060
Part No.: 08055-10881
Part No.: 08055-10891
12
799-601-7310
Part No.: 08055-11281
Part No.: 08055-11291
14
799-601-7070
Part No.: 08055-11481
PC130-7
T-adapter
Part No.
Part No.: 08055-11491
20-235
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
SWP type connector
No. of
pins
16
T-adapter
Part No.
799-601-7320
Part No.: 08055-11681
Part No.: 08055-11691
Terminal part No.:

Grommet: Black
Qty: 20
Terminal part No.:

Grommet: Black
Qty: 20
Terminal part No.:

Grommet: Red
Qty: 20
Terminal part No.:

Grommet: Red
Qty: 20
20-236
(1)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
M type connector
No.of
pins
T-adapter Part
No.
Part No.: 08056-00171
Part No.: 08056-00181
799-601-7080
799-601-7090
Part No.: 08056-00271
Part No.: 08056-00281
799-601-7110
Part No.: 08056-00371
Part No.: 08056-00381
799-601-7120
Part No.: 08056-00471
Part No.: 08056-00481
799-601-7130
Part No.: 08056-00671
Part No.: 08056-00681
799-601-7340
Part No.: 08056-00871
PC130-7
Part No.: 08056-00881
20-237
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
No.of
pins
S type connector
799-601-7140
Part No.: 08056-10871
Part No.: 08056-10881
10
(White)
799-601-7150
Part No.: 08056-11071
Part No.: 08056-11081
12
(White)
799-601-7350
Part No.: 08056-11271
Part No.: 08056-11281
16
(White)
799-601-7330
Part No.: 08056-11671
20-238
(1)
T-adapter
Part No.
Part No.: 08056-11681
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
No.of
pins
S type connector
10
(Blue)
12
(Blue)
799-601-7160
Part No.: 08056-11272
Part No.: 08056-11282
16
(Blue)
799-601-7170
Part No.: 08056-11672
PC130-7
T-adapter
Part No.
Part No.: 08056-11682
20-239
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
MIC type connector
No.of
pins
T-adapter Part
No.
Body part No.: 79A-222-2640 (Qty: 5)
Body part No.: 79A-222-2630 (Qty: 5)
11
Body part No.: 79A-222-2680 (Qty: 5)
Body part No.: 79A-222-2670 (Qty: 5)
799-601-2710
Body part No.: 79A-222-2620 (Qty: 5)
Body part No.: 79A-222-2610 (Qty: 5)
799-601-2950
Body part No.: 79A-222-2660 (Qty: 5)
Body part No.: 79A-222-2650 (Qty: 5)
13
799-601-2720
Body part No.: 79A-222-2710 (Qty: 2)
20-240
(1)
Body part No.: 79A-222-2690 (Qty: 2)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
No.of
pins
MIC type connector

17
799-601-2730
Body part No.: 79A-222-2730 (Qty: 2)
Body part No.: 79A-222-2720 (Qty: 2)
21
PC130-7
T-adapter Part
No.
799-601-2740
Body part No.: 79A-222-2750 (Qty: 2)
Body part No.: 79A-222-2740 (Qty: 2)

(Qty: 50)

(Qty: 50)
20-241
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
No.of
pins
AMP040 type connector

T-adapter Part
No.
799-601-7180
Housing part No.: 79A-222-3430 (Qty: 5)
12
799-601-7190
16
799-601-7210
20
799-601-7220
a Terminal part No.: 79A-222-3470 (No relation with number of pins)
20-242
(1)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
No.of
pins
AMP070 type connector

10
799-601-7510
Part No.: 08195-10210
12
799-601-7520
Part No.: 08195-12210
14
799-601-7530
Part No.: 08195-14210
18
799-601-7540
Part No.: 08195-18210
20
799-601-7550
PC130-7
T-adapter Part
No.
Part No.: 08195-20210
20-243
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
No.of
pins
L type connector
No.of
pins
Connector for PA
Bendix MS connector
10
(1)
T-adapter Part
No.
799-601-3460
20-244
T-adapter Part
No.
No.of
pins
T-adapter Part
No.
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
KES 1 (Automobile) connector
No.of
pins
T-adapter Part
No.
Part No.: 08027-10210 (Natural color)

08027-10220 (Black)

08027-10270 (Black)
Part No.:08027-10310
Part No.:08027-10360

08027-10420 (Black)

08027-10470 (Black)

08027-10620 (Black)
PC130-7

08027-10670 (Black)
20-245
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
KES 1 (Automobile) connector
No.of
pins

08027-10820 (Black)
No.of
pins

08027-10870 (Black)
Connector for relay (Socket type)

799-601-7370
20-246
T-adapter Part
No.
799-601-7360
(1)
T-adapter Part
No.
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
No.of
pins
F type connector
PC130-7
T-adapter
Part No.
20-247
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
[The pin No. is also marked on the connector (electric wire insertion end)]
HD30 Series connector
Type
(shell
size
code)
Body (plug)
Body (receptacle)
Pin (male terminal)
Pin (female termial)
T-adapter
Part No.
799-601-9210
18-8
(1)
Part No.: 08191-11201, 08191-11202,

08191-11205, 08191-11206
Pin (female terminal)
Part No.: 08191-14101, 08191-14102,

08191-14105, 08191-14106
Pin (male termial)
799-601-9210
Part No.: 08191-12201, 08191-12202,

08191-12205, 08191-12206
Pin (male terminal)
Part No.: 08191-13101, 08191-13102,

08191-13105, 08191-13106
799-601-9220
Part No.: 08191-21201, 08191-12202,

08191-21205, 08191-12206
18-14
(2)
Part No.: 08191-24101, 08191-24102,

08191-24105, 08191-24106
Pin (male termial)
799-601-9220
Part No.: 08191-22201, 08191-22202,

08191-22205, 08191-22206
20-248
(1)
Part No.: 08191-23101, 08191-23102,

08191-23105, 08191-23106
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Type
(shell
size
code)

Body (plug)
Body (receptacle)
Pin (male terminal)
T-adapter
Part No.
799-601-9230
18-20
(3)
Part No.:08191-31201, 08191-31202
Part No.:08191-34101, 08191-34102
Pin (male termial)
799-601-9230
Part No.:08191-32201, 08191-32202
Part No.:08191-33101, 08191-33102
Pin (male terminal)
799-601-9240
18-21
(4)
Part No.:08191-41201, 08191-42202
Part No.:08191-44101, 08191-44102
Pin (male termial)
799-601-9240
Part No.:08191-42201, 08191-42202
PC130-7
Part No.:08191-43101, 08191-43102
20-249
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Type
(shell
size
code)
Body (plug)
Body (receptacle)
Pin (male terminal)
T-adapter
Part No.
799-601-9250
24-9
(5)
Part No.:08191-51201, 08191-51202
Part No.:08191-54101, 08191-54102
Pin (male termial)
799-601-9250
Part No.:08191-52201, 08191-52202
Part No.:08191-53101, 08191-53102
Pin (male terminal)
799-601-9260
Part No.: 08191-61201, 08191-62202,

08191-61205, 08191-62206
24-16
(6)
Part No.: 08191-64101, 08191-64102,

08191-64105, 08191-64106
Pin (male termial)
799-601-9260
Part No.: 08191-62201, 08191-62202,

08191-62205, 08191-62206
20-250
(1)
Part No.: 08191-63101, 08191-63102,

08191-63105, 08191-63106
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Type
(shell
size
code)
Body (plug)
Body (receptacle)
Pin (male terminal)
T-adapter
Part No.
799-601-9270
24-21
(7)
Part No.: 08191-71201, 08191-71202,

08191-71205, 08191-71206
Part No.: 08191-74101, 08191-74102,

08191-74105, 08191-74106
Pin (male termial)
799-601-9270
Part No.: 08191-72201, 08191-72202,

08191-72205, 08191-72206
Pin (male terminal)
Part No.: 08191-73101, 08191-73102,

08191-73105, 08191-73106
799-601-9280
Part No.: 08191-81201, 08191-81202

08191-81203, 08191-81204
08191-81205, 08191-80206
24-22
(8)
Part No.: 08191-84101,

08191-84103,
08191-84105,
08191-84102
08191-84104
08191-84106
Pin (male termial)
799-601-9280
Part No.: 08191-82201,

08191-82203,
08191-82205,
PC130-7
08191-82202
08191-82204
08191-82206
Part No.: 08191-83101,

08191-83103,
08191-83105,
08191-83102
08191-83104
08191-83106
20-251
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Type
(shell
size
code)
Body (plug)
Body (receptacle)
Pin (male termial)
T-adapter
Part No.
799-601-9290
24-31
(9)
Part No.: 08191-91203, 08191-91204,

08191-91205, 08191-91206
Part No.: 08191-94103, 08191-94104,

08191-94105, 08191-94106
Pin (male termial)
799-601-9290
Part No.: 08191-92203, 08191-92204,

08191-92205, 08191-92206
20-252
(1)
Part No.: 08191-93103, 08191-93104,

08191-93105, 08191-93106
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
DT Series connector
No.of
pins
Body (plug)
Body (receptacle)
T-adapter
Part No.
799-601-9020
Part No.: 08192-12200 (normal type)

08192-22200 (fine wire type)

799-601-9030


799-601-9040


799-601-9050

PC130-7

20-253
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
DT Series connector
No.of
pins
Body (plug)
Body (receptacle)
8GR:
8B:
8G:
8BR:
Part No.: 08192-1820

08192-2820
(normal type) Part No.: 08192-1810

(fine wire type)
08192-2810
799-601-9060
799-601-9070
799-601-9080
799-601-9090
(normal type)
(fine wire type)
12GR:
12B:
12G:
12BR:
12
Part No.: 08192-1920

08192-2920
20-254
(1)
T-adapter Part No.
(normal type) Part No.: 08192-1910

(fine wire type)
08192-2910
799-601-9110
799-601-9120
799-601-9130
799-601-9140
(normal type)
(fine wire type)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
DTM Series connector
No.of
pins
Body (plug)
Body (receptacle)
T-adapter Part
No.
799-601-9010
Part No.: 08192-02200
Part No.: 08192-02100
DTHD Series connector
No.of
pins
Body (plug)
Body (receptacle)
T-adapter Part
No.
Part No.: 08192-31200 (Contact size#12) Part No.: 08192-31100 (Contact size#12)
08192-41200 (Contact size #8)
08192-41100 (Contact size #8)
08192-51200 (Contact size #4)
08192-51100 (Contact size #4)
PC130-7
20-255
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
No.of
pins
DRC26 Series connector

Body (plug)
Body (receptacle)
24
799-601-9360
Part No.: 7821-93-3110
40
(A)
799-601-9350
Part No.: 7821-93-3120
40
(B)
799-601-9350
20-256
(1)
T-adapter Part
No.
Part No.: 7821-93-3130
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
T-BRANCH BOX AND T-BRANCH TABLE
799-601-2600
799-601-3100
799-601-3200
799-601-3300
799-601-3360
799-601-3370
799-601-3380
799-601-3410
799-601-3420
799-601-3430
799-601-3440
799-601-3450
799-601-3460
799-601-3510
799-601-3520
799-601-3530
799-601-2910
799-601-3470
799-601-2710
799-601-2720
799-601-2730
799-601-2740
799-601-2950
799-601-2750
799-601-2760
799-601-2770
799-601-2780
799-601-2790
799-601-2810
799-601-2820
799-601-2830
799-601-2840
799-601-2850
799-601-7010
799-601-7020
799-601-7030
799-601-7040
799-601-7050
799-601-7060
799-601-7310
799-601-7070
799-601-7320
799-601-7080
799-601-7090
799-601-7110
799-601-7120
799-601-7130
799-601-7340
PC130-7
Measurement box
Measurement box
Measurement box
Measurement box
Plate
Plate
Plate
BENDIX (MS)
BENDIX (MS)
BENDIX (MS)
BENDIX (MS)
BENDIX (MS)
BENDIX (MS)
BENDIX (MS)
BENDIX (MS)
BENDIX (MS)
BENDIX (MS)
Case
MIC
MIC
MIC
MIC
MIC
ECONO
ECONO
ECONO
ECONO
ECONO
DLI
DLI
DLI
Additional cable
Case
X
X
X
X
SWP
SWP
SWP
SWP
SWP
M
M
M
M
M
M
799-601-9300
799-601-9200
799-601-9100
799-601-9000
799-601-8000
799-601-7500
799-601-7400
799-601-7100
799-601-7000
799-601-6500
799-601-6000
799-601-5500
799-601-3000
799-601-2900
799-601-2800
Connector type or
No. of pins
part name
799-601-2700
Part No.
799-601-2500
a The vertical column shows part number of T-Branch Box or T-Branch, and horizontal column shows part
number of Harness Checker Ass'y.
Econo-21P
MS-37P
MS-37P
Econo-24P
For MS box
For MS box
For MS box
24P
24P
17P
17P
5P
10P
5P
14P
19P
14P
5P
13P
17P
21P
9P
2P
3P
4P
8P
12P
8P
12P
16P
1P
2P
3P
4P
6P
8P
12P
14P
16P
1P
2P
3P
4P
6P
8P
20-257
(1)
799-601-7140
799-601-7150
799-601-7160
799-601-7170
799-601-7330
799-601-7350
799-601-7180
799-601-7190
799-601-7210
799-601-7220
799-601-7230
799-601-7240
799-601-7270
799-601-7510
799-601-7520
799-601-7530
799-601-7540
799-601-7550
799-601-7360
799-601-7370
799-601-7380
799-601-9010
799-601-9020
799-601-9030
799-601-9040
799-601-9050
799-601-9060
799-601-9070
799-601-9080
799-601-9090
799-601-9110
799-601-9120
799-601-9130
799-601-9140
799-601-9210
799-601-9220
799-601-9230
799-601-9240
799-601-9250
799-601-9260
799-601-9270
799-601-9280
799-601-9290
799-601-9310
799-601-9320
799-601-9330
799-601-9340
799-601-9350
799-601-9360
799-601-9410
S
S
S
S
S
S
AMP040
AMP040
AMP040
AMP040
Short connector
Case
Case
070
070
070
070
070
Relay connector
Relay connector
JFC connector
DTM
DT
DT
DT
DT
DT
DT
DT
DT
DT
DT
DT
DT
HD30
HD30
HD30
HD30
HD24
HD30
HD30
HD30
HD30
Plate
Measurement box
Case
Case
DRC
DRC
For NE, G sensor
For fuel, boost
799-601-9420
press.
799-601-9430 PVC socket
20-258
(1)
799-601-9300
799-601-9200
799-601-9100
799-601-9000
799-601-8000
799-601-7500
799-601-7400
799-601-7100
799-601-7000
799-601-6500
799-601-6000
799-601-5500
799-601-3000
799-601-2900
799-601-2800
Connector type or
No. of pins
part name
799-601-2700
Part No.
799-601-2500
TROUBLESHOOTING
8P
10P-White
12P-Blue
16P-Blue
16P-White
12P-White
8P
12P
16P
20P
X-2
10P
12P
14P
18P
20P
5P
6P
2P
2P
2P
3P
4P
6P
8P-Gray
8P-Black
8P-Green
8P-Brown
12P-Gray
12P-Black
12P-Green
12P-Brown
18-8
18-14
18-20
18-21
24-9
24-16
24-21
24-23
24-31
For HD30
For DT, HD
40P
24P
2P
3P
2P
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
WHEN ERROR CODE IS DISPLAYED
(DISPLAY OF ERROR CODE)
BEFORE CARRYING OUT TROUBLESHOOTING WHEN CODE IS DISPLAYED .................................. 20-302
INFORMATION IN TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE .................................................................................... 20-307
Error code [104] (Clogging of air cleaner) .................................................................................................. 20-310
Error code [108] (Overheating of engine coolant) .......................................................................................20-311
Error code [112] (Short circuit in wiper motor drive forward system) ......................................................... 20-312
Error code [113] (Short circuit in wiper motor drive reverse system) ......................................................... 20-314
Error code [114] (Short circuit in windshield washer drive system) ............................................................ 20-316
Error code [115] (Trouble in operation of windshield wiper) ....................................................................... 20-318
Error code [116] (Trouble in storage of windshield wiper) .......................................................................... 20-320
Error code [203] (Short circuit in swing holding brake solenoid) ................................................................ 20-322
Error code [205] (Short circuit in 2-stage relief solenoid) ........................................................................... 20-324
Error code [206] (Short circuit in travel speed shifting solenoid) ................................................................ 20-326
Error code [213] (Disconnection in swing holding brake solenoid) ............................................................ 20-328
Error code [215] (Disconnection in 2-stage relief solenoid) ....................................................................... 20-330
Error code [216] (Disconnection in travel speed shifting solenoid) ............................................................ 20-332
Error code [217] (Abnormality in input model code) ................................................................................... 20-334
Error code [218] (Disconnection in S-NET signal line) ............................................................................... 20-336
Error code [222] (Short circuit in LS-EPC solenoid) ................................................................................... 20-338
Error code [223] (Disconnection in LS-EPC solenoid) ............................................................................... 20-339
Error code [224] (Abnormality in pump pressure sensor) .......................................................................... 20-340
Error code [226] (Abnormality in pressure sensor power supply) .............................................................. 20-342
Error code [227] (Abnormality in engine speed sensor) ............................................................................. 20-344
Error code [232] (Short circuit in PC-EPC solenoid) .................................................................................. 20-346
Error code [233] (Disconnection in PC-EPC solenoid) .............................................................................. 20-348
Error code [251] (Abnormality in overload pressure sensor) ..................................................................... 20-350
Error code [301] (Engine low idling speed out of standard range) ............................................................. 20-352
Error code [302] (Engine high idling speed out of standard range) ............................................................ 20-352
Error code [306] (Abnormality in governor potentiometer) ......................................................................... 20-354
Error code [308] (Abnormality in fuel control dial) ...................................................................................... 20-356
Error code [315] (Short circuit in battery relay output line) ......................................................................... 20-358
Error code [316] (Step-out of governor motor) ........................................................................................... 20-360
Error code [317] (Disconnection in phases A and B of governor motor) .................................................... 20-362
Error code [318] (Short circuit in phases A and B of governor motor) ....................................................... 20-364
PC130-7
20-301
(1)
Error
code
218
315
(1)
20-302
217
203
205
206
213
215
216
104
108
112
q
q
113
q
q
114
115
q
q
116
q
q
316
317
318
222
q
q
223
q
q
226
224
227
232
233
251
301
302
306
308
q
q
Defective travel speed shifting solenoid
Defective 2-stage relief solenoid valve
Defective swing holding brake solenoid
Defective LS-EPC solenoid
Defective PC-EPC solenoid
Overheating of engine
Defective fuel control of engine
Defective adjustment of governor lever
Defective mechanical system of engine
Defective air cleaner clogging switch
Defective engine coolant temperature sensor
Defective engine speed sensor

(including adjustment)
Defective governor potentiometer
Defective governor motor
Defective fuel control dial
Defective emergency pump drive switch
Defective swing lock switch
Defective windshield washer motor
Defective wiper motor
Defective sensor power supply (5 V)
Defective governor and pump controller
Defective monitor panel
Defective fuse or fusible link
Defective battery relay
TROUBLESHOOTING
BEFORE CARRYING OUT TROUBLESHOOTING WHEN CODE IS DISPLAYED
BEFORE CARRYING OUT TROUBLESHOOTING WHEN CODE IS

DISPLAYED
Error codes and possible causes of them

Possible causes
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
PC130-7
PC130-7
q
q
q
q
q
Short circuit with power source in wiring harness
Grounding fault in wiring harness
Disconnection in wiring harness
Defective assembled-type diode
Overload pressure sensor
TROUBLESHOOTING
q
q
q
q
q
q
Possible causes
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
q
20-303
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Connection table of fuse box

a This connection table shows the devices to which each power supply of the fuse box (FB1) supplies power
(A switch power supply is a device which supplies power while the starting switch is at the ON position and
a constant power supply is a device which supplies power while the starting switch is at the OFF position).
a When carrying out troubleshooting related to the electrical system, you should check the fuse box and fusible link to see if the power is supplied normally.
Type of power
supply
Fuse No.
Fuse capacity
Destination of power
Governor and pump controller (Controller power supply)
10A
PC-EPC solenoid (Emergency pump drive switch circuit)

Swing holding brake solenoid (Swing holding brake release
switch circuit)
20A
10A
Governor and pump controller (Solenoid power supply)

PPC oil pressure lock solenoid
Starting motor cutout relay (For PPC lock)
Cigarette lighter
10A
Windshield washer motor
Switch power supply

(Fusible link: A34)
10A
Horn
10A
Lower wiper motor [If equipped]
10A
Rotary lamp [If equipped], DC/DC converter [If equipped]
10A
Working lamp (Boom and right front)

Working lamp (Left front and rear) [If equipped]
9
10A
One-touch power maximizing switch circuit
10
10A
Fuel priming pump [If equipped]
11
20A
12
20A
Starting motor cutout relay (For personal code)

Monitor panel (Switch power supply)
Light relay 1
13
20A
Light relay 2
Panel night light signal circuit
14
10A
15
10A
Heated seat [If equipped]

Travel alarm [If equipped]
Constant power
supply (Fusible link:
A35)
20-304
(3)
16
10A
Radio back up (Constant power supply)
17
20A
Monitor panel (Constant power supply)
18
10A
Starting switch
19
10A
Room lamp
20
10A
(Spare)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubles which occur when controller power supply of governor and pump controller
is defective
a The controller power supply (FB1-1) of the governor and pump controller drives the controller system.
a Accordingly, if the controller power supply is turned off, the controller cannot control the governor motor and
battery relay and the following troubles occur.
1) The engine can be started but cannot be stopped.
2) The engine speed cannot be controlled with the fuel control dial.
a If the above problems occur, check the related fuse (FB1-1) and "green LED" of the governor and pump
controller to see if the power is supplied normally.
Lighting: The controller power is supplied (There is not an error and the power supply is normal).
Flashing: The controller power is supplied (There is an error).
Put out: The controller power is not supplied.
a Green LED of governor and pump controller (GREEN)
PC130-7
20-305
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubles which occur when solenoid power supply of governor and pump controller is
defective
a The solenoid power supply (FB1-2) of the governor and pump controller is used by the controller to drive the
solenoids and relays.
a Accordingly, if the solenoid power supply is turned off, when the controller outputs the power to the solenoids or relays, the power is not supplied to any of the solenoids and relays and all or some of the following
error codes are displayed simultaneously.
[E213]: Disconnection in swing holding brake solenoid
[E215]: Disconnection in 2-stage relief solenoid
[E216]: Disconnection in travel speed shifting solenoid
[E222]: Disconnection in LS-EPC solenoid
[E223]: Disconnection in PC-EPC solenoid
a If the above problems occur, check the related fuse (FB1-2) and inlet voltage of the governor and pump controller.
1) Disconnect connector C03 of the controller and connect a T-adapter to the wiring harness side.
2) Turn the starting switch ON.
3) Measure the voltage between each of pins (2) and (12) and each of pins (31), (32), and (33).
Pins (2) and (3) are the power supply pins and pins (31), (32), and (33) are the ground pins.
Pins (2) and (3) are the power supply and pins (31), (32), and (33) are the chassis ground.
If the voltage is 20 30 V, it is normal.
a Power supply connector (C03) of governor and pump controller
20-306
(1)
PC130-7
INFORMATION IN TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE
TROUBLESHOOTING

a The following information is summarized in the troubleshooting table and the related electrical circuit diagram. Before carrying out troubleshooting, understand that information fully.
User code
Error code
Display on panel Display on panel
Trouble
Trouble indicated by error code
Contents of
Condition at the time when the monitor panel or controller detects the trouble
trouble
Action of monitor
The action taken by the monitor panel or controller to protect the system or devices when the monitor
panel or
panel or controller detects the trouble
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
The problem that appears on the machine as a result of the action taken by the monitor panel or controller (shown above)
Information related to the detected trouble or troubleshooting
Cause
Standard value in normal state/Remarks on troubleshooting

<Contents of description>
Standard value in normal state to judge possible causes
Remarks on judgment
2
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
PC130-7
<Troubles in wiring harness>

Disconnection
Connector is connected imperfectly or harness is broken.
Grounding fault
Harness which is not connected to chassis ground circuit is in contact with chassis ground circuit.
Short circuit with power source
Harness which is not connected to power source (24-V) circuit is in
contact with power source (24-V) circuit.
Possible causes of trouble
(Given numbers are refer- <Precautions for troubleshooting>
ence numbers, which do not 1) Method of indicating connector No. and handling of T-adapter
Insert or connect T-adapter as explained below for troubleshooting,
indicate priority)
unless otherwise specified.
If connector No. has no marks of "male" and "female", disconnect
connector and insert T-adapters in both male side and female
side.
If connector No. has marks of "male" and "female", disconnect
connector and connect T-adapter to only male side or female
side.
2) Entry order of pin Nos. and handling of circuit tester leads
Connect positive (+) lead and negative (-) lead of circuit tester as
explained below for troubleshooting, unless otherwise specified.
Connect positive (+) lead to pin No. or harness entered on front
side.
Connect negative (-) lead to pin No. or harness entered on rear
20-307
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Related circuit diagram
This is a circuit diagram of the part related to troubleshooting.

Connector No.: Shows the "Type-Number of pin" and "Color".
Branching/Merging point: Shows that there is a branching/merging point in the electric circuit to be
checked.
Arrow ( ): Roughly shows the location on the machine.
20-308
(1)
PC130-7
[104]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [104] (Clogging of air cleaner)

User code
Contents of
trouble
Action of
monitor panel
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Error code
Trouble
Clogging of air cleaner(Monitor panel system)
104
The signal circuit of the air cleaner clogging switch is opened (disconnected from the chassis ground)
while the engine is running.
None in particular.
If the machine is operated as it is, the engine may be damaged.
If the air cleaner clogging monitor of the monitor panel flashes while the engine is running, this error
code is recorded.
The input state (ON/OFF) from the air cleaner clogging switch can be checked with the monitoring function. (Code: 046, Right of upper line)
Cause
1
(When system is normal)
Defective air cleaner clog2 ging switch (Internal disconnection)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state

Check the air cleaner. If it is clogged, clean or replace it.
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then start engine and carry out troubleshooting.
A31 (male)
Between (1) and (2)
Air cleaner
When normal
Resistance
Max.1 z
When clogged
Min.1 Mz
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting without turning starting switch.
Disconnection in wiring
harness (Disconnection in Wiring harness between P02 (female) (5) and
Resistance Max.1 z
3
wiring harness or defective A31 (female) (1)
contact in connector)
Wiring harness between P11 (female) (2) and
Resistance Max.1 z
chassis ground (A15)
4 Defective monitor panel
P02
Between (5) and
chassis ground
Air cleaner
When normal
Voltage
Max. 1 V
When clogged
20 30 V
Circuit diagram related to air cleaner clogging switch
20-310
(1)
PC130-7
[108]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [108] (Overheating of engine coolant)

User code
Contents of
trouble
Action of
monitor panel
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Error code
Trouble
Overheating of engine coolant (Monitor panel system)
108
The signal circuit of the engine coolant temperature sensor inputs 99 o or higher temperature while the
engine is running.
None in particular.
If the machine is operated as it is, the engine may be seized.
If the engine coolant temperature monitor of the monitor panel flashes while the engine is running, this
error code is recorded.
The input state (ON/OFF) from the engine coolant temperature sensor can be checked with the monitoring function. (Code: 041, by 10 mV)
Cause
Overheating of engine
1
Defective engine coolant

2 temperature sensor (Internal short circuit)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Short circuit with chassis

ground in wiring harness
3
(Contact with ground circuit)

The engine may have overheated. Find the cause and check the
engine for damage, and then repair.
E05 (male)
Engine coolant
temperature
Resistance
Between (1) and (2)

3.5k 90 kz
10 100 C
Between (2) and
Min. 1 Mz
chassis ground
Between P02 (female) (1) E05 (female) (2)
wiring harness and chassis ground
Resistance Min. 1 Mz
P02
Engine coolant
temperature
Between (1) and (13)

Between (1) and
chassis ground
Resistance
3.5k 90 kz
10 100 C
Min. 1 Mz
Circuit diagram related to engine coolant temperature sensor
PC130-7
20-311
(1)
[112]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [112] (Short circuit in wiper motor drive forward system)
User code
Error code
Contents of
trouble
Action of
monitor panel
112
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
When the signal is output to the wiper motor drive forward circuit, an abnormal current flows.
Turns the output to the wiper motor drive forward circuit OFF.
Windshield wiper stops.
Cause
1 (Internal short circuit or
grounding fault)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Short circuit in wiper motor drive forward system

(Monitor panel system)

2

W04 (male)
Continuity/Resistance
Between (3) and (1)
Between (3) and chassis ground
Between P01 (female) (9) W03 (female) (3)
(1)
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and carry out troubleshooting.
P01
Wiper switch
Resistance
Between (9) and
chassis ground
20-312
There is continuity
Min. 1 Mz
OFF
Max. 3 V
ON
Max. 3 V 20 30 V
(Constant period)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[112]
Circuit diagram related to wiper motor
PC130-7
20-313
(1)
[113]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [113] (Short circuit in wiper motor drive reverse system)
User code
Error code
Contents of
trouble
Action of
monitor panel
113
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
When the signal is output to the wiper motor drive reverse circuit, an abnormal current flows.
Turns the output to the wiper motor drive reverse circuit OFF.
Windshield wiper stops.
Cause
1 (Internal short circuit or
grounding fault)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Short circuit in wiper motor drive reverse system


2

W04 (male)
Between (1) and (3)
(1)
P01
Wiper switch
Resistance
Between (10) and
chassis ground
20-314
There is continuity
Min. 1 Mz
OFF
Max. 3 V
ON
Max. 3 V 20 30 V
(Constant period)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[113]
PC130-7
20-315
(1)
[114]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [114] (Short circuit in windshield washer drive system)

User code
Contents of
trouble
Action of
monitor panel
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Error code
Short circuit in windshield washer drive system

Trouble
114
When the windshield washer drive circuit is connected to the ground circuit (the output is turned ON),
an abnormal current flows.
Turns the ground output of the windshield washer motor circuit OFF.
The windshield washer stops.
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Cause
Defective washer motor

(Internal short circuit)
A50 (male)
Resistance
Short circuit with power

2 source in wiring harness
(Contact with 24-V circuit)
20-316
(1)
Between (1) and (2)

5 20 z
Between P01 (female) (3) A50 (female) (2) or
D02 (female) (8) wiring harness and chassis
Voltage
Max. 1 V
ground
Windshield washer
P01
Voltage
switch
OFF
20 30 V
Between (3) and
chassis ground
ON
Max. 1 V
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[114]
Circuit diagram related to windshield washer motor
PC130-7
20-317
(1)
[115]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [115] (Trouble in operation of windshield wiper)

User code
Error code
Contents of
trouble
Action of
monitor panel
115
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
Trouble in operation of windshield wiper (Monitor panel system)
When the wiper operates, the W-signals of both ends of the operating range are not input.
Turns the operation signal to the wiper motor OFF.
The windshield wiper does not operate.
The input state (ON/OFF) from the W-signals of the wiper operating range can be checked with the
monitoring function. (Code: 049, Center of lower line)
Cause

(Internal disconnection)

W04 (male)
Wiper blade
Resistance
Top of operating range

Max. 1 z
Other than top of
Min. 1 Mz
operating range
Resistance Max. 1 z
2
wiring harness or defective W04 (female) (6)
Wiring harness between W04 (female) (5) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
chassis ground (A11, A12)
Between (6) and (5)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
P01
Between (5) and
chassis ground
20-318
(1)
Wiper blade
Top of operating range
Voltage
Max. 1 V
Other than top of

operating range
20 30 V
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[115]
PC130-7
20-319
(1)
[116]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [116] (Trouble in storage of windshield wiper)

User code
Error code
Contents of
trouble
Action of
monitor panel
116
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
When the wiper stored, the P-signals of the storage range is not input.
Turns the storage signal to the wiper motor OFF.
The wiper is not stored.
The input state (ON/OFF) from the P-signals of the wiper operating range can be checked with the monitoring function. (Code: 049, Left of upper line)
Cause
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Trouble in storage of windshield wiper (Monitor panel system)


W04 (male)
Wiper blade
Resistance
Between (4) and (5)
(1)
Max. 1 z
Min. 1 Mz
Resistance Max. 1 z
2
wiring harness or defective W04 (female) (4)
Wiring harness between W04 (female) (5) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
chassis ground (A11, A12)
P01
Wiper blade
Voltage
Between (12) and
chassis ground
20-320
Storage range
Operating range
Storage range
Operating range
Max. 1 V
20 30 V
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[116]
PC130-7
20-321
(1)
[203]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [203] (Short circuit in swing holding brake solenoid)

User code
Error code
E03
Contents of
trouble
203
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
When the signal is output to the swing holding brake solenoid circuit, an abnormal current flows.
Turns the output to the swing holding brake solenoid circuit OFF.
Even if the cause of the failure disappears, the system does not reset itself until the starting switch is
turned OFF.
The machine cannot swing (The swing holding brake is not released).
The operation state (ON/OFF) of the swing holding brake solenoid can be checked with the monitoring
function. (Code: 023, Center of upper line)
If the solenoid and wiring harness are normal, the machine can swing by setting the swing holding brake
release switch in the FREE position. (The swing holding brake does not operate when the machine
stops swinging, however.)
Cause
Defective swing holding
1 brake solenoid (Internal
short circuit)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Short circuit in swing holding brake solenoid

(Governor and pump controller system)

2
Defective governor and

pump controller

V05 (male)
Between (1) and (2)

Min. 1 Mz
Between C03 (female) (37) D01 J02 X05
V05 (female) (1) or S25 (female) (8) wiring
harness and chassis ground
Left work equipment
C03
Voltage
control lever
Between (37) and
chassis ground
20-322
(1)
Resistance
20 60 z
Neutral position
Swing position
Max. 1 V
20 30 V
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[203]
Circuit diagram related to swing holding brake solenoid
PC130-7
20-323
(1)
[205]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [205] (Short circuit in 2-stage relief solenoid)

User code
Error code
Contents of
trouble
205
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
When the signal is output to the 2-stage relief solenoid circuit, an abnormal current flows.
Turns the output to the 2-stage relief solenoid circuit OFF.
turned OFF.
The one-touch power maximizing function does not work (The main relief valve is not set to high pressure).
The operation state (ON/OFF) of the 2-stage relief solenoid can be checked with the monitoring function. (Code: 023, Left of upper line)
Cause
Defective 2-stage relief
1 solenoid (Internal short circuit)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Short circuit in 2-stage relief solenoid


2

V06 (male)
Between (1) and (2)

Min. 1 Mz
Between C03 (female) (28) V06 (female) (1)

pump controller
C03
Between (37) and
chassis ground
20-324
(1)
Resistance
20 60 z
One-touch power maximizing switch

Released
Kept pressed
Voltage
Max. 1 V
20 30 V
(With 8.5-sec timer)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[205]
Circuit diagram related to 2-stage relief solenoid
PC130-7
20-325
(1)
[206]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [206] (Short circuit in travel speed shifting solenoid)

User code
Error code
Contents of
trouble
206
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
When the signal is output to the travel speed shifting solenoid circuit, an abnormal current flows.
Turns the output to the travel speed shifting solenoid circuit OFF.
turned OFF.
The travel speed is not set to HI (The swash plate angle of the travel motor is not set to the minimum).
The operation state (ON/OFF) of the travel speed shifting solenoid can be checked with the monitoring
function. (Code: 023, Left of lower line)
Cause
Defective travel speed
1 shifting solenoid (Internal
short circuit)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Short circuit travel speed shifting solenoid


2

V04 (male)
Between (1) and (2)
Resistance
20 60 z

Min. 1 Mz
20-326
(1)

pump controller
C03
Travel speed switch

and travel lever
Voltage
Between (27) and

chassis ground
Lo + Neutral
Hi + Travel position
Max. 1 V
20 30 V
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[206]
Circuit diagram related to travel speed shifting solenoid
PC130-7
20-327
(1)
[213]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [213] (Disconnection in swing holding brake solenoid)

User code
Error code
E03
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
213
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
Disconnection in swing holding brake solenoid

When the signal is output to the swing holding brake solenoid circuit, no current flows.
None in particular (Since no current flows, the solenoid does not operate).
If the cause of the failure disappears, the system resets itself.
The machine cannot swing (The swing holding brake is not released).
The operation state (ON/OFF) of the swing holding brake solenoid can be checked with the monitoring
function. (Code: 023, Center of upper line)
If the solenoid and wiring harness are normal, the machine can swing by setting the swing holding brake
release switch in the FREE position. (The swing holding brake does not operate when the machine
stops swinging, however.)
During troubleshooting, keep the swing lock switch in the OFF position and the swing holding brake release switch in the RELEASE position.
Since the controller detects disconnection while the solenoid output is turned ON, be sure to turn the
solenoid output ON when checking for reproduction of the failure after repair. (For the method of turning the solenoid output ON and OFF, see troubleshooting for error code [203].)
Cause
Defective swing holding
1 brake solenoid (Internal
disconnection)


V05 (male)
Resistance
Between (1) and (2)
20 60 z
X05 (female)
Between (3) and (4)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness (Disconnection in Wiring harness between D01 (female) (3) and

wiring harness or defective J02 and X05 (male) (3)
Wiring harness between X05 (male) (4) and
V05 (female) (1)

(1)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
ON
Min. 1 Mz
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting withDefective assembled-type
out turning starting switch.
3 diode D01 (Internal disconD01 (male)
Digital circuit tester
Continuity
nection)
Between (7) and (3)
Diode mode
There is continuity
Wiring harness between C03 (female) (37) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
D01 (female) (7)
4
20-328
Swing lock switch

OFF

pump controller
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between C03 (female) (3), (13),

Resistance Max. 1 z
(23) and V05 (female) (2)
Between C03 (female) (37) D01 (female) (7)
Voltage
Max. 1 V
C03 (female)
Disconnect D01 and
Between (37) and (3), connect (3) and (7) on
female side.
(13), (23)
Resistance
20 60 z
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[213]
Circuit diagram related to swing holding brake solenoid
PC130-7
20-329
(1)
[215]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [215] (Disconnection in 2-stage relief solenoid)

User code
Error code
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
215
Trouble
Disconnection in 2-stage relief solenoid

When the signal is output to the 2-stage relief solenoid circuit, no current flows.
Problem that
appears on
machine
The one-touch power maximizing function does not work (The main relief valve is not set to high pressure).
Related
information
The operation state (ON/OFF) of the 2-stage relief solenoid can be checked with the monitoring function. (Code: 023, Left of upper line)
Cause
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting withDefective 2-stage relief
1 solenoid (Internal short cirV06 (male)
Resistance
cuit)
Between (1) and (2)
20 60 z
harness (Disconnection in Wiring harness between C03 (female) (28) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
2
wiring harness or defective V06 (female) (1)
Resistance Max. 1 z

4
pump controller
(1)
Max. 1 V
C03 (female)
Resistance
Between (37) and (3), (13), (23)
20-330
Voltage
20 60 z
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[215]
Circuit diagram related to 2-stage relief solenoid
PC130-7
20-331
(1)
[216]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [216] (Disconnection in travel speed shifting solenoid)

User code
Error code
Contents of
trouble
216
Action of
controller
Trouble
Disconnection in travel speed shifting solenoid

When the signal is output to the travel speed shifting solenoid circuit, no current flows.
Problem that
appears on
machine
The travel speed is not set to HI (The swash plate angle of the travel motor is not set to the minimum).
Related
information
The operation state (ON/OFF) of the travel speed shifting solenoid can be checked with the monitoring
function. (Code: 023, Left of lower line)
Cause
Defective travel speed
1 shifting solenoid (Internal
disconnection)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state

V04 (male)
Resistance
Between (1) and (2)
20 60 z
Resistance
2
Resistance

pump controller
(1)
Max. 1 z
Voltage
Max. 1 V
C03 (female)
Resistance
Between (27) and (3), (13), (23)
20-332
Max. 1 z
20 60 z
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[216]
Circuit diagram related to travel speed shifting solenoid
PC130-7
20-333
(1)
[217]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [217] (Abnormality in input model code)

User code
Error code
Contents of
trouble
217
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
Abnormality in input model code

A model code signal for a model which is not registered in the controller is input.
Uses the default model (PC200-7) for control.
turned OFF.
The engine does not output sufficient power or may stall.
The model name (number) recognized by the controller can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 002, 003)
The input state (ON/OFF) of the model selection signal can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 027, Other than left of lower line)
Cause
Defective model selection
C09 (female)
Resistance
1 connector (Internal disconnection or short circuit)
Between (1), (2) and (8)
Max. 1 z
Between (3), (4), (7) and (8)
Min. 1 Mz
harness (Disconnection in
2
wiring harness or defective
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
3

Resistance
C09 (male) (1)

Resistance Max. 1 z
C09 (male) (2)
Resistance Max. 1 z
Between C02 (female) (17) C09 (male) (3)
Between C02 (female) (7) C09 (male) (4) wirResistance Min. 1 Mz
ing harness and chassis ground
Between C02 (female) (13) C09 (male) (7)
20-334
(1)

pump controller
Max. 1 z
C02 (female)
Voltage
Between (7), (13), (17) and
chassis ground
20 20 V
Between (27), (37), and chassis

ground
Max. 1 V
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[217]
Circuit diagram related to model selection connector
PC130-7
20-335
(1)
[218]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [218] (Disconnection in S-NET signal line)

User code
Contents of
trouble
Error code
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Disconnection in S-NET signal line

Trouble
218
A trouble has occurred in the S-NET communication between the monitor panel and controller (It has
been repaired when this error code is displayed).
Uses the following default items for control until the trouble is repaired.
1) Working mode: E
2) Travel speed: Lo
3) Auto-decelerator: ON
turned OFF.
The working mode cannot be changed (The working mode displayed in the monitor panel changes
normally).
The travel speed cannot be changed (The travel speed displayed in the monitor panel changes
normally).
The auto-decelerator cannot be reset (The auto-decelerator displayed in the monitor panel is reset
normally.)
This error code is displayed to notify the operator that a trouble has occurred when the S-NET communication between the monitor panel and governor and pump controller becomes normal.
The system is normal when the error code is displayed. Check the related devices and circuits and
remove the cause of the trouble, however, to prevent reoccurrence of the trouble.
Cause
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness (Disconnection in Wiring harness between P02 (female) (9), (10)
Resistance Max. 1 z
1
wiring harness or defective and C02 (female) (21).
Resistance Max. 1 z
C02 (female) (31)
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting withShort circuit with chassis
2
(Contact with ground cirBetween P02 (female) (9), (10) C02 (female)
cuit)
(21) wiring harness and chassis ground

pump controller
Between P02 (female) (9), (10) C02 (female)
Voltage
Max. 1 V
(21) wiring harness and chassis ground
P02
Voltage
Between (9), (10) and (20)
69V
C02
Voltage
20-336
(1)
69V
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[218]
Circuit diagram related to S-NET
PC130-7
20-337
(1)
[222]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [222] (Short circuit in LS-EPC solenoid)

User code
Error code
Contents of
trouble
222
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
Short circuit in LS-EPC solenoid

An abnormal current flows in the LS-EPC solenoid circuit

Reduces the output to the LS-EPC solenoid circuit 0.
turned OFF.
The travel speed is fast at Lo. Amount of flow is large at model B. (The set pressure of the LS valve
cannot be controlled)
The output state (current) to the LS-EPC solenoid can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 015, by 10 mA)
Cause

Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Defective LS-EPC solenoid (Internal short circuit)

2
V22 (male)
Between (1) and (2)
Resistance
7 14 z

Min. 1 Mz

pump controller
C03
Between (6) and (3), (13), (23)
Resistance
7 14 z
Min. 1 Mz
Circuit diagram related to LS-EPC solenoid
20-338
(1)
PC130-7
[223]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [223] (Disconnection in LS-EPC solenoid)

User code
Error code
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
223
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
Disconnection in LS-EPC solenoid

No current flows in the LS-EPC solenoid circuit

The travel speed is fast at Lo. Amount of flow is large at model B. (The set pressure of the LS valve
cannot be controlled)
The output state (current) to the LS-EPC solenoid can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 015, by 10 mA)
Cause
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Defective LS-EPC solenoid (Internal short circuit)

V22 (male)
Resistance
Between (1) and (2)

7 14 z
Resistance Max. 1 z
2
Resistance Max. 1 z
(23), and V22 (female) (2)

4
pump controller
Voltage
Max. 1 V
C03
Resistance
Between (6) and (3), (13), (23)
7 14 z
Circuit diagram related to LS-EPC solenoid
PC130-7
20-339
(1)
[224]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [224] (Abnormality in pump pressure sensor)

User code
Error code
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
224
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
Abnormality in pump pressure sensor

The signal voltage from the pump pressure sensor is below 0.3 V or above 4.72 V.
Sets the pump pressure to 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2} for control.
The travel speed does not change automatically (The travel load pressure cannot be sensed).
Cut-off function dose not work (The work equipment pressure can not be detected.)
If the 5-V circuit (B) and ground circuit (A) of the pressure sensor are connected inversely, the pressure
sensor will be broken. Accordingly, take extreme care when checking.
The input state (ON/OFF) from the pump pressure sensor can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 011, 012, by 1 kg/cm2)
Cause
Defective sensor power
1
supply

If error code [226] is displayed, carry out troubleshooting for it first.
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then hold starting switch ON or start
engine and carry out troubleshooting.
Defective pump pressure

2 sensor (Internal defect)
A51
Between (B) and (A)
Power supply
Voltage
4.5 5.5 V
Between (C) and (A)

Signal
0.5 4.5 V
The pressure sensor voltage is measured with the wiring harness connected. Accordingly, if the voltage is abnormal, check the wiring harness and controller, too, for another cause of the trouble, and then
judge.
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
3

4

20-340
(1)

pump controller

Resistance
J07 and A51 (female) (B)
Max. 1 z

Resistance Max. 1 z
A51 (female) (A)
Resistance Max. 1 z
A51 (female) (C)
Between C01 (female) (8) A51 (female) (C)
Between C01 (female) (22) J07 A51
(female) (B) wiring harness and chassis ground
Voltage
Max. 1 V

Voltage
Max. 1 V
C01
Voltage
Power supply
Signal
4.5 5.5 V
0.5 4.5 V
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[224]
Circuit diagram related to pump pressure sensor
PC130-7
20-341
(1)
[226]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [226] (Abnormality in pressure sensor power supply)

User code
Error code
Contents of
trouble
226
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
An abnormal current flows in the power supply (5 V) circuit of the pressure sensor or potentiometer.
Turns the output to the power supply (5 V) circuit OFF.
turned OFF.
The signals of the pressure sensor and potentiometer are not input normally.
The error codes of abnormality in the pressure sensor and abnormality in the potentiometer are displayed simultaneously.
Cause
Defective pressure sensor

1 or potentiometer (Internal
short circuit)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Abnormality in pressure sensor power supply


2

aDisconnect connector with starting switch OFF, then turn starting
switch ON and carry out troubleshooting.
Fuel control dial
Connector E06
Disconnect the devices
Governor
Connector E10
at right in order. If the
potentiometer
error code disappears
Pump pressure
when a device is disConnector A51
sensor
connected, that device
Overload pressure
has a defect in it.
Connector A70
sensor (If installed)
Between C01 (female) (22) J07 E06
(female) (1) wiring harness and chassis ground Resistance Min. 1 Mz
[Fuel control dial system]
(female) (A) wiring harness and chassis ground Resistance Min. 1 Mz
[Governor potentiometer system]
(female) (B) wiring harness and chassis ground Resistance Min. 1 Mz
[Pump pressure sensor system]
(female) (B) wiring harness and chassis ground Resistance Min. 1 Mz
[Overload pressure sensor system: If installed]

3
pump controller
20-342
(1)
C01
Voltage
4.5 5.5 V
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[226]
Circuit diagram related to sensor power supply
PC130-7
20-343
(1)
[227]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [227] (Abnormality in engine speed sensor)

User code
Error code
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
227
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
Normal pulse signals are not input to the signal circuit of the engine speed sensor.
Controls as if in the E-mode.
The output power is a little low (The engine speed cannot be sensed).
The input state (ON/OFF) from the engine speed sensor can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 010, by 10 rpm)
Cause
Defective engine speed
1 sensor (Internal short circuit or disconnection)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Abnormality in engine speed sensor

Defective adjustment of
engine speed sensor

E04 (male)
Resistance
Between (1) and (2)
500 1,000 z
Min. 1 Mz
See TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Adjusting engine speed sensor.

Resistance Max. 1 z
3
wiring harness or defective E04 (female) (1)
Wiring harness between C01 (female) (29),
Resistance Max. 1 z
(39) and E04 (female) (2)
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and carShort circuit with power
ry out troubleshooting.
Between
C01 (female) (40) E04 (female) (1)
Voltage
Max. 1 V
5
20-344
(1)

pump controller
C02
Between (40) and (29), (39)
Resistance
500 1,000 z
Min. 1 Mz
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[227]
Circuit diagram related to engine speed sensor
PC130-7
20-345
(1)
[232]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [232] (Short circuit in PC-EPC solenoid)

User code
Error code
E02
Contents of
trouble
232
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
Short circuit in PC-EPC solenoid

An abnormal current flows in the PC-EPC solenoid circuit.

Turns the output to the LS-EPC solenoid circuit OFF.
turned OFF.
If the pump load increases, the engine speed lowers largely and the engine may stall (The pump absorption torque cannot be controlled).
The output state (current) to the PC-EPC solenoid can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 013, by 10 mA)
Cause

Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state

V21 (male)
Between (1) and (2)
Resistance
7 14 z

Min. 1 Mz
Emergency pump drive
Defective emergency pump
S25 (male)
Resistance
switch
2 drive switch (Internal short
circuit or disconnection)
Between (3) and (4)
Min. 1 Mz
Normal
Between (3) and
Min. 1 Mz
chassis ground
Between C03 (female) (16) S25 (female) (3)
3
(Contact with ground cirwiring harness and chassis ground
cuit)
Between S25 (female) (2) V21 (female) (1)
4
20-346
(1)

pump controller
C03 (female)
Between (16) and (3), (13), (23)
Resistance
7 14 z
Min. 1 Mz
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[232]
Circuit diagram related to PC-EPC solenoid
PC130-7
20-347
(1)
[233]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [233] (Disconnection in PC-EPC solenoid)

User code
Error code
E02
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
233
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
Disconnection in PC-EPC solenoid

No current flows in the PC-EPC solenoid circuit.

If the pump load increases, the engine speed lowers largely and the engine may stall (The pump absorption torque cannot be controlled).
The output state (current) to the PC-EPC solenoid can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 013, by 10 mA)
Cause
1
V21 (male)
Resistance
Between (1) and (2)
7 14 z
Emergency pump drive
S25 (male)
Resistance
Defective emergency pump
switch
2 drive switch (Internal short
Normal
Max. 1 z
circuit or disconnection)
Between (2) and (3)
Emergency
Min. 1 Mz
Normal
Max. 1 z
Between (5) and (6)
Emergency
Min. 1 Mz
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
3

20-348
(1)

pump controller

Resistance
S25 (female) (3)
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between S25 (female) (2) and

V21 (female) (1)
Max. 1 z
Resistance

Resistance Max. 1 z
(23) and S25 (female) (6)
Resistance Max. 1 z
V21 (female) (2)
Voltage
Max. 1 V
Between S25 (female) (2) V21 (female) (1)
Voltage
Max. 1 V
C03 (female)
Between (16) and (3), (13),
and (23)
Resistance
7 14 z
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[233]
Circuit diagram related to PC-EPC solenoid
PC130-7
20-349
(1)
[251]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [251] (Abnormality in overload pressure sensor)

User code
Error code
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
251
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
Abnormality in overload pressure sensor

The signal voltage from the overload pressure sensor is below 0.3 V or above 4.72 V.
Sets the boom cylinder bottom pressure to 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2} for control.
The overload caution function does not operate (The load pressure on the boom cylinder bottom side
cannot be sensed).
aIf the 5-V circuit (B) and ground circuit (A) of the pressure sensor are connected inversely, the pressure
sensor will be broken. Accordingly, take extreme care when checking.
Cause
1
supply system

aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then hold starting switch ON or start
engine and carry out troubleshooting.
A70
Voltage
Defective overload pres2 sure sensor (Internal

defect)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Between (B) and (A)

Between (C) and (A)
Power supply
Signal
4.5 5.5V
0.5 4.5V
The pressure sensor voltage is measured with the wiring harness connected. Accordingly, if the voltage is abnormal, check the wiring harness and controller, too, for another cause of the trouble, and then
judge.
Resistance Max. 1 z
J07 and A70 (female) (B)
3
wiring harness or defective Wiring harness between C01 (female) (10) and
Resistance
A70 (female) (A)
A70 (female) (C)
4

Resistance
Max. 1 z
Max. 1 z
Between C01 (female) (7) - A70 (female) (C)
Voltage
Max. 1 V
(female) (B) wiring harness and chassis ground
Voltage
Max. 1 V
6

pump controller
C01
20-350
(1)
Power supply
Voltage
4.5 5.5 V
Signal
0.5 4.5 V
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[251]
Circuit diagram related to overload pressure sensor
PC130-7
20-351
(1)
[301], [302]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [301] (Engine low idling speed out of standard range)
User code
Error code
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
301
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
Engine speed below 500 rpm is sensed for continuous 10 seconds while the engine is running.
None in particular.
The input state (rpm) from the engine speed sensor can be checked with the monitoring function.
Cause
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Engine low idling speed out of standard range

Check for external and internal factors that have lowered the engine low
Abnormality in mechanical
1
idling speed, and then carry out troubleshooting for the mechanical syssystem of engine
tem of the engine.
2

pump controller
Troubleshooting cannot be carried out since the defect is in the governor and pump controller. (If there is not any visible trouble in the
machine, the controller may be used as it is.)
Error code [302] (Engine high idling speed out of standard range)
User code
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Error code
302
20-352
(1)
Engine high idling speed out of standard range

Engine speed above 2,600 rpm is sensed for continuous 10 seconds while the engine is running.
None in particular.
The input state (rpm) from the engine speed sensor can be checked with the monitoring function.
Cause
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Trouble
Check for external and internal factors that have heightened the engine
Abnormality in mechanical
1
high idling speed, and then carry out troubleshooting for the mechanical
system of engine
system of the engine.
Troubleshooting cannot be carried out since the defect is in the goverDefective governor and
2
nor and pump controller. (If there is not any visible trouble in the
pump controller
machine, the controller may be used as it is.)
PC130-7
[306]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [306] (Abnormality in governor potentiometer)

User code
Error code
Contents of
trouble
306
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
Abnormality in governor potentiometer

The signal voltage from the governor potentiometer is below 0.4 V or above 4.6 V.
Calculates the motor position from the voltage just before occurrence of the trouble and uses it for control.
turned OFF.
The high idling speed is not obtained (it is a little low).

The low idling speed is not obtained (it is a little high).
The auto-decelerator or automatic warm-up system does not operate.
The engine stalls.
The engine does not stop.
The input state (voltage) from the governor potentiometer can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 031, by 10 mV)
Cause

1
supply system

Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Defective governor potentiometer (Internal defect)
E10 (male)
Between (A) and (C)
Resistance
4.0 6.0 z
Between (B) and (A)

Between (B) and (C)
0.25 5.0 z
0.25 5.0 z
Resistance Max. 1 z
harness (Disconnection in J07 and E10 (female) (A)
3
wiring harness or defective Wiring harness between C01 (female) (21) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
E10 (female) (C)
Resistance Max. 1 z
E10 (female) (B)
4


pump controller
Between C01 (female) (13) E10 (female) (B)
Voltage
Max. 1 V
(female) (A) wiring harness and chassis ground
Voltage
Max. 1 V
C01
20-354
(1)
Power supply
Voltage
4.5 5.5 V
Signal
0.5 4.5 V
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[306]
Circuit diagram related to governor motor and potentiometer
PC130-7
20-355
(1)
[308]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [308] (Abnormality in fuel control dial)

User code
Error code
E05
Contents of
trouble
308
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
Abnormality in fuel control dial

The signal voltage from the fuel control dial is below 0.23 V or above 4.77 V.
Calculates the fuel control dial position from the voltage just before occurrence of the trouble and uses
it for control.
If the output was set in the full mode before occurrence of the failure, it is not set in the partial mode.
If the output was set in the partial mode before occurrence of the failure, it is not set in the full mode.
The engine hunts.
The high idling speed is not obtained and the output is insufficient.
The input state (voltage) from the fuel control dial can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 030, by 10 mV)
Cause
1
supply system


(Internal defect)
E06 (male)
Between (A) and (C)
Resistance
4.0 6.0 z
Between (B) and (A)

Between (B) and (C)
0.25 5.0 z
0.25 5.0 z
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
3

4

20-356
(1)

pump controller

Resistance
J07 and E06 (female) (1)
Max. 1 z

Resistance Max. 1 z
E06 (female) (3)
Resistance Max. 1 z
E06 (female) (2)
Between C01 (female) (19) E06 (female) (2)
(female) (1) wiring harness and chassis ground
Voltage
Max. 1 V

Voltage
Max. 1 V
C01
Voltage
Power supply
Signal
4.5 5.5 V
0.5 4.5 V
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[308]
Circuit diagram related to fuel control dial
PC130-7
20-357
(1)
[315]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [315] (Short circuit in battery relay output line)

User code
Error code
Contents of
trouble
315
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
Abnormality in battery relay output

When the signal is output to the battery relay drive circuit, an abnormal current flows.
Turns off the output to the battery relay drive circuit OFF.
turned OFF.
The engine does not stop (The controller power supply cannot be maintained until the engine stops).
The operation state (ON/OFF) of the battery relay can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 037, Right of upper line)
Cause

Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state

2
20-358
(1)


pump controller
Battery relay (unit)

Between A21 (BR) and A20 (E)
Resistance
Approx. 100 z
Between A21 (BR) and

chassis ground
Min. 1 Mz
Between C03 (female) (4) D01 J01 A21
(BR) wiring harness and chassis ground
C03
Starting switch
Voltage
Between (4) and
chassis ground
ON o OFF
20 30 V
(For 4 7sec)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[315]
Circuit diagram related to battery relay
PC130-7
20-359
(1)
[316]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [316] (Step-out of governor motor)

User code
Error code
Contents of
trouble
316
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
The input signal from the governor potentiometer is much different from the set value in the controller.
Repeats the control operation (steps out).
turned OFF.
The engine speed cannot be controlled.
The engine hunts.
Cause
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
(1)

system
Defective governor potentiIf error code [306] is displayed, carry out troubleshooting for it first.
ometer system

system (Disconnection)
4
system (Short circuit)
5
governor lever
Defective fuel control sys6
tem of engine
3
20-360
Step-out of governor motor


pump controller

See TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Special functions of monitor panel
See Shop Manual for 95-3 Series engine.
Troubleshooting cannot be carried out since the defect is in the controller (If none of causes 1 6 is the cause of the trouble, the controller is
defective).
PC130-7
[317]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [317] (Disconnection in phases A and B of governor motor)

User code
Error code
E05
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
317
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
Disconnection in phases A and B of governor motor

When the signal is output to the governor motor, no current flows.

None in particular.
The engine speed is set to low idling.

The engine hunts.
The governor motor steps out.
The operation state (current) of the governor motor can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 033 - Phase A, 034 - Phase B, by 10 mA)
Cause

Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
(1)
E11 (male)
Between (1) and (2)
Resistance
2.5 7.5 z
Between (3) and (4)

2.5 7.5 z
Resistance Max. 1 z
E11 (female) (1)
Resistance
2
wiring harness or defective E11 (female) (2)
Resistance
E11 (female) (3)
20-362


pump controller
Max. 1 z
Max. 1 z

Resistance Max. 1 z
E11 (female) (4)
C03 (female)
Resistance
2.5 7.5 z
2.5 7.5 z
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[317]
PC130-7
20-363
(1)
[318]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error code [318] (Short circuit in phases A and B of governor motor)

User code
Error code
E05
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
318
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Trouble
Short circuit in phases A and B of governor motor

When the signal is output to the governor motor, an abnormal current flows.
None in particular.
The engine speed cannot be controlled.

The engine speed is set to low idling.
The engine hunts.
The operation state (current) of the governor motor can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 033 - Phase A, 034 - Phase B, by 10 mA)
Cause


1
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state

2
E11 (male)
Between (1) and (2)
Resistance
2.5 7.5 z
Between (3) and (4)

2.5 7.5 z
Min. 1 Mz

Min. 1 Mz


C03 (female)
Resistance
3
pump controller
20-364
(1)

2.5 7.5 z
2.5 7.5 z

Min. 1 Mz
Min. 1 Mz

Min. 1 Mz
Min. 1 Mz
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
[318]
PC130-7
20-365
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

(E-MODE)
BEFORE CARRYING OUT TROUBLESHOOTING WHEN CODE IS DISPLAYED................................... 20-402
INFORMATION IN TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE ..................................................................................... 20-403
E- 1 Engine does not start......................................................................................................................... 20-404
E- 2 Engine stops during operation........................................................................................................... 20-408
E- 3 Engine speed is unstable or engine hunts......................................................................................... 20-410
E- 4 Engine does not stop......................................................................................................................... 20-412
E- 5 Auto-decelerator does not operate .................................................................................................... 20-414
E- 6 Automatic warm-up system does not operate ................................................................................... 20-415
E- 7 Preheater does not operate............................................................................................................... 20-416
E- 8 Work equipment, swing, and travel system do not operate ............................................................... 20-418
E- 9 One-touch power maximizing system does not operate.................................................................... 20-420
E-10 No items of monitor panel light up ..................................................................................................... 20-421
E-11 7-segment LED's of monitor panel does not light up partially............................................................ 20-422
E-12 Monitor lamp of monitor panel is different from mounted model........................................................ 20-422
E-13 When starting switch is turned ON, basic check items light up or flash ............................................ 20-423
E-14 While engine is running, caution items flash ..................................................................................... 20-424
E-15 While engine is running, emergency stop items flash ....................................................................... 20-428
E-16 Engine coolant thermometer is abnormal.......................................................................................... 20-430
E-17 Fuel level gauge is abnormal............................................................................................................. 20-431
E-18 Swing lock monitor is abnormal......................................................................................................... 20-432
E-19 When monitor switch is operated, display by lamp does not change ................................................ 20-434
E-20 Windshield wiper and windshield washer do not operate.................................................................. 20-436
E-21 Lower windshield wiper does not operate ......................................................................................... 20-440
E-22 Caution buzzer does not stop............................................................................................................ 20-442
E-23 Monitoring function does not display "Boom RAISE" normally .......................................................... 20-444
E-24 Monitoring function does not display "Boom LOWER" normally ....................................................... 20-446
E-25 Monitoring function does not display "Arm IN" normally .................................................................... 20-448
E-26 Monitoring function does not display "Arm OUT" normally ................................................................ 20-450
E-27 Monitoring function does not display "Bucket CURL" normally ......................................................... 20-452
E-28 Monitoring function does not display "Bucket DUMP" normally ........................................................ 20-454
E-29 Monitoring function does not display "Swing" normally ..................................................................... 20-456
E-30 Monitoring function does not display "Travel" normally ..................................................................... 20-458
E-31 Monitoring function does not display "service" normally.................................................................... 20-460
E-32 Troubleshooting of air conditioner ..................................................................................................... 20-464
E-33 Travel alarm does not sound or does not stop sounding................................................................... 20-475
PC130-7
20-401
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
BEFORE CARRYING OUT TROUBLESHOOTING WHEN CODE IS

DISPLAYED
Connection table of fuse box
a This connection table shows the devices to which each power supply of the fuse box (FB1) supplies power
(A switch power supply is a device which supplies power while the starting switch is at the ON position and
a constant power supply is a device which supplies power while the starting switch is at the OFF position).
a When carrying out troubleshooting related to the electrical system, you should check the fuse box and fusible link to see if the power is supplied normally.
Type of power
supply
Fuse No.
Fuse capacity
Destination of power
Governor and pump controller (Controller power supply)
10A
PC-EPC solenoid (Emergency pump drive switch circuit)

Swing holding brake solenoid
(Swing holding brake release switch circuit)
Switch power supply

(Fusible link: A34)
20A
10A
Governor and pump controller (Solenoid power supply)

PPC oil pressure lock solenoid
Starting motor cutout relay (For PPC lock)
Cigarette lighter
10A
Windshield washer motor
Switch power supply

(Fusible link: A34)
10A
Horn
10A
Lower wiper motor [If equipped]
10A
Rotary lamp [If equipped]
10A
Working lamp (Boom and right front)

Working lamp (Left front and rear) [If equipped]
9
10A
One-touch power maximizing switch circuit
10
10A
Fuel priming pump [If equipped]
11
20A
12
20A
Starting motor cutout relay (For personal code)

Monitor panel (Switch power supply)
Light relay 1
Switch power supply
(Fusible link: A34)
13
20A
Light relay 2
Panel night light signal circuit
14
10A
15
10A

Travel alarm [If equipped]
Constant power
supply
(Fusible link: A35)
20-402
(1)
16
10A
DC/DC converter (Power supply to 12-V devices)
17
20A
Monitor panel (Constant power supply)
18
10A
Starting switch
19
10A
Room lamp
20
10A
(Spare)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING

a The following information is summarized in the troubleshooting table and the related electrical circuit diagram. Before carrying out troubleshooting, understand that information fully.
Trouble
Related
information
Trouble which occurred in the machine

Cause
<Contents of description)
Standard value in normal state to judge possible causes
Remarks on judgment
<Troubles in wiring harness>

Disconnection
Connector is connected imperfectly or wiring harness is broken.
Grounding fault
Wiring harness which is not connected to chassis ground circuit is in
contact with chassis ground circuit.
Short circuit with power source
Wiring harness which is not connected to power source (24-V) circuit
is in contact with power source (24-V) circuit.
2
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state

(Given numbers are
reference numbers, which
do not indicate priority)
3
<Precautions for troubleshooting>

1) Method of indicating connector No. and handling of T-adapter
Insert or connect T-adapter as explained below for troubleshooting, unless otherrwise specified.
If connector No. has no marks of "male" and "female", disconnect
connector and insert T-adapters in both male side and female
side.
If connector No. has marks of "male" and "female", disconnect
connector and connect T-adapter to only male side or female
side.
2) Entry order of pin Nos. and handling of circuit tester leads
Connect positive (+) lead and negative (-) lead of circuit tester as
explained below for troubleshooting, unless otherwise specified.
Connect positive (+) lead to pin No. or harness entered on front
side.
Connect negative (-) lead to pin No. or harness entered on rear
side.
Related circuit diagram
This is a circuit diagram of the part related to troubleshooting.

Connector No.: Shows the "Type-Number of pin" and "Color".
Branching/Merging point: Shows that there is a branching/merging point in the electric circuit to be
checked.
Arrow ( ): Roughly shows the location on the machine.
PC130-7
20-403
(1)
E-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-1 Engine does not start

Trouble
Related
information
Engine does not start

The engine starting circuit is equipped with the start lock function of safety lock lever type.
Cause
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
20-404
(1)

Battery voltage
Electrolyte specific gravity
Low charge level of battery
Min. 24 V
Min. 1.26
If the fuse is broken, the circuit probably has a grounding fault, etc.
(See Cause 10.)
Defective fuse No. 3 or 18
If the fuse is not broken and the monitor panel does not light up, check
the power supply circuit between the battery and fuse box, too.
Defective starting switch
H15 (male)
Starting switch
Resistance
OFF
Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) and (4)
START
Max. 1 z
Defective safety lock switch
S14 (female)
Safety lock lever
Resistance
Free
Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) and (3)
Lock
Max. 1 z
Defective starting motor
R11 (female), R12
Resistance
cutout relay R11 or R13
(Internal disconnection or
Between (1) and (2)
100 500 z
short circuit)
Between (3) and (5)
Min. 1 Mz
Between (3) and (6)
Max. 1 z
aPrepare with starting switch OFF (Disconnect only terminal C), then
turn starting switch to START position and carry out troubleshooting.
Starting
Voltage/Resistance
Relay terminal, A27
switch
Between B and
Power
20 30 V
chassis ground
supply
Between E and
GND
Max. 1 z
chassis ground
safety relay
Between A27 (2) and
GeneraSTART
Max. 1 V
(Internal defect)
chassis ground
tion signal
Between A27 (1) and
Starting
20 30 V
chassis ground
input
Between C and
Starting
20 30 V
chassis ground
output
If the power supply, GND, generation signal, and starting input are normal and the starting output is not normal, the starting motor safety relay
is defective.
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch to START
position and carry out troubleshooting.
Starting
Voltage
Starting motor
switch
Between B and
Power
20 30 V
(Internal defect)
chassis ground
supply
START
Starting
Between C and
20 30 V
chassis ground
output
If the power supply and starting signal are normal and the starting motor
does not rotate, the starting motor is defective.
PC130-7
E-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
Cause
Defective alternator
(Internal defect)

aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch to ON or
START position and carry out troubleshooting.
E12 (male)
Resistance
Max. 1 V
Wiring harness between FB1-18 outlet and H15
Resistance Max. 1 z
(female) (1)
Wiring harness between H15 (female) (4) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
J01 and R11 (female) (5)
Wiring harness between R11 (female) (3) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
A27 (female) (1)
harness
Wiring harness between starting safety relay C
9 (Disconnection in wiring
and starting motor C
harness or defective
Wiring harness between FB1-3 outlet and S14
(male) (1)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between S14 (male) (3) and

Resistance Max. 1 z
R11 (female) (1)
Resistance Max. 1 z
R13 (female) (6)
Resistance Max. 1 z
J04 and chassis ground (A10)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Between FB1-18 outlet H15 (female) (1) wiring harness and chassis ground
Resistance
Min. 1 Mz
Between H15 (female) (4) J01 R11 (female)

(5) or P01 (female) (4) or C01 (female) (17) or
other related circuit wiring harness and chassis
Short circuit with chassis ground
ground in wiring harness Between R11 (female) (3) A27 (female) (1)
10
(Contact with ground
Between starting safety relay C starting motor
circuit)
C wiring harness and chassis ground
Between FB1-3 outlet S14 (male) (1) wiring
Resistance
Min. 1 Mz
Between S14 (male) (3) R11 (female) (1) wirResistance Min. 1 Mz


PC130-7
Between P02 (female) (14) J05 R13

Between A27 (female) (2) E08 (male) (1) or
J02 or D01 (female) (6) or P02 (female) (11) or
Voltage
Max. 1 V
other related circuit wiring harness and chassis
ground
20-405
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-1
Circuit diagram related to engine preheating, starting, charging, and stopping functions
20-406
(1)
PC130-7
E-2
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-2 Engine stops during operation

Trouble
Related
information
Engine stops during operation.

The input state (Voltage) from the governor potentiometer can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 031, by 10 mV)
Cause
Defective governor
1 potentiometer
(Internal defect)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness
harness or defective contact in connector)
3
circuit)

E10 (male)
Resistance
4.0 6.0 z
0.25 5.0 z
Between (A) and (C)

Between (B) and (A)
Between (B) and (C)

0.25 5.0 z
Resistance
E10 (female) (B)
Max. 1 z

pump controller
C01
20-408
(1)
Power supply
Voltage
4.5 5.5 V
Signal
0.5 4.5 V
PC130-7
E-2
TROUBLESHOOTING
BWP13362
PC130-7
20-409
(1)
E-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-3 Engine speed is unstable or engine hunts

Trouble
Related
information
(1) Low idling speed is unstable.

(2) Engine hunts.
(3) High idling speed is low.
Since the governor and pump controller normally performs the following controls, the set opening angle
of the fuel control dial does not always conform accurately to the control angle of the governor motor.
1) Governor control by selecting working mode
2) Governor control by setting automatic decelerating function
3) Governor control according to operating condition of control lever
4) Governor control by automatic warm-up function in cold state
5) Governor control by turbocharger protecting function when engine is started
Accordingly, when checking the operation of the fuel control dial and governor motor, be sure to select
GOVERNOR ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION [03]. (Since the governor control function does not operate
in this mode, the set opening angle of the fuel control dial always conforms to the control angle of the
governor motor.)
The engine speed can be checked with the monitoring function.
Cause
Defective governor
1 potentiometer
(Internal defect)
Normal display
130
003
If the monitoring display is abnormal, carry out troubleshooting for error
code [217].
Malfunction of governor
motor
aTurn starting switch ON or start engine and carry out troubleshooting.

When the following operation is performed, if the governor motor lever
moves smoothly, the governor motor is normal.
Operate the fuel control dial between low idling and high idling.
Stop the engine by turning the starting switch OFF.
Defective fuel control

system of engine
See the Shop Manual for 95-3 Seriese, Engine.

6
circuit)
(1)
Item
Governor and pump
controller model code
See TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Special functions of monitor panel.
harness
harness or defective contact in connector)
20-410
Monitoring code
002
governor lever
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state

aTurn starting switch ON and carry out troubleshooting (monitoring).

pump controller
Resistance
J07 and H15 (female) (5)
Max. 1 z
Between C01 (female) (23) J07 H15
Resistance Min. 1 z
(female) (5) or other related circuit wiring harness and chassis ground
Troubleshooting cannot be carried out since the defect is in the governor and pump controller (If none of causes 1 6 is the cause of the trouble, the governor and pump controller is defective).
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-3
PC130-7
20-411
(1)
E-4
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-4 Engine does not stop

Trouble
Related
information
Engine does not stop.

The governor and pump controller holds the battery relay for 4 seconds at shortest and 7 seconds at
longest to secure the drive power for the governor motor after the starting switch is turned to the OFF
position until the engine stops.
The drive state (ON/OFF) of the battery relay can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 037, Right of upper line)
Cause

(Internal defect)
Defective assembled-type
2 diode D01
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness

When the starting switch is operated as follows, if the battery relay contacts make operating sounds, the battery relay is normal.
Starting switch OFF o ON o OFF
D01 (male)
Digital circuit tester
Continuity
Between (5) and (1)
Diode mode
There is continuity
Resistance Max. 1 z
D01 (female) (5)
Wiring harness between D01 (female) (1) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
J01 and A21 (BR)
Wiring harness between A20 (E) and chassis
ground (A14)
20-412
(1)

pump controller
Resistance
Max. 1 z
C03
Between (4) and
chassis ground
Starting switch
ON o OFF
Voltage
20 30 V
(4 7 sec)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-4
PC130-7
20-413
(1)
E-5
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-5 Auto-decelerator does not operate

Trouble
Related
information
Auto-decelerator does not operate.

Since the auto-decelerator is set to 1,400 rpm, it does not operate if the fuel control dial is not set above
this level.
Check the display on the monitor panel while the engine is running.
Cause
1 Defective boom RAISE

signal
Defective boom LOWER

2 signal
3 Defective arm IN signal
4 Defective arm OUT signal
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
5 Defective bucket CURL

signal
Defective bucket DUMP

6 signal
7 Defective swing signal
8 Defective travel signal
9 Defective attachment
signal
10 Defective governor and

pump controller
20-414
(1)

When lever is
Monitoring code
operated: ON
6-bit display
(Center of lower line)
When
lever is in
020
neutral: OFF
If the display on the monitor panel is abnormal, carry out troubleshooting
for E-23.
When lever is
Monitoring code
operated: ON
6-bit display
(Center of upper line)
When lever is in
020
neutral: OFF
for E-24.
When lever is
Monitoring code
operated: ON
6-bit display
(Left of upper line)
When
lever is in
020
neutral: OFF
for E-25.
When lever is
Monitoring code
operated: ON
6-bit display
(Left of lower line)
When lever is in
020
neutral: OFF
for E-26.
When lever is
Monitoring code
operated: ON
6-bit display
(Right of upper line)
When
lever is in
021
neutral: OFF
for E-27.
When lever is
Monitoring code
operated: ON
6-bit display
(Right of lower line)
When lever is in
021
neutral: OFF
for E-28.
When lever is
Monitoring code
operated: ON
6-bit display
(Right of upper line)
When
lever is in
020
neutral: OFF
for E-29.
When lever is
Monitoring code
operated: ON
6-bit display
When lever is in
020
neutral: OFF
for E-30.
When lever is
Monitoring code
operated: ON
6-bit display
(Center of lower line)
When
lever is in
021
neutral: OFF
IIf the display on the monitor panel is abnormal, carry out troubleshooting for E-31.
Troubleshooting cannot be carried out since the defect is in the governor and pump controller (If none of causes 1 9 is the cause of the trouble, the governor and pump controller is defective).
PC130-7
E-6
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-6 Automatic warm-up system does not operate

Trouble
Related
information
Automatic warm-up system does not operate.

When the engine coolant temperature is below 30C, the automatic warm-up system raises the engine
speed to 1,200 rpm.
If the fuel control dial is opened more than 70% for 3 seconds when the starting switch is turned ON or
after the engine is started, the automatic warm-up system is turned OFF.
Cause

Monitoring code
Item
Normal display
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
041
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
voltage (Unit: 10 mV)
Approx. 480 440

(Coolant temperature:
0 30 C)

for E-16.
2
PC130-7

temperature sensor system

pump controller
Troubleshooting cannot be carried out since the defect is in the governor and pump controller (If none of the above causes is the cause of the
trouble, the governor and pump controller is defective).
20-415
(1)
E-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-7 Preheater does not operate

Trouble
Related
information
(1) When the starting switch is set in the HEAT position, the preheating monitor does not light up.
The preheater monitor lights up when the starting switch is turned to the HEAT position and starts flashing about 30 seconds after to notify the operator of completion of preheating (It stops flashing about 10
seconds after).
The input state (ON/OFF) of the preheating signal can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 045, Center of upper line)
Cause
1 Defective starting switch
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness
Trouble

Resistance
J02 (male) (7)
P02
Between (17) and
chassis ground
Starting switch
OFF
Voltage
Max. 1 V
HEAT
20 30 V
(2) When the starting switch is turned to the HEAT position, the heater unit does not become hot.
If the engine is started while the temperature is low (the coolant temperature is below 30C), the governor and pump controller drives the heater relay automatically to preheat the engine.
Cause
1 Defective starting switch

aPrepare with starting switch OFF.
H15 (male)
Between (1) and (3)
Starting switch
OFF
Resistance
Min. 1 Mz
Max. 1 z
HEAT
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Defective heater relay

2
Defective electrical intake

3 air heater
harness
Heater relay
Between A25 and
chassis ground
Between contact
terminals
Starting switch
OFF
There is continuity
HEAT
Max. 1 z
Between E01 and chassis ground
(1)
Continuity
There is continuity
Wiring harness between H15 (female) (3) and
J02 and A25
Wiring harness between A22 and heater relay
Wiring harness between A26 and E01
20-416
Max. 1 z

Related
information

If the engine is not preheated (the heater unit does not become hot),
carry out troubleshooting for trouble (2).
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Resistance
Max. 1 z
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-7
PC130-7
20-417
(1)
E-8
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-8 Work equipment, swing, and travel system do not operate

Trouble
Work equipment, swing, and travel system do not operate
Related
information
Cause
1 Defective fuse No. 3
Defective safety lock switch

Defective PPC lock

solenoid
3
short circuit)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Defective assembled-type
4 diode D01
harness

6
circuit)
20-418
(1)

(See cause 6.)
S14 (female)
Between (1) and (2)
Safety lock lever

Lock
Free
V01 (male)
Between (1) and (2)
Resistance
Min. 1 Mz
Max. 1 z
Resistance
20 60 z

Min. 1 Mz
D01 (male)
Resistance (Continuity)
Between (4) and (8)
Min. 1 Mz (No continuity)
Wiring harness between FB1-3 outlet and S14
Resistance Max. 1 z
(male) (1)
Wiring harness between S14 (male) (2) and
J02 and V01 (female) (1)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between V01 (female) (2) and

chassis ground
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Between FB1-3 outlet S14 (male) (1) wiring
Between S14 (male) (2) J02 V01 (female)
(1) or D01 (female) (4) wiring harness and
chassis ground
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-8
Circuit diagram related to PPC lock solenoid
PC130-7
20-419
(1)
E-9
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-9 One-touch power maximizing system does not operate

Trouble
Related
information
One-touch power maximizing system does not operate.

The input state (ON/OFF) from the one-touch power maximizing switch (left knob switch) can be
checked with the monitoring function. (Code: 022, Center of upper line)
Cause
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
(See cause 4.)
Defective one-touch power
One-touch power
M23 (male)
Resistance
2 maximizing switch
maximizing switch
Released
Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) and (4)
Pressed
Max. 1 z
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting withDisconnection in wiring
harness
Wiring harness between FB1-9 outlet and M23
Resistance Max. 1 z
(female) (1)
Wiring harness between M23 (female) (4) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
C01 (female) (1)
4
circuit)

pump controller
Between FB1-9 outlet M23 (female) (1) wiring
Between M23 (female) (4) C01 (female) (1)
C01
One-touch power
maximizing switch
Voltage
Between (11) and

chassis ground
Released
Pressed
Max. 1 V
20 30 V
Circuit diagram related to one-touch power maximizing switch
20-420
(1)
PC130-7
E-10
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-10 No items of monitor panel light up

Trouble
No items of monitor panel light up.
When the starting switch is turned ON, no items of monitor

panel light up.
Related
information
Cause
1 Defective fuse No.12
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness
2 (Disconnection in wir
ing harness or defective
3
circuit)

(See cause 3.)
Wiring harness between FB1-12 outlet and J07
Resistance Max. 1 z
and P01 (female) (1), (2)
Wiring harness between P01 (female) (6), (7)
Resistance Max. 1 z
and chassis ground (A11)
Between FB1-12 outlet J07 P01 (female)
(1), (2) wiring harness and chassis ground
P01 (female)
Starting switch
Voltage/Resistance
Between (1), (2) and

chassis ground
ON
20 30 V
Between (6), (7) and

chassis ground
OFF
Max. 1 z
Circuit diagram related to monitor panel power supply
PC130-7
20-421
(1)
E-11, E-12
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-11 7-segment LED's of monitor panel does not light up partially

Trouble
7-segment LED's of monitor panel does When the starting switch is turned ON, 7-segment LED's of
not light up partially.
monitor panel does not light up partially.
Related
information
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Cause

Troubleshooting cannot be carried out since the defect is in the monitor
panel (The LCD that does not light up may be defective).
E-12 Monitor lamp of monitor panel is different from mounted model

Trouble
Monitor lamp of monitor panel is different When the starting switch is turned ON, the monitor panel
from mounted model
which lights up totally is different from the mounted model.
Related
information
Cause

Monitoring code
Item
Normal display
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Defective model code

signal
20-422
(1)
Monitor panel
130
model code
for error code [217].
panel (If none of the above causes is the cause of the trouble, the monitor panel is defective).
001
PC130-7
E-13
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-13 When starting switch is turned ON, basic check items light up or flash
Trouble
Related
information
(1) Engine oil level monitor flashes.

When the starting switch is turned ON, if the engine oil level monitor detects lowering of the engine oil
level, it flashes.
The input state (ON/OFF) from the engine oil level switch can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 046, Center of lower line)
Cause
1
Low engine oil level

Defective engine oil level

2 switch
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state

Check the engine oil level. If it is low, add new oil.
E03 (male)
Engine oil level
Resistance
Between (1) and
chassis ground
When normal
When low
Max. 1 z
Min. 1 Mz
harness

E03 (female) (1)
P02
Engine oil level
Voltage
Between (8) and
chassis ground
When normal
When low
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Max. 1 V
20 30 V
Circuit diagram related to engine oil level switch
Trouble
Related
information
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
PC130-7
(2) Engine oil replacement monitor lights up.

When the starting switch iResistances turned ON near the engine oil replacement period, the engine oil
replacement monitor lights. (Set up Machine only)
Cause
Engine oil replacement
1 period

It is near the engine oil replacement period. Check the elapsed time
and replace the oil.
If the time before the set engine oil replacement period is longer than 10
hours, the monitor panel is defective (Troubleshooting cannot be carried
out since the defect is in the monitor panel).
20-423
(1)
E-14
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-14 While engine is running, caution items flash

Trouble
Related
information
(1) Battery charge level monitor flashes.

While the engine is running, if the battery charge level monitor detects lowering of the charge voltage,
it flashes.
The generation state (Voltage) of the alternator and the input state (ON/OFF) of the generation signal
can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 043, by 10 mV, left of lower line)
Cause
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
(Defective charge)
harness
3
circuit)

E08 (female)
Engine speed
Voltage
Between (1) and
Above medium
20 30 V
chassis ground
(half) speed
Resistance
J02 and E08 (male) (1)
Between P02 (female) (11) J02 E08 (male)
(1) or A27 (female) (2) or D01 J01 D01
(female) (1) or H15 (female) (2) or A21 (BR)
E08 (female)
Engine speed
Voltage
Between (1) and
chassis ground
20-424
(1)
Max. 1 z
Above medium
(half) speed
20 30 V
PC130-7
E-14
TROUBLESHOOTING
PC130-7
20-425
(1)
E-14
TROUBLESHOOTING
Trouble
Related
information
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
20-426
(1)
(2) Fuel level monitor flashes.

While the engine is running, if the fuel level monitor detects lowering of the fuel level (Fuel level gauge:
Red range), it flashes.
Cause
Low fuel level
1

Check the fuel level gauge. If the fuel level is low, add fuel.
If the monitor flashes while the fuel level gauge is not in the red range
(level 1), the monitor panel is defective (Troubleshooting cannot be carried out since the defect is in the monitor panel).
PC130-7
E-14
TROUBLESHOOTING
Trouble
Related
information
(3) Air cleaner clogging monitor flashes.

While the engine is running, if the air cleaner clogging monitor detects clogging of the air cleaner, it
flashes.
The input state (ON/OFF) from the air cleaner clogging switch can be checked with the monitoring function. (Code: 046, Right of upper line)
Cause
1

Defective air cleaner

2 clogging switch
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness

Check the air cleaner. If it is clogged, clean or replace it.
A31 (male)
Air cleaner
Resistance
Between (1) and (2)
When normal
When clogged
Max. 1 z
Min. 1 Mz
a Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting without turning starting switch.
Resistance Max. 1 z
A31 (female) (1)
Resistance Max. 1 z
P02
Air cleaner
Voltage
Between (5) and
chassis ground
When normal
When clogged
Max. 1 V
20 30 V
Circuit diagram related to air cleaner clogging switch
PC130-7
20-427
(1)
E-15
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-15 While engine is running, emergency stop items flash

Trouble
Related
information
(1) Engine coolant temperature monitor flashes.

If the engine coolant temperature monitor detects a rise of engine coolant temperature (Coolant thermometer: Red range), it flashes.
Cause
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
20-428
(1)
Engine overheating
1
Check the engine coolant thermometer. If the engine coolant temperature is high, run the engine at low idling to cool it down.
If the monitor flashes while the engine coolant thermometer is not in the
red range (level 8, 9), the monitor panel is defective (Troubleshooting
cannot be carried out since the defect is in the monitor panel).
PC130-7
E-15
TROUBLESHOOTING
Trouble
Related
information
(2) Engine oil pressure monitor flashes.

If the engine oil pressure monitor detects lowering of the engine oil pressure, it flashes.
The input state (ON/OFF) from the engine oil pressure switch can be checked with the monitoring function. (Code: 046, Center of upper line)
Cause
Lowering of engine oil
1 pressure
Defective engine oil
2 pressure switch
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state

3
circuit)

Check the engine oil pressure. If it is low, repair the troubled parts.
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then hold starting switch OFF and
start engine and carry out troubleshooting.
E02
Engine
Resistance
Between terminal and
chassis ground
When stopped
When operated
Max. 1 z
Min. 1 Mz
Between P02 (female) (7) E02 wiring harness
Resistance Max. 1 z
and chassis ground
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then hold starting switch ON and
start engine and carry out troubleshooting.
P02
Engine
Voltage
Between (7) and
chassis ground
When stopped
(Starting switch ON)
Max. 1 V
When operated
20 30 V
Circuit diagram related to engine oil pressure switch
PC130-7
20-429
(2)
E-16
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-16 Engine coolant thermometer is abnormal

Trouble
(1) While engine coolant temperature is rising normally, thermometer does not rise from white range (C).
(2) While engine coolant temperature is stabilized normally, thermometer rises to red range (H).
Related
information
The input state (ON/OFF) from the engine coolant temperature sensor can be checked with the monitoring function. (Code: 041, by 10 mV)
Cause

temperature sensor
1
short circuit)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness
3
circuit)

Engine coolant
E05 (male)
Resistance
temperature
Between (1) and (2)
3.5 k 90 kz
10 100 C
Between (2) and
Min. 1 Mz
chassis ground
Resistance Max. 1 z
E05 (female) (2)
Resistance
E05 (female) (1)
Max. 1 z
Voltage
Max. 1 V
P02
Engine coolant
temperature

Between (1) and
chassis ground
10 100 C
Resistance
3.5 k 90 kz
Min. 1 Mz
Circuit diagram related to engine coolant temperature sensor
20-430
(1)
PC130-7
E-17
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-17 Fuel level gauge is abnormal

Trouble
Related
information
(1) While fuel level is high, gauge does not rise from red range (E).
(2) While fuel level is low, gauge does not lower from green range (F).
The input state (ON/OFF) from the fuel level sensor can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 042, by 10 mV)
Cause

Defective fuel level sensor
A60 (male)
Fuel level
Resistance
1 (Internal disconnection or
short circuit)
FULL
(Upper
limit)
Approx.
12 z
Between (1) and
chassis ground
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness
3
circuit)
EMPTY (Lower limit)
85 120 z
A60 (female) (1)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Between P02 (female) (2) A60 (female) (1)
Between P02 (female) (2) A60 (female) (1)
Voltage
Max. 1 V
P02
Between (2) and
chassis ground
Fuel level
FULL (Upper limit)
Resistance
Approx. 12 z
EMPTY (Lower limit)
85 120 z
Circuit diagram related to fuel level sensor
PC130-7
20-431
(1)
E-18
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-18 Swing lock monitor is abnormal

Trouble
Related
information
(1) When swing lock switch is set in LOCK position, swing lock monitor does not light up.
(2) When swing lock switch is set in OFF position, swing lock monitor does not go off.
If the swing holding brake release switch is set in the RELEASE position, the swing lock monitor flashes.
The input state (ON/OFF) from the swing lock switch can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 022, Left of upper line, 049, Right of upper line)
Cause
short circuit)
harness
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state

3
circuit)


X05 (female)
Swing lock switch
Resistance
Between (1) and (2)
(1)
Min. 1 Mz
Max. 1 z
Resistance
J02 and X05 (male) (1)
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between X05 (male) (2) and

Resistance Max. 1 z
Between P02 (female) (17) J02 X05 (male)
(1) or C02 (female) (38) wiring harness and
chassis ground
Between P02 (female) (17) J02 X05 (male)
(1) or C02 (female) (38) wiring harness and
Voltage
Max. 1 V
chassis ground
P02
Swing lock switch
Voltage
Between (17) and
chassis ground
20-432
OFF
LOCK
OFF
LOCK
20 30 V
Max. 1 V
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-18
Circuit diagram related to swing lock switch
PC130-7
20-433
(1)
E-19
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-19 When monitor switch is operated, display by lamp does not change
Trouble
Related
information
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
20-434
(1)
When monitor switch is operated, display by lamp does not change.
Cause

panel.
PC130-7
E-20
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-20 Windshield wiper and windshield washer do not operate

Trouble
Related
information
(1) Windshield wiper does not operate.

The input state (ON/OFF) from the window rear limit switch can be checked with the monitoring function.
(Code: 049, Center of upper line)
Cause
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting withDefective window rear limit
switch
W03 (male)
Front window
Resistance
1
When installed to front
Min. 1 Mz
short circuit)
Between (1) and (2)
When stored in rear
Max. 1 z
2
W04 (female)
Continuity
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness
4
circuit)
(Window rear limit switch
system)
5
(Wiper motor system)
20-436
(1)
Between (3) and (1)

There is continuity
W04 (male) (3)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

Resistance
W04 (male) (1)
Max. 1 z
P02
Front window
Voltage
Between (15) and
chassis ground
When installed to front

When stored in rear
20 30 V
Max. 1 V
P01
Wiper switch
Voltage
Between (9) and
chassis ground
Between (10) and
chassis ground
OFF
Max. 1 V
ON
Max. 1 V 20 30 V
(Constant period)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-20
Circuit diagram related to wiper motor and window rear limit switch
PC130-7
20-437
(1)
E-20
TROUBLESHOOTING
Trouble
(2) Windshield washer does not operate.
Related
information
Cause
Defective washer motor

short circuit)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness

4
circuit)

(See cause 4.)
A50 (male)
Between (1) and (2)
Resistance
5 20 z

Min. 1 Mz
Wiring harness between FB1 4 and J03 and
J06 and A50 (female) (1)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between A50 (female) (2) and

J04 and P01 (female) (3)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Between FB1-4 J03 J06 A50 (female) (1)
or D02 (female) (4) wiring harness and chassis Resistance Min. 1 Mz
ground
Between A50 (female) (2) J04 P01 (female)
(3) or D02 (female) (8) wiring harness and
chassis ground
P01
Between (3) and
chassis ground
20-438
(1)
Windshield washer
switch
When OFF
20 30 V
When ON
Max. 1 V
Voltage
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-20
Circuit diagram related to windshield washer motor
PC130-7
20-439
(1)
E-21
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-21 Lower windshield wiper does not operate

Trouble
Lower windshield wiper does not operate.
Related
information
Cause
Defective lower wiper

2 switch

(See cause 6.)
P06 (female)
Lower wiper switch
Resistance
Between (1) and (2)
When OFF
When ON
Min. 1 Mz
Max. 1 z
M92 (female)
Between (1) and
chassis ground
Defective lower wiper
3 motor
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
20 30 V
Max. 1 z
ON
20 30 V

6
circuit)
(1)
Between (3) and

chassis ground
Resistance
Between (4) and

Max. 1 V
chassis ground
If the voltage and resistance are normal and the lower windshield wiper
does not operate, the lower wiper motor is defective.
aReplace relay while starting switch is OFF, then turn starting switch ON
and carry out troubleshooting.
Defective lower wiper relay
4
When the right lower wiper relay is replaced with another
R18
one, if the condition becomes normal, the relay is defective.
harness
20-440
Between (2) and

chassis ground
Lower wiper switch

and M92 (female) (3) or R18 (female) (5) or
P06 (male) (1)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

P06 (male) (2)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between M92 (female) (2), D03

(female) (5), R18 (female) (2) and J09 and
Resistance
chassis ground (T05)
Max. 1 z

D03 (female) (1) or M92 (female) (1)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

M92 (female) (6)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Between FB1-6 outlet J10 M92 (female) (3)
or R18 (female) (5) or P06 (male) (1) wiring har- Resistance Min. 1 Mz
ness and chassis ground
Between R18 (female) (1) P06 (male) (2) wirResistance Min. 1 Mz
Between R18 (female) (3) D03 (female) (1) or
M92 (female) (1) wiring harness and chassis
ground
Between R18 (female) (6) M92 (female) (6)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-21
Circuit diagram related to lower windshield wiper
PC130-7
20-441
(1)
E-22
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-22 Caution buzzer does not stop

Trouble
Related
information
Caution buzzer does not stop.

The input state (ON/OFF) from the caution buzzer stop switch can be checked with the monitoring function. (Code: 045, Right of upper line)
Cause

Defective caution buzzer

1 stop switch
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness
P03 (female)
Caution buzzer
stop switch
Resistance
Between (1) and (2)
Released
Pressed
Min. 1 Mz
Max. 1 z
Resistance Max. 1 z
P03 (male) (1)
Wiring harness between P03 (male) (2) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
Between P02 (female) (16) P03 (male) (1)
Voltage
Max. 1 V
P02
Between (16) and
chassis ground
20-442
(1)
Caution buzzer
stop switch
Released
20 30 V
Pressed
Max. 1 V
Voltage
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-22
Circuit diagram related to caution buzzer stop switch
PC130-7
20-443
(1)
E-23
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-23 Monitoring function does not display "Boom RAISE" normally

Trouble
Related
information
Monitoring function does not display The monitoring function (special function) of the monitor
"Boom RAISE" normally.
panel does not display "Boom RAISE" normally.
6-bit position of boom RAISE oil pressure switch (Code: 020, Center of lower line)
Cause
Defective boom RAISE oil
pressure switch
1
short circuit)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness
3
circuit)

Right work equipment
S06 (male)
Resistance
control lever
Between (1) and (2)
Neutral position
Boom RAISE position
Min. 1 Mz
Max. 1 z
Resistance
S06 (female) (1)
Max. 1 z

Resistance Max. 1 z
Voltage
Max. 1 V
5

pump controller
C03
Between (10) and
chassis ground
20-444
(1)

control lever
Neutral position
20 30 V
Boom RAISE position
Max. 1 V
Voltage
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-23
Circuit diagram related to boom RAISE oil pressure switch
PC130-7
20-445
(1)
E-24
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-24 Monitoring function does not display "Boom LOWER" normally

Trouble
Related
information
"Boom LOWER" normally.
panel does not display "Boom LOWER" normally.
6-bit position of boom LOWER oil pressure switch (Code: 020, Center of upper line)
Cause

Defective boom LOWER oil
pressure switch
S02 (male)
Resistance
1
control lever
short circuit)
Neutral position
Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) and (2)
Boom LOWER position
Max. 1 z
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness
3
circuit)
Resistance
S02 (female) (1)
Max. 1 z

Resistance Max. 1 z
Voltage
Max. 1 V
5

pump controller
C03
Between (10) and
chassis ground
20-446
(1)

control lever
Neutral position
20 30 V
Boom LOWER position
Max. 1 V
Voltage
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-24
Circuit diagram related to boom LOWER oil pressure switch
PC130-7
20-447
(1)
E-25
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-25 Monitoring function does not display "Arm IN" normally

Trouble
Related
information
Monitoring function does not display "Arm The monitoring function (special function) of the monitor
IN" normally.
panel does not display "Arm IN" normally.
6-bit position of arm IN oil pressure switch (Code: 020, Left of upper line)
Cause
Defective arm IN oil
pressure switch
1
short circuit)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness
3
circuit)

Left work equipment
S04 (male)
Resistance
control lever
Between (1) and (2)
Neutral position
Arm IN position
Min. 1 Mz
Max. 1 z
Resistance
S04 (female) (1)
Max. 1 z

Resistance Max. 1 z
Voltage
Max. 1 V
5

pump controller
C03
Between (30) and
chassis ground
20-448
(1)
Left work equipment

control lever
Neutral position
20 30 V
Arm IN position
Max. 1 V
Voltage
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-25
Circuit diagram related to arm IN oil pressure switch
PC130-7
20-449
(1)
E-26
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-26 Monitoring function does not display "Arm OUT" normally

Trouble
Related
information
Monitoring function does not display "Arm The monitoring function (special function) of the monitor
OUT" normally.
panel does not display "Arm OUT" normally.
6-bit position of arm OUT oil pressure switch (Code: 020, Left of lower line)
Cause
Defective arm OUT oil
pressure switch
1
short circuit)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness
3
circuit)

Left work equipment
S08 (male)
Resistance
control lever
Between (1) and (2)
Neutral position
Arm OUT position
Min. 1 Mz
Max. 1 z
Resistance
S08 (female) (1)
Max. 1 z

Resistance Max. 1 z
Voltage
Max. 1 V
5

pump controller
C03
Between (40) and
chassis ground
20-450
(1)
Left work equipment

control lever
Neutral position
20 30 V
Arm OUT position
Max. 1 V
Voltage
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-26
Circuit diagram related to arm OUT oil pressure switch
PC130-7
20-451
(1)
E-27
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-27 Monitoring function does not display "Bucket CURL" normally

Trouble
Related
information
"Bucket CURL" normally.
panel does not display "Bucket CURL" normally.
6-bit position of bucket CURL oil pressure switch (Code: 021, Right of upper line)
Cause

Defective bucket CURL oil
pressure switch
S01 (male)
Resistance
1
control lever
short circuit)
Neutral position
Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) and (2)
Bucket CURL position
Max. 1 z
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness
3
circuit)
S01 (female) (1)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

Resistance Max. 1 z
Voltage
Max. 1 V
5

pump controller
C03
Between (9) and
chassis ground
20-452
(1)

control lever
Neutral position
20 30 V
Max. 1 V
Voltage
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-27
Circuit diagram related to bucket CURL oil pressure switch
PC130-7
20-453
(1)
E-28
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-28 Monitoring function does not display "Bucket DUMP" normally

Trouble
Related
information
"Bucket DUMP" normally.
panel does not display "Bucket DUMP" normally.
6-bit position of bucket DUMP oil pressure switch (Code: 021, Right of lower line)
Cause

Defective bucket DUMP oil
pressure switch
S05 (male)
Resistance
1
control lever
short circuit)
Neutral position
Min. 1 Mz
Between (1) and (2)
Bucket DUMP position
Max. 1 z
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness
3
circuit)
Resistance
S05 (female) (1)
Max. 1 z

Resistance Max. 1 z
Voltage
Max. 1 V
5

pump controller
C03
Between (19) and
chassis ground
20-454
(1)

control lever
Neutral position
20 30 V
Max. 1 V
Voltage
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-28
Circuit diagram related to bucket DUMP oil pressure switch
PC130-7
20-455
(1)
E-29
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-29 Monitoring function does not display "Swing" normally

Trouble
Related
information
"Swing" normally.
panel does not display "Swing" normally.
6-bit position of swing oil pressure switch (Code: 0201, Right of upper line)
Cause
Defective swing LEFT oil
pressure switch
1
short circuit)
Defective swing RIGHT oil

pressure switch
2
short circuit)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness
3 Disconnection in wiring

4
ircuit)


Left work equipment
S03 (male)
Resistance
control lever
Between (1) and (2)
Neutral position
Swing LEFT position
Min. 1 Mz
Max. 1 z
S07 (male)
Left work equipment

control lever
Resistance
Between (1) and (2)
Neutral position
Swing RIGHT position
Min. 1 Mz
Max. 1 z
Resistance Max. 1 z
S03 (female) (1) or S07 (female) (1)
Resistance Max. 1 z
Resistance Max. 1 z
or S07 (female) (1) wiring harness and chassis Resistance Min. 1 Mz
ground
or S07 (female) (1) wiring harness and chassis
ground
Voltage
Max. 1 V
6
20-456
(1)

pump controller
C03
Left work equipment

control lever
Between (29) and

chassis ground
Neutral position
Swing LEFT or RIGHT
position
Voltage
20 30 V
Max. 1 V
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-29
Circuit diagram related to swing LEFT oil pressure switch and RIGHT oil pressure switch
PC130-7
20-457
(1)
E-30
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-30 Monitoring function does not display "Travel" normally

Trouble
Related
information
"Travel" normally.
panel does not display "Travel" normally.
6-bit position of travel oil pressure switch (Code: 020, Right of lower line)
Cause
Defective travel oil pressure switch
1
short circuit)
harness
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state

3
circuit)
20-458
(1)

pump controller

S30 (male)
Travel lever
Resistance
Between (1) and (2)
Neutral position
Forward or reverse
operation
Min. 1 Mz
Max. 1 z
Resistance
S30 (female) (1)
Max. 1 z

Resistance Max. 1 z
Between C03 (female) (39) J01 S30
(female) (1) and A43 (female) (2) wiring harness and chassis ground
Between C03 (female) (39) J01 S30
Voltage
Max. 1 V
C03
Between (39) and
chassis ground
Travel lever
Neutral position
Voltage
20 30 V
Forward or reverse
operation
Max. 1 V
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-30
Circuit diagram related to travel oil pressure switch and travel alarm
PC130-7
20-459
(1)
E-31
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-31 Monitoring function does not display "service" normally

When 1 attachment is installed
Trouble
Related
information
Monitoring function does not display

"Service" normally.
6-bit position of service oil pressure switch (Code: 0201, Center of lower line)
Cause
Defective service 1 (front)
oil pressure switch
1
short circuit)
Defective service 1 (rear)

oil pressure switch
2
short circuit)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
The monitoring function (special function) of the monitor

panel does not display "Service" normally.
harness

4
circuit)


S10 (male)
Between (1) and (2)
Service pedal 1
Neutral position
Resistance
Min. 1 Mz
Front position
Max. 1 z
S11 (male)
Service pedal 1
Resistance
Between (1) and (2)
Neutral position
Rear position
Min. 1 Mz
Max. 1 z
Resistance Max. 1 z
S10 (female) (1) or S11 (female) (1)
Resistance Max. 1 z
Resistance Max. 1 z
or S11 (female) (1) wiring harness and chassis Resistance Min. 1 Mz
ground
or S11 (female) (1) wiring harness and chassis
ground
Voltage
Max. 1 V
6
20-460
(1)

pump controller
C02
Between (35) and
chassis ground
Service pedal 1
Neutral position
Voltage
20 30 V
Front or rear position
Max. 1 V
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-31
Circuit diagram related to service 1 oil pressure switches (front and rear)
PC130-7
20-461
(1)
E-31
TROUBLESHOOTING
When 2 attachments are installed

Trouble
Related
information
Monitoring function does not display

"Service" normally.
6-bit position of service oil pressure switch (Code: 0201, Center of lower line)
Cause
oil pressure switch
1
short circuit)

oil pressure switch
2
short circuit)

oil pressure switch
3
short circuit)

oil pressure switch
4
short circuit)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness

6
circuit)

20-462
(1)
The monitoring function (special function) of the monitor

panel does not display "Service" normally.

pump controller

S10 (male)
Between (1) and (2)
Service pedal 1
Neutral position
Resistance
Min. 1 Mz
Front position
Max. 1 z
S11 (male)
Service pedal 1
Resistance
Between (1) and (2)
Neutral position
Rear position
Min. 1 Mz
Max. 1 z
Resistance
S21 (male)
Service pedal 2
Between (1) and (2)
Neutral position
Front position
Min. 1 Mz
Max. 1 z
S22 (male)
Between (1) and (2)
Service pedal 2
Neutral position
Resistance
Min. 1 Mz
Rear position
Max. 1 z
Resistance Max. 1 z
S10 (female) (1) or S11 (female) (1) or S21
(female) (1) or S22 (female) (1)
Resistance Max. 1 z
Resistance Max. 1 z
Resistance
Max. 1 z

Resistance
Max. 1 z
or S11 (female) (1) or S21 (female) (1) or S22 Resistance Min. 1 Mz
or S11 (female) (1) or S21 (female) (1) or S22
Voltage
Max. 1 V
C02
Service pedals 1 and 2
Voltage
Between (35) and
chassis ground
Neutral position
Front or rear position
20 30 V
Max. 1 V
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-31
Circuit diagram related to service 1 oil pressure switches (front and rear) and service 2 oil pressure
switches (front and rear)
PC130-7
20-463
(1)
E-32
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-32 Troubleshooting of air conditioner

Troubleshooting procedure for air conditioner system
a The control panel of the air conditioner constantly monitors the sensors and other devices in the system.
When it detects any abnormality, it displays "Self-diagnosis notice" on the display monitor by operating
switches specially.
a If you feel any abnormality in the air conditioner system, check the "Self-diagnosis notice" first according to
the procedure for "Troubleshooting by self-diagnosis notice", and then;
If the "Self-diagnosis notice" is displayed, continue the "Troubleshooting by self-diagnosis notice".
If the "Self-diagnosis notice" is not displayed, carry out the "Troubleshooting by trouble".
Troubleshooting by self-diagnosis notice

a Check the "Self-diagnosis notice" on the control
panel according to the following procedure.
How to display "Self-diagnosis notice"

1) Turn the starting switch ON.
2) Press OFF switch (1) and check that anything is not displayed on display monitor (2).
3) Hold the UP switch ( ) and DOWN switch
( ) of temperature setting switch (3) simultaneously for 3 seconds.
4) Check the "Self-diagnosis notice" displayed
on display monitor (2).
How to select "Self-diagnosis notice"

If multiple "Self-diagnosis notices" are recorded,
press the UP switch ( ) or DOWN switch ( ) of
temperature setting switch (3) to select another
notice.
Self-diagnosis notice
Trouble mode
E--
No trouble
E11
Disconnection in internal air sensor
How to delete "Self-diagnosis notice"

When reproducing the "Self-diagnosis notices"
or after removing the cause of a trouble, press
the switches on both sides of EXTERNAL/
INTERNAL air changeover switch (4) simultaneously for 3 seconds, and all the "Self-diagnosis notices" are deleted.
E12
Short circuit in internal air sensor
E15
Disconnection in water temperature sensor
E16
Short circuit in water temperature

sensor
E18
Short circuit in daylight sensor
Finishing display of "Self-diagnosis notice"

To finish display of the "Self-diagnosis notice",
press OFF switch (1) or turn the starting switch
OFF.
E43
Abnormality in air outlet damper
E44
Abnormality in air mix damper
E45
Abnormality in internal and external air damper
20-464
(1)
PC130-7
E-32
TROUBLESHOOTING
Self-diagnosis
notice
E11
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
Trouble
Disconnection in internal air sensor
Disconnection in the internal air sensor is detected.

Fixes the internal air temperature for control.
If the following condition is satisfied, the trouble is reset.
<Completion of removal of cause> + <Deletion of self-diagnosis notice> +
<Turning starting switch OFF and ON> + <Starting air conditioner>
Related
information
Cause
Defective internal air
1 sensor
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness
Self-diagnosis
notice
E12
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
Defective air conditioner

system
Trouble

TH1 (male)
Between (1) and (2)
Resistance
300 z 430 kz
Resistance
TH1 (female) (2)
Max. 1 z

Resistance Max. 1 z
TH1 (female) (1)
If neither of causes 1 and 2 is the cause of the trouble, the air conditioner system may be defective. See Shop Manual for Chassis Components, Troubleshooting for air conditioner.
Short circuit in internal air sensor
Short circuit in the internal air sensor is detected.

Fixes the internal air temperature for control.
Related
information
Cause
Defective internal air
1 sensor
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness
PC130-7

system

Resistance
TH1 (male)
Between (1) and (2)
300 z 430 kz
Resistance
TH1 (female) (2)
Max. 1 z

Resistance
TH1 (female) (1)
Max. 1 z
20-465
(1)
E-32
TROUBLESHOOTING
Self-diagnosis
notice
E15
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
Trouble
Disconnection in water temperature sensor
Disconnection in the water temperature sensor is detected.

Ignores the warm-up control and fixes the water temperature at 60 C for control.
Related
information
Cause
Defective water
1 temperature sensor
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness
Self-diagnosis
notice
E16
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller

system
Trouble

THw (male)
Between (1) and (2)
Resistance
95 z 455 kz
Resistance Max. 1 z
THw (female) (2)
Resistance Max. 1 z
THw (female) (1)
Short circuit in water temperature sensor
Short circuit in the water temperature sensor is detected.

Ignores the warm-up control and fixes the water temperature at 60 C for control.
Related
information
Cause
Defective water tempera1 ture sensor
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness
20-466
(1)

system

Resistance
THw (male)
Between (1) and (2)
95 z 455 kz
Resistance
THw (female) (2)
Max. 1 z

Resistance
THw (female) (1)
Max. 1 z
PC130-7
E-32
TROUBLESHOOTING
Self-diagnosis
notice
E18
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
Trouble
Short circuit in daylight sensor
Short circuit in the daylight sensor is detected.

Assumes that the daylight sensor is not installed for control.
Related
information
Cause
Defective daylight sensor
1
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness
Self-diagnosis
notice
E43
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller

system
Trouble

The daylight sensor may be defective. Check it directly.
Resistance Max. 1 z
P15 (female) (2)
Resistance Max. 1 z
P15 (female) (1)
Abnormality in air outlet damper
Abnormality in the air outlet servomotor system is detected.

Stops the servomotor.
Related
information
aDo not connect the power cables to the motor terminals directly to drive the motor. Doing so can damage the motor output shaft and break the motor coils.
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Cause
Defective air outlet
1
The air outlet servomotor may be defective. Check it directly.
servomotor (Internal defect)
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting without
turning starting switch.
Wiring harness between Mv1 (female) (1) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
M30 (female) (3)
Resistance Max. 1 z
harness
M29 (female) (11)
Resistance Max. 1 z
M30 (female) (9)
Resistance Max. 1 z
M29 (female) (8)
Resistance Max. 1 z
M29 (female) (9)
If neither of causes 1 and 2 is the cause of the trouble, the air conditioner
3
system may be defective. See Shop Manual for Chassis Components,
system
Troubleshooting for air conditioner.
PC130-7
20-467
(1)
E-32
TROUBLESHOOTING
Self-diagnosis
notice
E44
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
Related
information
Trouble
Abnormality in the air mix servomotor system is detected.

Stops the air mix servomotor.
Cause
Defective air mix
1 servomotor
(Internal defect)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
(1)
The air mix servomotor may be defective. Check it directly.

Wiring harness between MAM (female) (1) and
Resistance Max. 1 z
M29 (female) (11)
harness
20-468

system

M30 (female) (3)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

M30 (female) (2)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

Resistance Max. 1 z
M29 (female) (4)
Resistance Max. 1 z
M29 (female) (5)
PC130-7
E-32
TROUBLESHOOTING
Self-diagnosis
notice
E45
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
Related
information
Trouble
Abnormality in the internal and external air servomotor is detected.

Stops the internal and external air servomotor.
Cause
Defective internal and
1 external air servomotor
(Internal defect)
2 Defective fuse (in unit)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
harness
PC130-7

system

The internal and external air servomotor may be defective. Check it
directly.
If the fuse (in the unit) is broken, the circuit probably has a grounding
fault, etc. Check the related circuits.
Wiring harness between MRF (female) (1) and
M29 (female) (6)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

M29 (female) (7)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

Resistance Max. 1 z
fuse in unit and M33 (male) (3)
20-469
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-32
Circuit diagram related to air conditioner
20-470
(1)
PC130-7
E-32
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting by trouble
Trouble
Related
information
(1) Air conditioner does not operate at all.
Cause
harness

(See cause 3.)
Wiring harness between FB1-11 outlet and M33
Resistance Max. 1 z
(female) (3)
Resistance Max. 1 z
M30 (female) (6)
Resistance Max. 1 z
Resistance
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state

3
circuit)

unit
Max. 1 z
Between FB1-11 outlet M33 (female) (3) wirResistance Min. 1 Mz
Between M27 (female) (14) M30 (female) (6)
M33
Voltage
Between (2) and (3)
20 30 V
If the above voltage is normal and the air conditioner unit does not operate, the air conditioner unit is defective.
5 Defective control panel
M30, M29
Between M30 (6) and M29 (12)
Voltage
20 30 V
If the above voltage is normal and the control panel does not operate,
the control panel is defective.
PC130-7
20-471
(1)
E-32
TROUBLESHOOTING
Trouble
(2) Air does not come out (Air flow is insufficient).
Related
information
Cause
Defective blower relay

(coil side)
Defective blower relay

(contact side)
Defective power transistor

(Internal defect)

R30 (male)
Between (1) and (3)
Resistance
140 340 z
R30
Fan switch
Voltage
Between (4) and
chassis ground
ON (Operation)
position
20 30 V
Fan switch
If air flow changes as fan switch is
Operate between Low and Medium operated, power transistor is normal.
and High.
5
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Defective blower motor

(Internal defect)
MB (female)
Fan switch
Voltage
ON (Operation)
Between (1) and (2)
20 30 V
position
If the above voltage is normal and the blower motor does not rotate, the
blower motor is defective.
harness
Wiring harness between FB1-11 outlet and fuse

in unit and R30 (female) (3) or R31 (female) (1) Resistance
or M30 (female) (6)
Max. 1 z

R30 (female) (1)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

Resistance
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between MB (female) (1) and

R30 (female) (4)
Wiring harness between MB (female) (2) and
PTR (female) (3)
Wiring harness between PTR (female) (1) and
M30 (female) (7)
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Resistance
Max. 1 z
Resistance
Max. 1 z

M30 (female) (8)
7
20-472
(1)

system
If none of causes 1 6 is the cause of the trouble, the air conditioner

PC130-7
E-32
TROUBLESHOOTING
Trouble
(3) Air is not cooled (Cooling performance is insufficient).
Related
information
Cause

Defective compressor relay
2
(coil side)
R31 (male)
Resistance
Between (1) and (2)
140 340 z
aPrepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and carry out troubleshooting. (Set temperature: Max. cooling)
Defective compressor relay
3
R31
Fan switch
Voltage
(contact side)
Between (4) and
ON (Operation)
20 30 V
chassis ground
position
4
Defective thermostat
(Internal defect)
Defective high/low
5 pressure switch
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Defective compressor
(Internal defect)
Defective compressor
7
(Internal defect)
6
P17 (male)
Resistance
Between (1) and (2)
Max. 1 z
The compressor clutch may be defective. Check it directly.

The compressor may be defective. Check it directly.
harness
PC130-7
The thermostat may be defective. Check it directly.

system

P17 (female) (1)
Resistance
Max. 1 z

Resistance
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between FB1-11 outlet and R31

(female) (2) or fuse in unit and R31 (female) (1) Resistance
or M30 (female) (6)
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between ST1 (female) (1) and

R31 (female) (3)
Max. 1 z
Resistance

Resistance Max. 1 z
ST1 (female) (2)
Resistance Max. 1 z
Resistance Max. 1 z
E06 (female) (1)
If none of causes 1 8 is the cause of the trouble, the air conditioner
20-473
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-32
Circuit diagram related to air conditioner
20-474
(1)
PC130-7
E-33
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-33 Travel alarm does not sound or does not stop sounding
When travel alarm is installed
Trouble
(1) Alarm does not sound while machine is traveling.

(2) Alarm sounds while machine is stopped.
Related
information
Cause
2 Defective travel signal
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
PC130-7

(See cause 4.)
aStart engine and carry out troubleshooting (Travel lever).
When lever is
Monitoring code
operated: ON
6-bit display
When lever is in
020
neutral: OFF
harness

Resistance
and A43 (female) (1)
Max. 1 z
Wiring harness between A43 (female) (2) and

J01 (male) (19)
Max. 1 z

4
circuit)
Between FB1-15 outlet J03 A43 (female)
(1) or other related circuit wiring harness and
chassis ground
5 Defective travel alarm
Troubleshooting cannot be carried out since the defect is in the travel

alarm (If none of the above causes 1 4 is the cause of the trouble, the
travel alarm is defective).
Resistance
20-475
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
E-33
Circuit diagram related to travel oil pressure switch and travel alarm
20-476
(1)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR HYDRAULIC AND

MECHANICAL SYSTEM
(H-MODE)
INFORMATION IN TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE .................................................................................... 20-502
HYDRAULIC AND MECHANICAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM ............................................................................ 20-504
H- 1 Speed or power of whole work equipment, swing, and travel is low ................................................ 20-506
H- 2 Engine speed lowers extremely or engine stalls .............................................................................. 20-507
H- 3 Work equipment, swing, and travel systems do not work ................................................................ 20-508
H- 4 Abnormal sound comes out from around hydraulic pump ................................................................ 20-508
H- 5 Auto-decelerator does not operate ................................................................................................... 20-509
H- 6 Fine control performance or response is low ................................................................................... 20-509
H- 7 Speed or power of boom is low ........................................................................................................ 20-510
H- 8 Speed or power of arm is low ........................................................................................................... 20-511
H- 9 Speed or power of bucket is low ...................................................................................................... 20-512
H-10 Work equipment does not move singly ............................................................................................ 20-513
H-11 Hydraulic drift of work equipment is large ........................................................................................ 20-514
H-12 Time lag of work equipment is large ................................................................................................ 20-515
H-13 One-touch power maximizing function does not work ...................................................................... 20-515
H-14 In compound operation of work equipment, speed of part loaded more is low ................................ 20-516
H-15 When machine swings and raises boom simultaneously, boom rising speed is low ........................ 20-516
H-16 When machine operates work equipment or swings and travels simultaneously,
travel speed lowers largely .............................................................................................................. 20-516
H-17 Machine deviates during travel ........................................................................................................ 20-517
H-18 Travel speed is low ......................................................................................................................... 20-518
H-19 Machine is not steered well or steering power is low ....................................................................... 20-519
H-20 Travel speed does not change ......................................................................................................... 20-519
H-21 Travel motor does not work (only one side) ..................................................................................... 20-520
H-22 Upper structure does not swing ....................................................................................................... 20-521
H-23 Swing acceleration or swing speed is low ........................................................................................ 20-522
H-24 Upper structure overruns remarkably when it stops swinging .......................................................... 20-523
H-25 Large shock is made when upper structure stops swinging ............................................................. 20-524
H-26 Large sound is made when upper structure stops swinging ............................................................ 20-524
H-27 Hydraulic drift of swing is large ........................................................................................................ 20-525
PC130-7
20-501
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING

a The following information is summarized in the troubleshooting table. Before carrying out troubleshooting,
understand that information fully.
Trouble
Related
information
Trouble which occurred in the machine

Cause
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
2
<Contents of description>
(Given numbers are refer Standard value in normal state to judge possible causes
ence numbers, which do not
Remarks on judgment
indicate priority)
3
20-502
(1)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
HYDRAULIC AND MECHANICAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
20-504
(1)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
a This system diagram is a rough general hydraulic circuit diagram made as reference material for troubleshooting of the hydraulic and mechanical systems.
PC130-7
20-505
(1)
H-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
H-1 Speed or power of whole work equipment, swing, and travel is low
Trouble
Related
information
Speed or power of whole work equipment, swing, and travel is low.

Carry out the troubleshooting in working mode A.
Cause
1 Defective unload valve

aPrepare with engine stopped, then run engine at high idling and carry
out troubleshooting.
Control levers
Unload pressure
2.4 3.4 MPa

{25 35 kg/cm2}
out troubleshooting
Defective adjustment or
2 malfunction of main relief
valve
Control levers
Arm-IN circuit relieved
Main relief pressure

33.6 37.0 MPa
{343 378 kg/cm2}
If the oil pressure does not become normal after adjustment, the main
relief valve may have a malfunction or a defect in it. Check the main
relief valve directly.
out troubleshooting
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Defective self-reducing
pressure valve
malfunction of PC valve
Control levers
Control circuit basic pressure

2.84 3.43 MPa
{29 35 kg/cm2}
out troubleshooting
Measured pump
Measurement
Oil pressure ratio
discharge pressure
conditions
Pump discharge
pressure
PC valve output
pressure
Swing lock switch:

LOCK
1
0.6 (3/5)
If the oil pressure does not become normal after adjustment, the PC
valve may have a malfunction or a defect in it. Check the PC valve
directly.
out troubleshooting
Measured pump
discharge pressure
5
malfunction of LS valve
Pump discharge
pressure
LS valve output
pressure
Oil pressure ratio

Either track shoe
driven idle (Full stroke)
1
Almost same pressure
0.6 (3/5)
If the oil pressure does not become normal after adjustment, the LS
valve may have a malfunction or a defect in it. Check the LS valve
directly.
6 Malfunction of servo piston The servo piston may have a malfunction. Check it directly.
If none of above causes is the cause of the trouble, the cause may be
7 Defective piston pump
lowering performance, malfunction, or internal defect of the piston
pump.
20-506
(1)
PC130-7
H-2
TROUBLESHOOTING
H-2 Engine speed lowers extremely or engine stalls

Trouble
Related
information
Engine speed lowers extremely or engine stalls.

Cause
1 malfunction of main relief
valve

Control levers
33.6 37.0 MPa
{343 378 kg/cm2}
2
malfunction of PC valve
malfunction of LS valve
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Clogging of orifice or filter

in serve devices
5 Malfunction servo piston
4
PC130-7
Measurement
conditions
Oil pressure ratio
Pump discharge
1
Swing lock switch:
pressure
LOCK
PC valve output
0.6 (3/5)
pressure
If the oil pressure does not become normal after adjustment, the PC
valve may have a malfunction or a defect in it. Check the PC valve
directly.
Oil pressure ratio
Either track shoe
Pump discharge
1
pressure
LS valve output
0.6 (3/5)
pressure
directly.
The orifices or filters in the pump servo devices may be clogged. Check
them directly.
The servo piston may have a malfunction. Check it directly.
20-507
(1)
H-3, H-4
TROUBLESHOOTING
H-3 Work equipment, swing, and travel systems do not work

Trouble
Related
information
Work equipment, swing, and travel systems do not work.

Cause

Safety lock lever
Solenoid valve output pressure
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Malfunction of PPC lock

solenoid valve
Malfunction of self-reducing pressure valve
LOCK
0 MPa
{0 kg/cm2}
FREE
2.84 3.43 MPa

{29 35 kg/cm2}
Control levers
2.84 3.43 MPa

{29 35 kg/cm2}
The piston pump may have a malfunction or has an internal defect.

Check it by the following method.
3 Malfunction of piston pump
Remove the pump discharge pressure pickup plug and crank the engine. If the oil flows out at this time, the piston pump is normal.
The pump shaft may not rotate because of an defect in the damper.
4 Defective damper
Check the damper directly.
H-4 Abnormal sound comes out from around hydraulic pump

Trouble
Related
information
Abnormal sound comes out from around hydraulic pump.

Cause
Lowering of hydraulic oil
1
level
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
20-508
(1)
2 Defective hydraulic oil

Clogging of hydraulic tank
3
cap
Clogging of hydraulic tank
4
strainer
5 Defective piston pump

Check it directly.
Hydraulic oil may contain air. Check hydraulic oil directly.
Negative pressure may be applied to the hydraulic tank because of clogging of the hydraulic tank cap. Check the cap directly.
Negative pressure may be applied to the suction circuit because of clogging of the hydraulic tank strainer. Check the strainer directly.
The piston pump may have a defect in it. Check it directly.
PC130-7
H-5, H-6
TROUBLESHOOTING
H-5 Auto-decelerator does not operate

Trouble
Related
information
Auto-decelerator does not operate.

Apply this troubleshooting if the auto-decelerator does not operate when the travel lever is operated.
(The shuttle valve (in the PPC valve) is installed between the PPC valve and oil pressure switch of only
in the travel circuit.)
Cause
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Malfunction of travel PPC

valve (shuttle valve)

Travel lever
PPC valve output pressure
Neutral position
Travel position
0 MPa
{0 kg/cm2}
2.84 3.43 MPa
{29 35 kg/cm2}
H-6 Fine control performance or response is low

Trouble
Related
information
Fine control performance or response is low.

Cause
Clogging of LS circuit
1
orifice

The LS circuit may be clogged. Check it directly.
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state

2
malfunction LS valve
3 Defective servo piston
PC130-7
Pump discharge
pressure
LS valve output
pressure
Oil pressure ratio

Either track shoe
1
0.6 (3/5)
directly.
The servo piston may have a malfunction. Check it directly.
20-509
(1)
H-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
H-7 Speed or power of boom is low

Trouble
Related
information
Speed or power of boom is low.

Cause

Right work equipment control lever
Malfunction of right PPC

valve (boom circuit)
Malfunction of boom control valve (spool)

Malfunction of boom con3 trol valve (pressure compensation valve)
2
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Neutral position
0 MPa
{0 kg/cm2}
Boom RAISE position

Boom LOWER position
2.84 3.43 MPa

{29 35 kg/cm2}
The spool of the boom control valve may have a malfunction. Check it
directly.
The pressure compensation valve of the boom control valve may have a
malfunction. Check it directly.
Malfunction of boom con4 trol valve (regeneration

valve)
The regeneration valve of the boom control valve may have a malfunction or a defective seal. Check it directly.
Malfunction or defective
5 seal of boom control valve
(suction valve)
The suction valve of the boom control valve may have a malfunction or a
defective seal. Check it directly.
6 seal of centralized safetysuction valve
7
Malfunction of boom cylinder (lock valve)
Malfunction of boom cylinder (cylinder unit)
The centralized safety-suction valve may have a malfunction or a defective seal. Check it directly.
(A trouble of the centralized safety-suction valve have bad effects on the
arm and bucket.)
The lock valve of the boom cylinder may have a malfunction. Check it
directly.
Boom cylinder
Leakage from cylinder
Relieved in RAISE position
20-510
(1)
15 cc/min
PC130-7
H-8
TROUBLESHOOTING
H-8 Speed or power of arm is low

Trouble
Related
information
Speed or power of arm is low.

Cause

Left work equipment control lever
Malfunction of left PPC

valve (boom circuit)
Neutral position
Arm IN position
Arm OUT position
Malfunction of arm control

valve (spool)
Malfunction of arm control
3 valve (pressure compensation valve)
4 seal of arm control valve
(suction valve)
2
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
0 MPa
{0 kg/cm2}
2.84 3.43 MPa
{29 35 kg/cm2}
The spool of the arm control valve may have a malfunction. Check it
directly.
The pressure compensation valve of the arm control valve may have a
The suction valve of the arm control valve may have a malfunction or a
boom and bucket.)
Malfunction of arm cylinder
6
(cylinder unit)
Arm cylinder
Relieved in IN position
15 cc/min
PC130-7
20-511
(1)
H-9
TROUBLESHOOTING
H-9 Speed or power of bucket is low

Trouble
Related
information
Speed or power of bucket is low.

Cause

Malfunction of right PPC

valve (bucket circuit)
Neutral position
Malfunction of bucket control valve (spool)

Malfunction of bucket con3 trol valve (pressure compensation valve)
4 seal of bucket control valve
(suction valve)
2
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
0 MPa
{0 kg/cm2}
2.84 3.43 MPa
{29 35 kg/cm2}
The spool of the bucket control valve may have a malfunction. Check it
directly.
The pressure compensation valve of the bucket control valve may have
a malfunction. Check it directly.
The suction valve of the bucket control valve may have a malfunction or
a defective seal. Check it directly.
boom and arm.)
Malfunction of bucket cylin6
der (cylinder unit)
Bucket cylinder
Relieved in CURL position
15 cc/min
20-512
(1)
PC130-7
H-10
TROUBLESHOOTING
H-10 Work equipment does not move singly
Trouble
Related
information
(1) Boom does not move singly.

(2) Arm does not move singly.
(3) Bucket does not move singly.
Cause
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
1 Malfunction of PPC valve

Work equipment control lever
Neutral
Operated
PC130-7
0 MPa
{0 kg/cm2}
2.84 3.43 MPa
{29 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of control valve

The spool of the control valve may have a malfunction. Check it directly.
(spool)
20-513
(1)
H-11
TROUBLESHOOTING
H-11 Hydraulic drift of work equipment is large

Trouble
Related
information
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Trouble
Related
information
(1) Hydraulic drift of boom is large.

Cause
Defective boom cylinder

(cylinder unit)
Boom cylinder
Relieved in RAISE position

15 cc/min
Defective seal of boom cyl- The seal of the lock valve of the boom cylinder may be defective. Check
2
inder (lock valve)
it directly.
(2) Hydraulic drift of arm is large.

Cause
Defective arm cylinder (cyl1
inder unit)
Arm cylinder
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Defective seal of arm con2

trol lever (spool)
Defective seal of arm con3
trol lever (suction valve)
4
Trouble
Related
information
Defective seal of centralized safety-suction valve
(3) Hydraulic drift of bucket is large.

Cause
Defective bucket cylinder
1
(cylinder unit)
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
20-514
(1)
Relieved in IN position
15 cc/min
The seal of the arm control valve spool may be defective. Check it
directly.
The seal of the suction valve of the arm control valve may be defective.
Check it directly.
The seal of the centralized safety-suction valve of the control valve may
defective. Check it directly.
(A trouble of the centralized safety-suction valve have bad effects on
bucket.)
Defective seal of bucket

control valve (spool)

Bucket cylinder
Relieved in CURL position

15 cc/min
The seal of the bucket control valve spool may be defective. Check it
directly.
Defective seal of bucket

3 control valve (suction
valve)
The seal of the suction valve of the bucket control valve may be defective. Check it directly.
Defective seal of central4

ized safety-suction valve
The seal of the centralized safety-suction valve of the control valve may
defective. Check it directly.
(A trouble of the centralized safety-suction valve have bad effects on
arm.)
PC130-7
H-12, H-13
TROUBLESHOOTING
H-12 Time lag of work equipment is large

Trouble
Related
information
Time lag of work equipment is large.

Cause
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Malfunction of control valve

The regeneration valve of the control valve may have a malfunction.
1 (regeneration valve) [Only
Check it directly.
boom]
2
Malfunction of control valve The suction valve of the control valve may have a malfunction. Check it
(Suction valve)
directly.
H-13 One-touch power maximizing function does not work

Trouble
Related
information
One-touch power maximizing function does not work.

Carry out installation in the reverse order to removal.
Cause
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state

Swing lock switch
Malfunction of 2-stage
relief solenoid valve
OFF
LOCK
PC130-7
Malfunction of main relief

valve
0 MPa
{0 kg/cm2}
2.84 3.43 MPa
{29 35 kg/cm2}
The main relief valve of the control valve may have a malfunction.
Check it directly.
20-515
(1)
H-14, H-15, H-16
TROUBLESHOOTING
H-14 In compound operation of work equipment, speed of part loaded more is low
Trouble
Related
information
In compound operation of work equipment, speed of part loaded more is low.

Cause
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Malfunction of pressure
1 compensation valve on
less load side

The pressure compensation valve of the control valve on the less load
side may have a malfunction. Check it directly.
Larger
Less load
Compound operation
load side
side
Boom RAISE + Arm IN
Boom
Arm
Boom RAISE + Arm OUT
Boom RAISE + Bucket CURL
Arm
Boom
Boom
Bucket
Arm OUT + Bucket CURL

Boom LOWER + Arm OUT
Arm
Arm
Bucket
Boom
H-15 When machine swings and raises boom simultaneously, boom rising speed is
low
Trouble
Related
information
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
When machine swings and raises boom simultaneously, boom rising speed is low.
Cause
Malfunction of defective
seal of LS selector valve
The LS selector valve of the control valve may have a malfunction or a

H-16 When machine operates work equipment or swings and travels simultaneously,
travel speed lowers largely
Trouble
Related
information
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
20-516
(1)
When machine operates work equipment or swings and travels simultaneously, travel speed lowers
largely.
Cause
Malfunction of work equip1 ment control valve (pressure compensation valve)
Malfunction of swing con2 trol valve (pressure compensation valve)
Malfunction of travel control
3 valve (pressure compensation valve)

The pressure compensation valve of the work equipment control valve
may have a malfunction. Check it directly.
The pressure compensation valve of the swing control valve may have a
The pressure compensation valve of the travel control valve may have a
PC130-7
H-17
TROUBLESHOOTING
H-17 Machine deviates during travel

Trouble
Related
information
Machine deviates during travel.

Cause

Control levers
2.84 3.43 MPa

{29 35 kg/cm2}
Travel lever
2
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state

valve
2.84 3.43 MPa

{29 35 kg/cm2}
Max. 0.4 MPa

{Max. 4 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of travel junc- The travel junction valve of the control valve may have a malfunction.
3
tion valve
Check it directly.
Malfunction of travel control The spool of the travel control valve may have a malfunction. Check it
4
valve (spool)
directly.
Difference between right and left of
above
Defective seal of center

swivel joint
6 Defective travel motor
7 Defective final drive
PC130-7
FORWARD or REVERSE position
The seal of the center swivel joint may be defective. Check it directly.
Travel lever
Leakage from travel motor
Relieved in TRAVEL position

Max. 10 l/min
The final drive may have a defect in it. Check it directly. (It may be
checked by abnormal sound, abnormal heating, metal chips in drain oil,
etc.)
20-517
(1)
H-18
TROUBLESHOOTING
H-18 Travel speed is low

Trouble
Related
information
Travel speed is low.

Cause

Control levers
2.84 3.43 MPa

{29 35 kg/cm2}
Travel lever
2

valve
2.84 3.43 MPa

{29 35 kg/cm2}
Max. 0.4 MPa

{Max. 4 kg/cm2}
Control levers
Difference between right and left of
above
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
4
5
6
7
Malfunction of main relief

valve
(1)
36.3 39.2 MPa

{370 400 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of travel control The spool of the travel control valve may have a malfunction. Check it
valve (spool)
directly.
valve (pressure compensamalfunction. Check it directly.
tion valve)
Malfunction of travel control The suction valve of the travel control valve may have a malfunction.
valve (suction valve)
Check it directly.
Defective seal of center
The seal of the center swivel joint may be defective. Check it directly.
swivel joint
Defective travel motor
Travel lever
Max. 10 l/min
20-518
etc.)
PC130-7
H-19, H-20
TROUBLESHOOTING
H-19 Machine is not steered well or steering power is low

Trouble
Related
information
Machine is not steered well or steering power is low.

Cause

Travel lever

valve
0 MPa
{0 kg/cm2}
Neutral position
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
2
3
4
5
6
Malfunction of travel junction valve

valve (spool)
valve (pressure compensation valve)
valve (suction valve)
Malfunction of travel motor
(safety-suction valve)
2.84 3.43 MPa

{29 35 kg/cm2}
The travel junction valve of the control valve may have a malfunction.
Check it directly.
The spool of the travel control valve may have a malfunction. Check it
directly.
The suction valve of the travel control valve may have a malfunction.
Check it directly.
The safety-suction valve of the travel motor may have a malfunction.
Check it directly.
H-20 Travel speed does not change

Trouble
Related
information
Travel speed does not change.

Cause

Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
PC130-7
Malfunction of travel speed

shifting solenoid valve
Travel speed switch
Travel lever
Lo position
Neutral position
Hi position
FORWARD or
REVERSE position
Solenoid valve output

pressure
0 MPa
{0 kg/cm2}
2.84 3.43 MPa
{29 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of travel motor The speed shifting section of the travel motor may have a malfunction.
(speed shifting section)
Check it directly.
20-519
(1)
H-21
TROUBLESHOOTING
H-21 Travel motor does not work (only one side)

Trouble
Related
information
Travel motor does not work (only one side).

Cause
Defective seal of travel
1 control valve
(suction valve)
2
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
(1)
The seal of the suction valve of the travel control valve may be defective. Check it directly.
Malfunction of travel motor The counterbalance valve of the travel motor may have a malfunction.
(counterbalance valve)
Check it directly.
Malfunction of travel motor The safety-suction valve of the travel motor may have a malfunction.
(safety-suction valve)
Check it directly.
4 Defective travel motor
Travel lever
3
20-520

Max. 10 l/min
etc.)
PC130-7
H-22
TROUBLESHOOTING
H-22 Upper structure does not swing

Trouble
Related
information
(1) Upper structure does not swing in either direction.

Cause

Malfunction of swing holding brake solenoid valve
0 MPa
{0 kg/cm2}
Neutral position
2.84 3.43 MPa
SWING position
{29 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of swing motor The parking brake of the swing motor may have a malfunction. Check it
(parking brake)
directly.
Left work equipment
Malfunction of swing motor
Swing lock switch
3
control lever
(safety valve)
2
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
LOCK
Defective swing motor

(motor unit)
Relieved in SWING
position
28.9 32.9 MPa

{295 335 kg/cm2}
Left work equipment
Swing lock switch
control lever
Relieved in SWING
LOCK
Max. 6 l/min
position
The swing machinery may have a defect in it. Check it directly. (It may
5 Defective swing machinery be checked by abnormal sound, abnormal heating, metal chips in drain
oil, etc.)
Trouble
Related
information
(2) Upper structure swings only in 1 direction.

Cause

Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
PC130-7
Malfunction of swing PPC

1
valve
Neutral position
SWING position

0 MPa
{0 kg/cm2}
2.84 3.43 MPa
{29 35 kg/cm2}
Malfunction of swing control valve (spool)
The spool of the swing control valve may have a malfunction. Check it
directly.
Defective seal of swing

motor (suction valve)
The seal of the suction valve of the swing motor may be defective.
Check it directly.
20-521
(1)
H-23
TROUBLESHOOTING
H-23 Swing acceleration or swing speed is low

Trouble
Related
information
(1) Swing acceleration or swing speed is low in both directions.

Cause
Malfunction of swing con1 trol valve (pressure compensation valve)
2

The pressure compensation valve of the swing control valve may have a
Malfunction of swing bleed The swing bleed valve of the control valve may have a malfunction.
valve
Check it directly.
Malfunction of swing motor The parking brake of the swing motor may have a malfunction. Check it
(parking brake)
directly.
Left work equipment
Swing lock switch
4
control lever
(safety valve)
3
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
LOCK position
Relieved in SWING
position
28.9 32.9 MPa

{295 335 kg/cm2}
Left work equipment
Leakage from swing
control lever
motor
Relieved in SWING
LOCK position
Max. 6 l/min
position
oil, etc.)
Trouble
Related
information

(motor unit)
(2) Swing acceleration or swing speed is low in only 1 direction.

Cause
1
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
20-522
(1)
Swing lock switch

valve

In NEUTRAL position
In SWING position
0 MPa
{0 kg/cm2}
2.84 3.43 MPa
{29 35 kg/cm2}
Clogging of swing PPC

slow return valve
The swing PPC slow return valve may be clogged. Check it directly.
directly (including the stroke limiting mechanism).

Check it directly.
PC130-7
H-24
TROUBLESHOOTING
H-24 Upper structure overruns remarkably when it stops swinging

Trouble
Related
information
(1) Upper structure overruns remarkably when it stops swinging in both directions.
Cause
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
LOCK position
Trouble

(motor unit)
{295 335 kg/cm2}
Swing lock switch
Left work equipment

control lever
Leakage from swing

motor
LOCK position
Relieved in SWING
position
Max. 6 l/min
(2) Upper structure overruns remarkably when it stops swinging in only 1 direction.
Cause
1
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
PC130-7
28.9 32.9 MPa
Relieved in SWING
position
2
Related
information
Left work equipment
Swing lock switch
1
control lever
(safety valve)

valve

In NEUTRAL position
In SWING position
0 MPa
{0 kg/cm2}
2.84 3.43 MPa
{29 35 kg/cm2}
Clogging of swing PPC

slow return valve
The swing PPC slow return valve may be clogged. Check it directly.
directly.

Check it directly.
20-523
(1)
H-25, H-26
TROUBLESHOOTING
H-25 Large shock is made when upper structure stops swinging

Trouble
Related
information
Large shock is made when upper structure stops swinging.

Cause

Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state

valve
In NEUTRAL position
In SWING position

slow return valve
3
(shockless valve)
2
0 MPa
{0 kg/cm2}
2.84 3.43 MPa
{29 35 kg/cm2}
The swing PPC slow return valve may have a malfunction. Check it
directly.
The shockless valve of the swing motor may have a malfunction. Check
it directly.
H-26 Large sound is made when upper structure stops swinging

Trouble
Related
information
Large sound is made when upper structure stops swinging.

Cause
Malfunction of back-pres1
sure check valve
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
20-524
(1)

The back-pressure check valve may have a malfunction. Check it
directly.
The swing motor (safety valves) may have a malfunction. Check it

directly. (It may be checked by exchanging both valves and seeing the
(safety valve)
change of phenomenon.)
The swing motor (suction valves) may have a malfunction. Check it
3
directly. (It may be checked by exchanging both valves and seeing the
(suction valve)
change of phenomenon.)
oil, etc.)
2
PC130-7
H-27
TROUBLESHOOTING
H-27 Hydraulic drift of swing is large

Trouble
Related
information
(1) When swing holding brake is applied

When the swing lock switch is in the LOCK position or when the swing holding brake release switch is
in the normal position, the swing holding brake operates and the upper structure is fixed with the disc
brake.
Cause
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
Malfunction of swing holding brake solenoid valve
Related
information
PC130-7
0 MPa
{0 kg/cm2}
2.84 3.43 MPa
{29 35 kg/cm2}
The parking brake of the swing motor may have a malfunction or a

defect in it. Check it directly.
(2) When swing holding brake is released

When the swing holding brake release switch is in the RELEASE position, the swing brake is released
and the upper structure is secured by only hydraulic pressure.
Cause
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal
state
In NEUTRAL position
In SWING position
Malfunction or internal
2 defect of swing motor
(parking brake)
Trouble


control valve (spool)
The seal of the spool of the swing control valve may be defective.
Check it directly.

The seal of the safety valve of the swing control valve may be defective.
control valve (safety valve) Check it directly.

3 control valve (suction
valve)
The seal of the suction valve of the swing control valve may be defective. Check it directly.

4 control valve (shockless
valve)
The seal of the shockless valve of the swing control valve may be defective. Check it directly.
20-525
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING OF ENGINE
(S-MODE)
Method of using troubleshooting charts ...................................................................................................... 20-602

S-1 Starting performance is poor (Starting always takes time)................................................................ 20-606
S-2 Engine does not start ........................................................................................................................ 20-608
(1) Engine does not turn ................................................................................................................ 20-608
(2) Engine turns but no exhaust smoke comes out (Fuel is not being injected)............................. 20-609
(3) Exhaust smoke comes out but engine does not start (Fuel is being injected).......................... 20-610
S-3 Engine does not pick-up smoothly (Follow-up is poor) ......................................................................20-611
S-4 Engine stops during operations ........................................................................................................ 20-612
S-5 Engine does not rotate smoothly (Hunting)....................................................................................... 20-613
S-6 Engine lacks output (or lacks power) ................................................................................................ 20-614
S-7 Exhaust smoke is black (Incomplete combustion) ............................................................................ 20-615
S-8 Oil consumption is excessive (or exhaust smoke is blue) ................................................................ 20-616
S-9 Oil becomes contaminated quickly ................................................................................................... 20-617
S-10 Fuel consumption is excessive ......................................................................................................... 20-618
S-11 Oil is in cooling water, or water spurts back, or water level goes down ............................................ 20-619
S-12 Oil pressure caution lamp lights up (Drop in oil pressure) ................................................................ 20-620
S-13 Oil level rises (Water, fuel in oil)........................................................................................................ 20-621
S-14 Water temperature becomes too high (Overheating)........................................................................ 20-622
S-15 Abnormal noise is made ................................................................................................................... 20-623
S-16 Vibration is excessive ....................................................................................................................... 20-624
PC130-7
20-601
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
METHOD OF USING TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS

This troubleshooting chart is divided into three sections: questions, check items, and troubleshooting. The questions and check items are used to
pinpoint high probability causes that can be located
from the failure symptoms or simple inspeciton without using troubleshooting tools.
Next, troubleshooting tools or direct inspection are
used to check the high probability causes to make
final confirmation.
[Questions]
Sections (A) + (B) in the chart on the right corresponds to the items where answers can be
obtained from the user. The items in (B) are
items that can be obtained from the user,
depending on the user's level.
[Check items]
The serviceman carries out simple inspection to
narrow down the causes. The items under (C) in
the chart on the right correspond to this.
The serviceman narrows down the causes from
information (A) that he has obtained from the
user and the results of (C) that he has obtained
from his own inspection.
[Troubleshooting]
Troubleshooting is carried out in the order of
probability, starting with the causes that have
been marked as having the highest probability
from information gained from [Questions] and
[Check items].
20-602
(1)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
PC130-7
*1
Confirm recent repair history
*2
Degree of use
Defective injection pump (excessive injection)
Improper injection timing
Clogged, seized injection nozzle
Worn piston ring, cylinder
Clogged air cleaner element
*1. For [Confirm recent repair history] in the

[Questions] Section, ask the user, and mark
the Cause column with E to use as reference for locating the cause of the failure.
However, do not use this when making calculations to narrow down the causes.
*2. Use the E in the Cause column as reference for [Degree of use (Operated for long
period)] in the [Questions] section as reference. As a rule, do not use it when calculating the points for locating the cause, but it
can be included if necessary to determine
the order for troubleshooting.
Seized turbocherger, interference
The basic method of using the troubleshooting chart

is as follows.
Items listed for [Questions] and [Check items] that
have a relationship with the Cause items are marked
with Q, and of these, causes that have a high probability are marked with w.
Check each of the [Questions] and [Check items] in
turn, and marked the Q or w in the chart for items
where the problem appeared. The vertical column
(Causes) that has the highest number of points is the
most probable cause, so start troubleshooting for that
item to make final confirmation of the cause.
Operated for long period
20-603
(1)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Example of troubleshooting when exhaust gas is black

Let us assume that [Clogged air cleaner] is taken to be the cause of black exhaust gas. Three symptoms
have causal relationship with this problem: [Exhaust gas slowly became black], [Power slowly became
weaker], and [Dust indicator is red].
If we look from these three symptoms to find the causes, we find that there is a relationship with five causes.
Let us explain here the method of using this causal relationship to pinpoint the most probable cause.
S-7 Exhaust gas is black (incomplete combustion)

General causes why exhaust gas is black
Insufficient intake of air
Improper condition of fuel injection
Excessive injection of fuel
Legend
: Possible causes (judging from Questions and Check items)
: Most probable causes (judging from Questions and Check items)
: Possible causes due to length of use (used for a long period)
: Items to confirm the cause.
20-604
(1)
PC130-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Five causes
Step 1
Clarify the relationship between the three symptoms in
the [Questions] and [Check items] section and the five
Cause items in the vertical column.
Three symptoms
Step 2
Add up the total of
and
marked where the
horizontal limes for the three symptoms and the vertical
columns for the causes intersect.
(1) Clogged air cleaner element:
(2) Air leakage between turbocharger
and cyl. head:
(3) Clogged, seized injection nozzle:
(4) Defective contact of valve, valve seat:
(5) Worn piston ring, cylinder:
Step 3
The calculation in Step 2 show that the closest
relationship is with [Clogged air cleaner element]. Follow
this column down to the troubleshooting area and carry
out the troubleshooting item marked .
The Remedy is given as [Clean], so carry out cleaning,
and the exhaust gas color should return to normal.
PC130-7
20-605
(1)
S-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-1 Starting performance is poor

(Starting always takes time)
General causes why exhaust smoke comes out but engine takes time to start
Defective electrical system
Insufficient supply of fuel
Improper selection of fuel
(At ambient temperature of 10C or below,
ASTM D975 No. 2 diesel fuel is used)
1.22
1.24
1.23
0C
1.30
1.28
1.26
1.25
1.24
The specific gravity should exceed the value for the charging
rate of 70% in the above table.
In cold areas the specific gravity must exceed the value for the
charging rate of 75% in the above table.
1.23
1.25
Clogged feed pump gauze filter
1.24
1.27
Replace
1.26
1.29
Clean
1.28
0C
20C
Clogged fuel filter, strainer
70 %
Clean
75 %
80 %
Defective contact of valve, valve seat
90 %
Correct
Charging rate
100 %
Ambient
temperature
Replace
a Battery charging rate and gravity
Clean
Causes

Degree of use of machine
Questions
Ease of starting

Gradually became worse
Starts when warm
Indicator lamp does not light up

Engine oil must be added more frequently
Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to operation Manual
Non-specified fuel has being used
Dust indicator lamp is red
Battery charge lamp is ON
Starting motor cranks engine slowly
When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting engine,
temperature of some cylinders is low
Engine does not pick up smoothly, and combustion is irregular
Check items
Blow-by gas is excessive

Timing lock on fuel injection pump does not match
Mud is stuck to fuel tank cap
When engine is cranked with starting motor,
1) Little fuel comes out even when injection pump piping sleeve nut is loosened
2) Little fuel comes out even when fuel filter air bleed plug is loosened
Leakage from fuel piping
There is hunting from engine (rotation is irregular)
When compression pressure is measured, it is found to be low

When air cleaner element is inspected directly, it is found to be clogged
Troubleshooting
When fuel filter, strainer are inspected directly, they are found to be clogged
When feed pump strainer is inspected directly, it is found to be clogged
Heater mount does not become warm
Is voltage 2630V between alternator terminal B and terminal E
with engine at low idling?
Yes
No
Either specific gravity of electrolyte or voltage of battery is low

Speed does not change when operation of certain cylinders is stopped
When control rack is pushed, it is found to be heavy or does not return
(check after removing fuel injection pump)
When fuel tank cap is inspected directly, it is found to be clogged
Remedy
Use a test stand when adjusting.
20-606
(1)
PC130-7
PC130-7
Leakage, clogging, air in fuel piping
Clogged air breather hole in fuel tank
Defective feed pump
Defective boost compensator cancel
Clean
Replace
Replace
Adjust
Correct
Defetive injection timing
Replace
Defetive injection pump (rack, plunger stuck)
Defective injection nozzle
Replace
Replace
Defective or deteriorated battery
Replace
Defective regulator
Replace
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-1
Causes
20-607
(1)
S-2
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-2 Engine does not start

(1) Engine does not turn
General causes why engine does not turn
Causes
Internal parts of engine seized
Broken ring gear
Defective safety relay or safety switch
Defective battery terminal connection
Defective fuel cut solenoid
Defective starting switch
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Defective wiring of starting circuit
Defective electrical system

Failure in power train
Questions
Replace
a If internal parts of the engine are seized, carry

out troubleshooting for Engine stops during
operations.

Condition of horn when

starting switch is turned ON
Horn sounds
Horn volume is low
Speed of rotation is low
When starting switch is

turned to START, pinion
moves out, but
Makes grating noise

Soon disengages pinion again
Check items
Makes rattling noise and does not turn

When starting switch is turned to START, pinion does not move out
When starting switch is turned to ON, there is no clicking sound
Battery terminal is loose
When starting switch is turned ON, linkage is not actuated
Specific gravity of electrolyte, voltage of battery is low
Troubleshooting
For the following conditions 1) - 5), turn the starting switch

OFF, connect the cord, and carry out troubleshooting
1) When terminal B and terminal C of starting switch are connected,
engine starts
2) When terminal B and terminal C of starting motor are connected,
engine starts
3) When terminal B and terminal C of safety relay are connected,
engine starts
4) When terminal of safety switch and terminal B of starting motor are
connected, engine starts
5) There is no 24V between battery relay terminal b and terminal E
When ring gear is inspected directly, tooth surface is found to be
chipped
Troubleshooting of defective wiring in starting circuit
When battery is checked, battery electrolyte is found to be low
Cannot be moved by hand even when linkage of fuel cut solenoid is

disconnected
Remedy
20-608
(1)
PC130-7
S-2
TROUBLESHOOTING
(2) Engine turns but no exhaust smoke comes out

(Fuel is not being injected)
General causes why engine turns but no exhaust smoke
comes out
Causes
Clogged feed pump strainer
Insufficient fuel in tank
Clogged, leaking fuel piping
Defective fuel cut solenoid
Improper fuel used
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Questions
ASTM D975 No.1
Seized, broken feed pump piston
ASTM D975 No.2

Diesel fuel
Replace
AMBIENT TEMPRATURE
14
32
50
68F
-10
0
10
20C
Defective injection pump (rack, plunger seized)
-4
-20
Replace
KIND OF
FLUID
Broken injection pump drive shaft, key
a Standards for use of fuel
Replace
Supply of fuel impossible

Supply of fuel is extremely small
Improper selection of fuel (particularly in winter)
Replace

Exhaust smoke suddenly stops coming out (when starting again)

Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to Operation
Manual
Fuel tank is found to be empty
There is leakage from fuel piping
Check items

When starting switch is turned ON, linkage is not actuated
When fuel filter is drained, fuel does not come out
1) No fuel comes out even when fuel filter air bleed plug is
loosened
2) No fuel spurts out even when injection pump piping sleeve nut is
loosened
Rust and water are found when fuel tank is drained
Inspect injection pump directly
Troubleshooting
When control rack is pushed, it is found to be heavy, or does

not return
Inspect feed pump directly
When fuel filter, strainer are inspected directly, they are found to be
clogged
When feed pump strainer is inspected directly, it is found
to be clogged
When fuel cap is inspected directly, it is found to be clogged
Cannot be moved by hand even when linkage of fuel cut
solenoid is disconnected
Remedy
PC130-7
20-609
(1)
S-2
TROUBLESHOOTING
(3) Exhaust smoke comes out but engine does not

start (Fuel is being injected)
General causes why exhaust smoke comes out but
engine not start
Clogged air breather hole in fuel tank cap
Clean
Clean
Improper fuel used
Leakage, clogging, air in fuel system
Clogged injection nozzle, defective spray
Correct
Defective electrical intake air heater
Replace
Clean
Correct
Clean
Worn piston ring, cylinder liner
Clean
Defective injection pump (rack, plunger stuck)
Replace
Replace
Defective, broken valve system (valve, rocker lever, etc.)
Lack of rotating force due to defective electrical

system
Improper selection of fuel and oil
Replace
Causes
Questions
Suddenly failed to start

When engine is cranked, abnormal noise is heard from
around cylinder head
Non-specified fuel is being used
Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to
Operation Manual
Indicator lamp does not light up
Starting motor cranks engine slowly
Check items
When fuel lever is placed at FULL position, it does not contact stopper
1) Little fuel comes out even when injection pump piping
sleeve nut is loosened
2) No fuel comes out even when fuel filter air bleed plug is
loosened
When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting
engine, temperature of some cylinders is low
When fuel filter is drained, no fuel comes out
Remove head cover and check directly
Troubleshooting
When control rack is pushed, it is found to be heavy, or

does not return
When fuel filter, strainer are inspected directly, they are
found to be clogged
When feed pump strainer is inspected directly, it is found to
be clogged
When air cleaner element is inspected directly, it is found to be clogged
Heater mount does not become warm
Either specific gravity of electrolyte or voltage of battery is low
When feed pump is operated, there is no response, or
operation is too heavy
Remedy
20-610
(1)
PC130-7
S-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-3 Engine does not pick-up smoothly

(Follow-up is poor)
General causes why engine does not pick up smoothly
Improper condition of fuel injction
Improper fuel used
Defective contact of valve and valve seat

Replace
Replace
Seized turbocharger, interference
Replace
Correct
Replace
Improper valve clearance
Seized injection pump plunger
Correct
Clogged air breather hole in fuel tank cap
Clean
Clean
Clean
Adjust
Clean
Causes
Questions

Operation Manual
Engine pick-up suddenly became poor
Noise of interference is heard from around turbocharger
Blue under light load
Color of exhaust gas
Black
Check items
Clanging sound is heard from around cylinder head

High idling speed under no load is normal, but speed
suddenly drops when load is applied
When air cleaner element is inspected directly, it is found to
be clogged
Troubleshooting

found to be clogged
When feed pump strainer is inspected directly, it is found to be
clogged
Speed does not change when operation of certain cylinders
is stopped
When control rack is pushed, it is found to be heavy, or does not return
When turbocharger is rotated by hand, it is found to be heavy
When valve clearance is checked directly, it is found to be
outside standard value
When feed pump is operated, operation is too light or too heavy
Remedy
PC130-7
20-611
(1)
S-4
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-4 Engine stops during operations
Defective injection pump (rack, plunger stuck)
Clean
Replace
Broken, seized feed pump piston

Correct
Replace
Replace
Clean
Broken pump auxiliary equipment
Replace
Clean
Broken, seized gear train
Replace
Broken fuel pump drive shaft, key
Broken dynamic valve system (valve, rocker lever, etc.)
Replace
Add
Broken, seized piston, connecting rod
Broken, seized crankshaft bearing
Replace
Causes
Replace
General causes why engine stops during operations

Seized parts inside engine
Overheating
a If there is overheating and the engine stops,
carry out troubleshooting for overheating.
a If the engine stops because of a failure in the
power train, carry out troubleshooting for the
chassis.

Questions
Abnormal noise was heard and

engine stopped suddenly
Condition when engine
stopped
Engine overheated and stopped

Engine stopped slowly
There was hunting and engine stopped
Replacement of filters has not been carried out according

to Operation Manual
Fuel level lamp lights up
Check items

Engine rotates, but stops when power train is operated
Does not turn at all
When it is attempted to
turn by hand using
barring tool
Turns in opposite direction

Moves amount of backlash
Shaft does not turn

Troubleshooting of chassis
Metal particles are found when oil is drained

Remove oil pan and inspect directly
Troubleshooting
Remove head cover and inspect directly

When gear train is inspected, it does not turn
Rotates when pump auxiliary equipment is removed
found to be clogged
When feed pump strainer is inspected directly, it is found to
be clogged
Inspect feed pump directly
does not return
Remedy
20-612
(1)
PC130-7
S-5
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-5 Engine does not rotate smoothly

(Hunting)
General causes why engine does not rotate smoothly
Air in fuel system
Defective governor mechanism
Defective electric governor mechanism
(engine with electric governor)
Clogged, air in circuit between fuel tank and feed pump
Clogged, air in circuit between feed pump and nozzle
Clean
Correct
Correct
Clean
Clean
Low idling speed is too low
Adjust
Add
Defective adjustment of governor
Defective operation of control rack
Adjust
Defective operation of governor
a If hunting stops when electric governor rod is

disconnected, carry out troubleshooting for
the chassis.
Adjust
Causes
Adjust
Questions

Occurs at a certain speed range
Condition of hunting
Occurs at low idling

Occurs even when speed is raised
Occurs on slopes

to Operation Manual
Rust, water are found when fuel tank is drained
Check items

When feed pump is operated,
1) No response, light, return is quick
2) No response, light, return is normal
Engine speed sometimes rises too far
Engine is sometimes difficult to stop
Seal on injection pump has come off
Troubleshooting
When governor lever is moved it is found to be stiff

When injection pump is tested, governor is found to be
improperly adjusted
does not return
When feed pump strainer is inspected directly, it is
found to be clogged
found to be clogged
Remedy
PC130-7
20-613
(1)
S-6
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-6 Engine lacks output

(or lacks power)
General causes why engine lacks output
Defective boost compensator diaphragm
Correct
Clean
Replace
Defective westgate diaphragm
Bent fuel lever linkage, defective adjustment

Adjust
Adjust
Replace
Seized injection pump plunger
Replace
Clean
Correct
Clean
a If there is overheating and lack of output, carry

out troubleshooting for overheating.
Replace

Improper fuel used
(if non-specified fuel is used, output drops)
Lack of output due to overtaking
Clean
Replace
Causes

Questions
Power was lost

Suddenly
Gradually

to Operation Manual
Black
Check items
Engine pickup is poor and combustion is irregular

High idling speed under no load is normal, but speed
suddenly drops when load is applied
High idling speed of engine is low
When air cleaner element is inspected directly, it is found to be
clogged
Troubleshooting

found to be clogged
When feed pump strainer is inspected directly, it is found to be
clogged
is stopped
does not return
When valve clearance is checked directly, it is found to be
When lever is placed at FULL position, it does not contact stopper
Remedy
20-614
(1)
Replace
PC130-7
S-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-7 Exhaust smoke is black

(Incomplete combustion)
General causes why exhaust smoke is black
Crushed, clogged muffler
Leakage of air between turbocharger and head
Replace
Correct
Replace
Replace
Adjust
Adjust
Improper injection timing
Adjust
Replace
Clean
Replace
Replace
Causes

Questions
Suddenly became black

Gradually became black


Power was lost
Suddenly
Gradually

Check items
Engine pickup is poor and combustion is irregular

When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after
starting engine, temperature of some cylinders is low
Timing lock on fuel injection pump does not match
Exhaust noise is abnormal
Muffler is crushed
Leakage of air between turbocharger and head, loose clamp
When air cleaner element is inspected directly, it is found to be
clogged
Troubleshooting

is stopped
When check is made using delivery method, injection timing
is found to be incorrect
Injection pump test shows that injection amount is incorrect
When valve clearance is checked directly it is found to be
When muffler is removed, exhaust color returns to normal
does not return
Remedy
PC130-7
20-615
(1)
S-8
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-8 Oil consumption is excessive

(or exhaust smoke is blue)
a Do not run the engine at idling for more than 20
minutes continuously. (Both low and high idling)
Worn, broken rear seal, seal surface
Dust sucked in from intake system
Worn valve (stem, guide), broken seal
Correct
Correct
Correct
Turbocharger
Worn seal at turbine end
Worn seal at blower end

Replace
Broken oil cooler
Replace
Leakage from oil drain plug
Correct
Replace
Leakage from oil filter or oil cooler
Leakage from oil piping
Clogged breather or breather hose
Clean
Correct
Worn piston ring, cylinder (liner less engine)
Correct
Broken piston ring
Replace
Abnormal combustion of oil

External leakage of oil
Wear of lubrication system
Replace
Leakage from oil pan or cylinder head
Causes
General causes why oil consumption is excessive

Questions
Oil consumption suddenly increased

Engine oil becomes contaminated quickly
Exhaust smoke is blue under light load
Amount of blow-by gas
Excessive
None
Check items
Area around engine is dirty with oil

There is oil in engine cooling water
When exhaust pipe is removed, inside is found to be dirty with oil
When turbocharger air supply pipe is removed, inside is
found to be dirty with oil
Oil level in clutch or TORQFLOW transmission damper
chamber rises
Clamps for intake system are loose
Troubleshooting

When breather element is inspected, it is found to be
clogged with dirty oil
There is external leakage of oil from engine
Pressure-tightness test of oil cooler shows there is leakage
Excessive play of turbocharger shaft
Inspect rear seal directly
When intake manifold is removed, dust is found inside
Remedy
20-616
(1)
Correct
When intake manifold is removed, inside is found to be

dirty with oil
PC130-7
S-9
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-9 Oil becomes contaminated quickly

General causes why oil becomes contaminated quickly
Entry of exhaust gas due to internal wear
Clogging of lubrication passage
Improper fuel
Improper oil used
Operation under excessive load
Clogged turbocharger oil drain tube
Defective seal at turbocharger turbine end
Clean
Replace
Exhaust smoke is black
Worn valve, valve guide
Clogged oil cooler
Clean
Replace
Replace
Clogged breather, breather hose
Clogged oil filter
Clean
Causes
Replace
Questions


Non-specified oil is being used

Black
Carry out troubleshooting for Exhaust smoke is black.
Check items
Excessive
Amount of blow-by gas
None
When oil filter is inspected, metal particles are found

When exhaust pipe is removed, inside is found to be dirty
with oil
Engine oil temperature rises quickly
Troubleshooting

When breather element is inspected directly, hose is
broken or is found to be clogged with dirty oil
When oil filter is inspected directly, it is found to be clogged
When oil cooler is inspected directly, it is found to be clogged
Turbocharger oil drain tube is clogged
Excessive play of turbocharger shaft
When safety valve is directly inspected, spring is found to
be catching or broken
Remedy
PC130-7
20-617
(1)
S-10
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-10 Fuel consumption is excessive

General causes why fuel consumption is excessive
Leakage of fuel
Leakage of fuel inside head cover
Defective adjustment of fuel control linkage
Adjust
External leakage from fuel piping, fuel filter
Correct
Defective oil seal inside feed pump (piston)
Defective fuel injection timing
Adjust
Correct
Defective injection pump plunger
Replace
Correct
Defective nozzle holder spray
Replace
Causes
Adjust
Questions

Condition of fuel
consumption

More than for other machines of same
model
Gradually increased
Suddenly increased
Black
Exhaust smoke color
White
Check items
There is irregular combustion

When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting engine,
temperature of some cylinders is low
Match mark on injection pump is misaligned
There is external leakage of fuel from engine
Engine oil level rises and smells of diesel fuel
Engine low idling and high idling speeds are high
Injection pump measurement shows that injection amount is excessive
Troubleshooting

When control rack is pushed, it is found to be heavy, or does not return
When check is made using delivery method, injection timing is found
to be incorrect
Remove feed pump and inspect directly
When engine speed is measured, low idling and high idling speeds
are found to be high
Remedy
20-618
(1)
PC130-7
S-11
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-11 Oil is in cooling water, or water spurts

back, or water level goes down
General causes why oil is in cooling water
Internal leakage in lubrication system
Internal leakage in cooling system
Broken cylinder head, head gasket
Broken power train oil cooler
Holes caused by pitting
Internal cracks in cylinder block
Replace
Replace
Replace
Broken oil cooler core, O-ring
Replace
Causes
Replace
Questions

Oil level

Suddenly increased
Gradually increased
Hard water is being used as cooling water
Troubleshooting
Check items
Engine oil level has risen, oil is cloudy white

Excessive air bubbles inside radiator, spurts back
Hydraulic oil, transmission oil is cloudy white
When hydraulic oil, transmission oil is drained, water is
found
Pressure-tightness test of cylinder head shows there is leakage
Remedy
PC130-7
20-619
(1)
S-12
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-12 Oil pressure caution lamp lights up

(Drop in oil pressure)
General causes why oil pressure lamp lights up
Leakage, clogging, wear of lubricating system

Defective oil pressure control
Improper oil used (improper viscosity)
Deterioration of oil due to overheating
Causes
Defective relief valve
Leaking, crushed hydraulic piping
Defective oil pressure sensor
Defective oil level sensor
Adjust
Correct
Replace
Replace
Lack of oil in oil pan
Defective regulator valve
Adjust
Defective oil pump
Add
Broken suction pipe brazing
SAE15W-40CD
Replace
Clogged oil filter
SAE10W-30CD
Correct
SAE10WCD
Engine oil
Worn bearing, journal
SAE30CD
Clogged strainer inside oil pan
40C
Clogged oil pipe inside oil pan
-30
Selection of SAE No. according to

ambient temperature
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
Clean
Type of oil
Water, fuel in oil
a Standards for engine oil selection
Questions


Operation Manual
Caution lamp lights up
Lights up at low idling
Condition when oil
pressure lamp lights up
Lights up at low, high idling

Lights up on slopes
Check items
Sometimes lights up
There is crushing, leakage from hydraulic piping (external)
Oil level sensor lamp lights up
When oil level in oil pan is inspected, it is found to be low
Metal particles are stuck to oil filter element
Carry out troubleshooting

for Oil level rises.
Oil is cloudy white or smells of diesel oil

Oil pump rotation is heavy, there is play
There is catching of relief valve or regulator valve, spring or
valve guide is broken
When oil level sensor is replaced, oil level sensor lamp goes out
20-620
(1)
Clean
Remedy
Clean
When oil pressure is measured, it is found to be within

standard value
Clean
Troubleshooting
When oil filter is inspected, it is found to be clogged
PC130-7
S-13
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-13 Oil level rises (Water, fuel in oil)

a If there is oil in the cooling water, carry out troubleshooting for Oil is in cooling water.
General causes why oil level rises
Leakage of fuel from piping inside head cover
Defective thermostat
Holes made by pitting
Cracks inside cylinder block
Correct
Replace
Replace
Defective pump auxiliary equipment seal
Replace
Defective part inside injection pump
Worn, damaged rear seal surface
Correct
Replace
Replace
Correct
Broken oil cooler core, O-ring
Defective nozzle holder sleeve
Replace
Water in oil (milky white)

Fuel in oil (diluted, and smells of diesel fuel)
Entry of oil from other component
Replace
Causes
Questions

There is oil in radiator cooling water

Fuel must be added more frequently
Exhaust smoke is white
Check items
When engine is first started, drops of water come from

muffler
Leave radiator cap open. When engine is run at idling,
an abnormal number of bubbles appear, or water spurts back
Oil level goes down in clutch, TORQFLOW transmission,
or damper chamber
Oil level goes down in hydraulic tank
Engine oil smells of diesel fuel
Water temperature is low
Troubleshooting
Pressure-tightness test of cylinder head shows there is leakage

Inspect rear seal directly
When pump auxiliary equipment is removed, seal is found to
be damaged
Remove injection pump and inspect directly
Defective contact with thermostat seal valve
Remove oil pan and check directly
Remedy
PC130-7
20-621
(1)
S-14
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-14 Water temperature becomes too high

(Overheating)
General causes why water temperature becomes too
high
Lack of cooling air (deformation, damage of fan)
Drop in heat dissipation efficiency
Defective cooling circulation system
Rise in oil temperature in power train
Holes made by pitting
Replace
Replace
Replace
Rise in torque converter oil temperature
Clogged, broken oil cooler
Defective pressure valve
Replace
Lack of cooling water
Defective water temperature gauge
Replace
Fan belt slipping, worn fan pulley
Clogged radiator core
Defective thermostat (does not open)
Replace
Correct
Correct
Broken water pump
Clogged, crushed radiator fins
Replace
a Carry out troubleshooting for chassis.
Correct
Causes
Add
Questions

Condition of overheating

Suddenly overheated
Always tends to overheat
Water temperature
gauge
Rises quickly
Does not go down from red range
Radiator water level sensor lights up

Fan belt whines under sudden load
Cloudy white oil is floating on cooling water
Cooling water flows out from overflow hose
Check items
Excessive air bubbles inside radiator, water spurts back

Engine oil level has risen, oil is cloudy white
There is play when fan pulley is rotated
Radiator shroud, inside of underguard are clogged with dirt or mud
When light bulb is held behind radiator, no light passes through
Water is leaking because of cracks in hose or loose clamps
When belt tension is inspected, it is found to be loose
Power train oil temperature enters red range faster than
engine water temperature
Carry out troubleshooting for chassis.
Temperature difference between top and bottom radiator tanks

is excessive
Troubleshooting
Temperature difference between top and bottom radiator tanks

is slight
When water filler port is inspected, core is found to be clogged
When function test is carried out on thermostat, it does not
open even at cracking temperature
When water temperature is measured, it is found to be normal
When oil cooler is inspected directly, it is found to be clogged
When measurement is made with radiator cap tester, set
pressure is found to be low
Remedy
20-622
(1)
PC130-7
S-15
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-15 Abnormal noise is made

a Judge if the noise is an internal noise or an external
noise.
General causes why abnormal noise is made
Deformed fan, fan belt interference
Defective adjustment of valve clearance
Broken dynamic valve system (valve, rocker lever, etc.)
Improper gear train backlash
Leakage of air between turbocharger and cylinder head
Defect inside muffler (dividing board out of position)
Replace
Correct
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Replace
Replace
Missing, seized bushing
Clogged, seized injection nozzle
Replace
Excessive wear of piston ring, cylinder (liner less engine)
Replace
Abnormality due to defective parts

Abnormal combustion
Air sucked in from intake system
Replace
Causes
Questions

Condition of abnormal
noise
Gradually occurred
Suddenly occurred


Black
Metal particles are found in oil filter

Check items

Engine pickup is poor and combustion is abnormal
Abnormal noise is loud when accelerating engine
Leakage of air between turbocharger and cylinder head, loose clamp
Vibrating noise is heard from around muffler
Troubleshooting
Remove gear cover and inspect directly

Speed does not change when operation of certain cylinders is
stopped
When control rack is pushed, it is found to be heavy, or does
not return
Fan is deformed, belt is loose
When valve clearance is checked, it is found to be outside
standard value
Remove cylinder head cover and inspect directly
When muffler is removed, abnormal noise disappears
Remedy
PC130-7
20-623
(1)
S-16
TROUBLESHOOTING
S-16 Vibration is excessive

a If there is abnormal noise together with the vibration, carry out troubleshooting also for Abnormal
noise is made.
General causes why vibration is excessive
Improper gear train backlash
Defective dynamic valve system (valve, rocker lever, etc. stuck)
Defective injection pump (excessive fuel injection)
Correct
Replace
Adjust
Broken part inside output shaft (damper)
Center of engine and power train misaligned
Correct
Replace
Replace
Worn cam bushing
Loose engine mounting bolts, broken cushion
Replace
Worn connecting rod, main bearing
Defective parts (abnormal wear, breakage)

Improper alignment
Abnormal combustion
Replace
Causes
Questions

Condition of vibration

Suddenly increased
Gradually increased

Metal particles are found in oil filter
Check items
Oil pressure is low at low idling

Vibration occurs at mid-range speed
Vibration follows engine speed
Exhaust smoke is black
Troubleshooting
Remove side cover and inspect directly

Inspect directly for loose engine mounting bolts, broken cushion
Inspect inside of output shaft (damper) directly
When face runout and radial runout are inspected, they are
found to be incorrect
Remove front cover and inspect directly
Remedy
20-624
(1)
PC130-7
30 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL ................................................................................................................ 30- 2

PRECAUTIONS WHEN PERFORMING OPERATION .............................................................................. 30- 4
SPECIAL TOOL LIST ................................................................................................................................. 30- 6
SKETCH OF SPECIAL TOOL ................................................................................................................... 30- 9
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FUEL INJECTION PUMP ASSEMBLY .......................................... 30- 10
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY....................................................... 30- 13
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF RADIATOR ASSEMBLY ................................................................ 30- 18
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF AFTERCOOLER ASSEMBLY ........................................................ 30- 19
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF HYDRAULIC OIL COOLER ASSEMBLY ....................................... 30- 21
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF ENGINE AND HYDRAULIC PUMP ASSEMBLY ........................... 30- 23
EXPANSION AND INSTALLATION OF TRACK SHOE ASSEMBLY ........................................................ 30- 28
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SPROCKET .................................................................................... 30- 30
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY ............................................................. 30- 31
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF IDLER ASSEMBLY ....................................................................... 30- 32
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF RECOIL SPRING........................................................................... 30- 35
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF TRACK ROLLER ASSEMBLY ...................................................... 30- 39
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF CARRIER ROLLER ASSEMBLY .................................................. 30- 40
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SWING MOTOR AND SWING MACHINERY ASSEMBLY ............. 30- 41
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF SWING MOTOR AND SWING MACHINERY ASSEMBLY .......... 30- 42
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CENTER SWIVEL JOINT................................................................ 30- 48
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF CENTER SWIVEL JOINT ASSEMBLY ......................................... 30- 50
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF WORK EQUIPMENT ASSEMBLY ................................................... 30- 51
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF REVOLVING FRAME ..................................................................... 30- 54
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SWING CIRCLE ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 30- 56
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF HYDRAULIC TANK ASSEMBLY .................................................... 30- 57
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY ..................................................... 30- 60
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY ................................................... 30- 63
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF HYDRAULIC PUMP ASSEMBLY ................................................... 30- 65
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF HYDRAULIC PUMP INPUT SHAFT OIL SEAL .............................. 30- 68
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF HYDRAULIC CYLINDER ASSEMBLY ......................................... 30- 69
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF COUNTERWEIGHT ASSEMBLY ................................................... 30- 75
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF AIR CONDITIONER UNIT ASSEMBLY ......................................... 30- 76
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF OPERATOR'S CAB ........................................................................ 30- 79
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF OPERATOR'S CAB GLASS (STUCK GLASS) .............................. 30- 83
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FRONT WINDOW ASSEMBLY ...................................................... 30- 94
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF MONITOR PANEL ASSEMBLY ..................................................... 30-101
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY .......................................................... 30-102
PC130-7
30-1
(2)
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF ASSEMBLIES
SPECIAL TOOLS
INSTALLATION OF PARTS
Special tools that are deemed necessary for

removal or installation of parts are listed.
List of the special tools contains the following
kind of information
1) Necessity
t: Special tools which cannot be substituted, should always be used.
q: Speciall tools which are very useful if
available, can be substituted with commercially available tools.
2) Distinction of new and existing special tools.

N: Tools with new part numbers, newly
developed for this model.
R: Tools with upgraded part numbers,
remodeled from already available tools
for other models.
Blank: Tools already available for other models,
used without any modification.
3) Circle mark (Q) in sketch column.
A circle mark means that a sketch of the special tool is presented in the section of
Sketches for Special Tools.
a Part No. of special tools starting with 79*T
means that they are locally made parts and as
such not interchangeable with those made by
Komatsu in Japan e.g. 79*T------.
Except where otherwise instructed, install parts

is the reverse order of removal.
Instructions and precautions for installing part
are shown with [*1] mark in the INSTALLATION
Section, identifying which step the instructions
are intended for.
Marks shown in the INSTALLATION Section
stand for the following.
k
a
This mark indicates safety-related precautions, which must be followed when

doing the work.
This marks gives guidance or precautions when doing the procedure.
2 This mark stands for a specific coating

agent to be used.
3 This mark indicates the specified torque.
5
This mark indicates an amount of oil or

water to be added.
SKETCHES OF SPECIAL TOOLS
Various special tools are illustrated for the convenience of local manufacture.
REMOVAL OF PARTS
The REMOVAL Section contains procedures,

precautions and the amount of oil or water to be
drained.
Various symbols used in the REMOVAL Section
are explained and listed below.
k
a
[*1]

doing the work.
This mark gives guidance or precautions
when doing the procedure.
This mark shows that there are instructions or precautions for installing parts.
6 This mark shows oil or water be drained.
4 This mark shows the weight of a part or a

device.
30-2
(2)
PC130-7
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF ASSEMBLIES

SPECIAL TOOLS
Special tools which are deemed necessary for

disassembly and assembly are listed in this section.
List of the special tools contains the following
kind of information.
1) Necessity
t: Special tools which cannot be substituted, should always be used.
q: Speciall tools which are very useful if
available, can be substituted with commercially available tools.
2) Distinction of new and existing special tools.
N: Tools with new part numbers, newly
developed for this model.
R: Tools with upgraded part numbers,
remodeled from already available tools
for other models.
Blank: Tools already available for other models,
used without any modification.
3) Circle mark (Q) in sketch column.
A circle mark means that a sketch of the special tool is presented in the section of
Sketches for Special Tools.
4) Part No. of special tools starting with 79*T
means that they are locally made parts and
as such not interchangeable with those
made by Komatsu in Japan e.g. 79*T-----.
ASSEMBLY
Section titled ASSEMBLY contain procedures,

precautions and the know-how for the work, as
well as the amount of oil or water to be added.
Various symbols used in the ASSEMBLY Section
are explained and listed below.
k
a

doing the work.
This marks gives guidance or precautions when doing the procedure.
2 This mark stands for a specific coating

agent to be used.
3 This mark indicates the specified torque.
5
This mark indicates an amount of oil or

water to be added.
SKETCHES OF SPECIAL TOOLS

1) Vartious special tools are illustrated for the
convenience of local manufacture.
DISASSEMBLY
The DISASSEMBLY Section contains procedures, precautions and the amount of oil or water
to be drained.
Various symbols used in the DISASSEMBLY
Section are explained and listed below.
k
a
This mark indicates safety-related precautions which must be followed when doing
the work.
This mark gives guidance or precautions
when doing the procedure.
6 This mark shows oil or water to be

drained.
PC130-7
30-3
(2)
PRECAUTIONS WHEN PERFORMING OPERATION

Be sure to follow the general precautions given below when performing removal or installation (disassmbly or
assembly) of units.
1. Precautions when performing removal work
If the engine coolant water contains antifreeze, dispose of it correctly.
After disconnecting hoses or tubes, cover them or install blind plugs to prevent dirt or dust from entering.
When draining oil, prepare a container of adequate size to catch the oil.
Confirm the match marks showing the installation position, and make match marks in the necessary
places before removal to prevent any mistake when assembling.
To avoid loosening any wire contacts, do not pull on the wires. In-order to prevent excessive force to the
wiring, hold onto the connectors when disconnecting them.
Fasten tags to wires and hoses to identify and show their installation position and help to prevent any
mistakes when re-installing.
Count and check the number and thickness of the shims, and keep them in a safe place.
When raising or lifting components, be sure to use proper lifting equipment of ample strength and safety.
When using forcing screws to remove any components, tighten the forcing screws uniformly in turn.
Before removing any unit, clean the surrounding area and install a cover to prevent any dust or dirt from
entering after removal.
a Precautions when handling piping during disassembling
Fit the following blind plugs into the piping after disconnecting it during disassembly operations.
A.
Face seal type hoses and tubes

Nominal
number
02
03
04
05
06
B.
Plug (nut end)
Nut (elbow end)
07376-70210
07376-70315
07376-70422
07376-70522
07376-70628
02789-00210
02789-00315
02789-00422
02789-00522
02789-00628
Split flange type hoses and tubes

Nominal
number
04
05
Flange (hose end)
Sleeve head (tube end)
Split flange
07379-00400
07379-00500
07378-10400
07378-10500
07371-30400
07371-30500
C. If the part is not under hydraulic pressure, the following corks can be used.
30-4
(2)
Nominal
number
Part Number
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
27
07049-00608
07049-00811
07049-01012
07049-01215
07049-01418
07049-01620
07049-01822
07049-02025
07049-02228
07049-02430
07049-02734
Dimensions
D
d
L
6
5
8
8
6.5
11
10
8.5
12
12
10
15
14 11.5 18
16 13.5 20
18
15
22
20
17
25
22 18.5 28
24
20
30
27 22.5 34
PC130-7
2. Precautions when carrying out installation work

Tighten all bolts and nuts (sleeve nuts) to the specified (KES) torque.
Install the hoses without twisting or interference.
Replace all gaskets, O-rings, cotter pins, and lock plates with new parts.
Bend the cotter pins or lock plate securely.
When coating with adhesive, clean the part and remove all oil and grease, then coat the threaded portion with tow or three drops of adhesive.
When coating with gasket sealant, clean the surface and remove all oil and grease, check that there is
no dirt or damage, then coat uniformly with gasket sealant.
Clean all parts, and correct any damage, dents, burrs, or rust.
Coat rotating parts and sliding parts with engine oil.
When press fitting parts, coat the surface with anti-friction compound (LM-P).
After installing snap rings, check that the snap ring is installed securely in the ring groove.
When connecting wiring connectors, clean the connector to remove all oil, dirt, or water, then connect
securely.
When using eyebolts, check that there is no deformation or deterioration, screw them in fully, and align
the direction of the hook.
When tightening split flanges, tighten uniformly in turn to prevent excessive tightening on one side.
a When operating the hydraulic cylinders for the first time after reassembling cylinders, pumps and other
hydraulic equipment removed for repair, always bleed the air as follows:
1. Start the engine and run it at low idle.
2. Operate the work equipment control lever to operate the hydraulic cylinders, 4 5 times, stopping the
cylinder 100 mm from the end of their stroke.
3. Next, operate the hydraulic cylinder 3 4 times to the end of its stroke.
4. After doing this, run the engine at normal speed.
a When using the machine for the first time after repair or long storage, follow the same procedure.
3. Precautions when completing the operations
If the engine coolant water has been drained, tighten the drain valve, and add coolant water to the specified level. Run the engine to circulate the coolant water through the system. Then check the coolant
water level again.
If the hydraulic equipment has been removed and installed again, add engine oil to the specified level.
Run the engine to circulate the oil through the system. Then check the oil level again.
If the piping or hydraulic equipment have been removed for repair, Bleed the air from the system after
reassembling the parts.
a For details, see TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Bleeding air.
Add the specified amount of grease (molybdenum disulphide grease) to the work equipment parts.
PC130-7
30-5
(2)
SPECIAL TOOL LIST
SPECIAL TOOL LIST
Wrench
790-101-2501
Push puller
790-101-2510
Block
790-101-2520
Screw
791-112-1180
Nut
790-101-2540
Washer
790-101-2630
Leg
790-101-2570
Plate
790-101-2560
Nut
790-101-2650
Adapter
796-460-1210
Oil stopper
790-101-2501
Push puller KIT
790-101-2510
Block
790-101-2550
Leg
790-101-2560
Nut
790-101-2570
Plate
790-101-3101
Bearing puller
790-101-4200
Puller
796T-426-1140
Push tool
790-201-2680
Plate
1 790-201-2850
Spacer
2 790-201-2750
Spacer
Symbol
Removal and installation

of cylinder head assembly
Disassembly and assembly of center swivel joint

assembly

of engine and hydraulic
pump assembly
of hydraulic pump assembly
Disassembly and assembly of swing machinery

assembly
Part No.
Part Name
30-6
(2)
Sketch
Qty
790-331-1110
Work item
New/
Remodel
Necessity
a Tools with part number 79 Tcannot be supplied (they must be locally manufactured).
a Necessity:
t...........Cannot be substituted, should always be installed (used)
q...........Extremely useful if available, can be substituted with commercially available part.
a New/Remodel:N ...........Tools with new part numbers, newly developed for this model.
:R ...........Tools with upgraded part numbers, remodeled from items already available for other
models.
:Blank.....Tools already available for other models, used without any modification
a Tools marked
in the Sketch column are tools introduced in the sketches of the special tools (See
SKETCHES OF SPECIAL TOOLS).
Contents of work
Tightening of cylinder head
bolt
Disassembly of center swivel

joint assembly
Stopping of oil
Removal of bearing
Q
Press fitting of oil seal
Press fitting of bearing inner

race
PC130-7
4
Disassembly and assembly of swing machinery
assembly
Press fitting of bearing outer

race
Plate
For main bearing
790-101-5441
Plate
For sub bearing
790-101-5421
Grip
01010-51240
Bolt
790-201-2850
Spacer
790-201-2650
Plate
790-502-1003
Cylinder repair
stand
790-102-4300
Wrench assembly
790-102-4310
Pin
790-720-1000
Expander
796-720-1660
Ring
(For boom and arm)
Clamp
(For boom and arm)
Part Name
790-101-5401
Push tool KIT
790-101-5461
07281-01159
4
Disassembly and assembly of hydraulic cylinder

assembly
Ring (For bucket)
07281-01029
Clamp (For bucket)
790-201-1702
Push tool KIT
790-101-5021
Grip
01010-50816
Bolt
Disassembly and assembly of

hydraulic cylinder assembly
Removal and installation of
piston
Installation of piston ring
790-201-1811
790-201-1821
790-201-1791
Push tool
(For boom)
Push tool
(For arm)
Push tool
(For bucket)
Press fitting of cylinder head

bushing
1
1
790-201-1500
Push tool KIT
790-201-5021
Grip
01010-50818
Bolt
790-201-1620
Plate (For boom)
790-201-1630
Plate (For arm)
790-201-1610
Plate (For bucket)
791-600-2001
or
791-685-8006
Compressor
790-201-2780
Spacer
PC130-7
Contents of work
Removal of 2-piece collar
796-720-1650
Disassembly and assembly of recoil spring assembly
Sketch
Part No.
New/
Remodel
Qty
Symbol
Necessity
Work item
SPECIAL TOOL LIST
Installation of dust seal
Disassembly and assembly

of recoil spring assembly
30-7
(2)
Extension
790-101-1300
Cylinder
790-101-1102
Pump
790-201-1500
Push tool KIT
790-201-1590
Plate
790-101-5021
Grip
790-101-5021
Grip
01010-50816
Bolt
791-675-1510
Installer
790-434-1650
Installer
791-601-1000
Oil pump
Filling with oil
790-434-1660
Installer
Installation of floating seal
791-601-1000
Oil pump
Filling with oil
791-616-1040
or
791-620-7000
Remover and
installer
790-105-1100
Cylinder
790-101-1102
Pump
791-463-1141
Push tool
790-201-2740
Spacer
799-703-1200
Service KIT
799-703-1100
799-703-1120
Vacuum pump
(For 100 V)
Vacuum pump
(For 220 V)
Vacuum pump
(For 240 V)
799-703-1401
Gas leak detector
799-703-1300
Adapter (When
vacuum pump for
refrigerant R12 is
used)
792-785-1100
Remover
790-101-4000
Puller
790-101-1102
Pump
793-498-1210
Lifter (Suction cup)
20Y-54-13180
Adapter
Disassembly and assembly of recoil spring assembly
Disassembly and assembly of idler assembly
Disassembly and assembly of carrier roller assembly
Development and installation of track shoe assembly

of hydraulic pump input
shaft oil seal
799-703-1110
of air conditioner unit
assembly

of work equipment assembly

of operator's cab glass
(stuck glass)
30-8
(2)
Part Name
Contents of work
Disassembly and assembly

of recoil spring assembly
Disassembly and assembly of track roller assembly
Part No.
Sketch
Qty
791-635-3160
Symbol
New/
Remodel
Necessity
Work item
SPECIAL TOOL LIST
Installation of dust seal
Installation of floating seal
Removal and press fitting of

master pin
Press fitting of oil seal
Filling with air conditioner

refrigerant (gas)
Removal of boom foot pin
Fixing of window glass
PC130-7
SKETCH OF SPECIAL TOOL
SKETCH OF SPECIAL TOOL

NOTE: Komatsu cannot accept any responsibility for special tools manufactured according to these sketches.
F2 Push tool
PC130-7
30-9
(2)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

OF FUEL INJECTION PUMP
ASSEMBLY
FUEL INJECTION PUMP
4. Disconnect connector E05 (6) and remove clamp

(7).
5. Loosen bolts (8) and (9) and remove air conditioner compressor belt (10).
[*1]
REMOVAL
k Disconnect the cable from the negative () terminal of the battery.

1. Remove hood assembly (1).
4 Hood assembly: 30 kg
6. Remove bolts (8) and (9) and spacer (11).

Remove air conditioner compressor and bracket
assembly (12) and move them toward the counterweight.
a Do not separate the piping.
7. Remove heater hose (13).

2. Remove covers (2) (4).
8. Disconnect fuel hoses (14) and (15).

a Plug the hoses to prevent the fuel from leaking.
9. Remove fuel filter and bracket assembly (16).
3. Remove fan guard (5).
30-10
(2)
PC130-7
FUEL INJECTION PUMP
15. Remove lubrication tube (23).
10. Disconnect hose (17).

11. Remove tube (18).
12. Remove governor spring mounting nut (19).
16. Check that the fuel injection timing is normal.

Testing and adjusting fuel injection timing, Testing and adjusting by match mark method.
[*3]
13. Remove 4 fuel tubes (20).
[*2]
17. Remove 5 mounting bolts (24), (25), and (26),
rear mounting bracket, and fuel injection pump
assembly (27).
[*3]
a Remove the above parts together with holder
(28).
a After removing the above parts, remove bolt
(29) and fix drive gear (30) to holder (28) with
fixing bolt [1] to prevent a change of the fuel
injection timing.
a As fixing bolt [1], use a bolt 6 mm in diameter
and at least 35 mm in length.
14. Disconnect fuel hoses (21) and (22).

a Plug the hoses to prevent the fuel from leaking.
PC130-7
30-11
(2)
FUEL INJECTION PUMP
INSTALLATION
Bleeding Air
Carry out installation in the reverse order to

removal.
[*1]
[*2]
[*3]
Adjust the tension of the air conditioner compressor belt. For details, see TESTING AND
ADJUSTING, Testing and adjusting tension
of air conditioner compressor belt.
3 Fuel tube sleeve nut:

19.6 24.5 Nm {2 2.5 kgm}
k After installing the fuel injection pump assembly, remove fuel injection timing adjustment pin
(See TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Testing
and adjusting fuel injection timing) and fixing
bolt [1] without fail.
Bleed air from the fuel piping according to the following procedure.
1. Fill the fuel tank with fuel (up to the maximum rising position of the float).
2. Loosen eyebolt (31).
3. Remove cap (32). Loosen the feed pump knob
and move it up and down to let fuel flow out of
the mounting part of eyebolt (23) until bubbles do
not come out any more.
4. Tighten eyebolt (31).
5. Start the engine and check that fuel does not

leak from the fuel system.
a Adjust the governor lever stroke. For details, see
TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Special functions
of monitor panel, 5. Governor adjusting mechanism 03.
30-12
(2)
PC130-7
CYLINDER HEAD

OF CYLINDER HEAD
ASSEMBLY
4. Remove bracket (6) and covers (7) and (8).
Wrench
REMOVAL
Sketch
790-331-1110
New/Remodel
Part name
Q'ty
Part No.
Necessity
Symbol
SPECIAL TOOL
t 1
5. Remove fan guard (9) and hose (10).
[*1]

7. Disconnect connector E05 (12) and remove
clamp (13).
2. Drain the coolant.
6 Coolant: 13.4 l
PC130-7
[*2]
30-13
(2)
CYLINDER HEAD
10. Remove heater hose (19).

11. Remove fuel filter and bracket assembly (20)
and move it to a place where it will not be an
obstacle.
14. Remove air conditioner compressor bracket (26).

a Remove the connector on the underside
from the clamp.
15. Remove heat insulation plate (27).
16. Remove clamp (28).
[*4]
12. Remove hoses (21) and (22), tube (23), and terminal (24).
17. Remove cover (28a).
13. Remove fuel tube (25).
[*3]
18. Remove muffler drain tube (29).
a The muffler drain tube is fixed by the hydraulic pump assembly mounting bolts.
30-14
(2)
PC130-7
CYLINDER HEAD
25. Remove cooling fan (41).
19. Remove muffler and bracket assembly (30).
26. Remove hoses (42) and (43) and water pump

assembly (44).
[*9]
20. Remove air intake hose (31) and air intake connector (32) from the turbocharger.
[*5]
21. Remove exhaust outlet (33).
[*6]
27. Remove tube (45).
22. Remove cylinder head cover (34).
[*7]
28. Remove the 2 mounting bolts on the turbocharger side of tube (46) and the clamp mounting bolt.
29. Remove exhaust manifold and turbocharger
assembly (47).
[*10]
23. Remove alternator mounting bolts (35) and (36).

24. Loosen locknut (37), move alternator (39) with
adjustment nut (38), and remove fan belt (40).
[*8]
PC130-7
30-15
(2)
30. Loosen locknut (48), and then loosen adjustment

screw (49) by 2 3 turns.
[*11]
a Perform this work at all of the 8 places.
31. Remove 5 mounting bolts (50), 3 mounting nuts
(51), and rocker arm and shaft assembly (52).
[*12]
CYLINDER HEAD
INSTALLATION

removal.
[*1]
3 Hose clamp:
10.5 0.5 Nm {107 5 kgcm}
32. Remove 8 push rods (53).

[*2]
33. Remove the (17) mounting bolts and lift off cylinder head and air intake manifold assembly (54).
[*13]
4 Cylinder head and air intake manifold
assembly: 40 kg
a Adjust the belt tension. For details, see

TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Testing and
adjusting air conditioner compressor belt tension.
[*3]
3 Fuel tube sleeve nut:

19.6 24.5 Nm {2 2.5 kgm}
[*4]
3 Clamp mounting bolt:

1st time: 39.2 49 Nm {4 5 kgm}
2nd time: 68.6 122.5 Nm {7 12.5 kgm}
[*5]
3 Clamp of air intake hose (31):

8.8 0.5 Nm {0.9 0.05 kgm}
[*6]
3 Mounting nut:
27 34 Nm {2.8 3.5 kgm}
[*7]
3 Mounting bolt:
7.84 9.8 Nm {0.8 1.0 kgm}
[*8]
[*9]
a Adjust the belt tension. For details, see

TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Testing and
adjusting fan belt tension.
3 Hose clamp:
8.8 0.5 Nm {0.9 0.05 kgm}
[*10]
3 Mounting bolt:
34.3 53.9 Nm {3.5 5.5 kgm}
a If the turbocharger assembly was removed
from the exhaust manifold, tighten its nuts to
the following torque.
3 Mounting nut:
27 34 Nm {2.8 3.5 kgm}
30-16
(2)
PC130-7
CYLINDER HEAD
[*11]
a Adjust the valve clearance. For details, see
TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Adjusting valve
clearance.
[*12]
3 Mounting bolt and nut:

19.6 29.4 Nm {2 3 kgm}
[*13]
a Tighten all of the cylinder head mounting
bolts according to the following procedure.
a Numbers (1) (4) in the figure denote the following.
(1): Exhaust side (2): Intake side
(3): Front
(4): Rear
1) Clean the screw holes on the cylinder
block side.
2) Apply molybdenum disulfide grease (LMP) to the threads and end of each bolt
and the bottom of each cylinder head
hole.
3) Rotate the bolts with the hand in the
numeric order shown in the figure until
each of them catch 2 3 threads of the
screw hole of the cylinder head.
4) Tighten the bolts to the torque of 68.6
9.8 Nm {7 1 kgm} in the numeric order
shown in the figure.
5) Tighten the bolts to the torque of 107.8
4.9 Nm {11 0.5 kgm} in the numeric
order shown in the figure.
+ 30
6) Using tool A, tighten the bolts by 90 0
in the numeric order shown in the figure.
(Angle tightening)
a When not using tool A, make marks
with paint on the bolt heads and cylinder head, and then tighten the bolts
so that the mark of each of them will
be at the above angle to the mark of
the cylinder head.
7) After tightening each bolt, make a punch

mark on it.
a If there are 5 punch marks on a bolt,
do not use that bolt any more but
replace it.
a If the air intake manifold was removed,
apply a string of gasket sealant (LG-7)
1 mm in diameter to the rim of each air
intake port as shown in the following
figure.
a If the nozzle holder was removed,

tighten it to the following torque.
3 Mounting bolt:
39.2 49 Nm {4 5 kgm}
Refilling with coolant

Add coolant through the coolant filler to
the specified level. Run the engine to circulate the coolant through the system.
Then, check the coolant level again.
5 Coolant: 13.4 l
PC130-7
Bleeding air
Bleed air from the fuel circuit. For details,
see Removal and installation of fuel injection pump assembly.
30-17
(2)
RADIATOR

OF RADIATOR ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
1. Remove the undercover and drain the coolant.
6 Coolant: 13.4 l
2. Disconnect hoses (1) and (2) and remove plate

(3).
[*1]
6. Remove the 2 mounting bolts and lift off radiator

assembly (9).
a You can remove the radiator assembly with
your hands.
a Take care not to damage the radiator core.
4 Radiator assembly: 8 kg
INSTALLATION
[*1]
4. Disconnect hoses (5) and (6).
[*2]

removal.
a Tighten the clamp of hose (1) with the bolt
right down.
3 Clamp of hose (2):
8.8 0.5 Nm {0.9 0.05 kgm}
5. Remove plates (7) and (8).

[*2]
3 Clamp of hose (5):

8.8 0.5 Nm {0.9 0.05 kgm}

a Add coolant through the coolant filler to the specified level. Run the engine to circulate the coolant through the system. Then, check the coolant
level again.
5 Coolant: 13.4 l
30-18
(2)
PC130-7
AFTERCOOLER

OF AFTERCOOLER
ASSEMBLY
3. Remove the 3 mounting bolts of connector (3).

4. Loosen the 4 mounting nuts of clips (4).
[*2]
REMOVAL
[*1]
5. Remove the undercover and disconnect hose

(5).
[*3]
6. Remove the mounting bolts of plate (6) and
move the plate toward the rear of the machine.
PC130-7
30-19
(2)
AFTERCOOLER
[*4]
INSTALLATION

removal.
[*1]
3 Hose clamp:
8.8 0.5 Nm {0.9 0.05 kgm}
[*2]
3 Mounting nut:
10.8 26.5 Nm {1.1 2.7 kgm}
[*3]
9. Remove the 2 mounting bolts and lift off aftercooler assembly (10).
a You can remove the aftercooler assembly
with your hands.
a Take care not to damage the aftercooler
core.
4 Aftercooler assembly: 7 kg
30-20
(2)
a Tighten the hose clamp with the bolt right

down.
3 Hose clamp:
10.5 0.5 Nm {107 5 kgcm}
[*4]
3 Hose clamp:
10.5 0.5 Nm {107 5 kgcm}
PC130-7

OF HYDRAULIC OIL COOLER
ASSEMBLY
HYDRAULIC OIL COOLER
4. Remove 4 nuts (5).
REMOVAL
5. Remove 2 bolts (6), 2 nuts (7), and 2 bolts (8)

and (9).
6. Remove tube mounting bolts (10) under the

hydraulic oil cooler.
3. Loosen plug (4) of the pipe on the side of the

hydraulic oil cooler and drain the hydraulic oil
from the hydraulic oil cooler and piping.
a Before draining the oil, open the hydraulic
tank cap to release the pressure in the tank.
PC130-7
30-21
(2)
7. Lift off hydraulic oil cooler assembly (11).

a Take care not to damage the hydraulic oil
cooler core.
a You can remove the hydraulic oil cooler
assembly with your hands.
4 Hydraulic oil cooler assembly: 6 kg
30-22
(2)
HYDRAULIC OIL COOLER
INSTALLATION

removal.
Refilling with oil

a Add oil through the oil filler to the specified level.
Run the engine to circulate the oil through the
system. Then, check the oil level again.
PC130-7
ENGINE AND HYDRAULIC PUMP

OF ENGINE AND HYDRAULIC
PUMP ASSEMBLY
Oil stopper
Sketch
796-460-1210
New/Remodel
Part name
Q'ty
Part No.
Necessity
Symbol
SPECIAL TOOL
t 1
REMOVAL

stop the engine. Then, loosen the hydraulic oil
filler cap slowly to release the internal pressure
of the hydraulic tank.
a Put tags to the disconnected hoses to prevent a
mistake in re-connecting them.
6 Coolant: 13.4 l
2. Remove the hydraulic tank strainer. Using tool

D, stop the oil.
a When not using tool D, remove the drain plug
and drain the oil from the hydraulic tank. [*1]
6 Hydraulic tank: 90 l
6. Remove bracket (6) and covers (7), (8), and (8a).
3. Close the fuel stop valve.
PC130-7
30-23
(2)
7. Remove fan guard (9) and hose (10).
[*2]
8. Disconnect hose (10a).
[*3]
13. Disconnect wiring harness connectors E11 (19)

and E10 (20) from the left rear of the engine and
remove the wiring harness clamp.
14. Disconnect terminal (21) and remove the wiring

harness clamp.
10. Disconnect connector E05 (12) and remove

clamp (13).
[*4]
15. Disconnect hose (22) from the engine and

remove the clamp above the engine and clamp
(23).
17. Disconnect terminal (25) from the starting motor.
30-24
(2)
PC130-7
18. Remove hose clamps (26) and (27) from the left
front of the engine.
23. Disconnect wiring harness connectors E08 (37)

and T92 (38) from the revolving frame at the right
lower part of the engine and remove clamp (39).
19. Disconnect the ground wire from the left front

engine mount bracket.
24. Remove cooling fan (40).

20. Disconnect hoses (28), (29), and (30).
a Put plugs to stop the fuel.
21. Remove the 2 mounting bolts of connector (31)
and disconnect hose (32) from the engine. [*5]
25. Remove cover (40a) and frame (40b).
22. Remove clamp (33) from the left lower part of the
engine and disconnect wiring harness connectors E03 (34), T91 (35), and T13 (36).
PC130-7
30-25
(2)
26. Disconnect hoses (41) (45).
32. Disconnect wiring harness connector E04 (56)

from the right rear of the engine.

33. Remove 4 engine mounting bolts (57).
28. Disconnect wiring harness connectors A61 (47),

V22 (48), and V21 (49) and remove clamps (50)
and (51).
29. Remove bracket (52).
30. Remove the mounting bolt of connector (53).
a Prepare a pan to receive the oil.
[*6]
34. Lift off engine and hydraulic pump assembly

(58).
a Check that all the wires and pipes are disconnected.
4 Engine and hydraulic pump assembly:

470 kg
31. Remove 2 bolts (54) and move engine oil filter

and bracket assembly (55) toward the engine.
30-26
(2)
PC130-7
INSTALLATION
[*1]

removal.
3 Hydraulic tank drain plug:
58.6 78.5 Nm {5.97 8.0 kgm}
(Target: 68.6 Nm {7 kgm})
[*2]
3 Hose clamp:
10.5 0.5 Nm {107 5 kgcm}
[*3]
3 Hose clamp:
8.8 0.5 Nm {0.9 0.05 kgm}
[*4]
Refilling with oil (Hydraulic tank)

Bleeding air
a Bleed air. For details, see TESTING AND
ADJUSTING, Bleeding air from each part.
a Install the air conditioner compressor belt.

Testing and adjusting air conditioner compressor belt.
[*5]
3 Hose clamp:
8.8 0.5 Nm {0.9 0.05 kgm}
[*6]
3 Engine mount mounting bolt:

245 309 Nm {25 31.5 kgm}
(Target: 279.6 Nm {28.5 kgm})
a If the engine mount bracket was removed
from the engine, tighten it to the following
torque.
3 Mount bracket mounting bolt on front side
of engine:
58.9 73.6 Nm {6.0 7.5 kgm}
(Target: 65.7 Nm {6.7 kgm})
3 Mount bracket mounting bolt on rear side

of engine:
98.1 122.6 Nm {10.0 12.5 kgm}
(Target: 112.8 Nm {11.5 kgm})

a Add coolant through the coolant filler to the specified level. Run the engine to circulate the coolant through the system. Then, check the coolant
level again.
5 Coolant: 13.4 l
PC130-7
30-27
(2)
TRACK SHOE
EXPANSION AND
INSTALLATION OF TRACK
SHOE ASSEMBLY
3. Using tool M, pull out master pin (2).
[*2]
Remover and
installer
790-101-1300
Cylinder
790-101-1102
Pump
Part name
Sketch
Q'ty
791-616-1040
or
791-620-7000
Part No.
New/Remodel
Necessity
Symbol
SPECIAL TOOLS
4. Remove tool M and move the machine forward

so that temporary pin [1] will be in front of the
idler, then set block [2].
EXPANSION
1. Stop the machine so that the master pin will be
between the idler and carrier roller and the track
shoe can be expanded in the forward and backward directions.
5. Pull out temporary pin [1] and remove the dust

seal. Move the machine in reverse to expand
track shoe (3).
[*3]
2. Lower the work equipment to the ground and

loosen lubricator (1) to slacken the track shoe.
[*1]
k Since the internal pressure of the adjustment cylinder is very high, do not loosen
the lubricator more than 1 turn. If the
grease does not come out sufficiently, move
the machine forward and in reverse.
30-28
(2)
PC130-7
TRACK SHOE
INSTALLATION
[*1]
[*2]
[*3]

removal.
a Adjust the tension of the track shoe. For
detail, see TESTING AND ADJUSTING,
Inspection and adjustment of track shoe tension.
a Using tool M, press fit the master pin so that
its projection a will be as follows.
Dimension a: 5.5 2 mm
a When fitting the dust seal, apply grease (G2LI) to its contact face against the bushing.
a Install the track shoe assembly as shown in
the following figure. (The arrow indicates the
front of the machine.)
PC130-7
30-29
(2)

OF SPROCKET
SPROCKET
INSTALLATION

removal.
[*1]
2 Threads of sprocket mounting bolt:

Adhesive (LT-2)
3 Sprocket mounting bolt:
323.6 362.8 Nm {33 37 kgm}
REMOVAL
1. Expand the track shoe assembly. For details,
see EXPANSION OF TRACK SHOE ASSEMBLY.
2. Swing the work equipment by 90 and push up
the machine with it, and then set blocks [1]
between the track frame and track shoe.
3. Remove the 15 mounting bolts and lift off
sprocket (1).
[*1]
a Pass a bar, etc. through a bolt hole of the
sprocket to sling.
4 Sprocket: 40 kg
30-30
(2)
PC130-7

OF FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
1. Remove the sprocket, refer to the removing
sprocket section in this manual.
FINAL DRIVE
4. Remove the 20 mounting bolts from final drive

assembly (6) and lift if off to remove.
[*1]
a Be careful. Do not damage the face of the fitting seal at the base of the hose.
a When lifting off the final drive assembly, do
not use a tapped hole for lifting the cover.
4 Final drive assembly: 150kg
k Lower the work equipment to the ground for

safety. Stop the engine and loosen the oil filler
cap on the hydraulic tank to release pressure
inside.
2. Remove cover (1).
INSTALLATION
Install in reverse order to removal.
[*1]
3 Final drive assembly mounting bolt:

245.2 308.9 Nm {25 31.5 kgm}
Reflling hydraulic oil

Refill hydraulic oil through the oil filler port to the
specified level, and left the oil circulate in the
hydraulic system by starting the engine.
Then check the oil level again.
3. Disconnect four travel motor hoses (2), (3), (4)

and (5).
AJS01012.jpg
PC130-7
Bleeding air
30-31
(2)
IDLER
DISASSEMBLY AND
ASSEMBLY OF IDLER
ASSEMBLY
4. Remove floating seal (6) on the opposite side

from idler (4) and shaft (5) and support (7)
assembly.
L 1 791-675-1510
Installer
Sketch
New/Remodel
Part name
Q'ty
Part No.
Necessity
Symbol
SPECIAL TOOL
DISASSEMBLY
5. Remove dowel pin (8), and then remove support
(7) from shaft (5).
6. Remove bushings (9) and (10) from idler (4).
1. Remove dowel pin (1) and support (2).

2. Remove floating seal (3) from support (2) and
idler (4).
3. Remove idler (4) from shaft (5) and support (7)
assembly.
a About 90 cc of oil is in these parts. Drain it at
this time or spread cloths to absorb it.
30-32
(2)
PC130-7
ASSEMBLY
1. Press fit bushings (9) and (10) to idler (4).
2. Fit the O-ring and install support (7) to shaft (5)

with dowel pin (8).
IDLER
4. Install shaft (5) and support (7) assembly to idler

(4).
5. Fill the space between shaft (5) and idler (4) with
90 cc of oil.
5 Idler: 90 cc (EO-30CD)
3. Using tool L1, install floating seal (6) to idler (4)

and shaft (5) and support (7) assembly.
a Thoroughly degrease and dry the O-ring and

the contact surfaces of the floating seal
before installing. Take care that the contact
surfaces of the floating seal will be free from
dirt.
a After installing the floating seal, check that its
slant is less than 1 mm.
PC130-7
30-33
(2)
6. Using tool L1, install floating seal (3) to idler (4)

and support (2).
a For the precautions for installing the floating
seal, see step 3.
30-34
(2)
IDLER
7. Fit the O-ring and install support (2) with dowel

pin (1).
PC130-7
RECOIL SPRING
DISASSEMBLY AND
ASSEMBLY OF RECOIL
SPRING
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove lock plate (1), seat (2), and valve (3).
2. Piston assembly
Remove piston assembly (5) from recoil spring
assembly (4).
Compressor
790-201-2780
Spacer
791-635-3160
Extension
790-101-1300
Cylinder
790-101-1102
Pump
790-201-1500
Push tool kit
Part name
790-201-1590
Plate
790-101-5021
Grip
01010-50816
Bolt
Sketch
791-600-2001
or
791-685-8006
Part No.
New/Remodel
Q'ty
Necessity
Symbol
SPECIAL TOOLS
PC130-7
30-35
(2)
RECOIL SPRING
3. Disassembly of recoil spring assembly

1) Set tool J1 to recoil spring assembly (4).
k Since the installed load of the spring is

heavy and dangerous, set the spring
securely.
a Installed load of spring:
84,340 N {8,600 kg}
2) Apply hydraulic pressure gradually to compress the spring, and then remove nut (6).
a Compress the spring until the nut is loosened.
a Release the hydraulic pressure gradually
to lower the spring tension perfectly.
a Free length of spring: 501.4 mm
3) Remove pilot (8), cylinder (9), and dust seal
(10) from spring (7).
4. Disassembly of piston assembly
1) Remove wear ring (12) from piston (11).
2) Remove snap ring (13) and U-packing (14).
30-36
(2)
PC130-7
RECOIL SPRING
ASSEMBLY
1. Assembly of piston assembly

1) Install U-packing (14) to piston (11) and
secure it with snap ring (13).
2) Install wear ring (12).
2. Assembly of recoil spring assembly
1) Using tool J2, install dust seal (10) to cylinder (9).
3) Apply hydraulic pressure gradually to compress the spring and tighten nut (6) the
installed length of the spring is a.
a Installed length a of spring: 390 mm
2) Install cylinder (9) and pilot (8) to spring (7),

and then set them to tool J1.
2 Sliding parts of cylinder:
Grease (G2-LI)
PC130-7
30-37
(2)
RECOIL SPRING
4) Remove recoil spring assembly (1) from tool

D1.
3. Piston assembly
Install piston assembly (5) to recoil spring
assembly (4).
2 Sliding parts of piston: Grease (G2-LI)
2 Wear ring: Grease (G2-LI)

a Install the piston assembly so that the valve
wil l b e i ns ta ll ed o n th e o utsi de of the
machine.
a Pour at least 120 cc of grease (G2-LI) in the
cylinder and bleed air, and then check that
grease comes out of the grease hole.
30-38
(2)
PC130-7
TRACK ROLLER
DISASSEMBLY AND
ASSEMBLY OF TRACK
ROLLER ASSEMBLY
Installer
4 791-601-1000
Oil pump
Part name
Sketch
2 790-434-1650
Part No.
New/Remodel
Q'ty
Necessity
Symbol
SPECIAL TOOLS
DISASSEMBLY
a Referring to the following drawing, disassemble
the track roller assembly.
ASSEMBLY
a Referring to the following drawing, assemble the
track roller assembly.
a In this section, only precautions for assembling
the track roller assembly are explained. For
items which are not explained below, see the
assembly procedure for the idler assembly.
a Using tool L4, fill the track roller assembly with

oil, and then tighten plug (11).
5 Track roller: 75 85 cc (EO30-CD)
a Tighten the mounting bolts of the track roller

assembly to the following torque.
2 Mounting bolt: Adhesive (LT-2)
3 Mounting bolt:
245.2 308.9 Nm {25 31.5 kgm}
a Using tool L2, install the floating seals.

a Thoroughly degrease and dry the O-ring and
contact surfaces of the floating seals (5) and (6)
(hatched parts) before installing. Take care that
the contact surfaces of the floating seal will be
free from dirt.
a After installing the floating seal, check that its
slant is less than 1 mm and its projection a is 5
7 mm.
PC130-7
30-39
(2)
CARRIER ROLLER
DISASSEMBLY AND
ASSEMBLY OF CARRIER
ROLLER ASSEMBLY
790-434-1660
Installer
791-601-1000
Oil pump
Part name
Sketch
Part No.
New/Remodel
Q'ty
Necessity
Symbol
SPECIAL TOOLS
DISASSEMBLY
a Referring to the following drawing, disassemble
the carrier roller assembly.
ASSEMBLY
a Referring to the following drawing, assemble the
carrier roller assembly.
a In this section, only precautions for assembling
the carrier roller assembly are explained. For
items which are not explained below, see the
assembly procedure for the idler assembly and
track roller assembly.
a Using tool L3, install the floating seals.

a Thoroughly degrease and dry the O-rings and
contact surfaces of the floating seals (6) and (7)
(hatched parts) before installing. Take care that
the contact surfaces of the floating seal will be
free from dirt.
a After installing each floating seal, check that its
slant is less than 1 mm.
a Using tool L4, fill the carrier roller assembly with
oil, and then tighten plug (8).
5 Carrier roller: 68 76 cc (EO30-CD)
30-40
(2)
PC130-7
SWING MOTOR AND SWING MACHINERY

OF SWING MOTOR AND
SWING MACHINERY
ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
k Release the residual pressure in the hydraulic

circuit.
For details, see TESTING AND
ADJUSTING, Releasing residual pressure in
hydraulic circuit.
k Lower the work equipment to the ground in a
stable posture and set the lock lever in the
LOCK position.
2. Remove 14 mounting bolts (6).
INSTALLATION

removal.
[*1]
3 Mounting bolt:
245 308.7 Nm {25 31.5 kgm}

Bleeding air
a Bleed air from the circuit. For details, see TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Bleeding air from each
part.
[*1]
3. Using forcing screw [1], lift off swing motor and

swing machinery assembly (7).
a Take care that the assembly will not interfere
with the hoses, etc. around it.
4 Swing motor and swing machinery assembly: 110 kg
PC130-7
30-41
(2)
790-101-2501
Push puller kit
1
1
790-101-2550 Leg
1 790-101-2560 Nut
790-101-2570 Plate
790-101-3101
Bearing puller
790-101-4200
Puller
796T-426-1140 Push tool
790-201-2680
Plate
Spacer
Spacer
Push tool kit
F 1 790-201-2850
3
2 790-201-2750
790-101-5401
Plate
790-101-5461 (For main bearing)
4
790-101-5441 Plate
(For sub bearing)
1
1
01010-51240
Bolt
790-201-2850
Spacer
790-201-2650
Plate
DISASSEMBLY
1. Draining oil
Loosen drain plug and drain oil from swing
machinery.
6 Swing machinery case : Approx. 2.5 l
30-42
(2)
3. No. 1 carrier, No. 2 sun gear assembly

1) Remove No. 1 sun gear (2).
2) Remove No. 1 carrier and No. 2 sun gear
assembly (3).
790-101-5421 Grip
Sketch
790-101-2510 Block
New/Remodel
Part name
4 Swing motor assembly : 30 kg
Q'ty
Part No.
2. Swing motor
Remove swing motor assembly (1).
Necessity
Symbol
DISASSEMBLY AND
ASSEMBLY OF SWING
MOTOR AND SWING
MACHINERY ASSEMBLY
3) Disassemble No. 1 carrier and No. 2 sun

gear assembly (3) as follows.
i) Remove snap ring (4), then remove
thrust washer (5), gear (6), bearing (7),
and thrust washer (8).
PC130-7
ii) Knock in pin (9) and knock out shaft (10).

a After removing the shaft, remove pin
(9).
iii) Remove snap ring (11), then remove No.
2 sun gear (12) from carrier (13).
3) Disassemble No. 2 carrier assembly as follows.

i) Push in pin (17), and knock out shaft (18)
from carrier (19).
a After removing the shaft, remove pin
(17).
ii) Remove thrust washer (20), gear (21),
bearing (22), and thrust washer (23).
4. Ring gear
Remove ring gear (14).
5. No. 2 carrier assembly
1) Remove spacer (15).
2) Remove No. 2 carrier assembly (16).
PC130-7
6. Retainer, collar
1) Remove retainer (24).
2) Set shaft and case assembly to press, push
split collar (25) with push tool F5, and press
fit bearing (26).
a Operate the press slowly, and press fit
the bearing to a position where it is possible to remove the split collar.
3) Remove split collar (25).
30-43
(2)
7. Shaft assembly
1) Set block [2] to shaft and case assembly
(27), then using push tool [3], remove shaft
assembly (28) with press .
2) Remove bearing (26).
2) Using puller [5], remove bearing outer races

(34) and (35) from case (33).
3) Using push tool F1, remove bearing (29) and

collar (30) from shaft (31).
8. Oil seal, bearing outer race

1) Remove oil seal (32) from case (33).
30-44
(2)
PC130-7
ASSEMBLY
a Clean all parts, and check for dirt or damage.
Coat the sliding surfaces of all parts with engine
oil before installing.
1. Bearing outer races
Using push tool F4, press fit outer races (34) and
(35) to case (33).
4) Using push tool F3-2, press fit bearing (26) to

a position where it is possible to insert split
collar.
a Press-fitting force : 11.8 kN {1,200 kg}
a Rotate the case and gradually press fit
the bearing.
5) Install split collars (25).

2. Shaft assembly
1) Fit O-ring to inside of collar (30) and install to
shaft (31).
2) Using push tool F3-1, press fit bearing (29)
with press.
6) Screw bolt (Thread dia.=12mm, Pitch=1.75mm)

into case, then using push- pull scale [8], measure tangential force in direction of rotation.
a Tangential force : Max. 176.5 N {18 kg}
a The tangential force is the maximum force
when starting rotation.
3) Set case assembly (36) to shaft assembly

(28).
PC130-7
30-45
(2)
3. Oil seal
Using push tool F2, press fit oil seal (32).
a Replace the oil seal with a new part.
iii) Align position of pin holes of shaft and

carrier, then tap with plastic hammer to
install shaft (18).
a When installing the shaft, rotate the
planetary gear, and be careful not to
damage the thrust washers.
iv) Insert pin (17).
a After inserting the pin, caulk the pin
portion of the carrier.
2 Lip of oil seal : Grease (G2-LI)
2 Periphery of oil seal:

Gasket sealant (LG-6)
a Take care that the gasket sealant will not
stick to the oil seal lip and shaft.
4. Retainer
Install retainer (24).
5. No. 2 carrier assembly

1) Assemble No. 2 carrier assembly as follows.
i) Assemble bearing (22) to gear (21).
ii) Fit top and bottom thrust washers (20)
and (23), then set gear assembly to carrier (19).
30-46
(2)
2) Install No. 2 carrier assembly (16) to shaft

and case assembly.
3) Install spacer (15).
6. Ring gear
Assemble O-ring (37) to shaft and case assembly, and install ring gear (14).
PC130-7
7. No. 1 carrier, No. 2 sun gear assembly

1) Assemble No. 1 carrier and No. 2 sun gear
assembly as follows.
i) Assemble No. 1 carrier (13) to No. 2 sun
gear (12), and install snap ring (11).
ii) Align position of pin holes of shaft and
carrier, then tap with a plastic hammer to
install shaft (10).
iii) Insert pin (9).
a After inserting the pin, caulk the pin
portion of the carrier .
a Check that the stepped difference a
between the shaft and carrier is less
than 0.2 mm.
2) Install No. 1 carrier and No. 2 sun gear

assembly (3).
3) Install No. 1 sun gear (2).
8. Swing motor assembly

Install swing motor assembly (1).
3 Mounting bolt :
110.3 12.3 Nm {11.25 1.25 kgm}
iv) Assemble thrust washer (8), bearing (7),

gear (6), and thrust washer (5), then
install snap ring (4).
9. Refilling with oil

Tighten the drain plug and add engine oil through
oil filler.
5 Swing machinery case : Approx. 2.5 l
PC130-7
30-47
(2)

OF CENTER SWIVEL JOINT
CENTER SWIVEL JOINT
REMOVAL
k Release the residual pressure in the hydraulic circuit. For details, see TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Releasing residual pressure in hydraulic
circuit.
1. Remove pin (1) and move bar (2).
5. Remove elbow (18).

6. Sling the center swivel joint assembly temporarily.
8. Lift off center swivel joint assembly (20).
4 Center swivel joint assembly: 35 kg
3. Remove undercovers (10a) and (10b).
30-48
(2)
PC130-7
CENTER SWIVEL JOINT
INSTALLATION

removal.

Bleeding air
a Bleed air from the circuit. For details, see TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Bleeding air from each
part.
PC130-7
30-49
(2)
CENTER SWIVEL JOINT
790-101-2501
Push puller
790-101-2510 Block
790-101-2520 Screw
791-112-1180 Nut
790-101-2540 Washer
790-101-2630 Leg
790-101-2570 Plate
790-101-2560 Nut
790-101-2650 Adapter
4. Remove O-ring (6) and slipper seal (7) from the

swivel rotor.
Sketch
New/Remodel
Part name
Q'ty
Part No.
Necessity
Symbol
DISASSEMBLY AND
ASSEMBLY OF CENTER
SWIVEL JOINT ASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
1. Fit slipper seal (7) and O-ring (6) to the swivel
rotor.
2. Set swivel shaft (5) to a block. Using the push
tool, hit swivel rotor (4) lightly with a plastic hammer to install the swivel shaft.
2 Contact surfaces of rotor and shaft:

Grease (G2-LI)
a When installing the rotor, take care extremely
not to damage the slipper seal and O-ring.
3. Install ring (3) and secure it with snap ring (2).

3 Mounting bolt:
31.3 2.9 Nm {3.2 0.3 kgm}
4. Fit the O-ring and install cover (1).

2. Remove snap ring (2).
3. Using tool C, pull swivel rotor (4) and ring (3) out
of swivel shaft (5).
30-50
(2)
PC130-7
WORK EQUIPMENT

OF WORK EQUIPMENT
ASSEMBLY
792-785-1100
R
Remover
Puller
790-101-4000 (490 kN {50t} long) t
Pump
790-101-1102
t
(294 kN {30t})
Sketch
New/Remodel
Part name
Q'ty
Part No.
Necessity
Symbol
SPECIAL TOOLS
1
1
REMOVAL
k Except the arm and bucket fully. Lower the

work equipment to the ground and set the lock
lever to the lock position.
k Release the residual pressure in the hydraulic
circuit. For details, see TESTING AND
ADJUSTING, Release of residual pressure from
hydraulic circuit.
1. Disconnect grease hose (1).
4. Start the engine and retract the piston rod.

a Fasten the piston rod with wire so that it will
not slip out and lower the cylinder onto a
stand, or place a support under the bottom of
the cylinder to support it. In the latter case,
remove the grease fitting on the bottom side
first.
a Remove the bottom cylinder on the other
side in the same manner.
5. Disconnect hoses (6) to (9).
a Put tags to the disconnected hoses and
tubes to prevent a mistake in re-connecting
them.
a Put an oil stopper plug to each hose connecting part and bind the hose with ropes, etc. so
that it will not be an obstacle to the work.
6. Disconnect wiring harness connector A42 (10).
2. Sling boom cylinder assembly (2), and remove

lock bolt (3).
3. Remove plate (4), then remove head pin (5). [*1]
a There are shims installed, so check the number and thickness, and keep them in a safe
plate.
PC130-7
30-51
(2)
7. Sling the work equipment assembly and remove

plate (11) and foot pin (12).
[*2]
WORK EQUIPMENT
INSTALLATION
[*1]

removal.
a Tighten the locknut so that clearance a
between the plate and nut will be 0.5 1.5
mm.
When removing with tool R

Remove plate (11). Using tool R, remove
foot pin (12).
a Check the quantity and positions of the
inserted shims.
2 Greasing inside of bushing before assembling pin:
Molybdenum disulfide grease (LM-P)
2 Greasing after assembling pin:

k When aligning the pin holes, never insert

your finger in the pin holes.
a Adjust clearance a between cylinder rod (14)
and plate (4) to below 1.0 mm with a shim.
Standard shim thickness: 1.0 mm
8. Lift off work equipment assembly (13).
4 Work equipment assembly: 2,700 kg
[*2]
2 Greasing inside of bushing before assembling pin:

2 Greasing after assembling pin:

30-52
(2)
PC130-7
WORK EQUIPMENT
k When aligning the position of the pin hole,

never insert your fingers into the pin hole.
a Adjust clearance a between boom (15) and
frame (16) with shim so that it will be less
than 0.5 mm.
Thickness of standard shims:
0.5, 1.0, and 2.0 mm.

Bleeding air
PC130-7
30-53
(2)
REVOLVING FRAME

OF REVOLVING FRAME
REMOVAL
1. Remove the work equipment assembly. For
details, see Removal and installation of work
equipment assembly.
2. Remove the counterweight assembly.
For
details, see Removal and installation of counterweight assembly.
3. Disconnect hoses (1) (11)
a Put tags to the disconnected hoses to prevent a mistake in re-connecting them.
7. Remove pin (16) from the center swivel joint and

move bar (17).
4. Remove block (12).

5. Sling boom cylinder assembly (13) temporarily.
6. Remove plate (14) and pin (15), and then lift off
boom cylinder assembly (13).
[*1]
a Remove opposite boom cylinder assembly
as same procedure.
4 Boom cylinder assembly: 100 kg
9. Sling the revolving frame assembly temporarily.

a If the revolving frame assembly interferes
with the sling, move or remove the sling.
10. Remove the 34 mounting bolts and lift off revolving frame assembly (22).
[*2]
30-54
(2)
PC130-7
a Leaving 2 3 mounting bolts at the front and

rear parts, adjust the balance of the revolving
frame in each direction with lever blocks, etc.
Then, remove those mounting bolts.
k When removing the revolving frame assembly, take care that it will not interfere with the
center swivel joint.
REVOLVING FRAME
INSTALLATION
[*1]
4 Revolving frame assembly: 2,800 kg
[*2]

removal.
a Adjust clearance a between boom cylinder
(13) and frame (23) to below 1 mm with
shims.
Set shim thickness: 1.0, 2.0 mm
2 Mating face of swing circle:

2 Mounting bolt threads of revolving frame:
Adhesive (LT-2)
3 Mounting bolt of revolving frame:

245 308.9 Nm {25 31.5 kgm}
Target: 279.3 Nm {28.5 kgm}
Bleeding air
PC130-7
30-55
(2)
SWING CIRCLE

OF SWING CIRCLE ASSEMBLY
INSTALLATION

removal.
[*1]
2 Mounting bolt threads of swing circle:

Adhesive (LT-2)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the revolving frame assembly. For
details, see Removal and installation of revolving
frame assembly.
3 Mounting bolt of swing circle:

245 308.9 Nm {25 31.5 kgm}
Target: 279.3 Nm {28.5 kgm}
[*1]
[*2]
a Set soft zone a (marked with S) of the inner

race on the side of the machine (outer race
soft zone b). (The arrow indicates the front
of the machine.)
2 Quantity of grease for circle:

Grease (G2-LI), 9.1 l
3. Lift off swing circle assembly (2).
4 Swing circle assembly: 160 kg
30-56
(2)
[*2]
PC130-7
HYDRAULIC TANK

OF HYDRAULIC TANK
ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
1. Drain the oil from the hydraulic tank.
[*1]
6. Remove frames (11) (13).
3. Remove covers (2) and (3).

PC130-7
30-57
(2)
HYDRAULIC TANK
8. Remove clamps (22) and (23).
15. Remove the 4 mounting bolts and hydraulic tank

assembly (31).
[*3]
4 Hydraulic tank assembly: 100 kg

10. Remove water separator and bracket assembly
(25) and move it toward the engine.

12. Disconnect wiring harness connector A61 (27)
and remove clamp (28).
13. Remove the mounting bolt of connector (29) and
disconnect hose (30).
[*2]
14. Sling the hydraulic tank assembly temporarily.
30-58
(2)
PC130-7
HYDRAULIC TANK
INSTALLATION
[*1]
[*2]

removal.
58.8 78.5 Nm {6 8 kgm}
Target: 68.6 Nm {7 kgm}
a When tightening the hose clamp screws, set
them 180 apart from each other laterally (in
the horizontal direction).
3 Hose clamp: 90 5 Nm {8.8 0.5 kgm}
[*3]
3 Mounting bolt:
245 309 Nm {25.0 31.5 kgm}
Bleeding air
PC130-7
30-59
(2)
CONTROL VALVE

OF CONTROL VALVE
ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL

k Set the lock lever in the LOCK position.
The control valve described below is a 7-spool
valve (6-spool valve + service valve) to which no
attachments are connected.
1. Open the engine hood and remove cover (1).
2. Disconnect the following hoses in front of the

control valve.
(1): Attachment 1
(2): Attachment 1
(3): Bucket cylinder (Head side)
(4): Bucket cylinder (Bottom side)
(5): Arm cylinder (Head side)
(6): Arm cylinder (Bottom side)
(7): Hydraulic tank
(8): Boom cylinder (Bottom side)
(9): Boom cylinder (Head side)

(10): Right travel motor
(11): Right travel motor
(12): Left travel motor
(13): Left travel motor
(14): Swing motor
(15): Swing motor
(16): Hydraulic tank
30-60
(2)
PC130-7
3. Disconnect the following hoses and wiring connectors on the left side of the control valve.
(17): Service 1 PPC valve
(18): Bucket CURL PPC/EPC valve
(Hose band: White)
(19): Arm IN PPC/EPC valve
(Hose band: Blue)
(20): Boom RAISE PPC/EPC valve
(Hose band: Brown)
(21): Right travel FORWARD PPC valve
(Hose band: Green)
(22): Left travel REVERSE PPC valve
(23): Swing RIGHT PPC valve
(24): Swing motor
(25): Oil cooler
PC130-7
CONTROL VALVE
4. Disconnect the following hoses and wiring connectors on the right side of the control valve.
(26): Pump pressure sensor connector A51
(27): Service 1 PPC valve
(28): Bucket DUMP PPC/EPC valve
(Hose band: Black)
(29): Arm OUT PPC/EPC valve
(Hose band: Yellow)
(Hose band: Green)
(31): Right travel REVERSE PPC valve
(Hose band: Blue)
(32): Left travel FORWARD PPC valve
(Hose band: Red)
(33): Swing LEFT PPC/EPC valve
(Hose band: Red)
(34): Hydraulic tank
(35): 2-stage relief solenoid valve
30-61
(2)
5. Disconnect the following hoses at the rear of the

control valve.
(36): LS valve
(37): Hydraulic pump
(38): Swing holding brake solenoid valve
(39): Swing holding brake solenoid valve
(41): Hydraulic pump
CONTROL VALVE
INSTALLATION

removal.

Bleeding air
6. Remove the 4 mounting bolts and lift off control

valve assembly (42).
4 Control valve assembly: 120 kg
30-62
(2)
PC130-7
CONTROL VALVE
DISASSEMBLY AND
ASSEMBLY OF CONTROL
VALVE ASSEMBLY
a In this section, only the precautions for assembling the control valve assembly are described.
a For the tightening torque of the control valve
parts which are not shown in the following sectional view and explanation, see STRUCTURE
AND OPERATION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD, "Hydraulic equipment", "Control valve".
ASSEMBLY
a When tightening bolt (1) and plug (2) shown in

the figure, apply a drop (approx. 0.02 g) of LOCTITE (No. 638) to their threads.
a Apply LOCTITE to plug (2) as shown in the figure
at right.
Dimension a = 2 3 mm
3 Bolt (1): 11.8 14.7 Nm {1.2 1.5 kgm}

3 Plug (2): 14.7 19.6 Nm {1.5 2 kgm}
PC130-7
30-63
(2)
CONTROL VALVE
a Tighten the 4 combination nuts on the top of the

control valve in the following numerical order in 3
times.
a The arrow in the figure indicates the front of the
machine.
3 Combination nut:
1st time: 58.8 68.8 Nm {6 7 kgm}
2nd time: 78.5 88.3 Nm {8 9 kgm}
3rd time: 98.1 113 Nm {10 11.5 kgm}
30-64
(2)
PC130-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP

OF HYDRAULIC PUMP
ASSEMBLY
Oil stopper
Sketch
796-460-1210
New/Remodel
Part name
Q'ty
Part No.
Necessity
Symbol
SPECIAL TOOLS
REMOVAL

4. Remove covers (2) (4) and frame (5).

5. Remove bracket (6) and cover (7).
[*2]
1. Remove the hydraulic tank strainer. Using tool

D, stop oil from flowing out.
a When not using tool D, remove the drain plug
and drain oil from the hydraulic tank.
[*1]
2. Drain oil from the damper case.

6 Damper case: 0.75 l
PC130-7
30-65
(2)
7. Remove muffler drain tube (9).

a The muffler drain tube is fixed with the
mounting bolts of the hydraulic pump assembly.
HYDRAULIC PUMP
13. Sling the hydraulic pump assembly temporarily.

14. Remove governor motor bracket mounting bolts
(22) and (23) and fix the bracket to the engine
with ropes.
8. Remove muffler and bracket assembly (10).
15. Lift off hydraulic pump assembly (24).

4 Hydraulic pump assembly: 85 kg
[*3]
11. Disconnect wiring harness connectors A61 (17),

V22 (18), and V21 (19) and remove clamp (20).
12. Remove the mounting bolt of connector (21).
a Prepare a pan to receive the oil.
30-66
(2)
PC130-7
HYDRAULIC PUMP
INSTALLATION

removal.
[*1]

58.5 78.5 Nm {5.97 8.0 kgm}
(Target: 68.6 Nm {7 kgm})
[*2]
3 Clamp mounting bolt:

1st time: 39.2 49 Nm {4 5 kgm}
2nd time: 68.6 122.5 Nm {7 12.5 kgm}
[*3]
2 Hydraulic pump shaft spline:

Molybdenum disulfide grease (LM-G)
2 Mating face of hydraulic pump case:
Refilling with oil (Damper case)

5 Damper case: 0.75 l

5 Hydraulic tank: 90l
Bleeding air
PC130-7
30-67
(2)
HYDRAULIC PUMP INPUT SHAFT OIL SEAL
[*1]
Necessity
Q'ty
791-463-1141
Push tool
790-201-2740
Spacer
Part No.
Part name
Sketch
SPECIAL TOOLS
New/Remodel
INSTALLATION
Symbol

OF HYDRAULIC PUMP INPUT
SHAFT OIL SEAL

removal.
a Using tool N, press fit oil seal (3).
2 Lip and periphery of oil seal:

Grease (G2-LI)
a Apply grease thinly to the periphery of the oil
seal.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the hydraulic pump assembly. For
details, see REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF
HYDRAULIC PUMP ASSEMBLY.
2. Remove snap ring (1) and spacer (2).
3. Pry off oil seal (3) with a screwdriver, etc.
[*1]
a Take extreme care not to damage the shaft.
30-68
(2)
PC130-7
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
DISASSEMBLY AND
ASSEMBLY OF HYDRAULIC
CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
Cylinder repair stand t
790-102-4300
Wrench assembly t
790-102-4310
Pin
Expander
3 790-720-1000
796-720-1660
4 07281-01159
Part name
Ring
(for boom and
q
bucket)
Clamp
(for boom and
q
bucket)
q
07281-01029
Clamp (for bucket) q
790-201-1702
Push tool kit
790-101-5021 Grip
01010-50816
1
1
790-201-1821 Push tool (for arm)
790-201-1791 Push tool

(for bucket)
790-201-1500
Ring (for bucket)
5 790-201-1811 Push tool

(for boom)
Push tool kit
790-201-5021 Grip
01010-50818
Bolt
4) Set piston rod assembly (2) to tool H1.
796-720-1650
Bolt
Sketch
Q'ty
1 790-502-1003
Part No.
New/Remodel
Necessity
Symbol
SPECIAL TOOLS
790-201-1620 Plate (for boom)
790-201-1630 Plate (for arm)
790-201-1610 Plate (for bucket)
5) Remove piston assembly lock screw (3).

a If the screw is so caulked that you cannot
remove it, tighten it temporarily and cut
the threads on it, and then remove it.
DISASSEMBLY
a The following explanation is common to the
boom, arm, and bucket cylinders, unless otherwise specified.
1. Piston rod assembly
1) Remove the piping from the cylinder assembly.
2) Remove the mounting bolts and cylinder
head assembly (1).
3) Pull out piston rod assembly (2).
a Put a container under the cylinder to
receive oil.
PC130-7
30-69
(2)
6) Using tool H2, remove piston assembly (4).
7) Remove plunger (5) and collar (6).

a Perform this work for only the boom and
arm cylinders.
8) Remove cylinder head assembly (7).
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
2. Disassembly of piston assembly

1) Remove rings (11), wear rings (12), and piston ring (13).
2) Remove the O-ring and backup rings (14).
3. Disassembly of cylinder head assembly

1) Remove the O-ring and backup ring (15).
2) Remove snap ring (16) and dust seal (17).
3) Remove rod packing (18), buffer ring (19),
and bushing (20).
9) Remove cap (8), 11 balls (9), and plunger

(10).
a Take care not to lose the balls.
a Perform this work for only the arm cylinder.
30-70
(2)
PC130-7
ASSEMBLY
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
2) Using tool H4, install piston ring (13).
a The following explanation is common to the

boom, arm, and bucket cylinders, unless otherwise specified.
a Take care not to damage the packings, dust
seals, O-rings, etc.
a Clean the all parts. After installing them, cover
the piping ports and pin holes to prevent dirt from
entering.
a Do not insert each backup ring forcibly, but warm
it in water at 50 60 C and then insert it.
1. Assembly of cylinder head assembly
1) Using tool H5, press fit bushing (20).
2) Install buffer ring (19) and rod packing (18).
3) Using tool H6, install dust seal (17) and
secure it with snap ring (16).
4) Install backup ring (15) and O-ring.
3) Install backup rings (14) and O-ring.

4) Install wear rings (12).
5) Install rings (11).
a Do not increase the closed gap of the
ring too much.
2 Ring groove: Grease (G2-LI)
3. Piston rod assembly

1) Set piston rod assembly (2) to tool H1.
2. Assembly of piston assembly

1) Set piston ring (13) to tool H3 and turn the
handle 8 10 times to expand the piston
ring.
PC130-7
30-71
(2)
2) Install cylinder head assembly (7).

3) Fit the O-ring and backup ring to collar (6),
and then install them.
arm cylinders.
4) Install plunger (5).
arm cylinders.
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
6) Tighten piston assembly (4). Then, using

tool H2, tighten piston assembly (4) until the
screw holes are aligned.
a Remove the burrs from the threads with
a file.
7) Tighten screw (3).
5) Set plunger (10) to the piston rod. Install 11

balls (9) and secure them with cap (8).
a After installing the plunger, check that it
has a little play at its end.
a Perform this work for only the arm cylinder.
2 Threads of screw:
Adhesive (LOCTITE No. 262)
3 Screw:
58.9 73.6 Nm {6 7.5 kgm}

8) Caulk threaded part a by 4 places with a
punch.
When reusing the rod and piston assembly, assemble them according to the following procedure.
a Clean the parts thoroughly and remove
metal chips, dirt, etc.
30-72
(2)
PC130-7
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
When replacing either or both of the rod and piston assembly (2), assemble the new parts
a Make a mark of the cushion plug position on the
end of the rod having the bottom cushion. (Perform this work for only the arm cylinder.)
9) Using tool H2, tighten piston assembly (4)
until it reaches end b of the rod.
3 Piston assembly:
294 29.4 Nm {30 3.0 kgm}
a After tightening the piston, check that
plunger (5) has some play.
arm cylinders.
10) Make a screw hole to install screw (3).

a Apply a drill to the V-groove of the
threaded parts of piston (4) and rod (2)
and make a hole.
a When making a hole on the cylinder having the bottom cushion, make it around
the cushion plug. (Perform this work for
only the arm cylinder.)
Dimensions of screw hole (mm)
Tap drill
diameter
Tap drill hole

depth
Tap to be
used
Tapping
depth
10.3
27
12 x 1.75
20
12) Tighten screw (3).
2 Threads of screw:
Adhesive (LOCTITE No. 262)
3 Screw:
58.9 73.6 Nm {6 7.5 kgm}

13) Caulk the threaded part by 4 places with a
punch.
14) Install piston rod assembly (2).

a Set the abutment joint of the ring at a
side and insert the piston rod, aligning it
with the cylinder tube.
a After inserting the piston rod, check that
the ring is not broken or removed, and
then insert to the end.
11) After making the hole, remove all metal chips

and dirt.
PC130-7
30-73
(2)
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
15) Tighten the mounting bolts of cylinder head

assembly (1).
3 Mounting bolt:
Arm cylinder:
270 39.0 Nm {27.5 4.0 kgm}
Boom/Bucket cylinder:
172 24.5 Nm {17.5 2.5 kgm}
16) Install the piping.

a Tighten the bolts to install the piping
band to the cylinder to the following
torque.
3 27.4 6.9 Nm {2.8 0.7 kgm}
30-74
(2)
PC130-7
COUNTERWEIGHT

OF COUNTERWEIGHT
ASSEMBLY
INSTALLATION
REMOVAL
[*1]
1. Sling the counterweight assembly temporarily.

4 Counterweight assembly: 2,500 kg
PC130-7
2 Threads of mounting bolt:

Adhesive (LT-2)
3 Mounting bolt:
1,177 1,470 Nm {120 150 kgm}
Target: 1,324 Nm {135 kgm}
[*1]
[*2]
3. Lift off counterweight assembly (2).

removal.
a Adjust the clearance between the counterweight and revolving frame and the clearance between the counterweight and outside
door to 10 5 mm on right and left sides.
[*2]
30-75
(2)
AIR CONDITIONER UNIT

OF AIR CONDITIONER UNIT
ASSEMBLY
a When removing box (2), disconnect hoses (4)

and (5).
799-703-1120
Vacuum pump
(100 V)
Vacuum pump
(220 V)
Vacuum pump
(240 V)
799-703-1401
Gas leak detector
799-703-1300
Adapter (When
vacuum pump for
refrigerant R12 is
used)
799-703-1200
799-703-1100
799-703-1110
Q
Part name
Sketch
Q'ty
Service tool kit
Part No.
New/Remodel
Necessity
Symbol
SPECIAL TOOLS
a When removing box (3), disconnect wiring harness connector M79 (6).
REMOVAL

6 Coolant: 13.4 l
2. Discharge the refrigerant (gas) from the air conditioner circuit.

[*1]
3. Remove the operator's seat.
4. Remove cover (1) and boxes (2) and (3).
30-76
(2)
PC130-7
9. Disconnect wiring harness connectors M33 (15)

and M27 (16) and remove them from the
bracket.
a Remove the mounting bolts of bracket (17),
and then hold the clip on the back side of the
bracket and remove the connectors.
7. Disconnect ducts (11) and (12) from the air conditioner unit.
10. Remove duct (18).

11. Disconnect hoses (19) and (20) and remove air
conditioner unit assembly (21).
[*2]
a When removing the air conditioner unit
assembly, disconnect the 2 hoses from its
lower side.
8. Remove ducts (13) and (14).
PC130-7
30-77
(2)
INSTALLATION

removal.
a When installing the hoses of the air conditioner

circuit, take care that dirt, dust, water, etc. will not
enter them.
a When installing each air conditioner hose, check
that the O-ring is fitted to it.
a Check each O-ring for flaw and deterioration.
[*1]
Charging with air conditioner refrigerant
a Using tool Q, charge the air conditioner circuit with air conditioner refrigerant (R134a).
[*2]
a When connecting each refrigerant pipe,

apply compressor oil (ND-OIL8) to its
threads and use a double spanner to tighten
it.
3 Hose threads M16 x 1.5 (Width across

flats: 19):
12 15 Nm {1.2 1.5 kgm}
Hose threads M22 x 1.5 (Width across
flats: 24):
20 25 Nm {2.0 2.5 kgm}
Hose threads M24 x 1.5 (Width across
flats: 27):
30 35 Nm {3.0 3.5 kgm}
M6 bolt of receiver (Width across flats:
10):
4 7 Nm {0.4 0.7 kgm}
M6 bolt of compressor pipe (Width
across flats: 10):
8 12 Nm {0.8 1.2 kgm}
30-78
(2)
PC130-7

OF OPERATOR'S CAB
OPERATOR'S CAB
5. Remove cover (5) and boxes (6) and (7).
REMOVAL

1. Remove floor mat (1).
a When removing box (6), disconnect hoses

(8) and (9).
2. Remove the operator's seat assembly.

3. Remove the monitor panel assembly. For details,
see Removal and installation of monitor panel
assembly.
4. Remove covers (3) and (4).
a When removing cover (3), disconnect wiring
harness connector M19 on its back side.
PC130-7
a When removing box (7), disconnect wiring

harness connector M79 (10).
30-79
(2)
OPERATOR'S CAB
10. Remove ducts (17) and (18).
11. Return the right lever stand removed in step 9.

12. Disconnect wiring harness connectors M71 (19),
H10 (20), H11 (21), and H12 (22).
8. Disconnect wiring harness connector W04 (15).

9. Remove the 4 mounting bolts of right lever stand
(16) and move the lever stand to the left side in
the operator's cab.
30-80
(2)
13. Remove duct (23).
PC130-7
14. Remove bracket (24) and duct (25).
15. Disconnect wiring harness connectors M72 (26),

H08 (27), H09 (28), and M31 (29).
OPERATOR'S CAB
18. Remove cover (32) under the front of the operator's cab.
19. Disconnect windshield washer hose (33).
16. Remove bracket (30) and move it toward the air

conditioner unit.
20. Sling operator's cab assembly temporarily.
17. Remove the 5 mounting bolts of controller bracket

(31) and move the bracket toward the air conditioner unit.
PC130-7
21. Remove 5 mounting bolts (34) and 4 mounting

nuts (35).
a Check the bolt length.
30-81
(2)
22. Lift off operator's cab assembly (36).
4 Operator's cab assembly: 280 kg
30-82
(2)
OPERATOR'S CAB
INSTALLATION

removal.
PC130-7
OPERATOR'S CAB GLASS
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF OPERATOR'S CAB GLASS

(STUCK GLASS)
Among the panes of window glass on the 4 sides

of the operator's cab, 4 panes (1) (4) are stuck.
In this section, the procedure for replacing the
stuck glass is explained.
When replacing front window glass (4), remove
front window assembly (5). (It is impossible to
replace only the front window glass while the
front window assembly is installed to the operator's cab.)
For the procedure for replacing the front window
assembly, see REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
OF FRONT WINDOW ASSEMBLY.
PC130-7
(1) :
(2) :
(3) :
(4) :
(5) :
Right side window glass

Left side rear window glass
Door lower window glass
Front window glass
Front window assembly
(Front window glass + Front frame)
(6) : Both-sided adhesive tape
(16): Center trim seal
30-83
(2)
793-498-1210
Lifter (Suction cup) t
20Y-54-13180
Adapter
Part name
Sketch
Part No.
New/Remodel
Q'ty
(The figure shows the operator's cab of a

wheel loader.)
Necessity
Symbol
SPECIAL TOOLS
REMOVAL
*
Remove the window glass to be replaced

1. Using seal cutter [1], cut the adhesive between

broken window glass (7) and operator's cab
(metal sheet) (8).
a If the window glass is broken finely, it may be

removed with knife [4] and a screwdriver.
a Widening the cut with a screwdriver, cut the
adhesive and both-sided adhesive tape with
knife [4].
wheel loader.)
a If a seal cutter is not available, make holes

on the adhesive and both-sided adhesive
tape with a drill and pass a fine wire (piano
wire, etc.) [2] through the holes. Grip the
both ends of the wire with priors [3], etc. (or
hold them by winding them onto something)
and move the wire to the right and left to cut
the adhesive and both-sided adhesive tape.
Since the wire may be broken by the frictional heat, apply lubricant to it.
30-84
(2)
2. Remove the window glass.
PC130-7
INSTALLATION
1. Using a knife and scraper [5], remove the
remaining adhesive and both-sided adhesive
tape from the metal sheets (glass sticking surfaces) of the operator's cab.
a Remove the adhesive and both-sided adhesive tape to a degree that they will not affect
adhesion of the new adhesive. Take care not
to scratch the painted surfaces. (If the
painted surfaces are scratched, adhesion will
be lowered.)
(The figure shows the operator's cab of a wheel

loader.)

wheel loader.)
2. Remove oil, dust, dirt, etc. from the sticking surfaces of cab (8) and window glass (9) with white
gasoline.
a If the sticking surfaces are not cleaned well,
the glass may not be stuck perfectly.
a Clean the all black part on the back side of
the window glass.
a After cleaning the sticking surfaces, leave
them for at least 5 minutes to dry.
PC130-7
3. Apply primer (10).

a The using limit of primer (10) is 4 months
after the date of manufacture. Do not use
primer (10) after this limit.
a Use the primer within 2 hours after unpacking it.
a Even if the primer is packed again just after it
is unpacked, use it within 24 hours after it is
unpacked for the first time. (Discard the
primer 24 hours after it is packed.)
1) Stir the primers for paint and glass sufficiently before using them.
a If the primer has been stored in a refrigerator, leave it at the room temperature
for at least half a day before stirring it. (If
the primer is unpacked just after taken
out of the refrigerator, water will be condensed. Accordingly, leave the primer at
the room temperature for a sufficient
time.)
2) When reusing primer brush (11), wash it in
white gasoline.
a After washing the brush, check it again
for dirt and foreign matter.
a Prepare respective brushes for the paint
primer glass primer.
30-85
(2)
3) Evenly apply paint primer to the surfaces to

stick both-sided adhesive tapes and the surfaces out of those surfaces on operator's cab
(8) which will be coated with the adhesive.
2 Paint primer:
SUNSTAR PAINT PRIMER 580
SUPER or equivalent
a Do not apply the primer more than 2
times. (If it is applied more than 2 times,
its performance will be lowered.)
a In addition to the above parts, apply the

primer to right side window glass (1) and
door lower window glass (3).
Range to apply primer additionally for right

side window glass (1): (b)
Range to apply primer additionally for door

lower window glass (3): (c)
a After applying the primer, leave it for at least
5 minutes (within 8 hours) to dry.
a Parts to be coated with primer: Apply the

primer all over dimension (a).
Dimension to apply primer (a): 25 mm
a Never apply wrong primer. If the glass primer

is applied by mistake, wipe it off with white
gasoline.
30-86
(2)
PC130-7
4) Evenly apply glass primer to the sticking surfaces of window glass (9).
2 Glass primer:
SUNSTAR GLASS PRIMER 580
SUPER or equivalent
a Do not apply the primer more than 2
times. (If it is applied more than 2 times,
its performance will be lowered.)
a Parts to be coated with primer: Apply the

primer to the sticking surfaces of window
glass (9) and all over dimension (d)
which will be on both-sided adhesive
tape (6) and operator's cab (8).
a Do not apply the primer to the boarder
about 5 mm wide between the black part
and transparent part of the glass.
a After applying the primer, leave it for at
least 5 minutes (within 8 hours) to dry.
a Never apply wrong primer. If the glass
primer is applied by mistake, wipe it off
with white gasoline.
PC130-7
4. Stick both-sided adhesive tape (6) along the

inside edge of the glass sticking section.
a Do not remove the release tape of the bothsided adhesive tape on the glass sticking
side before sticking the glass.
a When sticking the both-sided adhesive tape,
do not touch the cleaned surface as long as
possible.
a Take that the both-sided adhesive tape will
not float at each corner of the window frame.
a When sticking both-sided adhesive tape (6)

around a frame, do not lap its finishing end
over the starting end but make clearance e of
about 5 mm between them.
1) Stick both-sided adhesive tape (6) for right
side window glass (1) as shown in the figure.
30-87
(2)
a Stick both-sided adhesive tape (6a) additionally for right side window glass (1).
Positions to stick additional both-sided
adhesive tape for right side window
glass:
(f) : 50 mm
(g) : 90 mm
(h) : 250 mm
2) Stick both-sided adhesive tape (6) for left

side rear window glass (2) as shown in the
figure.
30-88
(2)
3) Stick both-sided adhesive tape (6) for door

lower window glass (3) as shown in the figure.
a Stick both-sided adhesive tape (6b) additionally for door lower window glass (3).
a Positions to stick additional both-sided
adhesive tape for door lower window
glass:
(j) : 110 mm
(k) : 90 mm
(m) : 200 mm
PC130-7
4) Stick both-sided adhesive tape (6) for front

window glass (4) as shown in the figure.
a Stick both-sided adhesive tape (6c) of

the lower side of the front window glass
along the outside edge of the lower line,
differently from other both-sided adhesive tapes (6). (If it is stuck along the
inside, it will be seen through the transparent part of the glass.)
PC130-7
5. Position the new window glass.

1) Check the clearance between the window
glass and the operator's cab on the right, left,
upper, and lower sides, and then adjust it
evenly.
2) Stick tapes [6] between window glass (9) and
operator's cab (8) and draw positioning line
n.
a Stick tapes [6] to the right, left, and lower
parts of the right side window glass, left
side rear window glass, and door lower
window glass for accurate positioning.
3) Cut the tape between window glass (9) and
operator's cab (8) with a knife, and then
remove the window glass.
a Do not remove the tapes left on the window glass and operator's cab before
installing the window glass.
30-89
(2)
a When positioning front window glass (4),

set its horizontal position to the frame
width and set its vertical position so that
height difference (p) between it and the
frame top will be 3 mm.
6. Apply adhesive.
a Use either of the 2 types of the adhesive.
a
a
a
a
1)
2 Adhesive (Summer):
SUNSTAR PENGUINE SEAL 580
SUPER "S"
2 Adhesive (Winter):
SUPER "W"
The using limit of the adhesive is 4 months
after the date of manufacture. Do not use the
adhesive after this limit.
Keep the adhesive in a dark place where the
temperature is below 25C.
Never heat the adhesive higher than 30C.
When reusing the adhesive, remove the all
hardened part from the nozzle tip.
Break aluminum seal (13) of the outlet of
adhesive cartridge (12) and install the nozzle.
30-90
(2)
2) Cut the tip of the adhesive nozzle (14) so

that dimensions (q) and (r) will be as follows.
Dimension (q): 10 mm
Dimension (r): 15 mm
3) Set adhesive cartridge (12) to caulking gun

[7].
a An electric caulking gun is more efficient.
4) Remove the release tape of the both-sided

adhesive tape on the glass side.
PC130-7
5) Apply adhesive (15) to the outside of bothsided adhesive tape (6) of the operator's cab.
a Apply adhesive (15) additionally for additional both-sided adhesive tape (6a) of
the right side window glass and additional both-sided adhesive tape (6b) of
door lower window glass.
a Apply adhesive (15) to dimensions (s)

and (t) of both-sided adhesive tape (6) of
operator's cab (8).
Dimension (s): 10 mm
Dimension (t): 15 mm
a Apply adhesive (15) higher than bothsided adhesive tape (6).
a Apply the adhesive evenly.
AJF00822
PC130-7
30-91
(2)
7. Install the window glass.

1) Install window glass (9), matching it to the
lines of the positioning tapes drawn in step 5.
a Since the window glass cannot be
removed and stuck again, stick it very
carefully.
a Stick the glass within 5 minutes after
applying the adhesive.
2) After sticking window glass (9), press all
around it until it is stuck to the both-sided
adhesive tape.
a Press the corners of the window glass
firmly.
a After installing front window glass (4), fill

the clearances between it and center trim
seal (16) with caulking material in range
(s) to dimensions (t) and (u).
After applying the primer to glass (4) of
section A A, apply adhesive as caulking material.
Caulking dimension (t): 2 mm
Caulking dimension (u): 5 mm
a When caulking, mask the glass side and
form the adhesive with a rubber spatula
as shown in the figure.
a Wipe off projected adhesive.
2 Glass primer:
SUNSTAR GLASS PRIMER 580
SUPER
2 Adhesive:
SUPER "S" or "W"
a You can perform this work efficiently by

pulling window glass (9) from inside of
the operator's cab with suction cup X1.
30-92
(2)
PC130-7
8. Fix the window glass.

1) After installing right window glass (1) to the
operator's cab, insert stopper rubbers X2 to 2
places (v) at the bottom of the glass to fix the
glass.
9. After installing the window glass, remove the

primer and adhesive from the operator's cab and
window glass.
a Using white gasoline, wipe off the adhesive
before it is dried up.
a When cleaning the glass, do not give an
impact to it.
10. Protect the stuck window glass.
1) Keep the stopper rubbers, styrene foam
blocks, and rubber bands installed for 10
hours (at temperature of 20C and humidity
of 60%).
2) After removing the stopper rubbers, styrene
foam blocks, and rubber bands, wait at least
14 hours, at least 24 hours in total, before
operating the machine actually.
2) Using styrene foam blocks [9] and rubber

bands [10], fix the window glass and bothsided adhesive tape to fit them completely.
PC130-7
30-93
(2)

OF FRONT WINDOW
ASSEMBLY

stop the engine.
To replace the front window glass, the front window assembly must be removed from the operator's cab. The procedure for removing and
installing the front window assembly (front frame
and front window glass) is explained below.
FRONT WINDOW
5. Release the rear locks.

6. Lower the front window assembly carefully a little. Put out rollers (8) and (9) under the both
sides of the front window through the portion
from which the corner blocks were removed in
step 3 (the portion where the rail is open) and
hold them.
7. Remove rollers (8) and (9) under the both sides
of the front window.
REMOVAL
1. Raise the front window assembly to the ceiling
and fix it with the rear locks (on both sides).
2. Remove left corner blocks (1) and (2) and right
corner block (3).
[*1]
3. Remove left striker bolt (4), right striker bolt (5),
left corner block bracket, and right corner block
bracket (7).
[*2]
4. Install left striker bolt (4) to the operator's cab
again and tighten it lightly.
a This bolt will be used to hang the pull-up
assist cable in step 8.
30-94
(2)
PC130-7
8. Remove left lower pin (10).

[*3]
a If left lower pin (10) is removed, plate (12) at
the end of pull-up assist cable (11) comes
off.
a Hang plate (12) on the left striker bolt.
FRONT WINDOW
9. Put out the bottom of front window assembly (13)

through the rail opening portion and lower it
gradually.
k The return load of 58.8 N {6 kg} is applied

to the rear of the operator's cab. Accordingly, take care when removing left lower
pin (10) to disconnect pull-up assist cable
(11).
10. Lower front window assembly (13) completely.

a Do not let the front window assembly touch
the monitor.
PC130-7
30-95
(2)
11. Twist front window assembly (13) to the right and

left to remove both upper rollers (14) and (15)
from the rails, and then remove front window
assembly (13).
FRONT WINDOW
INSTALLATION

removal.
[*1] [*2]
Adjust opening and closing of the front window
assembly according to the following procedure.
1. Open and close the front window to check that it
does not interfere with the rails and the rollers
are not hitch.
2. If there is any problem in opening or closing of
the front window, loosen the mounting bolts of
roller adjustment brackets (16) and (17) and
adjust the condition of the front window, and then
tighten the mounting bolts again.
3 Mounting bolt: 98 Nm {1.0 kgm}
30-96
(2)
PC130-7
FRONT WINDOW
3. Raise the front window assembly and fix it with

the rear locks (on both sides).
a Check that the locks in the rear of the operator's cab are applied securely.
4. Install right corner block (3) and fix right corner
block bracket (7) with right striker bolt (5).
a Tighten the striker bolt securely after adjusting it in step 6.
a Install the right corner block so that there will
be no level difference at part (a).
a Install the right corner block so that level difference (b) between the rail and right corner
block (3) at part PF will be 0 1.0 mm.
Check that the right corner block is not projected from the rail at the rolling surface of
the roller.
a Secure roller clearance (c) at part PJ.
PC130-7
30-97
(2)
5. Install left corner blocks (1) and (2) and secure

left corner bracket (6) with left striker bolt (4).
a Tighten the striker bolt securely after adjusting it in step 6.
a Install the left corner blocks so that there will
be no level difference at 2 part (d).
a Secure roller clearance (e).
30-98
(2)
FRONT WINDOW
6. Adjust the striker bolts according to the following

procedure (Adjust the "CLOSE" positions of the
front window assembly locks).
1) Tighten left striker bolt (4) and right striker
bolt (5) at roughly right positions so that front
window glass (18) will be fitted to cab-side
trim seal (19).
PC130-7
FRONT WINDOW
2) Open and close the front window assembly

and check the working condition of both
locks (20) and (21).
i) If both locks do not work normally, move
the striker bolts toward the rear of the
cab and tighten them again.
ii) After moving the striker bolts, check the
fitness of the front window glass and cabside trim seal which was checked in step
1).
iii) Repeat the work in i) and ii) until the fitness of the front window and the working
condition of both locks (20) and (21) are
acceptable, and then tighten the striker
bolts.
7. After adjusting the striker bolts, splash water

heavily over the front window glass and check
that the water does not leak into the cab.
8. Adjust the "opening" lock of the front window
assembly.
1) After adjusting the "closing" lock of the front
window in step 6, raise the front window
assembly to the ceiling.
2) Set the right and left front window assembly
locks at the rear of the operator's cab to the
"OPEN" positions, and then check the following items.
Check that right and left locks (20) and
(21) are closed normally.
Check that right and left locks (20) and
(21) are inserted in parallel in right and
left striker plates (22).
Check that right and left rubber stoppers
(24) are in contact with the front window
assembly and their deflection allowance
is 1.5 3.0 mm.
3) After checking the above items, if necessary,
adjust them by moving right and left striker
plates (22) at the rear of the operator's cab.
PC130-7
9. Adjust the front window stoppers.

1) After adjusting "closing" lock of the front window assembly in step 8, check the contact of
both front window stoppers (23).
2) If both stoppers (23) do not contact normally,
adjust and fix them at places where they contact normally.
30-99
(2)
FRONT WINDOW
10. Check the latching effort of the front window

assembly.
1) After finishing steps 6 8, check that latching
efforts of both locks (20) and (21) are even.
a Check the latching efforts on both "closing" side (in the front of the operator's
cab) and "opening" side (in the rear of
the operator's cab).
[*3]
3 Left lower pin:

27 34 Nm {2.75 3.47 kgm}
30-100
(2)
PC130-7

OF MONITOR PANEL
ASSEMBLY
MONITOR PANEL
3. Disconnect wiring harness connectors P01 (3)

and P02 (4) and remove monitor panel assembly
(5).
REMOVAL

a When removing the cover, disconnect wiring
harness connector P15 on its back side.
INSTALLATION

removal.
a Take care not to drop the mounting bolts in

the cover or duct.
PC130-7
30-101
(2)

OF CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY
CONTROLLER
INSTALLATION

removal.
REMOVAL

2. Disconnect wiring harness connectors C01 (2),

C02 (3), and C03 (4).
3. Loosen the 2 lower mounting bolts and remove
the 2 upper mounting bolts, and then pull up and
remove controller assembly (5).
a Take care extremely not to give a shock of
falling, etc. to the controller assembly.
30-102
(2)
PC130-7
40 MAINTENANCE STANDARD
SWING MACHINERY .............................................................. 40- 2

SWING CIRCLE ...................................................................... 40- 4
TRACK FRAME, IDLER CUSHION......................................... 40- 5
IDLER ...................................................................................... 40- 6
CARRIER ROLLER ................................................................. 40- 7
TRACK ROLLER ..................................................................... 40- 8
SPROCKET ............................................................................. 40- 9
TRACK SHOE ......................................................................... 40-10
HYDRAULIC PUMP................................................................. 40-14
CONTROL VALVE ................................................................... 40-15
SUCTION SAFETY VALVE ..................................................... 40-24
SELF PRESSURE REDUCTION VALVE ................................ 40-25
TRAVEL MOTOR..................................................................... 40-26
SWING MOTOR ...................................................................... 40-27
SOLENOID VALVE .................................................................. 40-28
CENTER SWIVEL JOINT ........................................................ 40-29
PPC VALVE ............................................................................. 40-30
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER......................................................... 40-34
WORK EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 40-36
DIMENSION OF WORK EQUIPMENT.................................... 40-38
PC130-7
40-1
SWING MACHINERY
SWING MACHINERY
40-2
PC130-7
SWING MACHINERY
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Remedy
Standard clearance
Clearance limit
Backlash between swing motor

shaft and No.1 sun gear.
0.07 0.18
0.4
Backlash between No.1 sun gear

and No.1 planetary gear.
0.13 0.31
0.6
Backlash between No.1 planetary

gear and ring gear.
0.15 0.34
0.7

carrier and No.2
sun gear.
0.14 0.34
0.7
Backlash between No.2 sun gear

and No.2 planetary gear.
0.13 0.31
0.6

gear and ring gear.
0.15 0.34
0.7

carrier and swing pinion.
0.08 0.19
0.4
Backlash between swing pinion

and swing circle.
0.13 1.16
2.3
Standard size
Repair limit
Wear of swing pinion surface contacting with oil seal.
144.8
PC130-7
Replace
145 - 0.1000
Apply hardchrome plating

recondition, or
replace
40-3
SWING CIRCLE
SWING CIRCLE
Unit: mm
No.
40-4
Check item
Axial clearance of bearing
Criteria
Remedy
Standard clearance
Clearance limit
0.10 0.25
0.9
Replace
PC130-7
TRACK FRAME, IDLER CUSHION
TRACK FRAME, IDLER CUSHION
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Idler guide top and

bottom width
Idler guide left and

right width
Criteria
Standard size
Clearance limit
Track frame
84
89
Idler support
82
77
Rebuild or
replace
Track frame
185
193
Rebuild
Idler support
183
175
Rebuild or
replace
Standard size
3
Recoil spring
PC130-7
Remedy
Rebuild
Repair limit
Free length
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free length
Installed
load
502
390
84.3 kN
{8,600 kg}
490
75.0 kN
{7,650 kg}
Replace
40-5
IDLER
IDLER
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Remedy
Standard size
Repair limit
527
Outer diameter of tread
489
477
Depth of protruding portion
19
25
Width of protruding portion
52
42
Total width
115
107
Width of tread
31.5
36.5
Outer diameter of protruding

portion
Clearance between idler shaft and

bushing
Interference between idler

and bushing
Standard
size
Shaft
Hole
Standard
clearance
Clearance
limit
54
0.250
0.280
+ 0.074
0
0.250
0.354
1.5
Standard
size
61
Side clearance of idler

(on one side)
10
Tread wall thickness

(at center of tread)
40-6
Tolerance
Rebuild or
replace
Tolerance
Shaft
Hole
+ 0.117
+ 0.087
+ 0.030
0
Standard in- Interference

terference
Replace
limit
0.057
0.117
Standard clearance
Clearance limit
0.18 0.38
1.5
Standard size
Repair limit
15
Rebuild or
replace
PC130-7
CARRIER ROLLER
CARRIER ROLLER
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Width of tread
Clearance between shaft and

bushing
Criteria
Standard size
Repair limit
116
106
123
Standard
size
40
Interference between collar and

bushing
Play on carrier roller in

axial direction

(at 10 mm away from end face roller)
PC130-7
Remedy
Tolerance
Shaft
Hole
Standard
clearance
+ 0.055
0.035
+ 0.261
+ 0.200
-0.145
0.226
Tolerance
Standard
size
Shaft
Hole
47
+ 0.061
0.036
+ 0.025
0
Rebuild or
replace
Clearance
limit
Replace

terference
limit
0.011
0.061
Standard size
Repair limit
0.363 0.537
1.5
17.7
12.7
Rebuild or
replace
40-7
TRACK ROLLER
TRACK ROLLER
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Diameter of flange
(outside)
Remedy
Standard size
Repair limit
158
130
120
Flange width
26.5
Total width
176
Width of tread
35
Clearance between shaft and

bushing
Interference between roller and

bushing
Track roller side clearance

(on one side)

(at center of width)
40-8
Rebuild or
replace
Standard
size
Shaft
Hole
Standard
clearance
Clearance
limit
48
0.250
0.350
+ 0.186
0.025
0.225
0.536
1.5
Standard
size
55
Tolerance
Rebuild or
replace
Tolerance
Shaft
Hole
+ 0.190
+ 0.110
+ 0.093
+ 0.063

terference
Replace
limit
0.017
0.127
Standard clearance
Clearance limit
0.160 0.345
1.5
Standard size
Repair limit
37.5
32.5
Rebuild or
replace
PC130-7
SPROCKET
SPROCKET
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Remedy
Standard size
Tolerance
Repair limit
547.4
+ 1.0
2.0
535
Wear on addendum diameter
607
595
Wear on addendum width
27
22
Wear on tooth bottom width
42
1.5
39
Tooth bottom wall thickness
111.7
+ 0.465
1.160
105.5
Wear on tooth bottom diameter
PC130-7
Rebuild or
replace
40-9
TRACK SHOE
TRACK SHOE
TRIPLE SHOE, ROAD LINER, CITY PAD SHOE
1 Triple shoe and city pad shoe

2 Road liner
a P portion shows the link of bushing press fitting end.
40-10
PC130-7
TRACK SHOE
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Link pitch
Standard size
Repair limit
175.25
178.25
Bushing outside diameter

46.3
Link height
Thickness of link metal

(bushing pressfitting portion)
Turn of replace
When turned
Standard size
2
Remedy
Normal road
Impact road
42.3
Standard size
Repair limit
86
81
24
19
Rebuild or
replace
102.4
Replace
Shoe bolt pitch
86.4
57
8
9
Inside diameter
Link
10
52.4
Overall width
35
Tread width
30.1
11
Protrusion of pin
5.5
12
Protrusion of regular bushing
3.75
13
Overall length of pin
173
14
Overall length of bushing
86.7
15
Thickness of bushing metal
16
Thickness of spacer
17
18
Press fitting
force
*19
Rebuild or
replace
Adjust of
replace
Standard size
Repair limit
7.8
3.8
Bushing
39.2 137.2 kN {4 14 ton}
Regular pin
78.4 186.3 kN {8 19 ton}
Master pin
39.2 98.1 kN {4 10 ton}
a The items marked * are for dry type track.

PC130-7
40-11
TRACK SHOE
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Remedy
Tightening torque (Nm {kgm}) Additional tightening angle (deg)

a. Regular link
Shoe bolt
20
b. Master link
Triple shoe
City pad shoe
196 20
{20 2}
90 10
Road liner
147 10
{15 1}
50 5
Tightening torque
(Nm {kgm})
Additional tightening
angle (deg)
Lower limit torque

(Nm {kgm})
No. of shoe (each side)
21
22
23
Interference between bushing

and link
Interference between regular

pin and link
Clearance between regular

pin and bushing
43
Standard size
*24
*25
Height of
grouser
Standard
interference
46
+ 0.387
+ 0.347
+ 0.062
0
0.285 0.387
30
+ 0.150
0
0.198
0.250
0.198 0.400
Standard size
Standard size
Standard size
30
26
Tolerance
Hole
30
Clearance between master

pin and bushing
Shaft
30
Interference between master

pin and link
Retighten
a. Road liner
Tolerance
Standard
clearance
Shaft
Hole
+ 0.150
0
0.830
0.330
0.180 0.830 Adjust or

replace
Tolerance
Shaft
Hole
Standard
interference
+ 0.020
0.020
0.198
0.250
0.178 0.270
Tolerance
Standard
interference
Shaft
Hole
0.200
0.300
+ 0.630
+ 0.230
0.430 0.930
Standard size
Repair limit
58
21
Replace
a The items marked * are for dry type track.
40-12
PC130-7
TRACK SHOE
RIPLE SHOE, CITY PAD SHOE
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Height of grouser
Overall height of shoe
Thickness
4
5
Criteria
Standard size
Repair limit
20
10
29.5
19.5
9.5
14
Length of grouser top
PC130-7
Remedy
Repair by
build-up
welding or
replace
13
15
40-13
HYDRAULIC PUMP
HYDRAULIC PUMP
40-14
PC130-7
CONTROL VALVE
CONTROL VALVE
(1/9)
PC130-7
40-15
(3)
CONTROL VALVE
(2/9)
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
Suction valve spring
Remedy
Repair limit
Free length
x O.D.
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free length
Installed
load
46.8 x 7.50
40.6
5.500.40N
{0.560.04kg}
4.40 N
{0.45 kg}
16.0 x 16.0
12.0
5.70 N
{0.58 kg}
4.50 N
{0.46 kg}
Piston spring
20.0 x 7.0
14.0
1.20 N
{0.12 kg}
0.98 N
{0.10 kg}
40-16
(3)
Replace spring
if any damages
or deformations
are found
PC130-7
CONTROL VALVE
(3/9)
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
Spool return spring
Remedy
Repair limit
Free length
x O.D.
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free length
Installed
load
45.0
53.5 N
{5.46 kg}
Spool return spring
45.0
55.9 N
{5.70 kg}
Spool return spring
41.0
92.2 N
{9.4 kg}
PC130-7
Replace spring
if any damages
or deformations
are found
40-17
CONTROL VALVE
(4/9)
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
Flow control valve spring
Remedy
Repair limit
Free length
x O.D.
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free length
Installed
load
23.5
29.4 N
{3 kg}
Pressure reduction valve spring
27.5 x 14.2
18.0
17.70.98N
{1.800.10kg}
13.7 N
{1.40 kg}
28.2 x 14.5
26.0
29.42.94N
{3.00.30kg}
23.5 N
{2.40 kg}
32.5 x 14.2
23
17.6 N
{1.8 kg}
14.1 N
{1.44 kg}
40-18
(3)
Replace spring
if any damages
or deformations
are found
PC130-7
CONTROL VALVE
(5/9)
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
Check valve spring
PC130-7
Remedy
Repair limit
Free length
x O.D.
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free length
Installed
load
41.5 x 8.50
31.5
5.88 N
{0.60 kg}
4.71 N
{0.48 kg}
Replace spring
if any damages
or deformations
are found
40-19
(3)
CONTROL VALVE
(6/9)
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
Lift check valve spring

Cooler bypass valve spring
Remedy
Repair limit
Free length
x O.D.
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free length
Installed
load
72.7 x 20.6
42.5
1354.90N
{13.80.50kg}
113 N
{11.5 kg}
Lift check valve spring
72.7 x 20.6
42.5
67.7 N
{6.9 kg}
Bleed spool return spring
23.3 x 12.5
23.0
3.920.98N
{0.400.10kg}
2.94 N
{0.30 kg}
40-20
(3)
Replace spring
if any damages
or deformations
are found
PC130-7
CONTROL VALVE
(7/9)
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
Travel junction spool
PC130-7
Remedy
Repair limit
Free length
x O.D.
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free length
Installed
load
17.7 x 8.20
13.0
13.70.10N
{1.400.10kg}
10.1 N
{1.10 kg}
Replace spring
if any damages
or deformations
are found
40-21
CONTROL VALVE
(8/9)
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
Check valve spring
40-22
(3)
Remedy
Repair limit
Free length
x O.D.
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free length
Installed
load
41.5 x 8.50
31.5
5.88 N
{0.60 kg}
4.71 N
{0.48 kg}
Replace spring
if any damages
or deformations
are found
PC130-7
CONTROL VALVE
(9/9)
PC130-7
40-23
(3)

FOR SERVICE VALVE
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
Piston spring
40-24
Remedy
Repair limit
Free length
x O.D.
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free length
Installed
load
16.3 x 21.3
9.50
2.06 N
{0.21 kg}
1.57 N
{0.16 kg}
20.0 x 7.0
14.0
2.06 N
{0.21 kg}
1.57 N
{0.16 kg}
Replace spring
if any damages
or deformations
are found
PC130-7
SELF PRESSURE REDUCTION VALVE
SELF PRESSURE REDUCTION VALVE
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
Spring
(pressure reduction main)
Remedy
Repair limit
Free length
x O.D.
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free length
Installed
load
19.2 x 7.20
16.1
19.6 N
{2.0 kg}
17.7 N
{1.80 kg}
Spring
(pressure reduction valve pilot)
16.5 x 7.20
12.7
20.6 N
{2.10 kg}
18.6 N
{1.90 kg}
Spring
71.0 x 18.0
59.0
200 N
{20.4 kg}
186 N
{19.0 kg}
Spring (safety valve)
16.1 x 7.80
13.4
61.7 N
{6.30 kg}
58.8 N
{6.0 kg}
PC130-7
Replace spring
if any damages
or deformations
are found
40-25
TRAVEL MOTOR
TRAVEL MOTOR
GM18VL-3
40-26
PC130-7
SWING MOTOR
SWING MOTOR
KMF40ABE-3
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
Check valve spring
Shuttle valve spring
PC130-7
Remedy
Repair limit
Free length
x O.D.
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free length
Installed
load
33.0 x 13.8
23.0
1.28 N
{0.13 kg}
0.98 N
{0.10 kg}
16.4 x 8.90
11.5
13.7 N
{1.40 kg}
10.8 N
{1.10 kg}
Replace spring
if any damages
or deformations
are found
40-27
SOLENOID VALVE
SOLENOID VALVE
FOR PPC LOCK, 2ND TRAVEL SPEED SELECTOR, SWING AND PARK BRAKE, AND 2STAGE RELIEF SOLENOID VALVE
40-28
PC130-7
CENTER SWIVEL JOINT
CENTER SWIVEL JOINT
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Clearance between rotor and
shaft
PC130-7
Criteria
Remedy
Standard size
Standard clearance
Clearance limit
80
0.056 0.105
0.111
Replace
40-29
PPC VALVE
PPC VALVE
FOR SWING, WORK EQUIPMENT
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
Centering spring
(for P3 and P4 ports)
Remedy
Repair limit
Free length
x O.D.
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free length
Installed
load
44.45 x 15.5
34.0
29.4 N
{3.0 kg}
23.5 N
{2.40 kg}
Centering spring
(for P1 and P2 ports)
47.93 x 15.5
34.0
39.2 N
{4.0 kg}
31.4 N
{3.20 kg}
Metering spring
26.53 x 8.15
34.0
16.7 N
{1.70 kg}
13.7 N
{1.40 kg}
40-30
Replace spring
if any damages
or deformations
are found
PC130-7
PPC VALVE
FOR TRAVEL
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
Metering spring
Centering spring
PC130-7
Remedy
Repair limit
Free length
x O.D.
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free length
Installed
load
6.5 x 8.15
24.9
16.7 N
{1.70 kg}
13.7 N
{1.40 kg}
48.1 x 15.5
32.5
108 N
{11.0 kg}
86.3 N
{8.80 kg}
Replace spring
if any damages
or deformations
are found
40-31
PPC VALVE
FOR SERVICE
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Criteria
Standard size
Centering spring
Metering spring
40-32
Remedy
Repair limit
Free length
x O.D.
Installed
length
Installed
load
Free length
Installed
load
42.4 x 15.5
28.4
207.8 N
{21.2 kg}
167 N
{17.0 kg}
2.7 x 8.10
22.0
16.7 N
{1.70 kg}
13.3 N
{1.36 kg}
Replace spring
if any damages
or deformations
are found
PC130-7
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
BOOM CYLINDER
ARM CYLINDER
BUCKET CYLINDER
40-34
PC130-7
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Cylinder
Clearance between
piston rod and
bushing
Clearance between
piston rod support
shaft and bushing
Cylinder piston
tightening torque
Cylinder piston lock

screw tightening
torque
PC130-7
Tolerance
Shaft
Hole
Standard
clearance
Clearance
limit
70
0.030
0.076
+ 0.259
+ 0.063
0.093
0.335
0.435
Arm
75
0.030
0.076
+ 0.279
+ 0.065
0.095
0.355
0.455
Bucket
65
0.030
0.076
+ 0.250
+ 0.055
0.085
0.326
0.426
Boom
70
0.030
0.100
+ 0.190
+ 0.070
0.100
0.290
1.0
Arm
70
0.030
0.100
+ 0.190
+ 0.070
0.100
0.290
1.0
Bucket
65
0.030
0.080
+ 0.170
+ 0.070
0.100
0.250
1.0
Boom
70
0.030
0.100
+ 0.190
+ 0.070
0.100
0.290
1.0
70
0.030
0.100
+ 0.190
+ 0.070
0.100
0.290
1.0
65
0.030
0.080
+ 0.170
+ 0.070
0.100
0.250
1.0
Clearance between
cylinder bottom support shaft and bush- Arm
ing
Bucket
Cylinder head
tightening torque
Standard
size
Remedy
Boom
Boom
4
Criteria
Arm
Replace
bushing
172 24.5 Nm {17.5 2.5 kgm}

270 39 Nm {27.5 4.0 kgm}
Bucket
172 24.5 Nm {17.5 2.5 kgm}
Boom
294 29.4 Nm {30.0 3.0 kgm}
Arm
294 29.4 Nm {30.0 3.0 kgm}
Bucket
294 29.4 Nm {30.0 3.0 kgm}
Boom
66.2 7.4 Nm {6.75 0.75 kgm}
Arm
66.2 7.4 Nm {6.75 0.75 kgm}
Bucket
30.9 3.4 Nm {3.15 0.35 kgm}
Re-tightening
40-35
WORK EQUIPMENT
WORK EQUIPMENT
40-36
PC130-7
WORK EQUIPMENT
Unit: mm
No.
Check item
Clearance between connecting

pin and bushing of revolving
frame and boom.
Criteria
Tolerance
Remedy
Standard
size
Shaft
Hole
Standard
clearance
Clearance
limit
70
0.030
0.100
+ 0.130
+ 0.065
0.095
0.230
0.8

pin and bushing of boom and
arm.
70
0.030
0.100
+ 0.141
+ 0.074
0.104
0.241
0.8

pin and bushing of arm and link.
60
0.030
0.080
+ 0.129
+ 0.074
0.104
0.209
0.8
60
0.030
0.080
+ 0.135
+ 0.074
0.104
0.215
0.8
65
0.030
0.080
+ 0.133
+ 0.074
0.104
0.213
0.8

pin and bushing of arm and bucket.
pin and bushing of link and
bucket.
Replace

pin and bushing of link and link.
60
0.030
0.080
+ 0.130
+ 0.074
0.104
0.210
0.8
Clearance between the blade and

track frame mounting pin and
bushing
70
0.030
0.100
+ 0.198
+ 0.124
0.154
0.298
1.5
PC130-7
40-37
DIMENSION OF WORK EQUIPMENT

ARM
40-38
PC130-7
Unit: mm
No.
Measuring position
Tolerance
Standard size
70
Shaft
Hole
0.030
0.100
+ 0.100
0
81.5
+ 1.0
0
Cylinder head side
80
1.2
Boom side
226
+ 0.5
0
Arm side
226
0.2
0.7
Arm side
2
3
0.030
0.100
+ 0.100
0
70
264
2.0
213.5
1.0
640.6
0.5
2,491
2,101.9
1.5
10
290.4
0.5
11
493
0.2
12
422
0.5
13
374.9
14
1,175.1
15
60
0.030
0.080
+ 0.200
0
Link side
259
0
0.1
Bucket side
261
1.0
16
17
60
0.030
0.080
+ 0.200
0
Arm side
226
0
0.5
Bucket side
274
Min.
1,378
Max.
2,263
18
19
PC130-7
40-39
BUCKET
40-40
PC130-7
Unit: mm
No.
Measuring position
Standard size
Tolerance
371.3
0.5
51.6
0.5
97.9
374.9
1241.6
190.2
60
+ 0.2
0
10
64
11
80
12
261
1.0
13
50
14
85
15
380
+ 1.0
0
16
18
17
110
18
130
19
132
20
108
21
274
22
51
23
34
24
104.2
25
119.6
26
74
27
65
PC130-7
+ 0.25
0
40-41
90 OTHERS
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM........................................................... 90- 3

ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (1/4) ................................................ 90- 5
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (2/4) ................................................. 90- 7
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (3/4) ................................................. 90- 9
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (4/4) ..................................................90-11
PC130-7
90-1
(3)
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
PC130-7
90-3
(3)
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (1/4)
PC130-7
90-5
(3)
PC130-7
90-7
(3)
PC130-7
90-9
(3)
PC130-7
90-11
(3)

PC130-7 Sebm036303 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PC130-7 Sebm036303 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SEBM036303

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION .................................................................10-1

TESTING AND ADJUSTING .......................................................................20-1

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ..........................................................30-1

The affected pages are indicated by the use of the

Page to be newly added

Pages having no marks are those previously revised

LIST OF REVISED PAGES

Always wear safety glasses when hitting

3. If welding repairs are needed, always have a

6. Decide a place in the repair workshop to keep

PRECAUTIONS DURING WORK

19.Be sure to assemble all parts again in their original places.

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION

HOW TO READ THE SHOP MANUAL

HOW TO READ THE SHOP MANUAL

REVISED EDITION MARK

When a manual is revised, an edition mark

Chassis volume: Issued for every machine model

Revised pages are shown in the LIST OF REVISED

Special safety precautions

Special technical precautions or other precautions

Weight of parts of systems. Caution necessary

Places that require special

Places to be coated with

Places where oil, water or

Places where oil or water

If a part cannot be smoothly removed from the

Slinging near the edge of the hook may cause

3) Do not sling a heavy load with one rope alone,

4) Do not sling a heavy load with ropes forming a

2) Sling wire ropes from the middle portion of the

METHOD OF DISASSEMBLING, CONNECTING PUSH-PULL TYPE COUPLER

METHOD OF DISASSEMBLING, CONNECTING PUSH-PULL TYPE COUPLER

k Even if the residual pressure is released from

METHOD OF DISASSEMBLING, CONNECTING PUSH-PULL TYPE COUPLER

1) Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion

1) Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion

2) Hold in the condition in Step 1), and turn

2) Hold in the condition in Step 1), and push

3) Hold in the condition in Steps 1) and 2), and

3) Hold in the condition in Steps 1) and 2), and

Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion

Hold the mouthpiece of the tightening portion

Main applications, featuresr

Used in places requiring an immediately effective, strong adhesive.

Features: Resistance to heat and

Used as heat-resisting sealant for repairing engine.

Quick hardening type adhesive

Used as adhesive or sealant for metal, glass and plastic.

Quick hardening type adhesive

Resistance to heat, chemicals

Used as sealant for various threads,

Features: Silicon based, resistance

Features: Silicon based, quick hardening type

Used as heat-resisting sealant for repairing engine.

Features: Silicone type, heat resistant, vibration resistant, and impact

Used as sealant for machined holes.

Main applications, featuresr

Used as lubricant for sliding portion

Used to prevent seizure or scuffling

General purpose type

Used for normal temperature, light